Service Manual FDR MS-1000 Main

FUJIFILM Digital Mammography System
AMULET
FDR MS-1000
Service Manual
The relationship between mR (milliroentgen), which

is the unit of radiation, and μC/kg (micro-coulomb/
kilogram), which is the SI derived unit of radiation, is
as follows.
1 mR = 0.258 μC/kg
FDR is a trademark or a registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation.
<No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted.>
Copyright © 2008-2011 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval

system, or transmitted in any form or by means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior
Document No. 019-201-03E written permission of FUJIFILM Corporation.
1st Edition - October 20, 2008
Revision - March 14, 2011
2-26-30 Nishiazabu, Minato-ku, Tokyo

Printed in Japan
BLANK PAGE
0.1
Handling of this Manual About Notation in the Manual
About this Manual  Notation of Cautions, Warnings, etc.

The notation formats of "warning," "caution," "instruction," "note," and "reference" are
 Scope shown below.
This service manual is applicable to FUJIFILM Digital Mammography System FDR
MS-1000.
WARNING
This manual mainly mentions detailed information on the mammographic stand, Used when death or serious injury may occur if the instruction is not observed.
the FPD and the controller unit. Refer to the AWS Service Manual for the detailed
information on the AWS.
 Manual Organization CAUTION
FDR MS-1000 Service Manual This volume Used when minor or medium levels of physical injury may be incurred if the
instruction is not observed.
FDR MS-1000 Service Manual Troubleshooting (MT) Also used when the machine may suffer serious trouble (such as unrecoverable
FDR MS-1000 Service Manual Maintenance Utility (MU) or difficult-to-recover trouble).
FDR MS-1000 Service Manual Calibration (CA)

INSTRUCTION
 Notation of Unit Symbols Used when the machine may suffer damage, or any failure or malfunction may occur,
For notation of unit symbols, metric units set forth in the International Systems of Units if the instruction is not observed.
(SI) are used, as a rule. However, metric units that are allowed in the Measurement
Law, not in the SI, are used in some cases. NOTE
Precautions for Handling of this Manual Used to indicate the matters that need attention during steps of the procedure.
1. FUJIFILM Corporation reserves all rights related to this manual. REFERENCE

2. This manual should be accessible only to technical service personnel authorized by
FUJIFILM Corporation. Used to indicate terminology or supplemental explanations.
3. Since this manual contains confidential information of FUJIFILM Corporation, such
as the internal structure of the product, appropriate measures should be taken to
prevent illegal or inappropriate disclosure and/or use of this manual.  Indication of Refer To
4. The following conducts are prohibited without prior written approval of FUJIFILM The " " mark is used to indicate the chapter or section you should refer to.
Corporation:
Its format is as indicated below.
- Copy or transcribe a whole or part of the contents of this manual.
- Disclose, furnish, lend, and/or transfer a whole or part of the contents of this {IN:1_Installation Work Flowchart}
manual to persons other than the afore-described technical service personnel.
- Use a whole or part of the contents of this manual for purposes other than
technical servicing of the product.
5. Portions of the descriptions in this manual may be revised due to improvements on
the product.
6. Accompanying documents were originally drafted in the English language.
019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual 0.1

0.2
 Abbreviations  Notation of Symbols
The following abbreviations are used in this service manual. - Check/Adjustment indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to check or adjust the
installation location when the part or component
Abbreviation Definition removed is to be reinstalled. This indicator is placed in
AEC Automatic Exposure Control CHECK the illustration that depicts the procedures for removing/
The terminal containing the X-ray console, the reader unit console installing the parts or components.
AWS and an image check function. The FDR-1000AWS is referred to in this When you see this indicator in an illustration, see
manual. " Check/Adjustment Procedures" or " CHECK" in a
BIOS Basic Input/Output System later section.
CBA Control Board Arm
- Half-punch indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to align the half-punches
CBS Control Board Stand
when installing the parts or components. However,
CDF_LIFT(MDR) Motor Driver Lift it is not indicated for the half-punches for improving
CDF_ROT(MDR) Motor Driver Rotation ease of assembly or preventing erroneous assembly
CNU Compression Unit procedures.
CUB Compression Unit Board
- 3B: Indicates that screw-locking bond needs to be applied
DICOM Standard for Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine to screw sections of installed parts/components.
Domain Name Services, address resolution procedure whereby Recommended screw-locking bond: Three Bond 1401B
DNS
numeric IP addresses are associated with names in the Internet format.
DYS Display
FPGA CBA/CBS on-board modules
File Transfer Protocol, a client-server application that transfers files
FTP
from one computer to another.
FPD Flat Panel Detector
IP address Internet Protocol address
LAN Local Area Network
MFI Main/Filament Inverter
Mo Molybdenum
Network Interface Card, an expansion card that provides a physical
NIC
connection to the network.
PMF Preventive maintenance function, operating values check
PMP Periodic preventive maintenance
PSU Power Supply Unit
QSQ System quality test
Rh Rhodium
RSC Regional Support Center
Reader Unit (Combination of FPD and controller unit)
RU
The FDR-1000DRS or the FDR-1000DRL is referred to in this manual.
SIE Electrical safety
SIM Mechanical safety
STU Single Tank Unit
TCP/IP Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
USC Uptime Service Center
W Tungsten

0.3
Servicing Instruments and Tools That Require
Inspection/Calibration
The machine should be installed and serviced by use of servicing instruments and
tools that have been regularly inspected and calibrated as appropriate.
If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not
been inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be
guaranteed.
Servicing instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration are as listed below.
The inspection/calibration should be planned and performed in accordance with the
specifications and operation manuals of the applicable servicing instruments and
tools.
n Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/Calibration

Name Inspection Calibration
Dosimeter - 
Steel rule (150 mm)  -
Steel rule (300 mm)  -
Digital multimeter  
Calipers  (∗) -
∗: A block gauge for use in inspection requires calibration.

0.4
Tools and Measuring Instruments Necessary for n Jigs
the Installation and Preventive Maintenance {IN:2.2_Tools and Measuring Instruments Necessary for Installation_n List of
Tools}
Prepare the following tools and measuring instruments before the installation and the
preventive maintenance of the machine. Situation of use
Name Appearance Preventive
n Convenient Tools Installation
maintenance
Although the following tools are not required for the installation and the preventive
maintenance, preparing them may help you improve working efficiency.
{IN:2.2_Tools and Measuring Instruments Necessary for Installation}
Situation of use
Name Appearance Water supply jig  -
Preventive
Installation
maintenance
DRMS0085.ai
Flexible screwdriver kit  -
DRMS0091.ai
Stand jig  -
Wrench
-  -
(13x13 mm)
DRMS0086.ai
Handle  -
DRMS0087 ai
Emergency stop short-

CAUTION
 -
circuit cable DRMS0089.ai
Temperature
adjustment unit relay CAUTION  -
cable DRMS0090.ai

0.5
n Measuring Instruments
{IN:2.2_Tools and Measuring Instruments Necessary for Installation_n List of
Measuring Instruments}
Situation of use
Name Appearance Preventive
Installation
maintenance
Acrylic board
 
(40 mm thick)
DRMS0093.ai
Mammographic
 
compression gauge
DRMS0094.ai
Dosimeter  
DRMS0095.ai

0.6
BLANK PAGE

Safety Precaution 0.7
FDR MS-1000 Service Manual - Contents
Safety Precaution
1. Safety Precautions................................................................... 1
1.1 General Precautions.........................................................................1
1.2 Precautions on Radiation.................................................................5
1.3 Laser................................................................................................6
1.4 Declaration of Conformity.................................................................6
1.5 Precautions on Infection...................................................................6
1.6 Safety and Various Symbols............................................................7
1.7 Precautions on Patient Environment................................................8
2. Labels........................................................................................ 9
2.1 Laser Precaution Labels...................................................................9
2.1.1 Laser Precaution Label Attachment Locations.............................................9
2.1.2 List of Labels................................................................................................9
2.2 Other Labels...................................................................................10
2.2.1 Attachment Locations for Ratings Indication Label and Other Labels.......10
2.2.2 List of Ratings Indication Label and Other Labels.....................................13
2.2.3 Handling Instruction Labels and Attachment Locations.............................20
3. CLASSIFICATION................................................................... 21
4. Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves................................... 22

4.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC).............................................22
4.1.1 Further Information for IEC 60601-1-2 (EN 60601-1-2).............................22

Product Specifications 0.8
Product Specifications
1. Specifications of the Machine................................................. 1

1.1 System Components........................................................................1
1.2 Machine Specifications.....................................................................3
1.2.1 FDR-1000DRSZ/FDR-1000DRLZ Specifications........................................3
1.2.2 FPD Specifications.......................................................................................7
1.2.3 FDR-1000AWS Specifications.....................................................................7
1.3 Dimensions and Weight of the Machine...........................................8
1.3.1 Dimensions and Weight of FDR-1000DRSZ/FDR-1000DRLZ.....................8
1.3.2 Dimensions and Weight of FDR-1000AWS.................................................8
1.4 Installation Space and Servicing Space...........................................9
1.5 Range of Movement.......................................................................11
1.6 Anchoring Locations.......................................................................12
1.7 System Configuration Example......................................................14
1.8 Disposal of the Machine.................................................................15

Machine Description (MD) 0.9
Machine Description (MD)
1. Summary of the Machine.................................................. MD-1 3.4 Startup Process of the Controller Unit and FPD......................MD-30
1.1 Features of the Machine............................................................MD-1 3.5 FDR-1000DRSZ/FDR-1000DRLZ Shutdown Process............MD-31
1.2 System Configuration Examples...............................................MD-2
4. Electrical-Related Information....................................... MD-32
1.3 Overall Machine Configuration and External View....................MD-3
4.1 Information on Board Locations..............................................MD-32
1.3.1 Machine External View and Functions.................................................. MD-3
1.4 X-Ray Irradiation Field Size.......................................................MD-9 5. Interlock Mechanisms and Operations......................... MD-35
1.5 I/O Parts Information...............................................................MD-10
1.6 System Block Diagram............................................................MD-12
2. Mechanism and Operation of the Mammographic

Stand................................................................................ MD-21
2.1 Subscanning Mechanism of the FPD......................................MD-21
2.2 Swivel Arm Elevation Mechanism...........................................MD-22
2.3 Swivel Arm Rotation Mechanism.............................................MD-23
2.4 Compression Mechanism (Compression Unit)........................MD-23
3. Software Operation Overview........................................ MD-24

3.1 FDR-1000DRSZ/FDR-1000DRLZ Network Setup..................MD-24
3.2 Data Structures.......................................................................MD-25
3.3 Data Flow between FDR-1000DRSZ/FDR-1000DRLZ and
AWS........................................................................................MD-26
3.3.1 Data Flow during Routine Processing................................................. MD-26
3.3.2 Data Flow for Software Installation..................................................... MD-27
3.3.3 Data Flow for Software Version Update.............................................. MD-27
3.3.4 Data Flow for Data Backup................................................................. MD-28
3.3.5 Data Flow for Data Restore................................................................ MD-28

Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.10
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment

of Parts (MC)
1. Precautions for Check, Replacement, and Adjustment... MC-1 3.1.3 Replacing the FPD.............................................................................. MC-47
3.1.4 Unpacking the FPD............................................................................. MC-54
2. Covers................................................................................ MC-4 3.1.5 Temporarily Installing the FPD............................................................ MC-56
2.1 Swivel Arm Covers....................................................................MC-4 3.1.6 FPD Inner Cover................................................................................. MC-57
2.1.1 Swivel Arm Top Cover........................................................................... MC-6 3.1.7 Board Cooling Fan.............................................................................. MC-59
2.1.2 Swivel Arm Lower Cover....................................................................... MC-8 3.1.8 PTC Board.......................................................................................... MC-61
2.1.3 Swivel Arm Left-Hand Side Cover....................................................... MC-10 3.2 Temperature Adjustment Unit..................................................MC-62
2.1.4 Swivel Arm Right-Hand Side Cover.................................................... MC-11 3.3 Collimator................................................................................MC-70
2.1.5 FPD Lower Cover................................................................................ MC-12 3.3.1 Checking the Collimator Mounting Angle............................................ MC-72
2.1.6 FPD Left-Hand Cover (Left-Hand Armrest)......................................... MC-13 3.3.2 Adjusting the Collimator Mounting Angle............................................ MC-72
2.1.7 FPD Right-Hand Cover (Right-Hand Armrest).................................... MC-14 3.3.3 Checking the Collimator Lamp............................................................ MC-73
2.1.8 Carbon Cover...................................................................................... MC-16 3.3.4 Checking the Irradiation Field Size..................................................... MC-73
2.1.9 Compression Unit Left-Hand Side Cover............................................ MC-19 3.4 Single Tank Unit......................................................................MC-74
2.1.10 Swivel Arm Left-Hand Front Cover..................................................... MC-21 3.4.1 Removing the Single Tank Unit........................................................... MC-75
2.1.11 Compression Unit Right-Hand Side Cover......................................... MC-22 3.4.2 Reinstalling the Single Tank Unit......................................................... MC-79
2.1.12 Swivel Arm Right-Hand Front Cover................................................... MC-23 3.4.3 Replacing the Single Tank Unit........................................................... MC-81
2.1.13 Compression Unit Front Cover............................................................ MC-24
3.5 Compression Unit....................................................................MC-83
2.2 Elevation Stand Covers...........................................................MC-25 3.5.1 Checking the Compression Unit......................................................... MC-88
2.2.1 Elevation Stand Top Cover.................................................................. MC-26 3.5.2 Correcting the Compression Thickness Indication.............................. MC-88
2.2.2 Elevation Stand Left-Hand Side Cover............................................... MC-26 3.5.3 Compression Plate (Plastic Plate Part)............................................... MC-90
2.2.3 Elevation Stand Right-Hand Side Cover............................................. MC-27
2.2.4 Elevation Stand Rear Cover............................................................... MC-27
3.6 CBA Board (D905)...................................................................MC-91
2.2.5 Display Cover...................................................................................... MC-28 3.7 Grid Assembly.........................................................................MC-93
2.2.6 Base Plate Cover................................................................................ MC-28 3.7.1 Removing the Grid Assembly.............................................................. MC-93
2.2.7 Elevation Stand Inner Cover (Lower).................................................. MC-29 3.7.2 Installing the Grid Assembly................................................................ MC-96
2.2.8 Elevation Stand Inner Cover (Upper).................................................. MC-29 3.7.3 Checking the Grid Position................................................................. MC-97
3.7.4 Adjusting the Grid Sensor................................................................... MC-97
3. Swivel Arm Unit............................................................... MC-30
3.8 MFI Board (D910) Assembly.................................................MC-101
3.1 FPD.........................................................................................MC-30
3.9 XIF51A Board........................................................................MC-103
3.1.1 Removal of the FPD............................................................................ MC-30
3.1.2 Installing the FPD................................................................................ MC-36 3.10 Fan (For Cooling the Single Tank Unit).................................MC-104

4. Elevation Stand Unit..................................................... MC-106 5.7 Compact Flash Card.............................................................MC-141

4.1 Motor Inverter Lift..................................................................MC-106 5.8 CPU51A Board (Motherboard)..............................................MC-142
4.2 Motor Inverter Rotate............................................................MC-107 5.9 Memory Board.......................................................................MC-144
4.3 CBS Board (D900)................................................................MC-109 5.10 IND51A Board.......................................................................MC-145
4.4 Lithium Battery (CBS Board)................................................. MC-111 5.11 NFB51A Board......................................................................MC-145
4.5 Power Supply Unit (PSU)...................................................... MC-112 5.12 Controller Unit Cooling Fans (FAN1, FAN 2 and FAN3)........MC-146
4.6 Emergency Stop Switch........................................................ MC-117 5.13 Power Supply (Alpha II 650)..................................................MC-147
4.7 Display Board (D903)............................................................ MC-117 5.14 Circuit Breaker.......................................................................MC-150
4.8 Control Pad........................................................................... MC-118 5.15 Terminal Block (TB1).............................................................MC-152
4.9 Control Pad Cable................................................................. MC-118 5.16 Terminal Block (TB2).............................................................MC-153
4.10 Foot Switch............................................................................MC-120
6. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse Locations.................. MC-156
4.11 Motor Lift...............................................................................MC-121
6.1 Fuse Locations of the FPD....................................................MC-157
4.11.1 Preparation....................................................................................... MC-121
6.1.1 PTC51A Board Fuses....................................................................... MC-157
4.11.2 Remove the Motor............................................................................. MC-125
6.1.2 SND51B Board Fuses....................................................................... MC-157
4.11.3 Reassembly the New Motor.............................................................. MC-128
6.1.3 TRC51A Board Fuses....................................................................... MC-158
4.11.4 Adjust the Motor Chain Tension........................................................ MC-130
4.11.5 Finishing . ......................................................................................... MC-132 6.2 Fuse Locations of the Controller Unit....................................MC-159
4.11.6 Check the Performance.................................................................... MC-136 6.2.1 MPI51A Board Fuses........................................................................ MC-159
6.2.2 CPS51B/CPS51C Board Fuse.......................................................... MC-159
5. Controller Unit............................................................... MC-137 6.2.3 PAT51A Board Fuses........................................................................ MC-160
5.1 Controller Unit Covers...........................................................MC-137 6.3 Fuse Location of the Swivel Arm...........................................MC-161
6.3.1 XIF51A Board Fuse........................................................................... MC-161
5.2 MIF51A Board.......................................................................MC-138
5.3 MPI51A Board.......................................................................MC-139 7. Updating Software Versions........................................ MC-162
5.4 CPS51B/CPS51C Board.......................................................MC-139 7.1 Updating the RU Software Versions......................................MC-162
5.5 PAT51A Board.......................................................................MC-140
5.6 CFI51A Board (Memory Board).............................................MC-141

8. Backup and Restore of the Configuration Data......... MC-166 13. Jigs................................................................................. MC-219
8.1 Configuration Data of the Mammographic Stand..................MC-166 13.1 List of Jigs.............................................................................MC-219
8.1.1 Backing Up the Configuration Data of the Mammographic Stand.... MC-166 13.2 How to Use the Water Supply Jig..........................................MC-222
8.1.2 Restoring the Configuration Data of the Mammographic Stand....... MC-169 13.2.1 Connecting the Water Supply Jig...................................................... MC-224
8.2 RU Data.................................................................................MC-172 13.2.2 Filling the Coolant............................................................................. MC-226
8.2.1 Backing Up the RU Data................................................................... MC-172 13.2.3 Draining the Coolant......................................................................... MC-231
8.2.2 Restoring the RU Data...................................................................... MC-172 13.2.4 Connecting the Closure Hose (FPD and Temperature
8.2.3 Installing the Machine-Specific Data................................................. MC-173 Adjustment Unit)................................................................................ MC-234
9. Generator Adjustment.................................................. MC-174 14. Tools............................................................................... MC-237

14.1 Standard Tools......................................................................MC-237
10. Checking and Adjusting the AEC................................ MC-179
14.2 Special Tools and Measuring Instruments.............................MC-239
10.1 Confirmation of AEC Accuracy..............................................MC-179
14.3 Special Consumables............................................................MC-240
10.2 Confirmation of Dose per Exposure Mode............................MC-179
14.4 Semi-Standard Tools.............................................................MC-240
10.3 Irradiation Field Dose Calculation LUT Adjustment...............MC-179
10.4 Sensitivity Variation Correction Factor LUT Adjustment........MC-183
11. Adjusting the Irradiation Field..................................... MC-192

11.1 Adjusting the X-Ray Irradiation Field.....................................MC-192
11.1.1 Adjustment Flow................................................................................ MC-192
11.1.2 How to Measure the Coordinates..................................................... MC-194
11.1.3 Preparation....................................................................................... MC-198
11.1.4 Adjusting the Mo Large Focus and the W Large Focus.................... MC-201
11.1.5 Adjusting the Mo Small Focus and the W Small Focus.................... MC-208
11.2 Adjusting the Light Irradiation Field.......................................MC-215
12. Checking for Image Problems..................................... MC-218

Contents Service Parts List (SP) 0.13
Service Parts List (SP)

Hot to Use Service Parts List ..................................................................SP-1
INDEX ....................................................................................................SP-2
01A COVER 1......................................................................................SP-3
01B COVER 2......................................................................................SP-4
02A MAMMO UNIT 1 ...........................................................................SP-5
02B MAMMO UNIT 2 (FDR-1000DRSZ) ..............................................SP-6
02C MAMMO UNIT 3 (FDR-1000DRLZ) ...............................................SP-7
02D MAMMO UNIT 4 ...........................................................................SP-8
02E MAMMO UNIT 5 ...........................................................................SP-9
03A CONTROLLER UNIT 1 ...............................................................SP-10
03B CONTROLLER UNIT 2 ............................................................... SP-11
03C CONTROLLER UNIT 3 ...............................................................SP-12
04 OTHERS.....................................................................................SP-13
05 JIG ..............................................................................................SP-14
06 CABLE........................................................................................SP-15
07A CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (For FDR-1000 DRSZ) ................................SP-16
07B CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (For FDR-1000 DRLZ) ................................SP-26
08 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE ..................................................SP-36
09 List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring..............................SP-37

Preventive Maintenance (PM) 0.14
Preventive Maintenance (PM)
1. Preventive Maintenance Program................................... PM-1 8. Checking the Coolant..................................................... PM-19

1.1 How to Use the Preventive Maintenance Volume..................... PM-1
9. Checking the Single Tank Unit....................................... PM-20
1.2 Notation of Age.......................................................................... PM-1
1.3 Preventive Maintenance Program List...................................... PM-2 10. Replacing the Lithium Battery (CBS Board)................. PM-21
1.3.1 Maintenance Program at the Age of 1, 5 and 7 Years.......................... PM-3
1.3.2 Maintenance Program at the Age of 2, 4 and 8 Years.......................... PM-3 11. Reinstalling the Covers.................................................. PM-22
1.3.3 Maintenance Program at the Age of 3 and 9 Years.............................. PM-4
1.3.4 Maintenance Program at the Age of 6 Years........................................ PM-4 12. Checking the 1.8-Fold Magnification Exposure
Stand S............................................................................. PM-24
2. Checking the Error Log.................................................... PM-5
13. Checking the Elevation of the Swivel Arm................... PM-25
3. Checking the Exposure Count......................................... PM-9
14. Checking the Rotation of the Swivel Arm..................... PM-26
4. Checking the Elevation Stand and the Operation Desk..PM-11
4.1 Checking the Elevation Stand................................................. PM-11 15. Checking the Stereo Motion of the Swivel Arm........... PM-27
4.2 Checking the Operation Desk................................................. PM-11
16. Checking the Emergency Stop Switches...................... PM-28
5. Removing the Covers..................................................... PM-12
17. Checking the Compression Unit.................................... PM-29
6. Cleaning the Air Filter..................................................... PM-15
18. Checking the Collimator................................................. PM-30
6.1 Air Filter of the Carbon Cover.................................................. PM-15
6.2 Air Filter of the FPD Lower Cover........................................... PM-15 19. Generator Adjustment.................................................... PM-31
6.3 Air Filter of the Swivel Arm Right-Hand Side Cover................ PM-16
20. FPD Calibration............................................................... PM-32
7. Replacing the Air Filter................................................... PM-17
21. Checking the Exposure Recognition Function............ PM-33
7.1 Air Filter of the Carbon Cover.................................................. PM-17
7.2 Air Filter of the FPD Lower Cover........................................... PM-17 22. Checking the AEC........................................................... PM-34
7.3 Air Filter of the Swivel Arm Right-Hand Side Cover................ PM-18

Preventive Maintenance (PM) 0.15
23. AEC Sensitivity Error Detection.................................... PM-35
24. Checking the Variation in X-Ray Output....................... PM-36
25. Checking for Image Problems....................................... PM-37
26. SDM Calibration.............................................................. PM-38
27. Checking the AWS.......................................................... PM-39
28. Clearing the Error Log.................................................... PM-40
29. Visual Inspection and Cleaning of the Machine........... PM-41
30. Protective Grounding Test............................................. PM-42
31. Measurement of Leakage Current and Patient

Leakage Current.............................................................. PM-43

Installation (IN) 0.16
Installation (IN)
1. Installation Work Flowchart............................................... IN-1 11. Installing the Mammographic Stand............................... IN-42
11.1 Marking and Drilling on the Installation Position........................IN-42
2. Installation Preparations.................................................... IN-3
11.2 Securing the Mammographic Stand..........................................IN-43
2.1 Preinstallation Work....................................................................IN-3
2.2 Tools and Measuring Instruments Necessary for Installation......IN-5 12. Connecting the Cables to the Controller Unit................ IN-44
3. Precautions in Installation................................................. IN-7 13. Connecting the Cables to the Mammographic Stand.... IN-46
4. Transfer................................................................................ IN-8 14. Changing the Swivel Arm Height

4.1 Unloading and Preparation for Transfer......................................IN-8
(Uppermost Position)........................................................ IN-47
4.2 Transferring the Mammographic Stand.......................................IN-9 15. Removing the Covers....................................................... IN-49
4.3 Transferring Other Packed Items................................................IN-9
16. Removing the Packing Material of the Swivel Arm (2).... IN-54
5. Checking the Items Supplied........................................... IN-10
17. Unpacking and Temporarily Installing the FPD.............. IN-55
6. Installing the Operation Desk.......................................... IN-17 17.1 Unpacking the FPD...................................................................IN-55
7. Installing the AWS............................................................. IN-22 17.2 Temporarily Installing the FPD..................................................IN-57
8. Installing the Controller Unit............................................ IN-23 18. Installing the FPD.............................................................. IN-58
18.1 Removing the Carbon Cover.....................................................IN-58
9. Connecting the Power Supply Cable ............................. IN-26 18.2 Removing the Inner Cover and the Cable Retaining Bracket....IN-60
9.1 Connecting the Power Supply Cable of the Controller Unit.......IN-26 18.3 Mounting the FPD.....................................................................IN-61
9.2 Connecting the Power Supply Cable of 18.4 Connecting the Cable Connectors and Attaching the Cable
the Mammographic Stand.........................................................IN-30 Retaining Brackets....................................................................IN-68
9.3 Checking the Wiring Connections and Connecting to the 18.5 Putting on the Inner Cover........................................................IN-70
Distribution Switchboard............................................................IN-34
18.6 Attaching the Grid Guide...........................................................IN-70
10. Removing the Packing Material of the Swivel Arm (1).... IN-36 18.7 Changing the DIP Switch Setting on the CBA (D905) Board....IN-72

18.8 Putting on the Swivel Arm Right- and Left-Hand Front Covers...IN-73 21.5 Installing the Machine-Specific Data.......................................IN-106
18.9 Putting on the Compression Unit Right- and Left-Hand Side 21.6 Replacing the Controller Unit AEC File...................................IN-108
Covers.......................................................................................IN-74 21.6.1 18x24 (only for Use in Europe)........................................................... IN-108
18.10 Checking the Grid Position (1)..................................................IN-75 21.6.2 24x30 (for Use Outside Europe)......................................................... IN-108
18.10.1 Checking the Grid Wire......................................................................... IN-75 21.7 Replacing and Merging the AEC File in the AWS....................IN-109
18.10.2 Checking the Grid Park Position........................................................... IN-76 21.7.1 Replacing the AEC File....................................................................... IN-109
18.10.3 Checking the Grid IN Position............................................................... IN-77 21.7.2 Merging the AEC File.......................................................................... IN-109
18.10.4 Checking the Gap between the Grid and the Exposure Plane............. IN-78
21.8 Backing Up the RU Data......................................................... IN-111
18.11 Putting on the Carbon Cover.....................................................IN-78
18.12 Checking the Grid Position (2)..................................................IN-80 22. Time Setting for the Mammographic Stand.................. IN-114
18.12.1 Checking the Oscillation....................................................................... IN-80
23. FPD Calibration............................................................... IN-116
19. Installing the Temperature Adjustment Unit................... IN-81
24. Checking the Exposure Recognition Function............ IN-117
20. Putting on the Covers....................................................... IN-86
25. Checking the AEC........................................................... IN-118
20.1 Putting on the FPD Right- and Left-Hand Covers
(Right- and Left-Hand Armrests)...............................................IN-86 25.1 Confirmation of AEC Accuracy................................................ IN-118
20.2 Putting on the FPD Lower Cover...............................................IN-87 25.2 Confirmation of Dose per Exposure Mode..............................IN-121
20.3 Putting on the Swivel Arm Right- and Left-Hand Side Covers....IN-88
26. Checking the Variation in X-Ray Output....................... IN-123
20.4 Putting on the Swivel Arm Top and Lower Covers....................IN-89
20.5 Putting on the Elevation Stand Covers......................................IN-90 27. Checking for Image Problems and Checking the
S Value............................................................................. IN-127
21. Installing the RU Software................................................ IN-94 27.1 Checking for Image Problems.................................................IN-127
21.1 Installing the RU PC-TOOL.......................................................IN-94 27.2 Checking the S Value..............................................................IN-127
21.2 Setting the IP Address...............................................................IN-96
21.3 Setting the AWS and Checking Connection............................IN-100 28. Checking the Operation of the Mammographic Stand.. IN-128
21.4 Installing the RU Software.......................................................IN-100 28.1 Checking the Elevation of the Swivel Arm...............................IN-128

28.2 Checking the Rotation of the Swivel Arm................................IN-129 34. Measurement of Installation Environment.................... IN-150
28.3 Checking the Emergency Stop Switches................................IN-130 34.1 Measurement of Installation Environment
28.4 Checking the Compression Unit..............................................IN-131 (Temperature and Humidity)....................................................IN-150
28.4.1 Operation and Operation Check of the Compression Plate................ IN-131 34.2 Measurement of Installation Environment
28.4.2 Checking Decompression................................................................... IN-132 (Power Supply Voltage) [Only Inside Japan]...........................IN-150
28.4.3 Checking the Optimum Compression Pressure Function................... IN-134
28.4.4 Checking the Automatic Decompression Function............................. IN-136
Appendix 1. Requirements Regarding Locally
Obtained Parts......................................... Appx IN1-1
28.4.5 Checking the Compression Thickness................................................ IN-137
28.4.6 Checking the Compression Pressure Indication Accuracy................. IN-138 Appendix 2. Measurement of Power Source
28.4.7 Checking Continuity of the Compression............................................ IN-139 Impedance [Only Inside Japan].............. Appx IN2-1
28.5 Checking the Collimator..........................................................IN-140
28.5.1 Checking the Collimator Mounting Angle............................................ IN-140
Appendix 3. Installation Environment Measurement
28.5.2 Checking the Collimator Lamp............................................................ IN-141
(Power Supply Voltage)
[Only Inside Japan]................................. Appx IN3-1
28.5.3 Checking the Irradiation Field Size..................................................... IN-141
Appendix 3.1 Measurement Flow................................................Appx IN3-1
29. Clearing the Error Log.................................................... IN-142 Appendix 3.2 Setting Up the Working Environments...................Appx IN3-1
29.1 Clearing the RU Error Log.......................................................IN-142 Appendix 3.2.1 Installing the Waveform Viewer........................................Appx IN3-1
29.2 Clearing the Error Log of the Mammographic Stand...............IN-144 Appendix 3.3 Preparation for Measurement................................Appx IN3-3
Appendix 3.3.1 Measurement Overview...................................................Appx IN3-3
30. Protective Grounding Test (Outside Japan)................. IN-146 Appendix 3.3.2 Measurement Period........................................................Appx IN3-3
Appendix 3.3.3 Setting the Measurement Conditions...............................Appx IN3-3
31. Measurement of Leakage Current and Patient Appendix 3.3.4 Storing the Measurement Data........................................Appx IN3-5
Leakage Current (Outside Japan).................................. IN-147 Appendix 3.4 Measurement.........................................................Appx IN3-6
Appendix 3.4.1 Measurement...................................................................Appx IN3-6
32. Visual Inspection and Cleaning of the Machine........... IN-148
Appendix 3.5 Transfer of the Data to the PC and Data Display...Appx IN3-7
33. Measurement of Power Source Impedance Appendix 3.6 Data Analysis.........................................................Appx IN3-7
[Only Inside Japan]......................................................... IN-149 Appendix 3.6.1 Printing the Data...............................................................Appx IN3-7
Appendix 3.6.2 Data Analysis....................................................................Appx IN3-7
Appendix 3.6.3 Example of Reporting the Measurement Data.................Appx IN3-8

Appendix 3.7 Power Supply Voltage Specifications....................Appx IN3-9 Appendix 5. Unloading................................................. Appx IN5-1
Appendix 3.7.1 Power Supply Voltage Specifications for
the FDR MS-1000............................................................Appx IN3-9
Appendix 5.1 Unloading and Preparation for Transfer.................Appx IN5-1
Appendix 5.1.1 Unpacking the Mammographic Stand..............................Appx IN5-2
Appendix 4. Measurement of Installation Environments Appendix 5.1.2 Unpacking the FPD, the Controller Unit and
Accessories.....................................................................Appx IN5-4
(Temperature and Humidity)................... Appx IN4-1
Appendix 5.1.3 Unpacking the Operation Desk and
Appendix 4.1 Measurement Flow................................................Appx IN4-1 the Equipment Rack........................................................Appx IN5-5
Appendix 4.2 Setting Up the Working Environments...................Appx IN4-1 Appendix 5.1.4 Unpacking the Elevation Stand Cover..............................Appx IN5-6
Appendix 4.2.1 Name of Each Part of the Data Logger............................Appx IN4-1 Appendix 5.2 Transferring the Mammographic Stand.................Appx IN5-7
Appendix 4.2.2 Installing the Manager Program.......................................Appx IN4-2 Appendix 5.2.1 Using the Dedicated Carrier.............................................Appx IN5-7
Appendix 4.3 Preparing for Measurement...................................Appx IN4-4 Appendix 5.2.2 When not Using the Dedicated Carrier...........................Appx IN5-10
Appendix 4.3.1 Measurement Conditions.................................................Appx IN4-4 Appendix 5.3 Transferring Other Packed Items.........................Appx IN5-11
Appendix 4.3.2 Recording Interval and Measurable Days........................Appx IN4-4
Appendix 4.3.3 Setting the Measurement Conditions...............................Appx IN4-4 Appendix 6. Installing the Optional Monitor Arm....... Appx IN6-1
Appendix 4.4 Measurement Start................................................Appx IN4-7
Appendix 7. Installing the Optional X-Ray
Appendix 4.5 Measurement End.................................................Appx IN4-7 Protective Board...................................... Appx IN7-1
Appendix 4.5.1 Terminating the Measurement on the Data Logger
Main Body........................................................................Appx IN4-7
Appendix 8. Installing the 1.8-Fold Magnification
Appendix 4.5.2 Terminating the Measurement from the Personal
Computer.........................................................................Appx IN4-8
Exposure Stand Kit S.............................. Appx IN8-1
Appendix 4.6 Transferring Data to the Personal Computer.........Appx IN4-8 Appendix 8.1 Putting the Positioner Retainer..............................Appx IN8-1
Appendix 4.7 Data Analysis.........................................................Appx IN4-9 Appendix 8.2 Adjustment of the Position of the Positioner..........Appx IN8-2
Appendix 4.7.1 Charting the Data.............................................................Appx IN4-9
Appendix 4.7.2 Data Analysis.................................................................. Appx IN4-11
Appendix 9. Installing the Front Cover Kit................. Appx IN9-1
Appendix 4.7.3 Example of Reporting the Measurement Data............... Appx IN4-11 Appendix 9.1 Checking the Items Supplied.................................Appx IN9-2
Appendix 4.8 Measurement Conditions for Temperature and Appendix 9.2 Removing the Covers............................................Appx IN9-3
Humidity...............................................................Appx IN4-12
Appendix 9.3 Replacing the Bracket under the Swivel Arm.........Appx IN9-3
Appendix 4.8.1 Measurement Conditions for the FDR MS-1000............Appx IN4-12
Appendix 9.4 Internal Wiring and Putting on the Stereo Cover...Appx IN9-4

Appendix 9.5 Putting on the Swivel Arm Lower Connector

Cover...................................................................Appx IN9-14
Appendix 9.6 Putting on the Covers..........................................Appx IN9-15
Appendix 10. Installing the Stereo Exposure Kit....... Appx IN10-1

Appendix 10.1 Checking the Items Supplied...............................Appx IN10-1
Appendix 10.2 Installing the Front Cover Kit...............................Appx IN10-2
Appendix 10.3 Adjusting the Irradiation Field..............................Appx IN10-2
Appendix 10.3.1 Adjusting the X-Ray Irradiation Field..............................Appx IN10-2
Appendix 10.3.2 Adjusting the Light Irradiation Field................................Appx IN10-2
Appendix 10.4 Updating the RU Software Versions....................Appx IN10-3
Appendix 10.5 Setting the AWS...................................................Appx IN10-3
Appendix 10.6 Installing the Stereo Digital Mammography
Key Software.......................................................Appx IN10-3
Appendix 10.7 Checking the Operation.......................................Appx IN10-3
Appendix 10.7.1 Checking the Stereo Motion of the Swivel Arm..............Appx IN10-3
Appendix 10.8 Creating the Correction Data...............................Appx IN10-4
Appendix 10.8.1 Filter Structure (Stereo)..................................................Appx IN10-5
Appendix 10.8.2 Checking for Image Problems (Stereo)..........................Appx IN10-5
Appendix 10.9 Exposure Dot Defect Calibration.........................Appx IN10-7
Appendix 10.9.1 Erasure of Permanent Dot Defect..................................Appx IN10-7
Appendix 10.9.2 Exposure Dot Defect (Stereo)........................................Appx IN10-8

Performance Check (PC) 0.21
Performance Check (PC)
Performance Checklist of FDR MS-1000.................................PC-1

Installation Information...........................................................................................PC-1
Checklist ...............................................................................................................PC-1

Performance Check (PC) 0.22
BLANK PAGE

Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
08.25.2008 01 Release for each application (FM5396) All pages
10.20.2008 01 (1) New release (FM5447) All pages
03.20.2009 02 Revision (FM5504) All pages
05.20.2009 02 (1) Revision (FM5552) All pages
FDR MS-1000
Service Manual
Safety Precaution
019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual

Safety Precaution -1
1. Safety Precautions - Electrical charge (residual charge) accumulated by a capacitor might remain in a
circuit after the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard is turned OFF.
Be sure to proceed with operations after you are sure that the charge has been
Warnings, operating precautions, and instructions should be observed to avoid completely discharged, due to fears of electric shock hazards.
possible physical hazards and serious accidents that may occur during installation and
You can check the discharge by the following indications.
servicing.
“PSU MAINS” LED on the power supply unit (PSU): The green LED is unlit.
Labels and name plates that describe relevant precautions are attached to the
machine. The instructions on such labels and name plates should also be observed
while installation/servicing procedures are performed.
1.1 General Precautions

 Electrical System Components/Parts
- Be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker on the distribution switchboard before an
inspection, replacement, or adjustment. If an inspection, replacement, or adjustment
procedure is performed while the power is ON, you may experience an electric
shock, burn, short circuit, or machine malfunction. Since some parts are not fully
discharged (such as the power supply unit) or remain at a high temperature (such as
the lamp section) even after the power is turned OFF, exercise due care not to touch [Check]
them. Inspection, replacement, or adjustment procedures that are to be performed LED (PSU MAINS)
with the power turned ON must be completed while exercising due care to avoid DRMS0073.ai
electric shock and short circuit, as instructed in this service manual. LED on the MFI board: The yellow LED is unlit.
MFI board
[Check] LED
DRMS0074 ai
019-201-03E
FDR MS-1000 Service Manual Safety Precaution -1
- Wait 5 seconds or longer after the circuit breaker of the power supply unit (elevation - To restart the machine, wait twenty seconds or longer after turning OFF the power.
stand) is turned OFF before starting operation, when the terminal block cover of the If you turn the power back ON shortly after power OFF, the machine may fail to start
power supply unit (elevation stand) is to be removed, to avoid electrical shocks due up normally.
to the residual charge. - When servicing a board, be sure to wear an antistatic wristband to ground your
Terminal block cover body. If your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage
electronic components on the board.
Wait 5 seconds or longer after
the circuit breaker of
the power supply unit (elevation stand) is
turned OFF before removing the cover.
Power supply unit (elevation stand)

DRMS0052.ai
- Press the system OFF button of the control pad without turning OFF the main circuit
breaker of the mammographic stand, to turn OFF the power of the mammographic
stand.
This is because your fingers might touch the terminals of the power supply cable
and get an electric shock as the main circuit breaker of the mammographic stand is
close to the terminal block of the power supply unit.
If you need to turn OFF the main circuit breaker of the mammographic stand for
some reason, turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard, and make
sure that the charge has been completely discharged, before you turn OFF the main
circuit breaker of the mammographic stand.
Mammographic stand
Main circuit breaker of the

mammographic stand
Terminal
block
Terminal of the
power supply cable
DRMS0075.ai
- The mammographic stand is kept energized unless the system OFF button of the
control pad is pressed, even if the circuit breaker of the controller unit is turned
OFF. Press the system OFF button of the control pad to turn OFF the power of the
mammographic stand.
019-201-03E
 Mechanical Safety Information  Product-Specific Safety Information

- If not observed, minor to more severe burns, especially on the hands, can occur. - In performing checks/replacement/adjustment with the machine covers removed,
Parts and components (e.g., power components, cooling fin, electromagnetic you might possibly come into contact with components under voltage. Carelessness
brakes) that can exceed 50 degrees Celsius during operation are accessible after can result in death or serious bodily injury. When performing the checks/
the covers are opened. To avoid burns, switch the system off prior to touching parts replacement/adjustment, observe the safety precautions in this manual.
or components and allow at least 5 minutes of cooling.
- Be sure to observe the following when removing and attaching components:
- If not observed, minor to more severe injuries, especially to the hands, can occur.
Parts such as threaded bolts, cut-off cable ties and component edges that, if care - Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard;
is not taken, can cause crushing, scrapes and cuts to the skin, particularly to the - Discharge the capacitors.
hands, can be touched after the covers are opened. Perform the particular work
steps with special care and attention to detail. If needed, wear gloves.  Heavy Objects
When removing or installing a heavy object, pay due attention to your working posture
 Drive System Components/Parts and get an assistant(s) as needed. Also, use suitable ancillary gear as appropriate.
- Be sure to turn OFF the power circuit breaker for the machine main body and the
circuit breaker on the distribution switchboard before an inspection, replacement,  Safety Devices
or adjustment. Inspection, replacement, or adjustment procedures that are to be For safety devices, such as fuses, circuit breakers, interlock switches, and protective
performed with the power turned ON must be completed while exercising due care housing, their safety features should always be enabled. Do not make any alternation
as instructed in this service manual. or modification that may impair their functionality.
- To avoid safety hazards, never touch rotating components or parts. Exercise due
care so that your hands, feet, hair, and clothing are not caught in the machine.
019-201-03E
 Grounding  Tightening of Screws

Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power supply
cable and additional protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with l Tightening torque of screw
retaining screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws - All existing screw connections must be tightened sufficiently firmly, but they may not
removed for servicing purposes are restored to states existing upon installation. After be overstressed when tightening.
the parts and retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned states, follow - Incorrect screw connections can result in physical injury or property damage. All
the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are screws are to be secured in accordance with the information in the manual.
securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
l Replacement for damaged or lost screws
 Unpacking
Damaged or missing screws may be replaced only with the same screw types that
- When unpacking, check to make sure that the machine and supplied accessories have the specified hardness rating.
are free from damage leading to an adverse effect on function and safety. Unless a different value is listed in the instructions, all Allen screws used must be
- Use only tools and jigs mentioned in this manual. hardness rated 8.8.
- Wear sturdy shoes.
- Always observe the directional markings on the crates during transport, storage and  Laser Beam
unpacking. Depending on their classification, laser beams may damage the eyes and the skin.
Follow the instructions as stated.
 Transport Protection
Remove the transport protective members in the sequence mentioned in the service  Batteries
manual. Incorrect installation of lithium batteries may lead to risk of explosion. Follow the
instructions on the handling and disposal as stated.
 Handling Hazardous Substances

Hazardous materials are designated as substances which can ignite or explode or
which are toxic, injurious to health, corrosive or irritating.
- Their properties together with the hazards and protective measures connected with
them are identified clearly by symbols.
- Before they are handled, the required protective measures must be complied with
when performing work to avoid health risks.
019-201-03E
 Other Precautions 1.2 Precautions on Radiation

- When performing a servicing procedure while the power is turned ON with a
protective housing removed, carefully proceed with the procedure while observing  Radiation Safety Information
the instructions described in this service manual. Further, exercise care not to drop
screws or other fasteners into the machine. If any fastener is dropped, be sure to If not observed, illness, irreversible damage to body cells and the genotype, severe
collect it. injuries and even death may result.
- While the machine is powered, never remove or install any component/part because In work in which radiation must be released, pay special attention to the followings:
you may experience an electric shock, burn, or short circuit. - Use available radiation protective devices.
- Keep clean the product name plates, safety standards labels, product serial number - Wear radiation protective clothing (lead apron).
labels, caution labels, and other labels attached to the machine, and do not peel - Stay as far away as possible from the radiation source.
them or put another name plate or label over them. - Release radiation only if necessary.
- Upon completion of the servicing procedures, put the protective housing, screws, - Set the radiation activity as low as possible (low kV and low mAs).
and other fasteners back to their original locations and secure them in place. - Release radiation for as short a time as possible.
- Replace a damaged or worn component with the component specified in the
manual.  Radiation Protection
- Always check to make sure that the surroundings of the machine are free from Ionizing radiation can lead radiation injuries if handled incorrectly. When radiation is
obstacles or persons before operating the machine. applied, the required protective measures must be complied with in any event.
 Radiation Protected Area and Low-Level Radiation Area

Evacuate to a radiation protected area certificated by the optional protective board
when engaging in X-ray irradiation in the exposure chamber. Wear radiation
protective clothing, when the protective board is not to be used.
Unless you wear the radiation protective clothing, you should engage in the X-ray
irradiation in a low-level radiation area at a distance of 1,500 mm or longer from the
back of the patient.
Low-level irradiation area
m
m
0
50
1,
Patient
45°
Protective board
(optional)
Irradiation protected area

DRMS0053.ai
019-201-03E
n Installing the Operation Desk in the Exposure Chamber 1.3 Laser

When the operation desk is to be installed in the exposure chamber, put the optional Class 1 laser product conforming to IEC60825-1(1993)+A2(2001).
protective board for radiation protection. Place the operation desk at a distance of 1,500
mm or more from the X-ray focus.
1.4 Declaration of Conformity
The machine conforms to the following standards.
- IEC 60601-1-1:2000 Ed.2
- EN 60601-1-2:2001+A1:2006
- IEC 60601-1-3:1994 Ed.1.0
- IEC 60601-1-6:2006
- IEC 60601-2-45:2001 Ed.2
1.5 Precautions on Infection

If not observed, severe injury and even death may result.
The machine can be contaminated by infected blood or other bodily fluids.
Avoid all contact with blood or other body fluids.
Strictly observe the safety information regarding prevention of infectious diseases.
X-ray focus
1,500 mm or more
Operation
desk
Protective board (optional)
Control pad
(exposure switch)
Exposure chamber
DRMS0045 ai
019-201-03E
1.6 Safety and Various Symbols Symbol Meaning

The safety symbols applied in the machine are listed below:
Symbol Meaning Icon of height adjustment by foot switch
DRMS0066.ai
Attention, consult ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTS.

DRMS0054.ai Icon of compression/decompression by foot switch
DRMS0067.ai
Stop
DRMS0076.ai Swivel arm up/down movement icon
DRMS0077.ai
Power-OFF (partial)
DRMS0055.ai
DRMS0078.ai
Swivel arm angle adjustment icon
Power-ON (partial)
DRMS0056.ai
DRMS0079.ai
Grid mounting/dismounting icon
Protective grounding (to the earth)

DRMS0057.ai DRMS0080.ai
Operation-on icon
Alternating current
DRMS0058.ai DRMS0081.ai Operation-off icon
Type B application
DRMS0059.ai
DRMS0082.ai
Exposure icon
DRMS0061.ai
High voltage
Electrical or electronic equipment to be collected separately

DRMS0062.ai for disposal
Year of manufacture
DRMS0083.ai
DRMS0084.ai
EFUP (Environmentally Friendly Use Period)
Connection point for the neutral conductor on permanently

N DRMS0063.ai
installed equipment
DRMS0064.ai
Light field lamp button icon
DRMS0065.ai
This button does not function
019-201-03E
1.7 Precautions on Patient Environment

Before installing the machine, the supervisor at the machine installation site need
determine the patient environment range at the installation site.
 General Example of the X-ray Environment

 Patient environment
Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment,
tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and
2.5 m in height from the area of the patient’s body.
It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.
m
5
2.
2.5 m
2.5 m 2.5 m
FR9H0001 .EPS
 Medically-used room
Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use
grounding terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective
grounding inside the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective
grounding of this medically-used room is equipotential to that in the other medically-
used room.
Generally, a portion of the medically-used room is the patient environment.
 Non-medically used room

Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.
 Additional Protective Grounding

If the machine is installed in the patient environment with the connected equipment
in the non-medically used room, they should be connected via additional protecting
grounding wires.
019-201-03E
2. Labels 2.1.2 List of Labels
 DHHS Certification and Identification Label

2.1 Laser Precaution Labels l Control pad
2.1.1 Laser Precaution Label Attachment Locations
Below are illustrated the protective housings and attachment locations of laser
precaution labels, as specified in "Laser Products - Conformance with IEC60825-1 (Am.
2) and IEC60601-1-22; Final Guidance for Industry and FDA (Laser Notice No. 50)"
issued by the FDA of the U.S. DRMS0001.ai
l Single tank unit

Control pad
DHHS certification and
identification label
DRMS0034 ai
l Collimator
Single tank unit

identification label DRMS0033.ai
Collimator

identification label
DRMS0032.ai
019-201-03E
2.2 Other Labels

2.2.1 Attachment Locations for Ratings Indication Label
and Other Labels
n Mammographic Stand/Controller Unit/Single Tank Unit/Collimator
Single tank unit B
Controller unit
FDR MS-1000
Elevation system label (*)
A stand label
Pharmaceutical
system label
Collimator
Ratings indication label UL authentication
(FDR-1000DRSZ label
(FDR-1000DRS or
or FDR-1000DRLZ)
FDR-1000DRL)
Pharmaceutical
notification label
Protective ground mark label
Mammographic stand
DETAIL A Single tank unit label

Protective ground mark DETAIL B DETAIL C
(engraved mark) X-ray tube model No., Serial No. label High voltage
caution label
C
Protective ground mark label
*: This is not applied to a machine for use in Japan.

SID/irradiation field size label
DRMS0040.ai
019-201-03E
n Power Supply (Mammographic Stand) n Power Supply (Controller Unit)

Power supply (controller unit)
Caution label Warning label
Ratings
indication
label
Ratings indication
label
DRMS0042.ai
Power supply (mammographic stand)
n Control Pad
Caution label
Continuous operation
Warning label condition label
Stop label
DRMS0041.ai
n FPD
High voltage High voltage
power supply label caution label
FPD
Caution label
Control pad
DRMS0044 ai
DRMS0043 ai
019-201-03E
n Motor Inverter n Terminal Block

Caution label Caution label
Neutral mark
label
Motor inverter
Controller unit
Motor inverter label Protective ground

DRMS0046.ai mark label
DRMS0024.ai
n Foot Switches
Foot switch label n Cover
l Mammographic stand
Stop label
Foot switch (rear side)

DRMS0069.ai
Continuous
operation condition DRMS0068.ai
label
019-201-03E
2.2.2 List of Ratings Indication Label and Other Labels l FDR-1000DRLZ
<For use in Japan>
n System Label System label is not applied to a machine.
l FDR-1000DRSZ <For use outside Japan>

<For use in Japan>
System label is not applied to a machine.
<For use outside Japan>
DRMS0088 ai
DRMS0035.ai
019-201-03E
n Ratings Indication Label l Power supply (mammographic stand)
l FDR-1000DRSZ
DRMS0002 ai
l Power supply (controller unit)
DRMS0039.ai
l FDR-1000DRLZ
DRMS0003 ai
DRMS0085.ai
019-201-03E
n Pharmaceutical System Label n Pharmaceutical Notification Label

l FDR-1000DRSZ l FDR-1000DRS
l FDR-1000DRLZ l FDR-1000DRL
019-201-03E
n UL Authentication Label n Warning Labels

l FDR-1000DRS l Control pad
DRMS0004 ai
l Power supply (mammographic stand)
DRMS0038.ai
l FDR-1000DRL
DRMS0005 ai
DRMS0089 ai
019-201-03E
n Caution Labels n High Voltage Power Supply Label

l Power supply (mammographic stand)
Barcode indication
Lot symbol Serial number
DRMS0020 ai DRMS0048.ai
l Motor inverter n Elevation Stand Label
DRMS0021.ai
DRMS0047.ai
n X-Ray Tube Model No., Serial No. Label

DRMS0022 ai
n High Voltage Caution Label
DRMS0019 ai
DRMS0049.ai
019-201-03E
n Single Tank Unit Label n Motor Inverter Label
DRMS0012.ai
n Foot Switch Label

DRMS0008.ai
n SID/Irradiation Field Size
DRMS0027.ai
DRMS0030 ai
019-201-03E
n Continuous Operation Condition Label n Stop Label

l Control pad
DRMS0072.ai
DRMS0070.ai n Neutral Mark Label

l Cover (mammographic stand)
FRAH0022.EPS
n Protective Ground Mark Label
FRAH0021.EPS
n Protective Ground Mark (Engraved Mark)
DRMS0031.ai
DRMS0071 ai
019-201-03E
2.2.3 Handling Instruction Labels and Attachment
Locations
REFERENCE
No handling instruction labels are attached to the machine.
019-201-03E
3. CLASSIFICATION n PC
IEC60950-1 approved product
n FDR-1000DRSZ/FDR-1000DRLZ
1. According to the type of protection against electrical shock
1. According to the type of protection against electrical shock CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT
CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT
n RX210 (Monitor)
2. According to the degree of protection against electrical shock
Type B 1. According to the type of protection against electrical shock
CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT
3. Protection against harmful ingress of water
Main unit: IPX0 2. According to the degree of protection against electrical shock
Foot switch: IPX1 Not applicable (N/A)
4. According to the degree of safety of application in the presence of 3. Protection against harmful ingress of water
a flammable anesthetics mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous IPX0
oxide
4. According to the degree of safety of application in the presence of
Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anesthetics mixture
with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide. a flammable anesthetics mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous
oxide.
5. According to the mode of operation Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anesthetics mixture
Continuous use with intermittent load with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
6. Continuous use 5. According to the mode of operation
Take the shortest exposure interval indicated in the graph (input energy of tube vs. Continuous operation
shortest exposure interval) for continuous exposures, and make less than 60 shots
per hour.
{Product Specifications:1.2.1_FDR-1000DRSZ/FDR-1000DRLZ Specifications_
l Heating curve and cooling curve of the X-ray tube}
n HUB
IEC60950-1 approved product
1. According to the type of protection against electrical shock
CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT
019-201-03E
4. Cautions on Electromagnetic 4.1.1 Further Information for IEC 60601-1-2 (EN 60601-1-2)
Model name FUJIFILM Digital Mammography System FDR MS-1000 is referred to as
Waves FDR MS-1000 in this section.
- Medical electrical equipment needs special precautions regarding EMC and needs
4.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) to be installed and put into service according to the EMC information provided in the
accompanying documents.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for medical - Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect medical electrical
devices to IEC 60601-1-2:2001+A1:2004 (EN 60601-1-2:2001+A1:2006). equipment.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful - Information regarding the cable affecting EMC is as follows.
interference in a typical medical installation.
Name General Specification
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
Network cable
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference (FDR-1000AWS)
Cat5e or more, UTP type and straight cable
to other devices in the vicinity. Network cable
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular (FDR-1000DRSZ/ Cat5e or more, STP type and straight cable
installation. FDR-1000DRLZ)
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to other devices, which can be - The use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified, with the
determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to exception of transducers and cables sold by FUJIFILM Corporation as replacement
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures; parts for internal components, may result in increased emissions or decreased
- Reorient or relocate the receiving device. immunity of the FDR MS-1000.
- Increase the separation between the equipment. - The FDR MS-1000 should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the FDR MS-1000 should be observed to
other device(s) are connected. verify normal operation in the configuration in which it will be used.
Consult a FUJIFILM dealer for help as necessary. - Items to be tested (see the table below)
This Service Manual contains the names of standards applied in IEC 60601-1-2. Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic emissions
The names of standards applied in EN 60601-1-2 are replaced as follows. The FDR MS-1000 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment
specified below. The customer or the user of the FDR MS-1000 should assure that
IEC 60601-1-2 it is used in such an environment.
Standards applied in EN 60601-1-2
(descriptions in this Service Manual)
Electromagnetic environment -
CISPR 11:1997+A1:1999+A2:2002 EN 55011 Emissions test Compliance
guidance
IEC 61000-3-2:2000+A1:2001+A2:2004 EN 61000-3-2 RF emissions The FDR MS-1000 uses RF energy only
CISPR 11 for its internal function. Therefore, its
IEC 61000-3-3:1994+A1:2001+A2:2005 EN 61000-3-3
Group 1 RF emissions are very low and are not
IEC 61000-4-2:1995+A1:1998+A2:2000 EN 61000-4-2 likely to cause any interference in nearby
IEC 61000-4-3:2006 EN 61000-4-3 electronic equipment.
IEC 61000-4-4:2004 EN 61000-4-4 RF emissions
CISPR 11 Class A
IEC 61000-4-5:2005 EN 61000-4-5 The FDR MS-1000 is suitable for use in
IEC 61000-4-6:2003+A1:2004+A2:2006 EN 61000-4-6 Harmonic emissions all establishments other than domestic
IEC 61000-3-2 N/A and those directly connected to the public
IEC 61000-4-8:1993+A1:2000 EN 61000-4-8 low-voltage power supply network that
IEC 61000-4-11:2004 EN 61000-4-11 supplies buildings used for domestic
Voltage fluctuations/ purposes.
flicker emissions N/A
IEC 61000-3-3
019-201-03E
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity
The FDR MS-1000 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The FDR MS-1000 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
The customer or the user of the FDR MS-1000 should assure that it is used in such an customer or the user of the FDR MS-1000 should assure that it is used in such an environment.
environment.
Electromagnetic IEC 60601 Compliance
Immunity test Electromagnetic environment - guidance
Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level environment - test level level
guidance Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms Portable and mobile RF communications
Electrostatic ±6 kV contact ±6 kV contact Floors should be equipment should be used no closer to any
discharge (ESD) wood, concrete or IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz - 80 MHz part of the FDR MS-1000, including cables,
±8 kV air ±8 kV air ceramic tile. If floors than the recommended separation distance
IEC 61000-4-2 are covered with calculated from the equation applicable to
synthetic material, the frequency of the transmitter.
the relative humidity
should be at least Recommended separation distance
30%. Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m d = 1.2
Electrical fast ±2 kV for power ±2 kV for power Mains power quality
transient/burst supply lines supply lines should be that of a IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz - 2.5 GHz d = 1.2 80 MHz - 800 MHz
±1 kV for input/output ±1 kV for input/output typical commercial or
IEC 61000-4-4 lines lines hospital environment.
d = 2.3 800 MHz - 2.5 GHz
Surge ±1 kV differential ±1 kV differential Mains power quality
mode mode should be that of a where P is the maximum output power rating
IEC 61000-4-5 ±2 kV common mode ±2 kV common mode typical commercial or of the transmitter in watts (W) according to
hospital environment. the transmitter manufacturer and d is the
Voltage dips, short <5% UT <5% UT Mains power quality recommended separation distance in metres
interruptions and (>95 % dip in UT ) (>95% dip in UT ) should be that of a (m).
voltage variations on for 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle typical commercial or
power supply input hospital environment. Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters,
lines 40% UT 40% UT If the user of the FDR as determined by an electromagnetic site
(60% dip in UT ) (60% dip in UT ) MS-1000 requires survey,a should be less than the compliance
IEC 61000-4-11 for 5 cycles for 5 cycles continued operation level in each frequency range.b
during power mains
70% UT 70% UT interruptions, it is Interference may occur in the vicinity
(30% dip in UT ) (30% dip in UT ) recommended that of equipment marked with the following
for 25 cycles for 25 cycles the FDR MS-1000 symbol:
be powered from an
<5% UT <5% UT uninterruptible power
(>95% dip in UT ) (>95% dip in UT ) supply or a battery.
for 5 s for 5 s
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
(50/60 Hz) magnetic magnetic fields NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is
field should be at levels affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
a
characteristic of a Field strength from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless)
IEC 61000-4-8 typical location in a telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV
typical commercial or broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic
hospital environment. environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be
NOTE: UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level. considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the FDR MS-1000 is
used exceeds the applicable RF compliance, the FDR MS-1000 should be observed to
verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be
necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the FDR MS-1000.
b
Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strength should be less than 3 V/m.
019-201-03E
Recommended separation distances between Portable and mobile RF

communications equipment and the FDR MS-1000
The FDR MS-1000 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment in
which radiated RF disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the
FDR MS-1000 can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining
a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications
equipment (transmitters) and the FDR MS-1000 as recommended below,
according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Rated maximum Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter
output power of m
transmitter 150 kHz - 80 MHz 80 MHz - 800 MHz 800 MH - 2.5 GHz
W d = 1.2 d = 1.2 d = 2.3
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the
recommended separation distance d in metres (m) can be estimated using the
equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum
output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter
manufacturer.
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency
range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic
propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects
and people.
019-201-03E
BLANK PAGE
019-201-03E
BLANK PAGE
019-201-03E
BLANK PAGE
019-201-03E
Control Sheet
FDR MS-1000
Service Manual
Product Specifications

Product Specifications -1
1. Specifications of the Machine Abbreviation Item Remarks

COMP PLATE MAG1.8 SPOT Compression plate, rectangle spot
9X9 #(E) magnification
WARNING
EXPOSURE SWITCH REMOTE
Exposure switch (remote type)
In preparation for the installation of the system, check to make sure that the #(E)
distribution switchboard on the installation site is equipped with a circuit EXPOSURE SWITCH FOOT #(E) Exposure switch (foot switch type)
breaker. PROTECT BOARD FOR CL #(E) X-ray protective board 16 kg (grass-made)
Do not use the distribution switchboard without the breaker. CHEST WALL PAD #(E) Chest wall pad supplement
AXILLA PAD LEFT #(E) Left axilla pad supplement
AXILLA PAD RIGHT #(E) Right axilla pad supplement
1.1 System Components MONITOR ARM #(E) Monitor arm
DR 1000 AC CORD 15M #(E) 15 m power supply cable Only inside Japan.
 System Configuration
DR 1000 AC CORD 25M #(E) 25 m power supply cable Only inside Japan.
Item Qty. Remarks COMP PLATE 18X24 LOW 18x24 compression plate (Low)
EDGE #(E) (*2)
Including single
Mammographic stand 1 COMP PLATE 18X24 HIGH 18x24 compression plate (High)
tank unit
EDGE #(E) (*2)
FDR-1000DRSZ
or FPD 1 COMP PLATE 18X24 FLEX #(E) 18x24 compression plate (Flex)
FDR-1000DRS
FDR-1000DRLZ or Temperature COMP PLATE 24X30 LOW 24x30 compression plate (Low)
(*) 1 EDGE #(E) (*2)
FDR MS-1000 FDR-1000DRL adjustment unit
(*) COMP PLATE 24X30 HIGH 24x30 compression plate (High)
Controller unit 1 EDGE #(E) (*2)
FDR-1000AWS AWS 1 24x30 compression plate (Flex)
COMP PLATE 24X30 FLEX #(E)
(*2)
Including rear COMP PLATE 2D BIOPSY #E 2D biopsy compression plate
Operation desk 1
cover
Only for use in Europe
DR 1000 DR L Z MBL KIT E Mobile kit (*2)
*: The FDR-1000DRSZ is a combination of the mammographic stand and the FDR- and Australia.
1000DRS, and the FDR-1000DRLZ is a combination of the mammographic stand and the Includes the face guard
FDR-1000DRL. POSITIONER KIT BIOPSY #(E) Biopsy positioner kit
W.
STEREO EXPOSURE KIT #(E) Stereo exposure kit
 Options (FDR MS-1000) Needed when using the
FACE GUARD W #(E) Face guard W
Abbreviation Item Remarks stereo exposure kit.
COMP PLATE SPOT 9X9 #(E) Compression plate, rectangle spot FRONT COVER KIT BIOPSY
Front cover kit (18x24) Needed when using the
18×24 #(E)
biopsy positioner kit or
Compression plate for axilla FRONT COVER KIT BIOPSY the stereo exposure kit.
COMP PLATE AXILLA 8X20 #(E) Front cover kit (24x30)
radiography 24×30 #(E)
1.8-fold magnification exposure BIOPSY AC CORD 20M # Biopsy power supply cable (20 m) Only inside Japan.
TABLE KIT #(E)
stand kit (18x24) (*1)
*1: Optional only for the FDR-1000DRSZ
1.8-fold magnification exposure
TABLE KIT L #(E)
stand kit (24x30) (*2)
*2: Optional only for the FDR-1000DRLZ
MAG TABLE #(E)

1.8-fold magnification exposure  Options (FDR-1000AWS)
stand kit S
Refer to the AWS Service Manual for the detailed information.
COMP PLATE MAG1.8 16X20 Compression plate for
#(E) magnification
019-201-03E
FDR MS-1000 Service Manual Product Specifications -1
 Separately Available Accessories

Abbreviation Item Qty. Remarks
EQUIPMENT RACK #(E) Equipment rack 1

For operation desk and
ANCHOR PLATE #(E) Anchor plate 1
equipment rack (*1)
FCR 1 shot Phantom M Plus 1
Booster transformer 1 Only inside Japan
WALL HOLDER FOR Compression plate wall-hanging
1
COMP PLATE #E holder (*2)
*1: The operation desk or the equipment rack must be fixed to the floor with the anchor bolts.
If anchor bolt holes cannot be made on the floor as requested by the customer, however,
you need use the optional anchor plate to fix the operation desk and the equipment rack.
*2: Attach the compression plate wall-hanging holder to a sufficiently rigid wall.
019-201-03E
1.2 Machine Specifications <Operating characteristic curve>
1.2.1 FDR-1000DRSZ/FDR-1000DRLZ Specifications Operating

characteristic curve
l Frequency
Single phase 50/60 Hz
l Input voltage Maximum
Operating time
208/230/240 V~ (single phase two-wire or three-wire)
l Input current
13.5/12.2/11.7 A for 208/230/240 V~
l Maximum permissible impedance

Minimum
208 V 0.25 Ω
230 V 0.30 Ω
240 V 0.35 Ω
l Overcurrent release characteristics

Number of poles 2
Rated interrupting Rated insulation voltage
500
capacity Ui V Current
(kA) AC 230 V 32 A or less (percentage with respect to rated current)
DRMS1011 ai
<Limitation of insulation distance> <Temperature characteristic curve>

Creepage distance 3 mm
Standard ambient
Spatial distance 3 mm
temperature
Percentage of change
in operating time
Ambient temperature °C DRMS1012.ai
019-201-03E
l Climate conditions l Vibration conditions on the floor (installation surface)
<Operating> Frequency Amplitude
Temperature: 20°C–30°C
Humidity: 30%–75% RH (Without moisture condensation) XY direction 10–55 Hz 0.0075 mm or less
Atmospheric pressure: 750–1060 hPa 10–20 Hz 0.0024G or less
Z direction
<Non-operating> 20–55 Hz 0.0015 mm or less
Temperature: 15°C–35°C
Humidity: 10%–80% RH (Without moisture condensation) l Variable magnetic field
Atmospheric pressure: 750–1060 hPa DC 0.3 Gauss or less
<Transit/storage>
The condition values are applicable when the FPD is not equipped.
Temperature: -10°C–50°C
Humidity: 10% (10°C)–90% (50°C) RH (Without moisture condensation)
Atmospheric pressure: 750–1060 hPa
l Attenuation equivalent
Exposure table: 0.1 mmAl
Magnification exposure stand: 0.15 mmAl
Inner cover: 0.01 mmAl
l Operating mode
Continuous use with intermittent load
l Continuous use (maximum continuous exposure interval)

Take the shortest exposure interval indicated in the graph (input energy of tube vs.
shortest exposure interval) for continuous exposures, and make less than 60 shots
per hour.
{Product Specifications:1.2.1_FDR-1000DRSZ/FDR-1000DRLZ Specifications_
l Heating curve and cooling curve of the X-ray tube}
l SID (focal spot to image receptor distance)

650 mm
019-201-03E
l Heating curve and cooling curve of the X-ray tube l Load curve of tube
Heating and cooling curves of the X-ray tube assembly Focus 0.1 Mo Focus 0.1 W
Focus 0.3 Mo Focus 0.3 W

Room temperature 20°C
Average rotor power 124W
Anode heating and cooling curves

P 40 Mo W
DRMS1016 ai
Input energy of tube vs. shortest exposure interval

450
400
Shortest exposure interval [sec]
350
300
250
200
150
100
50
0
0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000 20000
Input for exposure [kV x m x As] DRMS1015.ai
019-201-03E
l X-ray tube (Mo/W) l High voltage generator
<Type> <Tube voltage waveform>
P40Mo/W Multi-pulse type (high frequency: 500 kHz)
Molybdenum or molybdenum/tungsten rotary anode with beryllium window
<Tube voltage range>
<Focal size> 23 kV to 35 kV (in 1 kV steps)
Large focus: 0.3 mm
Small focus: 0.1 mm <mAs value set range (28 kV Mo target)>
* based on the start pattern test Large focus: 2 mAs ─ 500 mAs (±10%, +0.2 mAs)
Small focus: 2 mAs ─140 mAs (±10%, +0.2 mAs)
<X-ray tube current (Mo/W)>
<Exposure time>
- Maximum X-ray tube current with molybdenum anode
Large focus: 10 ms ─ 4 s
Large focus: 150 mA with 25 kV
Small focus: 60 ms ─ 6 s
Small focus: 28 mA with 25 kV
- Maximum X-ray tube current with tungsten focus <Voltage set value accuracy>
Large focus: 188 mA with 25 kV ±5% (measured in a high voltage circuit)
Small focus: 34 mA with 25 kV
<mAs value setting accuracy>
<Rated maximum X-ray tube voltage> ±5% (measured in a high voltage rectifying circuit)
40 kV
<Nominal maximum power (25 kV to 35 kV)>
<Combination of anode and filter Mo/W tube> Molybdenum: Large focus 3.75 kW, small focus 0.7 kW
Mo/30 µmMo Tungsten: Large focus 4.5 kW, small focus 0.85 kW
Mo/25 µmRh
W/50 µmRh
019-201-03E
l X-ray conversion mode 1.2.2 FPD Specifications
Direct conversion
l Frequency
l Conversion substance Single phase 50 Hz–60 Hz
a-Se
l Input voltage
l Effective image area 200–240 V~ (single phase two-wire or three-wire)
FDR-1000DRSZ: 177 mm (main) ×237 mm (sub)
FDR-1000DRLZ: 236.4 mm (main) ×296.4 mm (sub) l Input current
14.0–11.7 A for 200–240 V~
l Pixel resolution
50 x 50 µm/pix l Climate conditions
<Operating>
l Number of pixels Temperature: 20°C–30°C
FDR-1000DRSZ: 3,540 (main) ×4,740 (sub) = 16,779,600 pixels Humidity: 15%–80% RH (Without moisture condensation)
FDR-1000DRLZ: 4,728 (main) ×5,928 (sub) = 28,027,584 pixels Atmospheric pressure: 750–1060 hPa
l Concentration resolution <Non-operating>
16 bit Temperature: 15°C–35°C
Humidity: 10%–80% RH (Without moisture condensation)
l Threshold spatial frequency Atmospheric pressure: 750–1060 hPa
10.0 lp/mm <Transit/storage and unpacking>
l Calibration frequency Temperature: 10°C–30°C
Humidity: 10%–80% RH (Without moisture condensation)
Once/day or more
Atmospheric pressure: 750–1060 hPa
l Overload protection
Controller unit: Circuit breaker built in
FPD: Circuit breaker in the controller unit
l I/F cable
{INAppx:1._Requirements Regarding Locally Obtained Parts}
1.2.3 FDR-1000AWS Specifications

Refer to the AWS Service Manual for the FDR-1000AWS specifications.
019-201-03E
1.3 Dimensions and Weight of the Machine 1.3.2 Dimensions and Weight of FDR-1000AWS
Refer to the AWS Service Manual for the dimensions and the weight of the FDR-
1.3.1 Dimensions and Weight of FDR-1000DRSZ/FDR- 1000AWS.
1000DRLZ
n Dimensions
Mammographic stand: W1000 x D1200 x H1980 (mm)
Controller unit: W300 x D550 x H750 (mm)
Mammographic stand
Controller unit
550
750
300
1980
1200
FPD
1100
1000
Unit: mm
DRMS1001.ai
n Weight
Mammographic stand: Approx. 320 kg
FPD: Approx. 20 kg (FDR-1000DRSZ)
Approx. 23 kg (FDR-1000DRLZ)
Controller unit: Approx. 22 kg
019-201-03E
1.4 Installation Space and Servicing Space l Height direction

REFERENCE
n Mammographic Stand/Controller Unit The required height space of the machine ranges 2,100 to 2,400 mm. The movable
range of the machine can be changed depending on the available space at the
l Front-rear/left-right direction installation site.
{Product Specifications:1.5_Range of Movement}
0 or more Controller
unit
(*1)
500 or more
100 or more
Cable length:
Approx. 4,200
2,690 or more
2,400 or more (*1)
Mammographic stand •
•
FPD •
2,100 or more (*2)
1,500 or more 1,500 or more
990 or more
3,000 or more
Unit: mm
(*1): The machine can be installed with no clearance Unit: mm (*1)： Required space when the machine is used with the defaults as
(0 mm) on the rear of the controller unit. DRMS1002.ai set in the factory without repositioning the swivel arm elevation
upper-limit switch.
(*2)：Required space when the machine is used with the swivel arm
elevation upper-limit switch lowered by 300 mm. DRMS1003.ai
019-201-03E
n Operation Desk
350 350
or more or more
Operation desk
1,000 or more
Unit: mm
DRMS1010.ai
019-201-03E
1.5 Range of Movement

n Mammographic Stand 790 790
REFERENCE
Although the machine is set in the factory so that the swivel arm stops at 2,320 mm
when it is moved up to its uppermost position, the uppermost position of the swivel
arm can be adjusted within a range of 2,050 to 2,320 mm by repositioning the swivel
arm elevation upper-limit switch. 90° 90°
The corresponding adjustment range of the uppermost position of the FPD upper
surface is 1,200 to 1,500 mm.
Swivel arm
Swivel arm elevation
upper-limit switch
FPD
90° 90°
Uppermost position of Lowermost position
the swivel arm: 2,320 of the swivel arm:
(adjustable in a range 1,510 (*)
of 2,000 to 2,320) Unit: mm
DRMS1007 ai
Uppermost position of the

upper surface of the FPD: Lowermost position
1,500 (adjustable in a of the upper surface
range of 1,200 to 1,500) of the FPD: 690 (*)
Unit: mm
DRMS1060.ai
(*): The lowermost position (the position where the swivel arm is lowered to its lowest
position) does not change as the elevation lower-limit switch is not repositioned.
019-201-03E
1.6 Anchoring Locations

n Mammographic Stand/Controller Unit
60
147.4
500 or more Mammographic stand

457 Controller unit
485 100
180 43
465
670
705
643
780
Unit: mm
DRMS1004.ai
019-201-03E
n Operation Desk
700
400
200
150
400
Operation desk
Unit: mm
DRMS1009.ai
019-201-03E
1.7 System Configuration Example n Installing the Operation Desk in the Exposure Chamber
CAUTION
WARNING
Do not use a multi-socket/extension cord for the quality and safety of the When the operation desk is to be installed in the exposure chamber, put the
product. optional protective board for radiation protection. Place the operation desk at a
distance of 1,500 mm or more from the X-ray focus.
u NOTES u
- The FDR-1000DRSZ/FDR-1000DRLZ can be installed in an exposure chamber
(patient environment).
- Appropriately furnish the exposure chamber and the operation chamber to visually 500 or more
and acoustically check the patient conditions.
Exposure chamber Operation chamber
Control pad
(exposure switch)
Controller
unit
Operation desk
FDR-1000AWS
790 790

Mammographic stand
FDR-1000DRSZ/
FDR-1000DRLZ 1,500 or more
Operation
desk
Protective board (optional)
Control pad
DRMS1005 ai (exposure switch)
Patient chamber
Unit: mm
DRMS1008 ai
019-201-03E
1.8 Disposal of the Machine n Carbon Fiber

Dispose of the machine or its components in compliance with the local regulations. Carbon fiber in the exposure table: Approx. 1.1 kg
Classify the wastes according to the local situations for collection or disposal.
Take appropriate actions as consigning to waste disposers in principle. n Metals
When disposing the equipment, remove the lithium battery first. Be sure to return the The following components contain special metals.
removed lithium battery to the Service Parts Center. Single tank unit
WARNINGS - Beryllium: Approx. 0.7 kg
- Nickel: Approx. 50 kg
- Observe precautions mentioned in the “Safety Precautions” and “Checks, - Molybdenum/tungsten: Approx. 560 g
Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC)”.
- If the elevation stand or the swivel arm is improperly detached, they get The following components contain steel or iron.
uncontrollable, possibly resulting in hazard. These parts must be removed - Elevation stand
only by our service personnel. - Foot switches
The following components contain copper.
WARNING - System cable
Observe the followings to avoid electrical shock due to high voltage. - Printed board
- A capacitor which has been removed might hold a high voltage for an n Transformer Oil (Shell: Type 4655)
extended period of time (days or weeks). Do not touch a hazardous region or
contacts of the capacitor until you are sure that they are fully discharged. Oil in the single tank unit: Approx. 3 L
- After removing the capacitors, permanently short out their contacts (with wire
jumpers or the like). n Plastic Materials
- Epoxy casting resin in printed boards: Approx. 1.5 kg
- Insulation PVC in cables: Approx. 6 kg
n FPD - Housing components on the elevation stand,
Remove the FPD, and always return to the Service Parts Center. AWS, operation desk, and foot switches: Approx. 10 kg
n Coolant n Electrolytic Capacitor

Let the coolant be absorbed in paper and dispose of as burnable garbage. - Capacitor in printed boards: Approx. 2 kg
n Radiation Protective Material n Battery

- Lead in the single tank unit: Approx. 0.8 kg Lithium battery of the CPU51A board and the CBS board
- Lead in the grid: Approx. 0.1 kg
n Lead Solder
- Lead in electrical components and printed boards: Approx. 0.5 kg
019-201-03E
Control Sheet
FDR MS-1000
Service Manual
Machine Description (MD)

MD-1
1. Summary of the Machine
1.1 Features of the Machine

 Function Overview
- The high-performance flat panel detector is employed, permitting high quality
mammographic images to be recorded with a small quantity of X-ray dose.
- An interval from completion of exposure to the next exposure is short, attaining
processing speed to support a work flow such as group examination.
- Three kinds of exposure modes, including fully automatic, semi-automatic and
manual modes, are available, to support a wide range of exposure requirements.
- When the fully automatic or semi-automatic mode is specified, an optimum X-ray
irradiation dose can be automatically calculated from the automatically measured
breast thickness or a compression pressure, to minimize the dose for the patient.
- Automatic exposure control (AEC) permits a mammary gland region to be properly
captured, with mAs value or the like automatically controlled.
- The machine is equipped with the automatic breast compression function. This
function, when enabled, automatically controls the compression pressure on the
breast to be the optimum value which permits the breast to be compressed to the
optimum position without inflicting pain on the patient.
- The machine is equipped with the automatic decompression function of the
compression plate. This function, when enabled, automatically decompresses the
breast upon completion of the exposure, to shorten the painful time of the patient.
- The swivel arm can be motor-driven to move up/down, tilt and rotate, allowing easy
positioning of the patient.
- The machine is equipped with the foot switch, to allow elevation of the swivel arm
and compression/decompression of the breasts by the compression plate while the
operator assists the patient with both hands.
019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual MD-1

MD-2
1.2 System Configuration Examples
Server Image viewer
FDR MS-1000
FDR-1000DRSZ FDR-1000AWS
(FDR-1000DRLZ)
Personal
Controller computer
unit Monitor
Mammographic Control pad

stand Hub
DRMS2001.ai

MD-3
1.3 Overall Machine Configuration and External Name Description Remarks
View Mammographic stand Refer to "n Mammographic
Stand".
1.3.1 Machine External View and Functions Controller unit Refer to "n Controller Unit".
AWS - Registers and acquires
 Machine Main Body patient ID information;
checks, processes and
Mammographic stand delivers images.
- Sets the X-ray exposure
Control pad conditions.
Foot switches (right and - Moves up/down the swivel
left) arm and compresses/
decompresses the
compression plate.
Foot switch
Control pad Refer to “n Control Pad”.
Controller unit
DRMS2007.ai

MD-4
 Options (FDR MS-1000) Name Description Remarks
Name Description Remarks Biopsy positioner kit Controller unit, Face guard,
Attachment, Needle holder,
Compression plate, rectangle Used for spot exposure. Option key for the software.
spot Stereo exposure kit Stereo exposure plug, Software
Compression plate for axilla Used in axilla radiography. key CD, Instruction manual.
radiography Face guard W Needed when using the stereo
1.8-fold magnification exposure Used for magnification exposure. Only for FDR- exposure kit.
stand kit (18x24) 1000DRSZ. Front cover kit (18x24) Needed when using the biopsy
1.8-fold magnification exposure Used for magnification exposure. Only for FDR- Front cover kit (24x30) positioner kit or the stereo
stand kit (24x30) 1000DRLZ. exposure kit.
1.8-fold magnification exposure Used for magnification exposure. Biopsy power supply cable (20 m) For biopsy controller unit. Only inside Japan.
stand kit S
Compression plate for Used for magnification exposure.  Options (FDR 1000-AWS)
magnification
Compression plate, rectangle Used for magnification spot
spot magnification exposure.
Exposure switch (remote type) Exposure button.  Separately Available Accessories
Exposure switch (foot switch Exposure button.
type) Name Description Remarks
X-ray protective board Used with the operation desk 16 kg
installed in the exposure chamber. (grass-made) Equipment rack For accommodating the equipment.
Can be installed in combination with
Chest wall pad supplement Spare chest wall pad. the operation desk.
Left axilla pad supplement Spare left axilla pad.
Anchor plate For retaining the operation desk and
Right axilla pad supplement Spare right axilla pad. the equipment rack (*1)
Monitor arm Retains the AWS monitor. FCR 1 shot Phantom M Plus
15 m power supply cable For power supply to the controller Only inside Japan.
unit. Booster transformer Raises the supply voltage if the Only inside Japan.
standard is not satisfied.
25 m power supply cable For power supply to the controller Only inside Japan.
unit. Compression plate wall-hanging Accommodates the compression
18x24 compression plate (Low) Only for FDR- holder (*2) plate.
1000DRLZ.
*1: The operation desk or the equipment rack must be fixed to the floor with the anchor bolts.
18x24 compression plate (High) Only for FDR- If anchor bolt holes cannot be made on the floor as requested by the customer, however,
1000DRLZ. you need use the optional anchor plate to fix the operation desk and the equipment rack.
18x24 compression plate (Flex) *2: Attach the compression plate wall-hanging holder to a sufficiently rigid wall.
24x30 compression plate (Low) Only for FDR-
1000DRLZ.
24x30 compression plate (High) Only for FDR-
1000DRLZ.
24x30 compression plate (Flex) Only for FDR-
1000DRLZ.
2D biopsy compression plate For use of exposures for biopsy.
Mobile kit Fixed components to be mounted Only for use in
on the trailer. Europe and Australia.

MD-5
 Mammographic Stand (1/3)  Mammographic Stand (2/3)
Swivel arm Emergency
decompression button Compression/
decompression dials
Emergency (right and left)
stop switches
Elevation (right and left)
stand
Control panels
(right and left)
Grip handles
(right and left)
Exposure table
DRMS2045.ai
DRMS2006.ai
Name Description Remarks

Moves up/down and rotates
Elevation stand - Moves up/down and rotates
the swivel arm.
the swivel arm.
Control panel
For mounting the FPD/ - Puts ON/OFF the irradiation
Swivel arm compression unit/single tank field light and the indicator
unit
Decompresses the
Emergency compression plate to allow
decompression button manual push-up of the
compression plate.
Compression/
Compresses/decompresses
decompression dials
the compression plate.
(right and left)
Exposure table Carries the breast(s).
Grip handles (right and
The patient grasps.
left)
Stops the entire system
Emergency stop
operation and X-ray
switches (right and left)
irradiation.

MD-6
 Mammographic Stand (3/3) Name Description Remarks
Swivel Single tank Generates X-rays.
Single tank unit arm unit
Collimator Limits the irradiation
Motor inverter lift range.
Collimator Compression Moves up/down the
Motor inverter rotate
unit compression plate.
Grid Compression unit FPD Reads an image on the

Se device and outputs an
image signal to the AWS.
Power supply unit
Temperature Controls the temperature
(PSU) adjustment in the FPD.
FPD
unit
A Grid Removes scattered

radiation.
Display
Main circuit breaker Discharge Confirms that the When discharged: The yellow
checking LED accumulated voltage is LED goes out.
discharged.
DETAIL A Elevation Motor inverter Controls the motor lift of

stand lift the swivel arm.
Motor inverter Controls the motor rotate
rotate of the swivel arm.
Power supply Refer to "n Power Supply
B unit (PSU) Unit (PSU)".
Discharge checking LED Main circuit Turns ON/OFF the power ON: ( ) Main power supply ON
breaker of the elevation stand. OFF: ( ) Main power supply OFF
DETAIL B Display Refer to "n Display".
Discharge Confirms that the When discharged: The green LED
checking LED accumulated voltage is goes out.
discharged.
Temperature
adjustment unit
Discharge checking LED

DRMS2020.ai

MD-7
 Controller Unit  Control Pad
Control pad
Emergency stop switch
System OFF button
System start button

Controller unit
Exposure button
Circuit breaker
DRMS2005.ai Decompression button

DRMS2004.ai

Controller unit - Supplies power to the FPD Name Description Remarks
and the elevation stand. Emergency stop switch Stops the entire system
- Controls the FPD and operation and X-ray
processes the images. irradiation.
Circuit breaker Turns ON/OFF the controller ON: ( ) Main power supply ON Decompression button Moves the compression plate
unit power. OFF: ( ) Main power supply OFF in the decompressing direction
while the button is pushed.
Exposure button Irradiates X-rays. Yellow lit up: During irradiation
Green flashing: Compression
complete
Green lit up: Ready for irradiation
System OFF button Turns OFF the power of the
mammographic stand.
System start button Turn ON the power of the The exposure button lights up in
mammographic stand. green when the mammographic
stand is started.

MD-8
 Power Supply Unit (PSU)  Display
Supplies the power to the elevation stand. The following information appears on the display.
- Angle
 LED lights - Compression thickness
Name Function Value - Compression pressure
- Progress bar
PSU48V +48 V DC is applied Green LED lit up - Error messages
PSU24V +24 V DC is applied Green LED lit up - Maintenance information during adjustment
PSU5V +5 V DC is applied Green LED lit up  Startup window
Intermediate circuit voltage exceeds 60 V. The following appears when the machine starts up.
Warning
Turn OFF the system switch, and wait until the Yellow LED lit up
Upsu400V>60V
voltage lowers to 60 V or lower (LED goes out).
PSU400V +400 V DC is applied Green LED lit up
PSU ON Mammographic stand is turned ON. Green LED lit up IP address of the
X-ray generator part
Mammographic stand transits to the standby (default:
PSU MAINS Green LED lit up
state. The main power source is ON. 192.168.0.100)
192.168.0.100
00:07:ed:a1:b2:c3 INIT
MAC address
The bootup step in process appears.
DRMS2040.ai

MD-9
1.4 X-Ray Irradiation Field Size
Compression
The X-ray irradiation field size available with each compression plate is shown below. X-ray irradiation field size
plate
Note that the X-ray irradiation field size of each compression plate varies, whether or
not a grid is mounted. Mo target W target
With a grid: The grid is in position.
Without a grid: The grid is out of position. 24 cm 20 cm
Compression Compression
X-ray irradiation field size
plate
16.5 cm
plate for
16.5 cm
magnification
With a grid Without a grid
24 cm
0.5 cm
18x24
0.5 cm
24 cm Chest wall edge Chest wall edge
compression DRMS2042.ai DRMS2046.ai
plate (High)
16.5 cm
18 cm
18x24
compression
plate (Low)
9 cm
Compression
0.5 cm
0.5 cm
Chest wall edge Chest wall edge

DRMS2041.ai DRMS2042.ai plate,
9 cm
rectangle spot
30 cm
0.5 cm
30 cm Chest wall edge
24x30 DRMS2043.ai
compression
plate (High)
16.5 cm
24 cm
12.4 cm
24x30
compression Compression
plate (Low) plate,
0.5 cm
Chest wall edge
0.5 cm 12.4 cm
0.5 cm
Chest wall edge DRMS2051.ai

rectangle spot
DRMS2050.ai
magnification
Chest wall edge
24 cm DRMS2049.ai
24 cm
2D biopsy
16.5 cm
18 cm
compression
plate Compression 20 cm
plate for axilla

0.5 cm
0.5 cm
Chest wall edge Chest wall edge radiography
8 cm
0.5 cm
Chest wall edge
DRMS2044.ai

MD-10
1.5 I/O Parts Information  Fan/Motors or the Like
 Sensors/Switches  FPD
Subscanning motor (MZ1)
Internal cooling air
temperature sensor Internal cooling fan (FAN6)
(TH2)
Board chamber cooling

fan (FAN9)
Board chamber cooling fan (FAN8)
External atmospheric Subscanning HP
temperature sensor sensor (SZ1) Board chamber cooling fan (FAN10)
DRMS2031.ai
(TH3) DRMS2030.ai
Symbol Name Type Description

MZ1 Subscanning motor 5-phase Drives the subscanning mechanism
SZ1 Subscanning HP sensor PI Detects the home position during pulse for reading.
subscanning. motor
TH2 Internal cooling air Thermistor Detects the temperature of the FAN6 Internal cooling fan DC sirocco Circulates cooling air in the FPD.
temperature sensor internal cooling air. fan
TH3 External atmospheric Thermistor Detects the external atmospheric FAN8, 9 Board chamber cooling fan DC fan Cools the inside of the board
temperature sensor temperature. chamber.
PI: Photointerrupter FAN10 Board chamber cooling fan DC fan Cools the inside of the board
chamber.
Not incorporated in the FDR-
1000DRSZ.

MD-11
 Temperature adjustment unit
Coolant circulation
pump (P1)
Peltier heat radiating

fan (FAN7)
DRMS2032.ai

P1 Coolant circulation pump - Circulates the coolant.
FAN7 Peltier heat radiating fan DC fan Dissipates peltier heat.

MD-12
1.6 System Block Diagram
Single phase Dis-
200V
[Mammographic stand] To mammographic stand tribution
switch-
[Controller unit] board
X-ray tube
Normal power supply
DC power Circuit Terminal
［FPD］ source block
breaker
Mechanism for moving compression plate, moving up/down exposure stand,
24V/12V
Power Service power CF card
Read light source unit TCP (Tape line) Power supply source switch
distribution 1GB
Bucky drive ASIC (ChargeAmp) PAT51A
M CFI51A
Image transfer board
rotating swivel arm and controlling Bucky
TRC51A
Bucky unit Image data
Video
(SERDES) IDE
board High-speed image Image reception
Image data transmission circuit unit
ADC51A rearrangement
High voltage X-ray detector
CPU51A
Sensor and AD timing generation
PCI
power MPI51A
source
Electromagnetic
AEC51A CPU: Pentium4-3G
Fan pump Mechanical
AutoExposure OS: VXworks
Ctrl Temperature controller unit
control PTC51A
Erasure unit (ERS51A) SZ1 device 24V DIMM
temperature- CPS51B (*)
TDB51A regulating circuit 1GB
M
JCT51A Image (for single window
Subscanning Temperature sensor
correction unit + system
drive 24V (up to 4 images) + correction)
High voltage
Driver unit Marker voltage Internal exposure unit

control
(actuator driver controller unit Load control board control circuit; GbE
Display circuit) SND51B Control Air-
IO expansion FPGA MIF51A
unit communication cooling
fan
Circuit breaker Terminal block From controller unit

AWS
Exposure stand control system XIF51A READY, PREP, STATE, X-RAY, power source synchronization signals (etc.), Network
(parallel communication); SIZE, AEC dose information, etc. (serial communication)
(*): CPS51C for use in the FDR-1000DRLZ

Foot switch Foot switch SHOT signal switch DRMS2003.ai

MD-13
 System
Extern Stand Swivel arm
Acquisition
Workstation
AWS
24V 400V
Emergency- Lift Rotation Single Tank
Display Stand Display Arm
Stop Button Main Filament Unit
DYS DYA
Switches LRB Inverter STU
MFI
24V CAN
Control Box
CAN CAN Control Board
CTB Ctrl
Ctrl
Collimator
Control Board Stand Control Board Arm CBC
CBS CBA
5V
Foot-Switches 24V 24V Compression
Biospy Unit
Unit
BYU
CNU
Ctrl CAN Ctrl CAN

Motor-Switches Motor Drive Motor Drive XIF Board Grid
Rotation Lift
MDR MDL
48V 24V 48V 24V
Control
24V DC/DC Detector
Unit
Power Carbinet
Ctrl
L1 L1 48V
L2 / N L2 / N 24V
PE PE Power Supply Unit 5V
PSU 400V
24V
Extern Stand Swivel arm

DRMS2009.ai

MD-14
 Power Supply Unit (PSU)
PSU PSU_400V_Good
Control Board
PSU_400V_Good_Rtn
CBS
Stand
Power Supply Unit PSU_400V_Enable
PSU_400V_Enable_Rtn
Main Filament
AC-Fail / Konverter
Control Board Stand
Inverter
PSU_AC_Fail_Temp
MFI
UDC_P
PSU_AC_Fail_Temp_Rtn Temperatur 400V DC
UDC_N
CBS
PSU_Plug_In
PSU_Plug_Out PSU_48V_Sense
Control Board Stand

PSU_48V_Sense_Rtn
PSU_48V_Good
CBS
PSU_48V_Good_Rtn
PSU_48V_Enable
PSU_48V_Enable_Rtn
Motor Lift
Rotation
Konverter
MLR
L1
Sicherungen Netzfilter PFC-Stufe 48V_P
L2 / N 48V DC
GND_48V
PE
PSU_24V_Sense
Control Board Stand
Control Board
PSU_24V_Sense_Rtn
CBA
Arm
CBS
PSU_24V_Good
PSU_24V_Good_Rtn
PSU_24V_Enable
PSU_24V_Enable_Rtn
Main Filament
24V_P
Inverter
GND_24V
MFI
Konverter
24V_P
24V DC
GND_24V
PSU_5V_Sense
Control Board
PSU_5V_Sense_Rtn
Control Board Stand
CBS
Stand
PSU_5V_Good
PSU_5V_Good_Rtn
CBS
Control Board Stand
PSU_On
Konverter
CBS
PSU_Off Ein- / Aus-Logik VD_5P0

5V DC
PSU_On_Off_Rtn DGND
DRMS2010.ai

MD-15
 Motor Inverter Lift
CBS
CDF / Rot
X1 / L+
48V_P
X1 / L+
CDF 3000 Motor circuit Lift X29 / A5
48V_GND Lift
X1 / L- X1 / L- Emergency-Stop Top
X1 / PE X29 / B5
CAN_24V
X6 / 8 X6 / 8 X29 / A1
CAN_GND
X6 / 6 X6 / 6 Lift-Stop Top
X6 / 1 X29 / B1
CAN_L
X6 / 2 X6 / 2
CAN_H
X6 / 7 X6 / 7
CAN_GND
X6 / 3 X6 / 3
X29 / A2
Collision-Switch
CBS X29 / A4
MLR_24V_P
X25 / A1 X2 / 6
MLR_GND_24V
X25 / B1 X2 / 4 Lift-Stop Bottom
MLR_Lift_ENPO_24V
X25 / A2 X2 / 12 X3 / U X29 / A3
Bremse
MLR_Lift_3H_24V
X25 / B2 X2 / 10 X3 / V
MLR_Lift_Qstop_24V
X25 / A3 X2 / 13 X3 / W
MLR_Lift_Up_24V
X25 / B3 X2 / 14 X3 / PE X29 / A8
MLR_Lift_Down_24V
X25 / A4 X2 / 15 Emergency-Stop Bottom
X25 / B4
MLR_Lift_RSHO_24V
X2 / 16
Lift-Motor X29 / B8
MLR_Lift_RSHO_24V
30VAC
X25 / A6 X2 / 17
MLR_Lift_Brake_24V
X25 / B6 X2 / 1
X28 / 1 MLR_Lift_Brake
X28 / 3 MLR_Brake_Rth
DRMS2011.ai

MD-16
 Motor Inverter Rotate
PSU CDF 3000 CBS
Rotation
48V P
X3 / 1 X1 / L+
X3 / 2 48V_GND X1 / L- X28 / A7
Emergency-Stop
Left / Right
X28 / B7
SSI_5P0
X6 / 3
SSI_GND
X6 / 8
CBS X6 / 4
SSI_Data_H
CAN_24V SSI_Data_L
X13 / 9 X5 / 9 X6 / 5
CAN_GND SSI_Clk_H
X6 / 14
X13 / 6 X5 / 6
SSI_Clk_L
CAN_L X6 / 15
X13 / 2 X5 / 2
CAN_H
X13 / 7 X5 / 7
CAN_GND
X13 / 3 X5 / 3
CAN_SYNC_H
X13 / 8 X5 / 8
CAN_SYNC_L
X13 / 4 X5 / 4
X5 / 5
MLR_24V_P SSI_5P0
X25 / A10 X2 / 5
MLR_GND_24V SSI_GND
Bremse
X25 / B10 X2 / 4 X3 / U
MLR_Rot_ENPO_24V SSI SSI SSI_Data_H
X25 / A6 X2 / 12 X3 / V
Geber Geber
MLR_Rot_SH_24V SSI_Data_L
X25 / B6 X2 / 16 X3 / W
MLR_Rot_Qstop_24V SSI_Clk_H
X25 / A7 X2 / 13 X3 / PE
MLR_Rot_Go_24V SSI Tomo SSI_Clk_L
X25 / B7 X2 / 14
MLR_Rot_RSHO_24V Geber SSI
X25 / B8 X2 / 18
Rot-Motor Geber
MLR_Rot_RSHI_24V
X25 / A9 X2 / 17 30VAC
MLR_Rot_Brake_24V
X25 / B9 X2 / 1
MLR_Rot_Brake
X27 / 2
MLR Brake Rtn
X27 / 3
DRMS2012.ai

MD-17
 MFI Board
MFI
Main and Filament Inverter
X1
n_MFI_Plug_In
n_Out_A_Main_H
n_Out_A_Main_L n_Lg_Foc n_Err_Main
n_Out_B_Main_H n_Foc_W n_Err_Fil
n_Out_B_Main_L n_Fan_MFI n_Frr_Fil_Open
CPLD
CPLD
n_Out_Fil_H n_Fan_Arm MFI_Data_Out n_Frr_50kHz
MFI_Data_In
n_Out_Fil_L n_STU_Rel n_Frr_5V
n_Out_Bias_H n_An_Drv_Rel n_Frr_15V
n_Out_Bias_L n_An_Cap_Rel n_Frr_24V

n_Bias_Rel X6
MFI_Data_In_H
MFI Interface
Control Board Arm
Power_Out_A_Main
MFI_Data_In_L
Power_Out_B_Main
MFI_Data_Out_H
CBA
MFI_Data_Out_L Bias control

n_MFI_Err_H
X4
n_MFI_Err_L Power_Foc_1
Single Tank Unit

MFI_Temp Power_Foc_2
STU
I_Load_Main Power_Foc_3
50kHz auxiliary
I_Load_Main_Rth Power_Foc_4
voltage
IF_act Power_Bias
IF_act_Rth GND_Fil_Bias
UDC_act 24VDC with Supply X5
U_Bias line filter voltage AN_0
n_MFI_Plug_Out +5VDC AN_I
GND +15DC Main inverter AN_II
Gate driver
-15DC X9
CAnode
X2 400VDC STU / Anode

switching
Power Supply Unit
24V_P intermediate
GND_24 circuit with line
PSU
X3 filter / capacitors
UDC_P
UDC_N
Filament inverter
Foci switching
DRMS2013.ai

MD-18
 Single Tank Unit
STU
Single Tank Unit
Tramsformer Quadrupled Bleeder

circuit
Power_Out_A_Main
Power_Out_B_Main
X-Ray Tube
Main Filament Inverter
Power_Foc_1
Tube
Durchfűhrungsplatine
Power_Foc_2
Temperatur
Power_Foc_3
MFI
Power_Foc_4 T
Stator
Power_Bias
GND_Fil
AN_0
1 2 0
AN_I Tube
AN_II Pressure
P
Control Board Arm
UT_Act
IT_Act
CBA
STU_Temp
STU_Pres
DRMS2014.ai

MD-19
 CBS Board
DSI ENI ECI
Controller Board Stand PSU
Power Supply Unit
Debug Serial
Input Output Stand
IOS Ethernet External CAN
DYS
Display Stand
Mechanics
Magnet
(CBS)
Interface Interface Interface
Reserved1_Rx_RS232
Reserved1_Tx_RS232
Opdima_Rx_RS232
Opdima_Tx_RS232
CAN_GND
MLR_Normal_Out
MLR_Tomo_Out
MLR_Normal_In
DSI_Rx_RS232
DSI_Tx_RS232
DYS_Plug_Out
MLR_Tomo_In
MLR_Motor_N
MLR_Motor_P
24V_Rth
DYS_Plug_In
5V_Rth
ENET_Rx_H
ENET_Tx_H
GND
GND
ENET_Rx_L
ENET_Tx_L
CAN_Ext_H
CAN_Ext_L
DYS_Rx_H
DYS_Tx_H
DYS_Rx_L
DYS_Tx_L
DYS_GND
DYS_24V
24V
5V
Schalter
Em_Stop_Stand_Out GND
Not-
Halt
Em_Stop_Stand_In VCC_24V
Power CAN
VCC_5V RS232 RS232 RS232 ENET
Distribution Interface DYS Interface Mach Interface
VCC_3.3V Interface Interface Interface Interface
2
VCC_1.2V
IOS_Xray_Led_In
IOS_Xray_Led_Out
IOS
IOS_Safety_In
Input Output Stand
Interface
IOS_Safety_Out PSU_On
IOS
GND PSU_Off
SDRAM PSU_On_Off_Rth
VCC
FPGA
CAN_L CAN PSU_AC_Fail_Temp
CAN_H Interface SRAM PSU_AC_Fail_Temp_Rth
1
CAN_GND PSU_400V_Good
Flash Application Specific Module (ASM) PSU_400V_Good_Rth
CAN_L PSU_400V_Enable
Nios Processor System (NPS)
Power Supply Unit

CAN_H CAN PSU_400V_Enable_Rth
CAN_GND Interface PSU_48V_Good
PSU
1 PSU
CBA_Em_Stop_In Interface PSU_48V_Good_Rth
CBA_Em_Stop_Out
Watchdog Xray Release PSU_48V_Enable
CPLD PSU_48V_Enable_Rth
CPLD_Config_Rx_H Clock RTC Emergency Stop
Temperature PSU_24V_Good
Sensor
CPLD_Config_Rx_L PSU_24V_Good_Rth
Interface CPLD Interface FPGA Interface ASM
Control Board Arm
CPLD_Config_Tx_H PSU_24V_Enable
CPLD_Config_Tx_L PSU_24V_Enable_Rth
CBA
CBA_Plug2_In PSU_5V_Good
CBA_Plug2_Out / GND PSU_5V_Good_Rth
CBA PSU_Plug_In
n_Drive_Protect_H Interface PSU_Plug_Out
n_Drive_Protect_L
XC_H
XC_L
Xray_On_H CAN CAN MLR Interface
MCP Interface
Xray_On_L Interface 1 Interface 1
CBA_Plug1_In
CBA_Plug1_Out
MLR_Em_Stop_Bottom_Out
MLR_Em_Stop_Bottom_In
MLR_Em_Stop_Right_Out
MLR_Em_Stop_Top_Out
MLR_Em_Stop_Left_Out
MLR_Em_Stop_Right_In
MLR_Rot_Memory_Out
MLR_Lift_Collision_Out
MLR_Em_Stop_Top_In
MLR_Em_Stop_Left_In
MLR_Lift_Bottom_Out
MLR_Rot_Memory_In
MLR_Lift_Collision_In
MCP_Xray_Led_Out
MLR_Lift_Bottom_In
MCP_Em_Stop_Out
MCP_Decomp_Out
MLR_Lift_Top_Out
MCP_Xray_Led_In
MCP_Em_Stop_In
MLR_Lift_Rot_Rtn
PSU_On_Off_Rtn
MCP_Decomp_In
MLR_Lift_Top_In
MLR_Status_Out
MCP_Xray_Out
MCP_Plug_Out
MLR_Status_In
MCP_Xray_In
MCP_Plug_In
MLR_Lift_Rot
MLR_ENPO
MCP_Rx_H
MCP_Tx_H
MCP_Rx_L
MCP_Tx_L
MLR_GND
MCP_24V
MLR_24V
MLR_SH
PSU_On
PSU_Off
CAN_GND
CAN_H
CAN_H
CAN_L
CAN_L
MCP_GND
CAN_GND
VCC
RCI
Reserved CAN
Interface
MLR MCP
Motor Lift Rotation Main Control Panel
DRMS2015.ai

MD-20
 CBA Board
Controller Board Arm PSU DSI XIF LRB STU
Debug Serial
Power Supply Unit X-ray Interface Board Lift and Rotation Buttons Single Tank Unit
(CBA)
Interface
Rot_CCW
24V_Rtn
Lift_Down
DSI_Rx_RS232
DSI_Tx_RS232
Rot_CW
Lift_Up
PERSRVED
RESERVED
24V
STU_Temp
GND
GND
GND
VCC
STU_Pres
COM_RX
COM_TX
UT_Act
READY
STATE
IT_Act
X-RAY
PREP
GND
VCC_24V
Power
VCC_5V RS232 LRB
Distribution XIF Interface STU Interface
Interface Interface
VCC_3.3V
Control Board Collimator
VCC VCC_1.2V
GND
n_MFI_Plug_In
CBC
Out_A_Main_H
CAN_H Out_A_Main_L
CAN_L Out_B_Main_H
CAN_GND Out_B_Main_L
Out_Fil_H
CAN SDRAM Out_Fil_L
Interface
FPGA
Out_Bias_H
SRAM Out_Bias_L
CAN_L MFI_Data_In_H
Flash Application Specific Module (ASM)
Main and Filament Inverter

CAN_L MFI_Data_In_L
CAN_GND MFI_Data_Out_H
Nios Processor System (NPS)
MFI
MFI MFI_Data_Out_L
Emergency Stop Interface n_MFI_Err_H
CPLD_Config_Rx_H n_MFI_Err_L
Watchdog Xray_On UT_Max
Control Board Stand
CPLD_Config_Rx_L Test Circuit

CPLD_Config_Tx_H
CPLD Comparator Comparator
MFI_Temp
I_Load_Main
Clock Temperature
CBS
CPLD_Config_Tx_L Test DAC A / D Corversion I_Load_Main_Rtn

Sensor
n_Drive_Protect_H IF_act
n_Drive_Protect_L CBS Interface CPLD Interface FPGA Interface ASM U_Bias
XC_H Interface
UDC_act
XC_L n_MFI_Plug_Out
Xray_On_H
Xray_On_L AGND
CBS_Em_Stop_In
CBS_Em_Stop_Out
BYU Interface RDB Interface CUB Interface External Components Interface

n_BYU_Plugged_Out
n_CBU_Plugged_out
CUB_Em_Stop_Out
BYU_Em_Stop_Out
n_BYU_Plugged_In
n_CBS_Plugged_In
CUB_Em_Stop_In
BYU_Em_Stop_In
OT_Cass_Loaded
Comp_Thickness
FW_Sel_Wing_1
FW_Sel_Wing_2
BYU_Rx_RS232
BYU_Tx_RS232
Comp_Plate_ID
RDB_VCO_H
OT_Table_ID
RDB_VCO_L
Comp_Force
Decompress
GD_Go_Out
RDB_Rx_H
RDB_Rx_H
RDB_Tx_H
Comp_Dec
RDB_Tx_L
GD_Power
GD_Go_In
Comp_Inc
Compress
GD_Front
GD_Rear
GD_Turn
GND
VCC
GND
GND
VCC
VCC
GND
VCC
BYU RDB CUB Exposure Table & Grid

Biopsy Unit Radiation Detector Board Conpression Unit Board
DRMS2016.ai

MD-21
2. Mechanism and Operation of the
Mammographic Stand
2.1 Subscanning Mechanism of the FPD

The mechanism moves the light source unit by driving the subscanning motor (MZ1).
It reads electrons carried in the device by irradiating light while the light source unit is
moving.
Device
Light source unit
Subscanning HP
sensor (SZ1)
Sliding shaft
Shaft slide guide
Drive
Flexible cable
transmission
Transmission belt shaft
Decelerating pulley
Subscanning motor (MZ1) Decelerating belt
DRMS2033.ai

MD-22
2.2 Swivel Arm Elevation Mechanism  Functions of the Elevation Upper- and Lower-Limit Switches
The mechanism moves up/down the swivel arm by driving the motor lift. The motor lift Switch Function
is controlled by the CBS board and the motor inverter lift.
Upper-limit switch (front) Uppermost position detecting switch of the swivel arm
Upper-limit switch (rear) Stops the up-movement of the swivel arm when the upper
Sprocket limit switch (front) does not work. If the switch works, the
power circuit breaks, and the machine stops.
Guide rail
Lower-limit switch (front) Lowermost position detecting switch with an angle of 91 to
Swivel arm elevation 180 º (or -91 to -180º) of the swivel arm
upper-limit switch
Lower-limit switch (middle) Lowermost position detecting switch with an angle of 0 to 90º
(or -0 to -90º) of the swivel arm
Guide rail Lower-limit switch (rear) Stops the down-movement of the swivel arm when the lower
limit switch (front or middle) does not work. If the switch
works, the power circuit breaks, and the machine stops.
Guide bearing Upper-limit switch (front)
Upper-limit switch (rear)
Switch dog Upper-limit switch dog (front)
Upper-limit switch dog (rear)

lower-limit switch
Lower-limit switch dog (rear)

Chain
Reduction gear/sprocket Lower-limit switch dog (middle)
Swivel arm motor lift

Lower-limit switch dog (front)
DRMS2035.ai
Lower-limit switch (front)
Lower-limit switch (middle)
Lower-limit switch (rear)
DRMS2039.ai

MD-23
2.3 Swivel Arm Rotation Mechanism 2.4 Compression Mechanism (Compression
The mechanism rotates the swivel arm by driving the motor rotate. The motor rotate Unit)
is controlled by the CBS board and the motor inverter rotate. In addition, the rotation
angle is controlled by feeding back signals from the encoder. The mechanism moves up/down the compression plate by driving the compression
plate motor lift. The compression plate motor lift is controlled by the CBA board.
Swivel arm rotation
limit switch
Sprocket
Chain Shaft slide guide

Transmission belt
Reduction gear/
sprocket
Swivel arm
motor rotate
Compression
plate mount
DRMS2034.ai
Compression plate
motor lift
Reduction gear Pulley

DRMS2022.ai

MD-24
3. Software Operation Overview
3.1 FDR-1000DRSZ/FDR-1000DRLZ Network

Setup
Perform network setup from the PC-TOOL. The PC-TOOL is a servicing/maintenance
utility that is operated from the AWS's screen.
The settings entered from the PC-TOOL are written into the Compact Flash Card of
the controller unit.
Setup items Setting means Factory default values

RU IP address PC-TOOL 192.168.0.101
RU subnet mask PC-TOOL 255.255.255.0
RU default gateway PC-TOOL 0.0.0.0
FTP server IP address PC-TOOL 192.168.0.2
AWS IP address PC-TOOL 192.168.0.2
u NOTES u
- The IP address of the RU (RU IP ADDR) can only be set from PC-TOOL.
- As a rule, the IP addresses of the AWS and FTP server are used as the same
setting.
However, if the FTP server is centrally managed at a single location by distinguishing
between the IP addresses of the FTP server and AWS, you should gain full
understanding of this setup before use.
REFERENCE
The following abbreviations are used:
IP: Internet Protocol
HD: Hard Disk
FTP: File Transfer Protocol Used as a data sharing area.
AWS: Acquisition Workstation PC-Console
M/B: Motherboard Motherboard of the controller unit

MD-25
3.2 Data Structures  Principal software functions
Data structures in the AWS HD (FTP server), Compact Flash Card of the controller Principal functions of each software program are as follows.
unit, and FPD internal boards are shown below. Name Principal function
FDR-1000DRSZ/ IPL (Initial Program Loader) Sets up the RTOS for startup and loads the RTOS.
FDR-1000DRLZ
Basic OS. Sets up the application programs for startup, and
M/B
RTOS (Real-Time OS) loads/starts the controller unit application program from the
BIOS Compact Flash Card.
BIOS Self-diagnoses the motherboard.
AWS Compact Flash Card
Controls the AEC (X-ray dose sensor), acquires offset data,
HD (FTP server) AEC firmware
IPL and accumulates/offsets the dose.
RTOS
RU application Regulates the temperature of the FPD, and provides
PTC board firmware
AWS application
Configuration setting temperature information/error information to the motherboard.
Installation Machine-specific data
CD-ROM RU message
PC tool
AEC board
RTOS
RU application
EPROM
AEC firm LUT
AEC firm LUT
Machine-
specific data PTC firm LUT
CD-R
PTC board
EEPROM
Configuration setting PTC firm LUT
Backup/ Machine-specific data

restore
media
Log data M/B SDRAM
Log/history
DRMS2023.ai

MD-26
3.3 Data Flow between FDR-1000DRSZ/FDR- 3.3.1 Data Flow during Routine Processing
1000DRLZ and AWS  Flow of image data
There are five types of data flows between the FDR-1000DRSZ/FDR-1000DRLZ and Image data read by the detector is transferred from the MPI51A board to the CPS51B
AWS, as summarized below: board (*). In doing so, the image is longitudinally divided into four to speed up the
image correction and written into the DSP-incorporating RAM in the CPS51B board (*).
<For normal processing> The divided images are combined in the motherboard, and a diagnostic image and a
- Image data preview image are output.
- Log data
MPI51A board M/B
<For software installation>
Compact Flash Card
- RTOS
Image data
- RU application RU control software
- AEC firmware LUT
- PTC firmware LUT CPS51B board (*)
- Configuration data
<For software version update> DSP control software RU control software
- RTOS
Image data Image data
- RU application
- AEC firmware LUT Image data
- PTC firmware LUT SDRAM
Image data
<For data backup>
- Machine-specific data (INDIVIDUAL DATA) Image data Log data
<For data restore>

- Machine-specific data (INDIVIDUAL DATA)
AWS
HD (FTP server)
Image data
Log data
DRMS2024.ai
(*): CPS51C board for use in the FDR-1000DRLZ

MD-27
3.3.2 Data Flow for Software Installation 3.3.3 Data Flow for Software Version Update
The data flow during the software installation is as follows. REFERENCE
FDR-1000DRSZ/
The configuration data and machine-specific data are not transferred.
FDR-1000DRLZ
Compact Flash Card
FDR-1000DRSZ/
IPL
FDR-1000DRLZ
AWS
RTOS Compact Flash Card
HD (FTP server) RU application
*2
AWS IPL
Configuration setting RTOS
RTOS HD (FTP server) RU application
*1
RU application
Machine-specific data
Configuration setting AWS application
AEC board
Installation Installation
CD-ROM AWS application AEC board
CD-ROM RU message EPROM
EEPROM PC tool AEC firm LUT
RU message
PC tool AEC firm LUT
RTOS
RU application
AEC firm LUT
Machine- AEC firm LUT PTC board

specific data PTC firm LUT
CD-R PTC board
EEPROM
EEPROM PTC firm LUT
PTC firm LUT
PTC firm LUT
DRMS2026.ai
DRMS2025.ai
*1: The configuration data set in the AWS is written into the “HD (FTP server)” and then into
the “Compact Flash Card”.
*2: The RU application (RU-AP) is written from the "installation CD-ROM" into the "HD (FTP
server)" and "Compact Flash Card" in order named.

MD-28
3.3.4 Data Flow for Data Backup 3.3.5 Data Flow for Data Restore
When data is backed up with the PC-TOOL, the following data is transferred to a u NOTE u
medium in the specified drive.
Since the data is stored both in the Compact Flash Card and the HD, the machine-
- Configuration data setting/AWS connection setting specific data can be restored even if either of them is damaged.
- Machine-specific data
- Error log - If the Compact Flash Card data is damaged, the machine-specific data stored on the hard
disk is used.
AWS RU
- If the hard disk is defective, the machine-specific data stored on the Compact Flash
HD (FTP server) Compact Flash Card Card is used.
*1
Configuration setting
Further, the Compact Flash Card may become damaged before data backup at
Configuration setting the time of installation. In such an instance, restore the data with the machine-
specific data CD-R, which is supplied with the machine. To restore the data, choose
*1 Machine-specific data "INDIVIDUAL DATA" from the "RESTORE" menu of the PC-TOOL.
Backup/
restore Machine-specific data
media CAUTION
Log data *2
M/B SDRAM Never turn OFF the power of the controller unit while you restore the data.
Otherwise, the program on the Compact Flash Card gets damaged, and cannot
Log/history
restart.
DRMS2027.ai u NOTE u
Restored data takes effect when you turn the controller unit power OFF and then back
*1: The configuration data (CONFIGURATION) and the machine-specific data (INDIVIDUAL ON.
DATA) are transferred from the “Compact Flash Card”, the “HD (FTP server)” and the
“Backup/restore media” in order named.
*2: The log data (I/O trace log, trace log (control and correction), temperature regulation log
and operation log) are transferred from the “SDRAM” to the “HD (FTP server)” and the
“Backup/restore media” in order name. The ERROR LOG is transferred from the “HD (FTP
server)” to the “Backup/restore media”.

MD-29
 Flow for restoring backup data
The following data is transferred, by means of the PC-TOOL installed in the AWS, to a
“medium in the specified drive” and the “Compact Flash Card” in order named.
- Configuration data setting
- Machine-specific data
FDR-1000DRSZ/
AWS FDR-1000DRLZ
HD (FTP server) Compact Flash Card
*1
Configuration setting Configuration setting
*1 Machine-specific data
Backup/
restore
media
DRMS2028.ai
*1: The configuration data (CONFIGURATION) and the machine-specific data (INDIVIDUAL
DATA) are transferred from the “media having the data backed up”, the “HD (FTP server)”
and the “Compact Flash Card” in order named.

MD-30
3.4 Startup Process of the Controller Unit and (4) Discharge a high voltage relay to make it discharged.
FPD (5) Home-position the subscanning mechanism.
Upon turning ON the power of the controller unit, the controller unit and the FPD are (6) Perform initial checks of the AEC firmware (communication check,
started up in the following sequence. version check and AEC sensor check).
(1) The M/B BIOS boots up, and sets various controller registers. (7) Perform initial checks of the PTC firmware (communication check,
version check, power failure check, and time setting).
(2) Upon completion of the BIOS processing, the software program is
loaded from the Compact Flash Card. (8) Check the PTC temperature adjustment conditions.
Controller unit
- Check if an error occurs while the controller unit power is turned OFF.
- Retrieve the temperature regulation log of the EEPROM of the PTC board from
Compact Flash Card M/B DRAM the controller unit, and store in the HD (FTP server).
IPL IPL
(9) Make network communication with the AWS.
RTOS
RTOS
Configuration setting
Network setting
(IP address, etc.)
RU application
Log file RU application
*1
AWS
HD (FTP server)
Log file
DRMS2029.ai
*1: If a log file cannot be stored in the HD (FTP server) due to a failure in communication
or the like at the previous bootup, the file is transferred to the HD (FTP server).
(3) Upon completion of the startup and initialization of the software, the
controller unit and FPD hardware are initialized.
- Check mounting of the MPI51A board.
- Check mounting of the SND51B board.
- Check mounting of the CPS51B board (*).
- Initialize the CPS51B board (*) (load the micro program from the Compact
Flash Card to the DSP memory on the CPS board).
- Initialize the ASIC/ADC board/TRC board.
(*): CPS51C board for use in the FDR-1000DRLZ

MD-31
3.5 FDR-1000DRSZ/FDR-1000DRLZ Shutdown
Process
The information stored upon shutdown contains only the “log”.
(1) Press the system OFF button of the control pad (when the system OFF
button of the control pad is pressed, the controller unit is notified of a
signal indicating the power OFF).
(2) Make determination as to shutdown.
Whether the controller unit and the FPD are idle or busy is determined, and the
shutdown process takes place only when the controller unit and the FPD are idle.
If busy, the shutdown process takes place after it becomes idle.
(3) Home-position the subscanning mechanism.
(4) Turn OFF the scanner reading LED.
(5) Turn OFF the high voltage.
(6) Turn OFF the erasure light.
(7) Store the log information.
The error log, trace log, operation log and correction log are stored in the HD
(FTP server). If they cannot be stored on the FTP server due to communication
failures or the like, temporarily store in the Compact Flash Card.
(8) The process terminates.

MD-32
4. Electrical-Related Information  Controller Unit
MIF51A board
4.1 Information on Board Locations MPI51A board IND51A board

CPS51B board (*)
 Elevation Stand/Swivel Arm
CPU51A board
(motherboard)
PAT51A board
MFI board XIF51A board CFI51A board
(rear of
the swivel arm)
NFB51A board
CBA board Power supply
CBS board
DRMS2017.ai
DRMS2021.ai
Part name Description
Part name Description Power supply Supplies the DC power to the exposure unit/controller unit.
CBS board Refer to "n CBS Board". MIF51A board Communicates with the X-ray source.
CBA board Refer to "n CBA Board". MPI51A board - Control interface between mechanics and sensors in the FPD.
- Interface for acquiring image data from the FPD.
MFI board Supplies the power to the X-ray tube.
CPS51B board (*) Image processing by DSP
XIF51A board I/F communication relay board between the X-ray device and the RU
CFI51A board
CPU51A board RU control
(motherboard)
PAT51A board Distributes the DC power to the FPD/controller unit.
NFB5A board Power supply noise filter
IND51A board Power indication lamp
(*): The FDR-1000DRSZ is equipped with two CPS51B boards, and the FDR-
1000DRLZ is equipped with three CPS51C boards.

MD-33
 FPD  CBS Board
 LED lit information
SND51B board
V1008/bit 1 Description
TRC51A board S Controller board stand
B Boot
PTC51A board V1040/bit 2 Description

1 Initialization
2 Initialization
DRMS2018.ai
3 Initialization ready
Part name Description 4 Reset
SND51B board Mechanics and sensor control 5 Exposure ready, 48 V and 400 V switches are ON.
TRC51A board Image signal transfer 6 Preparing
PTC51A board - FAN drive control 7 Exposure
- Temperature regulation control
- Input to the temperature sensor C Failure
ADC51A board (*) Digital conversion of analog image signals
AEC51A board (*) Monitoring X-ray dose by the AEC sensor LED (V1008)
TDB51A board (*) Input to the temperature sensor
ERS51A board (*) Erasure of remaining device
*: Not shown
LED (V1040)
CBS board
DRMS2047.ai

MD-34
 CBA Board LED (V1040)
 LED lit information
A Controller board stand
B Boot
1 Initialization
2 Initialization
3 Initialization ready LED (V1008)
4 Reset
Switch (S2)
5 Exposure ready, 48 V and 400 V switches are ON.
6 Preparing
7 Exposure
C Failure
 mAs measurement
Name Description Value 1: ON
Open/close switch for the mAs meter measurement 2: OFF (default)
circuit. Set to ON when the mAs value is to be
mA test switch measured in the CBA board by means of the OFF CBA board DRMS2048.ai
mAs meter. The setting gets effective when the

mammographic stand is restarted.

MD-35
5. Interlock Mechanisms and  Interlock for Swivel Arm Elevation (Machine Protection)
The interlock shuts the power to the swivel arm motor lift to stop the swivel arm
Operations moving up/down for the purpose of protecting the machine under the following
conditions:
- The swivel arm reaches the uppermost point while moving up.
 Turning OFF/ON of Interlock Switches - The swivel arm reaches the lowermost point while moving down.
Interlock switches of the machine employ a normally-open-type (NO) circuit which is
closed (turned ON) by pressing the actuator and a normally-closed-type (NC) circuit  Interlock target
which is opened (turned OFF) by pressing the actuator. Swivel arm motor lift
 NO (normally-open-type) interlock switches  Interlock switches
The following interlock switches have their electric circuits closed (turned ON) when - Swivel arm elevation upper-limit switch
the actuator is pressed. The electric circuits keep open (turned OFF) without the - Swivel arm elevation lower-limit switch
actuator pressed.
Example of interlock switch connection upper-limit switch
Actuator
NC
NO
COM Swivel arm elevation
FRAH1606.EPS lower-limit switch
 NC (normally-closed-type) interlock switches

The following interlock switches have their electric circuits opened (turned OFF) when
the actuator is pressed. The electric circuits keep closed (turned ON) without the
actuator pressed.
Example of interlock switch connection
Actuator
NC
NO
COM
FRAH1607.EPS
Swivel arm motor lift
DRMS2036.ai

MD-36
 Interlock for Swivel Arm Rotation (Machine Protection)
The interlock shuts the power to the swivel arm motor rotate to stop the rotation of the
swivel arm for the purpose of protecting the machine when the swivel arm reaches the
180°position.
 Interlock target
Swivel arm motor rotate
 Interlock switch
- Swivel arm rotation limit switch
Swivel arm rotation

limit switch
Swivel arm motor rotate
DRMS2037.ai

MD-37
BLANK PAGE

MD-38
BLANK PAGE

MD-39
BLANK PAGE

Control Sheet
FDR MS-1000
Service Manual
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of

Parts (MC)

MC-1
1. Precautions for Check, WARNING
Replacement, and Adjustment Be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard to turn
OFF the power of the mammographic stand, instead of turning OFF the main
- In this volume, descriptions are omitted regarding components that do not require circuit breaker. This is because your fingers might touch the terminals of the
special attention or adjustment during their removal/reinstallation. For removal power supply cable and get an electric shock as the main circuit breaker of the
procedures for such components, refer to the Service Parts List Volume. mammographic stand is close to the terminal block of the power supply unit.
- When performing check/replacement/adjustment procedures on the machine, the Note that the power supply to the mammographic stand is not suspended only
following precautions should be observed.
by turning OFF the circuit breaker of the controller unit.
WARNINGS If you need to turn OFF the main circuit breaker of the mammographic stand for
some reason, turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard, and
l Be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard to make sure that the charge has been completely discharged, before you turn
avoid electric shock hazards.
l Electrical charge (residual charge) accumulated by a capacitor might remain OFF the main circuit breaker of the mammographic stand.
in a circuit after the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard is turned
OFF. Be sure to proceed with operations after you are sure that the charge Mammographic stand
has been completely discharged, due to fears of electric shock hazards.
You can check the discharge by the following indications. Main circuit breaker of
- “PSU MAINS” LED on the power supply unit (PSU): The green LED is unlit. the mammographic stand
Terminal
block
Terminals of power
supply cable
[Check] DRMS4259 ai
LED (PSU MAINS)

WARNING/CAUTION
DRMS4228.ai
- LED on the MFI board: The yellow LED is unlit.

Observe the warnings and cautions described in the "Safety Precautions".
MFI board
[Check] LED
DRMS4229 ai
019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual MC-1

MC-2
u INSTRUCTION u
CAUTIONS Some of the illustrations in this volume contain check/adjustment and half-punch
indicators as needed.
- When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. For removal and reinstallation, perform the procedures as instructed by such
If your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage
electronic components on the board. indicators.
- Check/Adjustment indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to check or adjust the
- When servicing a board, do not apply force to the center of the board or bend
installation location when the part or component
the board while holding both sides of the board. If the board is bent or force
removed is to be reinstalled. This indicator is placed in
is applied to its center, a crack may occur on a soldered connection, resulting
in a failure in its connection.
CHECK the illustration that depicts the procedures for
removing/installing the parts or components.
- When servicing a board, do not touch connector pins mounted on the board When you see this indicator in an illustration, see
with bare hands. " Check/Adjustment Procedures" or " CHECK" in a
- Never remove the red-painted screws. later section.
- Half-punch indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to align the half-punches
when installing the parts or components. However,
CAUTION it is not indicated for the half-punches for improving
ease of assembly or preventing erroneous assembly
Do not rotate the swivel arm continuously for more than 24 seconds. When it procedures.
need be rotated continuously, take an interval of 23 seconds or longer after the
arm is rotated for 24 seconds. Otherwise, the motor driver might get damaged. u INSTRUCTIONS u
- The yellow-painted screws require adjustments when components are reinstalled.
When reinstalling the components, follow the check/adjustment procedures.
- Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power supply
cable and additional protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with
retaining screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws
removed for servicing purposes are restored to states existing upon installation.
After the parts and retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned states,
follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining
screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
u INSTRUCTION u
Do not put items which might scratch the carbon cover (exposure stand), (such as
tools, screws and removed components). A scratched carbon cover might result in
abnormal images.

MC-3
u NOTES u
- Make exposures at intervals, considering characteristics of the X-ray tube. If
exposures are continuously made without considering the intervals, it might be
impossible to make exposures due to the heated X-ray tube. If the X-ray tube gets
heated and the exposure cannot be made, it might take a long time until the X-ray
tube lowers to a usable temperature. Do not make more than 60 exposures for one
hour.
{Product Specifications: 1.2.1_FDR-1000DRSZ/FDR-1000DRLZ
Specifications_l Heating curve and cooling curve of the X-ray tube}
- Do not move up/down the swivel arm continuously for more than 16 seconds. When
it need be moved up/down continuously, take an interval of 60 seconds or longer
after the arm is moved up/down for 16 seconds. Otherwise, an error might be
resulted and the machine might stop. In case the machine stops, restart it.
- Do not put in/out the grid continuously. When it need be put in/out continuously,
take an interval of 90 seconds or longer. Otherwise, a collimator error (irradiation
lamp heat error) might be resulted and the machine might stop. In case the machine
stops, restart it.
- Do not move up/down the compression plate continuously for more than 30
seconds. When it need be moved up/down continuously, take an interval of 2
minutes or longer after the plate is moved up/down for 30 seconds. Otherwise,
a collimator error (irradiation lamp heat error) might be resulted and the machine
might stop. In case the machine stops, restart it.
u NOTE u
When the mammographic stand is not used for a week or longer, carry out aging. The
aging can stabilize the output of X-rays and prevent deterioration of the tube.
{Operation Manual}

MC-4
2. Covers
2.1 Swivel Arm Covers

n Cover Removal Procedures (1/2)
 Location of Covers
0{MC:2.1.1_Swivel Arm Top Cover}
Swivel arm top cover
0{MC:2.1.2_Swivel Arm Lower Cover}
Swivel arm left-hand
side cover 0{MC:2.1.3_Swivel Arm Left-Hand Side Cover}
0{MC:2.1.4_Swivel Arm Right-Hand Side Cover}
Swivel arm left- 0{MC:2.1.5_FPD Lower Cover} (*1)

hand front cover
Compression unit
0{MC:2.1.6_FPD Left-Hand Cover (Left-Hand Armrest)}
front cover
Swivel arm
0{MC:2.1.7_FPD Right-Hand Cover (Right-Hand Armrest)}
lower cover Compression unit
side cover 0{MC:2.1.8_Carbon Cover}
FPD left-hand cover 0{MC:2.1.9_Compression Unit Left-Hand Side Cover}
(left-hand armrest)
0{MC:2.1.10_Swivel Arm Left-Hand Front Cover}
0{MC:2.1.11_Compression Unit Right-Hand Side

Cover}
Carbon cover
0{MC:2.1.12_Swivel Arm Right-Hand Front Cover}
Swivel arm right-
FPD lower cover hand front cover Swivel arm right- *1: The FPD lower cover can be removed alone.
FPD right-hand hand side cover
cover (right-hand armrest) DRMS4061.ai

MC-5
n Cover Removal Procedures (2/2)
Shown below is a standard flow for removing the swivel arm unit cover.
START A B C
(1) Swivel arm top cover (4) Swivel arm right-hand (7) FPD right-hand cover (10) Swivel arm left-hand
side cover (right-hand armrest) front cover
(1) (10)
(7)
(4)
(11) Compression unit right-hand

(2) Swivel arm lower cover (5) FPD lower cover (8) Carbon cover side cover
(11)
(5)
(2)
(8)
(6) FPD left-hand cover (9) Compression unit left-hand (12) Swivel arm right-hand
(3) Swivel arm left-hand side cover (left-hand armrest) side cover front cover
(9)
(6)
(3) (12)
A B C END
DRMS4138.ai

MC-6
2.1.1 Swivel Arm Top Cover (6) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard.
WARNINGS
 Removal Procedures
l Be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard to
(1) Rotate the swivel arm to the 0° position. avoid electric shock hazards.
l Electrical charge (residual charge) accumulated by a capacitor might remain
(2) Lower the swivel arm to its lowermost position. in a circuit after the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard is turned
OFF. Be sure to proceed with operations after you are sure that the charge
(1) #1 [Rotate]/ has been completely discharged, due to fears of electric shock hazards.
(2) #1 [Lower] You can check the discharge by the following indications.
Swivel arm - “PSU MAINS” LED on the power supply unit (PSU): The green LED is unlit.
(7) Remove the compression plate and the face guard.
#1
[Remove]
Face guard
DRMS4139.ai
(3) Turn OFF the power of the AWS.

(4) Press the system OFF button on the control pad. #2
[Remove]
(5) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the controller unit. Compression plate
DRMS4140.ai

MC-7
(8) Remove the swivel arm top cover.  Reinstallation Procedures
[Remove] Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
M5 (x3)
Swivel arm
top cover
DRMS4141.ai

MC-8
2.1.2 Swivel Arm Lower Cover  Removal Procedures
n Preparation (1) Remove the swivel arm lower cover.
You need remove the following cover before removing the swivel arm lower cover. #2
[Remove] DETAIL A
Swivel arm top cover M5x60 (x3) A
{MC:2.1.1_Swivel Arm Top Cover}
#1. Swivel arm top cover
#1 [Disconnect]
Protective ground
wire terminal
Swivel arm lower cover
#2 DETAIL B
[Remove]
B M5x60 (x3)
#1 [Disconnect]
Protective ground
wire terminal
CHECK1 #3
Control panel [Release]
DRMS4304.ai Swivel arm
*: The cover which need be removed beforehand is colored. lower cover
Control panel
#4 #4
[Disconnect] [Disconnect]
Connector Connector
(MBL X1 W105) (MBL X1 W106)
DRMS4266.ai

MC-9
 Reinstallation Procedures  Check/Adjustment Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. When putting on the swivel arm lower cover, exercise care not to press the pin on
the swivel arm lower cover against the DC cable connected with the collimator. If
the cover is fixed while the DC cable is pressed against the pin, the connector of the
DC cable might be disconnected. If the machine is booted up while the DC cable
connector is disconnected or incorrectly connected, a failure in DC cable connection
might be recognized, and no home positioning of the collimator takes place, resulting
in no reaction.
Pin
X2_24V DC cable
Collimator rear
Collimator
DRMS4340.ai

MC-10
2.1.3 Swivel Arm Left-Hand Side Cover  Removal Procedures
n Preparation (1) Remove the swivel arm left-hand side cover.
You need remove the following covers before removing the swivel arm left-hand side
cover.

{MC:2.1.2_Swivel Arm Lower Cover}
#2
#1. Swivel arm top cover [Remove]
Swivel arm left-
hand side cover
#2. Swivel arm

lower cover
#1
[Remove]
M5
DRMS4303.ai
*: The covers which need be removed beforehand are colored.

DRMS4143.
 Reinstallation Procedures
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

MC-11
2.1.4 Swivel Arm Right-Hand Side Cover  Removal Procedures
n Preparation (1) Remove the swivel arm right-hand side cover.
You need remove the following covers before removing the swivel arm right-hand side
cover.

A
Swivel arm left-hand side cover
{MC:2.1.3_Swivel Arm Left-Hand Side Cover} #2
[Remove]
#3. Swivel arm #1. Swivel arm top cover Swivel arm right-hand
left-hand side cover side cover
DETAIL A
#2. Swivel arm

lower cover
#1
[Remove]
M5x10 (x2)
W5 (x2)
DRMS4302.ai
*: The covers which need be removed beforehand are colored. DRMS4144.ai

MC-12
2.1.5 FPD Lower Cover  Reinstallation Procedures
REFERENCE Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
The FPD lower cover can be removed alone.
(1) Remove the FPD lower cover.
A
DETAIL A
FPD lower cover
[Remove]
M3x6 (x3)
Bind screw
DRMS4181.ai

MC-13
2.1.6 FPD Left-Hand Cover (Left-Hand Armrest)  Removal Procedures
 Preparation (1) Remove the FPD left-hand cover (left-hand armrest).
You need remove the following covers before removing the FPD left-hand cover (left-
hand armrest).
Swivel arm left-hand side cover A

FPD lower cover
{MC:2.1.3_Swivel Arm Left-Hand Side Cover}
{MC:2.1.5_FPD Lower Cover}
#1 [Remove]
#3. Swivel arm #1. Swivel arm top cover Q4x12/
left-hand side cover Cover (left) W4
B
DETAIL A DETAIL B FPD left-hand cover
(left-hand armrest)
CHECK1
#2. Swivel arm
lower cover
#3
[Remove]
TP4x6 (x2)
#2
[Remove]
BR4x25
#4. FPD lower cover

DRMS4159.ai
DRMS4301.ai

MC-14
 Reinstallation Procedures 2.1.7 FPD Right-Hand Cover (Right-Hand Armrest)
 Preparation
 Check/Adjustment Procedures You need remove the following covers before removing the FPD right-hand cover
Be sure to leave no gap between the FPD right- and left-hand covers (right- and left- (right-hand armrest).
hand armrests) and the FPD carbon cover when putting on the FPD right- and left-
hand covers (right- and left-hand armrests). Otherwise, dust might enter the FPD, Swivel arm top cover
resulting in abnormal images.

Carbon cover
Swivel arm right-hand side cover
FPD lower cover

{MC:2.1.4_Swivel Arm Right-Hand Side Cover}

#3. Swivel arm
left-hand side cover
FPD left-hand cover No gap No gap FPD right-hand cover
Carbon cover
#2. Swivel arm
lower cover #4. Swivel arm
right-hand side cover
No gap
DRMS4341.ai
#5. FPD lower cover
DRMS4300.ai

MC-15
 Removal Procedures  Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Remove the FPD right-hand cover (right-hand armrest). Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
 Check/Adjustment Procedures
Be sure to leave no gap between the FPD right- and left-hand covers (right- and left-
hand armrest) and the FPD carbon cover when putting on the FPD right- and left-hand
covers (right- and left-hand armrests). Otherwise, dust might enter the FPD, resulting
in abnormal images.
A
Carbon cover
#1 [Remove]
Q4x12/ Cover (right)
B W4
DETAIL A DETAIL B CHECK1

FPD right-hand cover FPD left-hand cover No gap No gap FPD right-hand cover
(right-hand armrest)
Carbon cover
#2
[Remove]
BR4x25
#3
[Remove] No gap
TP4x6 (x2)
DRMS4160.ai
DRMS4341.ai

MC-16
2.1.8 Carbon Cover  Preparation
CAUTION You need remove the following covers before removing the carbon cover.
After the carbon cover is removed, the exposure plane and the chest wall plane Swivel arm top cover
of the FPD are exposed. Never touch the following regions of the FPD when the
carbon cover is not put on. Swivel arm lower cover
- Do not push the fingers against the exposure plane or touch it. If the
exposure plane is strongly pushed by fingers or the like, it might get Swivel arm left-hand side cover
damaged, resulting in abnormal images.
- Do not push the fingers against the chest wall plane or touch it. If the chest Swivel arm right-hand side cover
wall plane is strongly pushed by fingers or the like, it might get damaged,
resulting in noise in images. FPD lower cover
- Do not peel off the aluminum tape from the chest wall plane. Otherwise,
countermeasures against radio waves will not work. FPD left-hand cover (left-hand armrest)
- Do not remove the five shock absorbers from the chest wall plane. Otherwise,
the carbon cover comes into direct contact with the chest wall plane, resulting FPD right-hand cover (right-hand armrest)
in abnormal images. Never touch the FPD exposure plane and the wall chest {MC:2.1.6_FPD Left-Hand Cover (Left-Hand Armrest)}
plane. {MC:2.1.7_FPD Right-Hand Cover (Right-Hand Armrest)}
DETAIL A #3. Swivel arm #1. Swivel arm top cover
Do not touch the
exposure plane.
#2. Swivel arm

B right-hand side cover
A #6. FPD left-hand cover
DETAIL B (left-hand armrest)
Do not peel or break the

aluminum tape.
#7. FPD right-hand cover

Do not touch the #5. FPD lower cover (right-hand armrest) DRMS4299.ai
chest wall plane. *: The covers which need be removed are colored.
Do not
touch the shock absorbers.
DRMS4351 ai

MC-17
 Removal Procedures (1) Remove the filter and the filter cover from the carbon cover.
CAUTION
Carbon cover
Exercise care not to touch, by your hands or body (clothing), the exposure
plane and the chest wall plane of the FPD (including the shock absorbers and
the aluminum tape) when putting on/off the carbon cover.
DETAIL A
Do not touch the
exposure plane.
Filter cover/
filter
B
A
DETAIL B
Do not peel or break the

aluminum tape.
[Remove]
Do not touch the Bind screw (M3x6)
chest wall plane.
Do not DRMS4182.ai
touch the shock absorbers.

DRMS4351 ai

MC-18
(2) Remove the carbon cover. (3) Temporarily place the carbon cover just removed on the shock
absorber or a corrugated fiberboard sheet.
CAUTION
Exercise care not to damage the exposure plane of the carbon cover or allow
dust or dirt to attach inside the cover, when temporarily placing the carbon
cover. If the dust or dirt attaches to the cover, abnormal images might result.
Do not scratch the

#1 exposure plane.
[Disconnect]
Connector
CHECK1
A
DETAIL A Shock absorber or corrugated
#4 fiberboard sheet
#3 [Remove]
[Remove] [Temporarily place]
Collar TP3x6 (x10) Carbon cover
DRMS4293.ai
TP3x12
Collar
Collar
#2
Collar [Remove]
Carbon cover TP3x12
DRMS4162.ai

MC-19
 Check/Adjustment Procedures 2.1.9 Compression Unit Left-Hand Side Cover
l CHECK 1  Preparation
Before retaining the carbon cover, make sure that: You need remove the following covers before removing the compression unit left-hand
- Marked positions on the carbon cover and the FPD align with each other. side cover.
- There is no gap between the carbon cover and the FPD frame.

A
FPD lower cover

Carbon cover A FPD left-hand cover (left-hand armrest)
DETAIL A FPD right-hand cover (right-hand armrest)

GOOD NO GOOD
Carbon cover
Carbon cover mark Carbon cover mark {MC:2.1.8_Carbon Cover}
#3. Swivel arm #1. Swivel arm top cover
FPD mark FPD mark #2. Swivel arm

#6. FPD left-hand cover

(left-hand armrest)
#8. Carbon cover

Properly installed with no gap Improperly installed with a gap left
DRMS4322.ai
#5. FPD lower cover (right-hand armrest)
DRMS4297.ai

MC-20
REFERENCE
The compression unit (W11G10501290) and the compression unit left- and right-hand
side covers (W11G10415618/W11G10415619) have been changed in design, and a
shape of the screw retaining part is modified in the progress of production.
In putting on a new compression unit cover on an old compression unit, their screw
parts interfere with each other.
* The old compression unit cover can be put on the new compression unit.
[Items to be prepared]
- Large nippers capable of cutting the SUS
- Hexagon socket head cap screw (Q4x12)
- *The new compression unit cover has no screws. The screw is necessary to retain
the right- and left-hand side covers.
Hexagon socket
head cap screw 2
(Q4x12)
[Action to cope with]
For retaining covers (Nos.4-11 and - Cut off the portion indicated in the figure below by the nippers or the like to remove
4-18
-12) the retaining screw part of the old compression unit. This modification allows the
Plain washer (W4) 2 new compression unit cover to be put on.
[State of interference]
- If the new compression unit cover is put on the old compression unit, the “retaining
screw part on the old compression unit” interferes with the “retaining screw part on
the new compression unit”, and the cover cannot be put as a result.
* Since the new compression unit cover is designed to retain the right and left
covers by together tightening the screws, no problem occurs if the retaining screw
part of the old compression unit is removed.

MC-21
2.1.10 Swivel Arm Left-Hand Front Cover  Removal Procedures
 Preparation (1) Remove the swivel arm left-hand front cover.
You need remove the following covers before removing the swivel arm left-hand front
cover.
Swivel arm lower cover A

Swivel arm right-hand side cover Swivel arm

left-hand front cover
FPD lower cover
DETAIL A
FPD left-hand cover (left-hand armrest)
#2
FPD right-hand cover (right-hand armrest) [Remove]
Q5x8
Carbon cover
Compression unit left-hand side cover

{MC:2.1.9_Compression Unit Left-Hand Side Cover}
#9. Compression unit

#2. Swivel arm
lower cover
#4. Swivel arm
right-hand side cover #1
[Remove]
Q5x8
(left-hand armrest)
DRMS4164.ai
#8. Carbon cover Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

#5. FPD lower cover
(right-hand armrest) DRMS4298.ai

MC-22
2.1.11 Compression Unit Right-Hand Side Cover  Removal Procedures
REFERENCE
 Preparation
You need remove the following covers before removing the compression unit right- You can remove the protective cover by pressing the snap-fit with a thin-blade
hand side cover. screwdriver or the like.
Swivel arm top cover (1) Remove the compression unit right-hand side cover.
Compression unit
Swivel arm left-hand side cover right-hand side cover
DETAIL A
FPD lower cover #2
[Disconnect]
FPD left-hand cover (left-hand armrest) Protective
ground wire
FPD right-hand cover (right-hand armrest) terminal
A
Carbon cover
{MC:2.1.8_Carbon Cover} DETAIL B
#1. Swivel arm top cover #4
#3. Swivel arm [Disconnect]
left-hand side cover Connector
B
(MBL X1 W108)
#3 [Remove]
Protective cover
#2. Swivel arm C
lower cover #4. Swivel arm DETAIL C
#5
#6. FPD left-hand cover [Disconnect]
(left-hand armrest) #1
Connector
[Open]
(D904 X6
Compression unit
W143)
#8. Carbon cover DRMS4184.ai
#5. FPD lower cover (right-hand armrest) Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
DRMS4297.ai

MC-23
2.1.12 Swivel Arm Right-Hand Front Cover  Removal Procedures
 Preparation (1) Remove the temperature adjustment unit.
{MC:3.2_Temperature Adjustment Unit}
You need remove the following covers before removing the swivel arm right-hand front
cover. (2) Remove the swivel arm right-hand front cover.

A
FPD lower cover
FPD left-hand cover (left-hand armrest)

Swivel arm
FPD right-hand cover (right-hand armrest) right-hand front cover
Carbon cover
DETAIL A
Compression unit right-hand side cover
{MC:2.1.11_Compression Unit Right-Hand Side Cover}
#9. Compression
unit right-hand
side cover
#2. Swivel arm [Remove]
lower cover #4. Swivel arm right-
Q5x8
hand side cover
(left-hand armrest)
DRMS4165.ai
#8. Carbon cover Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

#5. FPD lower cover (right-hand armrest) DRMS4296.ai

MC-24
2.1.13 Compression Unit Front Cover
(1) Remove the compression unit.
{MC:3.5_Compression Unit}
(2) Remove the compression unit front cover.
#2
[Remove]
Compression unit
front cover
#1
[Remove]
M4x6 (x2)
Compression unit
DRMS4097.ai
(1) Reinstall the compression unit front cover.
(2) Reinstall the compression unit.

MC-25
2.2 Elevation Stand Covers
 Location of Covers
No. Name Refer to
4 1 Elevation stand top cover {MC:2.2.1_Elevation Stand Top Cover}
1
A 2 Elevation stand left-hand side
cover
{MC:2.2.2_Elevation Stand Left-Hand
Side Cover}
2
3 Elevation stand right-hand {MC:2.2.3_Elevation Stand Right-Hand
side cover Side Cover}
4 Elevation stand rear cover {MC:2.2.4_Elevation Stand Rear Cover}
5 Display cover {MC:2.2.5_Display Cover}
6 Base plate cover {MC:2.2.6_Base Plate Cover}
7 Elevation stand inner cover {MC:2.2.7_Elevation Stand Inner Cover
(lower) (Lower)}
8 Elevation stand inner cover {MC:2.2.8_Elevation Stand Inner Cover
(upper) (Upper)}
5
3
6
DETAIL A
DRMS4062.ai

MC-26
2.2.1 Elevation Stand Top Cover 2.2.2 Elevation Stand Left-Hand Side Cover
 Removal Procedures  Removal Procedures

(1) Remove the elevation stand top cover. (1) Remove the elevation stand top cover.
{MC:2.2.1_Elevation Stand Top Cover}
A
(2) Remove the elevation stand left-hand side cover.
#1 [Lift]/
#2 [Open]
Elevation stand left-hand side cover
#3
[Disconnect]
Connector (emergncy stop switch)
DETAIL A
[Remove]
Q5x8 (x4)
DRMS4261.ai
Elevation stand
top cover  Reinstallation Procedures
DRMS4260.ai

MC-27
2.2.3 Elevation Stand Right-Hand Side Cover 2.2.4 Elevation Stand Rear Cover

(1) Remove the elevation stand top cover. (1) Remove the elevation stand left-hand side cover.
{MC:2.2.1_Elevation Stand Top Cover} {MC:2.2.2_Elevation Stand Left-Hand Side Cover}
(2) Remove the elevation stand right-hand side cover. (2) Remove the elevation stand right-hand side cover.
#1 [Lift]/ {MC:2.2.3_Elevation Stand Right-Hand Side Cover}
#2 [Open] (3) Remove the elevation stand rear cover.
Elevation stand right-hand side cover
#3 Elevation stand
[Disconnect]
Connector [Remove]
(emergncy stop switch) Q6x25 (x6)
Rear cover
DRMS4262.ai
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. DRMS4342.ai

MC-28
2.2.5 Display Cover 2.2.6 Base Plate Cover

(1) Remove the base plate cover. (1) Remove the elevation stand left-hand side cover.
{MC:2.2.6_Base Plate Cover} {MC:2.2.2_Elevation Stand Left-Hand Side Cover}
(2) Remove the display cover assembly. (2) Remove the elevation stand right-hand side cover.
(3) Remove the display cover. {MC:2.2.3_Elevation Stand Right-Hand Side Cover}
#3 (3) Remove the base plate cover.

[Remove]
Display board
Elevation
stand
#2
[Remove]
M2.5x6 (x4)
(self-tapping screw)
#1
[Disconnect]
Connector Display cover
(DYS1 X1 W122) DRMS4263.ai
[Remove]
 Reinstallation Procedures Base plate cover
DRMS4343.ai

MC-29
2.2.7 Elevation Stand Inner Cover (Lower) 2.2.8 Elevation Stand Inner Cover (Upper)

(1) Remove the elevation stand left-hand side cover. (1) Remove the elevation stand inner cover (lower).
{MC:2.2.2_Elevation Stand Left-Hand Side Cover} {MC:2.2.7_Elevation Stand Inner Cover (Lower)}
(2) Remove the elevation stand inner cover (lower). (2) Remove the elevation stand inner cover (upper).
[Loosen]
M4x6 (x14)
[Loosen]
Elevation stand M4x6 (x14)
inner cover (lower)
Elevation stand
inner cover (upper)
DRMS4264 ai DRMS4265.ai
 Reinstallation Procedures  Reinstallation Procedures

Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

MC-30
3. Swivel Arm Unit n Removing the Covers
(1) Remove the covers.
- Swivel arm top cover
3.1 FPD - Swivel arm lower cover
- Swivel arm left-hand side cover
3.1.1 Removal of the FPD - Swivel arm right-hand side cover
- FPD lower cover
CAUTIONS - FPD left-hand cover (left-hand armrest)
- When mounting/dismounting the FPD, two or more persons should cooperate - FPD right-hand cover (right-hand armrest)
to do so. - Carbon cover
- Always use the handles when mounting/dismounting the FPD. Exercise care - Compression unit left-hand side cover
not to touch, by your hands or body (clothing), the exposure plane and the - Compression unit right-hand side cover
chest wall plane of the FPD (including the shock absorbers and the aluminum - Swivel arm left-hand front cover
tape). If a part other than the handles needs to be held, hold the frame of the - Swivel arm right-hand front cover
FPD (see the figure). {MC:2.1_Swivel Arm Covers}
DETAIL A #3. Swivel arm #1. Swivel arm top cover

Hold here left-hand side cover
Do not touch the
exposure plane. #9/10.
#11. Swivel arm
left-hand front cover Compression
unit side covers
(right and left)
#2. Swivel arm
B right-hand side cover
A
(left-hand armrest)
DETAIL B
Exercise care not to break

the aluminum tape. #8. Carbon cover
#7. FPD right-hand cover #12. Swivel arm

#5. FPD lower cover right-hand front cover
(right-hand armrest)
Do not touch the chest DRMS4294.ai
wall plane. * The covers to be removed are colored.

(2) Remove the FPD inner cover.
Do not touch the shock absorbers. {MC:3.1.6_FPD Inner Cover}
DRMS4267 ai

MC-31
n Disconnecting the Cable Connectors and Removing the Cable (2) Remove the cable retaining bracket (large).
Retaining Brackets A
(1) Remove the cable retaining bracket (small).
DETAIL A
Cable retaining
bracket (large)
DETAIL A Cable retaining [Remove]
bracket (small) TP3x6 (x5)
[Remove]
TP3x6 (x6)
Cable (SND5)
Cable (TRC7)
Cable (TRC1, CN10, SND9)
DRMS4066.ai
DRMS4065.ai

MC-32
(3) Disconnect the cable connectors (TRC7, SND5, TRC1, CN10, and n Removal of the Grid Guide
SND9).
(1) Remove the grid guides.
#1 #4
Connector Connector
(SND5) (CN10)
#3
[Disconnect]
Grid guide Grid Grid Grid guide
Connector
#2 (SND9) #5
Connector Connector
(TRC7) (TRC1)
DRMS4067.ai
#1 #2
[Remove] [Remove]
Spacer x2 Spacer x2
TP3x6 (x2) TP3x6 (x2)
DRMS4070 ai

MC-33
n Removal of the FPD (2) Remove the bolts from the right- and left-hand sides of the FPD.
(1) Loosen the bolts on the upper surface of the FPD (inside the sheet
metal). B
REFERENCE
The bolts to be accessed in this procedure are located inside the sheet metal.
Use an allen wrench to tighten or loosen the bolts.
Allen wrench
Round hole of the sheet metal
A
FPD
DETAIL A DETAIL B
Hole of the sheet metal

Hexagon socket head cap screw
DRMS4168.ai
#1 [Remove] #2 [Remove]
Q4x12 Q4x12
SW4 SW4
#1 #2 W4 W4
[Loosen] [Loosen]
DRMS4102.ai
M4x40 M4x40
FPD
DRMS4103.ai

MC-34
(3) Attach the handles. (4) Remove the bolts from the upper surface of the FPD.
A #1 [Remove] #2 [Remove]
A [Tighten] Q6x25 Q6x25
TP3x6 (x6) SW6 SW6
W6 W6
Handle
Handle
DETAIL A [Tighten]
TP3x6 (x3)
FPD
FPD
DRMS4071.ai
Handle
DRMS4169 ai

MC-35
(5) Remove the FPD while pulling out the coolant hose. n Temporarily Installing the FPD
u INSTRUCTION u
Store the FPD under the temperature and humidity conditions within the specified
range. If stored under the conditions out of the specified range, deterioration of the
machine might accelerate.
{Product Specifications:1.2.2_FPD Specifications}
[Pull out]
Coolant hose (1) Release the coolant hoses routed to the rear of the FPD downwardly
from the joint with the stand jig.
u INSTRUCTION u
You need release the coolant hoses from the joint with the stand jig before
mounting the FPD on the stand jig. Otherwise, the coolant hoses might be caught
between the FPD joint and the stand jig, resulting in damage.
[Remove]
FPD
#1
[Remove]
Clamp
DRMS4170.ai Joint
Joint
#2
[Release]
Coolant hose DRMS4171.ai

MC-36
(2) Mount the FPD on the stand jig. 3.1.2 Installing the FPD
Exercise care not to have the coolant hoses caught between the FPD joint and the
CAUTIONS
stand jig.
- When mounting/dismounting the FPD, two or more persons should cooperate
A to do so.
- Always use the handles when mounting/dismounting the FPD. Exercise care
not to touch, by your hands or body (clothing), the exposure plane and the
chest wall plane of the FPD (including the shock absorbers and the aluminum
tape). If a part other than the handles needs to be held, hold the frame of the
FPD (see the figure).
DETAIL A
Hold here
Do not touch the
Stand jig
exposure plane.
FPD
DETAIL A
B
A
DETAIL B
Joint
the aluminum tape.
Do not touch the chest

Joint
wall plane.
Exercise care not to have
the hoses caught.
DRMS4172.ai
Do not touch the shock absorbers.
DRMS4267 ai

MC-37
n Installing the FPD (2) Remove the FPD from the stand jig.
[Remove]
(1) Loosen the screws which retain the grid assembly. FPD
REFERENCE
The position of installing the grid assembly is defined with the half-punches of the
FPD as reference and defined by pressing the entire assembly against the FPD.
You need loosen the retaining screws of the grid assembly beforehand.
DETAIL A DETAIL B
Stand jig
DRMS4307.ai
#1 [Loosen] #2 [Loosen]
M6 M6
DRMS4101.ai

MC-38
(3) Restore the coolant hoses which were released when temporarily (4) Insert the FPD into the swivel arm while routing the coolant hoses.
installing the FPD. [Insert]
u NOTE u FPD
Route the thicker coolant hose outside when retaining the hoses. If the FPD is
mounted on the swivel arm while the hose is not correctly routed, the hose might
be pressed by the frame of the swivel arm to degrade the circulation function of
the coolant.
FPD
A
[Route]
DETAIL A Coolant hose
DETAIL A
#1 A
[Route]
Coolant hose Hose (thin)
Hose (thick)
Hose (thin)
DRMS4309.ai
Hose (thin)
#2
#2 [Retain] Hose (thick)
Hose (thin) [Retain] Clamp
Clamp
DRMS4308.ai

MC-39
(5) Push the FPD against the frame of the swivel arm, observing the frame (6) Check to make sure that there is no gap between the frames of the
as reference. swivel arm and the FPD. Fix the upper surface of the FPD with the
bolts.
Top view
A [Insert]
B FPD
#1
DETAIL A DETAIL B [Verify]
No gap between the frames of the swivel arm and the FPD
B
FPD
Frame of the Frame of the A

swivel arm Frame of the FPD Frame of the FPD swivel arm
(reference) (reference)
DRMS4310.ai DETAIL A DETAIL B
#2 [Tighten] #2 [Tighten]
Q6x25/SW6/W6 Q6x25/SW6/W6
(Required torque value: 10 N・m) (Required torque value: 10 N・m)
DRMS4311.ai

MC-40
(7) Remove the handles. (9) Fix the upper surface of the FPD (inside the sheet metal) with the
bolts.
[Remove]
TP3x6 (x6) REFERENCE
Handle Use an Allen wrench to tighten or loosen the bolts.
Allen wrench
Handle
DRMS4312.ai
(8) Fix the right- and left-hand sides of the FPD with the bolts. Hole of the sheet metal
Hexagon socket head cap screw
B
DRMS4168.ai
[Tighten] [Tighten]
M4x40 M4x40
A
FPD
DETAIL A DETAIL B
[Tighten]
[Tighten]
Q4x12
Q4x12
SW4/W4
SW4/W4
DRMS4313 ai
DRMS4314.ai

MC-41
(10) Fix the grid assembly to align the half-punches on the FPD. n Attaching the Grid Guide
Retain with the screws while pushing the grid assembly against the FPD.
(1) Attach the grid guide.
DETAIL A DETAIL B
u NOTE u
Surely insert the grid into the groove of the grid guide.
#2 [Push] #2 [Push]
Grid assembly Grid assembly
M6 M6
#1 #1
Grid [Insert] [Insert]
assembly Grid guide Grid guide
A
B
#1 [Check] Half-punch of the FPD #1 [Check] Half-punch of the FPD
#2 #2
[Tighten] Grid Grid Spacer x2
[Tighten]
TP3x6 (x2) Spacer x2 TP3x6 (x2)
DRMS4320.ai
Frame of the grid Frame of the grid

DRMS4315 ai

MC-42
n Connecting the Cable Connectors and Attaching the Cable (2) Attach the cable retaining bracket (large).
Retaining Brackets Surely hold the copper foil of the cables (TRC1, CN10 and SND9) with the cable
retaining bracket.
(1) Connect the cable connectors (TRC1, CN10, SND9, TRC7 and SND5) to
the FPD board. A
A FPD
DETAIL A
[Tighten]
DETAIL A TP3x6 (x5)
Hold the copper foil.
[Connect] Bracket (large)
Cable
connector
Cable
(TPC1, CN10, SND9)
#5 #3 #2
(SND5) (SND9) (CN10) DRMS4317.ai
#4 #1
(TRC7) (TRC1)
DRMS4316 ai

MC-43
(3) Attach the cable retaining bracket (small). n Putting on the FPD Inner Cover
Surely hold the copper foil of the cables (TRC7 and SND5) with the cable retaining
bracket. (1) Put on the FPD inner cover and connect the cable connectors of the
fan.
A u INSTRUCTION u
Never connect the connector of the FDR-1000DRSZ to the NFI7 (center
FPD connector). The fan will not rotate if the connector is not connected, as power is
not fed to the FDR-1000DRSZ connector (NFI7).
FPD inner cover
A #1
[Tighten]
TP3x6 (x28)
DETAIL A
Bracket (small) Hold the copper foil.
Cable
(SND5)
Cable
(TRC7)
DETAIL A #1 [Connect] Connectors

<FDR-1000DRSZ> <FDR-1000DRLZ>
FAN x2 MFI51A board FAN x3
[Tighten]
NFI3
TP3x6 (x6)
DRMS4318.ai
NFI7
NFI3
NFI5
NFI5
MFI51A board
Do not connect the connector of the
FDR-1000DRSZ to the NFI7
(center connector).
DRMS4319.ai

MC-44
n Checking the Grid Wire (6) Turn OFF the power of the AWS.
(1) Check the grid wire. (7) Press the system OFF button on the control pad.
{IN:18.10.1_Checking the Grid Wire} (8) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the controller unit.
(9) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard.
n Putting on the Swivel Arm Right- and Left-Front Covers
WARNINGS
REFERENCES
- You need put on the swivel arm right- and left-front covers before putting on the l Be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard to
carbon cover. The swivel arm right- and left-front covers cannot be put on after the avoid electric shock hazards.
carbon cover is put on. l Electrical charge (residual charge) accumulated by a capacitor might remain
- Set the swivel arm to the 0° position before putting on the swivel arm right- and left- in a circuit after the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard is turned
front covers. OFF.
Be sure to proceed with operations after you are sure that the charge has
(1) Turn ON the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard. been completely discharged, due to fears of electric shock hazards.
(2) Turn ON the circuit breaker of the controller unit. - “PSU MAINS” LED on the power supply unit (PSU): The green LED is unlit.
(3) Press the system start button on the control pad. - LED on the MFI board: The yellow LED is unlit.
(4) Turn ON the power of the AWS.

(5) Rotate the swivel arm to the 0° position.

MC-45
(10) Put on the swivel arm right-hand front cover. n Putting on the Carbon Cover
{MC:2.1.12_Swivel Arm Right-Hand Front Cover}
u INSTRUCTION u
(11) Put on the swivel arm left-hand front cover.
Check to make sure that no dirt or dust remains on the back of the carbon cover and
{MC:2.1.10_Swivel Arm Left-Hand Front Cover} on the exposure plane of the FPD before putting on the carbon cover. If some dirt
or dust is observed, remove them by means of a blower included in the standard
accessories. Never wipe off on the surface with a cloth or the like moistened with
ethanol. If a surface is soiled, clean it with a clean cloth moistened with water or a dry
cloth. Do not forcibly push the exposure plane when wiping off the exposure plane of
the FPD. The FPD might get damaged, resulting in abnormal images.
Back of the
carbon cover
Swivel arm
right-hand front cover
Swivel arm
left-hand front cover
Exposure plane
of the FPD
DRMS4337.ai Do not wipe with a cloth moistened Do not wipe with a cloth moistened
with ethanol. with ethanol.
DRMS4321.ai
u NOTE u
Check the grid, if necessary, before reinstalling the carbon cover.
REFERENCE
Set the swivel arm to the 0° position before putting on the carbon cover.

MC-46
(1) Put on the carbon cover. #4 [Tighten]
u INSTRUCTIONS u TP3x12 (x2)
Collar
- The carbon cover and the FPD frame are marked in the factory to visually
check if the carbon cover is properly put on. Align the marks when putting on
the carbon cover.
- Make sure that no gap remains between the carbon cover and the FPD frame
when putting on the carbon cover.
A #2 [Connect]
Carbon cover
cable connector
Collar
#1 [Insert]
Carbon cover
TP3x12 (x2) TP3x6 (x10) DRMS4323.ai
Carbon cover A
(2) Put the filter and the filter cover on the carbon cover.
DETAIL A
Carbon cover
GOOD NO GOOD
Carbon cover mark Carbon cover mark
Filter cover/filter
FPD mark FPD mark
[Tighten]
Bind screw
(M3x6)
DRMS4324.ai
Properly installed with no gap Improperly installed with a gap left

DRMS4322.ai

MC-47
n Installing the Temperature Adjustment Unit 12. Adjusting the irradiation field
(1) Mount the temperature adjustment unit.
{MC:3.2_Temperature Adjustment Unit} 13. Irradiation field dose calculation LUT adjustment
n Reinstalling the Covers

14. Adjusting the sensitivity variation correction factor LUT
(1) Put on all of the covers which have been removed.
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. 15. Checking the AEC accuracy
3.1.3 Replacing the FPD

16. Confirming the dose per exposure mode
n Operation Flowchart for Replacing the FPD
17. Backing up the machine-specific data
START
1. Removal of the FPD 18. Checking for image problems
END
2. Installing the new FPD
3. Changing the RU identification code registered in the AWS
4. Checking the grid position
5. Checking the compression thickness
6. Checking the compression pressure indication accuracy
7. Checking the continuity of the compression
8. Checking the collimator mounting angle
9. Version-updating the controller unit software
10. Restoring the machine-specific data of the FPD
11. FPD calibration

MC-48
n Removal of the FPD (3) Mount the cable retaining brackets (large and small).
(1) Remove the FPD. A

{MC:3.1.1_Removal of the FPD}
(2) Remove the handles.
Handle
[Remove]
TP3x6 (x6)
DETAIL A
#3 #1
[Mount] [Mount]
Cable retaining Cable retaining
bracket (small) bracket (large)
Handle
DRMS4173.ai
#4 #2
[Tighten] [Tighten]
TP3x6 (x6) TP3x6 (x5)
DRMS4174 ai

MC-49
(4) Put on the FPD inner cover. (5) Put on the carbon cover.
A #2 Collar #3
[Put] [Put]
TP3x12 TP3x6 (x10)
#1
[Put] Collar
FPD inner cover
TP3x6 (x28) Collar
#1
[Put]
Collar
TP3x12
DETAIL A #1 [Connect] Connectors Carbon cover
<FDR-1000DRSZ> <FDR-1000DRLZ> DRMS4176.ai
(6) Put on the filter and the filter cover.
[Tighten]
NFI3
Bind screw
NFI7 (M3x6) Filter/filter cover
NFI3
NFI5
NFI5
MFI51A board
DRMS4175 ai
DRMS4177.ai
(7) Remove the FPD from the stand jig, and temporarily place it on a
shock absorber or a corrugated fiberboard sheet.

MC-50
n Unpacking the New FPD n Installing the New FPD
(1) Unpack the package box and take out the FPD. (1) Remove the filter and the filter cover from the carbon cover.
{MC:3.1.4_Unpacking the FPD} [Remove] FPD
u NOTE u Bind screw
(M3x6)
Take a note of the RU identification code (serial No.) mentioned on the rear of the
FPD. The identification code (serial No.) is required when setting the AWS.
Filter cover/
filter
FPD RU identification code

(serial No.)
DRMS4325.ai
DRMS4369.ai
(2) Temporarily place the FPD which has been taken out from the package
box.
{MC:3.1.5_Temporarily Installing the FPD}

MC-51
(2) Remove the carbon cover. (3) Temporarily place the carbon cover just removed on the shock
#1
#2 FPD
[Remove] CAUTION
[Remove] TP3x6 (x10)
TP3x12 (x2) Exercise care not to damage the exposure plane of the carbon cover or allow
dust or dirt to attach inside the cover, when temporarily placing the carbon
cover. If the dust or dirt attaches to the cover, abnormal images might result.
Collar Do not scratch the

exposure plane.
Collar Shock absorber or corrugated

fiberboard sheet
#2 [Temporarily place]
[Remove] Carbon cover
DRMS4293.ai
TP3x12 (x2)
#3
[Pull out]
Carbon cover
DRMS4326.ai

MC-52
(4) Disconnect the cable connector of the fan from the NFI51A board. (5) Attach the handles to the left-hand side of the FPD.
Remove the inner cover.
A
#3
[Remove]
Inner cover
#2
[Remove] A A
TP3x6 (x28)
FPD
DETAIL A [Tighten]
DETAIL A #1 [Disconnect] Connectors TP3x6 (x3)
FPD
NFI3
NFI7
NFI5
Handle
DRMS4338.ai
MFI51A board
NFI5 NFI3
DRMS4430.ai

MC-53
(6) Remove the cable retaining bracket assembly. n Check and Adjustment after the FPD Replacement
A (1) Change the RU identification code (serial No.) registered in the AWS.
Refer to the AWS Service Manual for details.
(2) Check the grid position.
{IN:18.10._Checking the Grid Position (1)}
{IN:18.12._Checking the Grid Position (2)}
(3) Check the compression thickness.
{IN:28.4.5_Checking the Compression Thickness}
(4) Check the compression pressure indication accuracy.
{IN:28.4.6_Checking the Compression Pressure Indication Accuracy}
DETAIL A (5) Check the continuity of the compression.
#4 {IN:28.4.7_Checking Continuity of the Compression}
#2
[Remove]
[Remove] (6) Check the collimator mounting angle.
Cable retaining
Cable retaining
bracket (large) {IN:28.5.1_Checking the Collimator Mounting Angle}
bracket (small)
(7) Version-update the controller unit software.
(8) Restore the machine-specific data of the FPD.
(9) Calibrate the FPD.
{Calibration (CA)}
(10) Adjust the irradiation field.
{MC:11._Adjusting the Irradiation Field}
(11) Adjust the irradiation field dose calculation LUT.
(12) Adjust the sensitivity variation correction factor LUT.
{MC:10.4_Sensitivity Variation Correction Factor LUT Adjustment}
#1 (13) Check the AEC accuracy.

#3
[Remove] [Remove] {IN:25.1_Confirmation of AEC Accuracy}
TP3x6 (x6) TP3x6 (x5) (14) Confirm the dose per exposure mode.
DRMS4329.ai {IN:25.2_Confirmation of Dose per Exposure Mode}
(7) Mount the FPD on the swivel arm. (15) Back up the RU data.
{MC:3.1.2_Installing the FPD} {IN:21.8_Backing Up the RU Data}
(16) Check for image problems and check the S value.
{IN:27._Checking for Image Problems and Checking the S Value}

MC-54
3.1.4 Unpacking the FPD (1) Take out the FPD from the transporting box, which packs the FPD.
CAUTIONS u NOTE u
- The FPD is shipped in a transporting box together with a phase-change Return, to the carrier, all the packing materials (including the phase-change
medium and desiccant) after the FPD is removed.
medium for keeping the performance of the FPD. Make sure that the
temperature and humidity requirements of the exposure chamber where
the machine is to be installed are kept within the specified range before
unpacking the FPD. If the temperature and humidity requirements are not kept
within the specified range, never take the procedures in this section.
{Product Specifications:1.2_Machine Specifications}
- The FPD is a heavy object. When unpacking the FPD, two or more persons
should always cooperate to do so.
Desiccant
- Fully exercise care not to scratch the exposure plane of the carbon cover put
on the FPD. A scratched exposure plane of the carbon cover might result in
abnormal images.
- Although the dedicated handles are used to carry the FPD, the handles cannot
be attached when taking out the FPD from the transit box. Hold the indicated Phase-change
positions in this case. medium
Hold here. Phase-change
DETAIL A medium
[Take out]
FPD package
FPD PAD
A Do not scratch the

Carbon cover exposure plane. Transporting box
DRMS4330.ai
- When temporarily installing the FPD, use the dedicated stand jig.
DRMS4332.ai
DRMS4331.ai

MC-55
(2) Break the four corners of the box which packs the FPD. Take out the (3) Remove the antistatic plastic sheet from the FPD.
FPD together with the plastic cover. Place it on a clean shock absorber
or a corrugated fiberboard sheet. [Remove]
Antistatic plastic sheet
u INSTRUCTION u FPD
Do not remove the antistatic plastic sheet from the FPD while the FPD is put on
the floor or on a dirty desk. When the antistatic plastic sheet is to be removed,
spread a clean shock absorber or a corrugated fiberboard sheet to protect the
carbon cover from damage or attachment of dust.
#2
[Take out]
FPD FPD package
Shock absorber or
corrugated fiberboard sheet
DRMS4334.ai
#1
[Break]
4-corner of the package
#3
[Place]
FPD
Spread a shock absorber or

a corrugated fiberboard sheet.
DRMS4333.ai

MC-56
3.1.5 Temporarily Installing the FPD (2) Mount the FPD on the stand jig.
u INSTRUCTION u stand jig.
Store the FPD under the temperature and humidity conditions within the specified Stand jig
Hold here
range. If stored under the conditions out of the specified range, deterioration of the A
machine might accelerate.
{Product Specifications:1.2.2_FPD Specifications} FPD
(1) Release the coolant hoses routed to the rear of the FPD downwardly
from the joint with the stand jig.
u INSTRUCTION u
You need release the coolant hoses from the joint with the stand jig before
mounting the FPD on the stand jig. Otherwise, the coolant hoses might be caught
between the FPD joint and the stand jig, resulting in damage.
DETAIL A
Joint
Joint
#1
[Remove] Exercise care not to have
Clamp the hoses caught.
DRMS4336.ai
Joint
Joint
#2
[Release]
Coolant hose DRMS4171.ai

MC-57
3.1.6 FPD Inner Cover (7) Turn OFF the power of the AWS.
(8) Press the system OFF button on the control pad.
n Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the carbon cover.
WARNINGS
{MC:2.1.8_Carbon Cover}
(2) Put on the compression unit left-hand side cover. l Be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard to
{MC:2.1.9_Compression Unit Left-Hand Side Cover}
u NOTE u in a circuit after the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard is turned
OFF.
The swivel arm need be rotated to the 180° position before removing the FPD
inner cover. Therefore, put on the compression unit left-hand side cover or the Be sure to proceed with operations after you are sure that the charge has
right-hand side cover with the control panel attached. been completely discharged, due to fears of electric shock hazards.
- “PSU MAINS” LED on the power supply unit (PSU): The green LED is unlit.
[Install]
Compression unit
DRMS4166.ai
(3) Turn ON the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard.

(4) Press the system start button on the control pad.

MC-58
(10) Remove the FPD inner cover.
Inner cover
A
#3
[Remove]
TP3x6 (x28)
DETAIL A #1 [Disconnect] Connectors
NFI3
NFI7
NFI5
MFI51A board
NFI5 NFI3
DRMS4063.ai

MC-59
3.1.7 Board Cooling Fan (11) Remove the board cooling fans.
<FDR-1000DRSZ>
n Removal Procedures #4 [Remove] #5 [Remove]
B3x25 (x4) Fin guard x2
(1) Remove the FPD left-hand cover (left-hand armrest).
Board cooling fan x2
{MC:2.1.6_FPD Left-Hand Cover (Left-Hand Armrest)}
(2) Remove the FPD right-hand cover (right-hand armrest).
{MC:2.1.7_FPD Right-Hand Cover (Right-Hand Armrest)}
#2 [Disconnect]
(4) Press the system start button on the control pad. CHECK1 Connector (NFI3)
#3 [Disconnect]
(6) Rotate the swivel arm to the 180° position. Connector (NFI5)
#1 [Unclamp]
(9) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the controller unit. Clamp
(10) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard. <FDR-1000DRLZ>
#6 [Remove] #5 [Remove]
WARNINGS Fin guard x3 B3x25 (x6)

l Electrical charge (residual charge) accumulated by a capacitor might remain #2 [Disconnect]
in a circuit after the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard is turned Connector (NFI3)
OFF. #3 [Disconnect]
Be sure to proceed with operations after you are sure that the charge has Connector (NFI7)
been completely discharged, due to fears of electric shock hazards. #4 [Disconnect]
You can check the discharge by the following indications. CHECK1 Connector (NFI5)
#1 [Unclamp]
Clamp DRMS4038.ai

MC-60
n Reinstallation Procedures
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Check that the board cooling fan is attached in its correct orientation.
Engraved
mark
DRMS4039.ai

MC-61
3.1.8 PTC Board (11) Remove the PTC board.
#1 Remove the board cover (sheet metal).
n Removal Procedures #2 Disconnect the connectors (x6).
#3 Remove the screws (x6).
(1) Remove the carbon cover.
{MC:2.1.8_Carbon Cover}
(2) Turn ON the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard. PTC board
(8) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the controller unit.
WARNINGS
DRMS4513.ai

avoid electric shock hazards. n Reinstallation Procedures
l Electrical charge (residual charge) accumulated by a capacitor might remain Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
OFF. n Check/Adjustment Procedures
been completely discharged, due to fears of electric shock hazards. l CHECK 1
You can check the discharge by the following indications. Start up the machine. Start up the MntTool from the RU PC-TOOL, and check the
- “PSU MAINS” LED on the power supply unit (PSU): The green LED is unlit. version of the PTC board.
- LED on the MFI board: The yellow LED is unlit. {MU:3.21.1-3_MntTool}

MC-62
3.2 Temperature Adjustment Unit n Removal Procedures
REFERENCE l Removing the covers
Prepare the following tools and jigs when mounting/detaching the temperature
adjustment unit. (1) Remove the covers.
- Water supply jig - Swivel arm top cover
- Empty coolant bottle - Swivel arm lower cover
- Closure joint (FPD) or closure hose (FPD) - Swivel arm left-hand side cover
- Closure hose (temperature adjustment unit) - Swivel arm right-hand side cover
- Stand jig {MC:2.1_Swivel Arm Covers}

#3. Swivel arm
#2. Swivel arm

DRMS4295.ai
* The covers to be removed are colored.

MC-63
l Removal of the temperature adjustment unit (5) Disconnect the cable connector (NFI1) of the temperature adjustment
unit from the NFI51A board of the FPD.
REFERENCE
It is recommended that you insert a screwdriver into a hole beside the screw for
retaining the temperature adjustment unit before installing/removing the unit. Inserting NFI51A board
the screwdriver can prevent the temperature adjustment unit from dropping. Remove
FPD
the screwdriver after completion of the operation.
DETAIL A
[Insert]
A
A Screwdriver
Temperature
Screw adjustment unit
cable
Screw
Temperature adjustment unit
DETAIL A
DRMS4146.ai

(3) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the controller unit. [Disconnect]
Connector
(4) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard. NFI1
WARNINGS FPD

in a circuit after the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard is turned DRMS4090 ai
OFF.
been completely discharged, due to fears of electric shock hazards.

MC-64
(6) Remove the temperature adjustment unit. (7) Mount the temperature adjustment unit on the stand jig.
REFERENCE
[Remove] Three pins are attached to the stand jig to keep the posture of the temperature
TP3x12 (x3) adjustment unit and to prevent it from dropping.
Insert the three pins into the three holes for retaining the temperature adjustment
unit when mounting the unit on the stand jig.
A
Temperature
adjustment unit
DRMS4147.ai
Stand jig
DETAIL A [Install]
Temperature
adjustment unit
Stand jig pin
Stand jig
DRMS4339 ai

MC-65
(8) Attach the water supply jig. n Reinstallation Procedures
{MC:13.2.1_Connecting the Water Supply Jig}
(1) Connect the temperature adjustment unit relay cable to the
(9) Discharge the coolant. NFI51A board connector of the FPD and the cable connector of the
{MC:13.2.3_Draining the Coolant} temperature adjustment unit.
(10) Connect the closure hose to the FPD and the temperature adjustment Relay cable
unit.
{MC:13.2.4_Connecting the Closure Hose (FPD and Temperature Adjustment A
Temperature
Unit)} NFI51A board adjustment unit
FPD Stand jig
B
Temperature
adjustment unit cable
DETAIL A DETAIL B
#2
[Connect] Temperature adjustment
Relay cable connector unit cable connector
#1
NFI51A board FPD [Connect]
Relay cable connector
DRMS4150.ai

MC-66
(2) Disconnect the closure hose from the temperature adjustment unit. u NOTE u
u NOTE u When the temperature adjustment unit is of an older version, the hose
(A370Y100306) extending from the rear to the front face of the unit is not supplied
Keep stored the closure hose which has been removed. It is used when servicing together with the machine. Separately prepare the hose and connect it.
the temperature adjustment unit or the FPD, and when replenishing the coolant.
When the FPD is to be replaced, it is shipped with a new closure hose connected
with the unit. <Routing the A370Y100306>
Front Rear
#1
[Disconnect]
Closure hose
A370Y100306
DRMS8426.ai
DRMS8427.ai

MC-67
(3) Disconnect the closure hose from the coolant hose of the FPD. (4) Connect the coolant hose (thick) of the FPD to the temperature
adjustment unit.
u NOTE u
Keep stored the FPD closure hose which has been removed. It is used when
u INSTRUCTION u
servicing the temperature adjustment unit or the FPD, and when replenishing the Securely connect the FPD coolant hoses to the joints. Otherwise, the coolant
coolant. When the FPD is to be replaced, it is shipped with a new closure hose might leak.
connected with the unit.
REFERENCE
Connect the FPD coolant hoses (thick and thin) to the temperature adjustment
unit and water supply jig in the following procedures.
#1
[Insert]
Coolant hose
(thick)
FPD
A
DETAIL A
Coolant hose
(thin)
Closure hose
DRMS8251.ai
Coolant hose (thin)

[Disconnect]
Coolant hose (thick)
Closure hose
DRMS8250 ai

MC-68
(5) Attach the water supply jig. (8) Remove the stand jig.
(6) Replenish the coolant. #1 [Raise]
{MC:13.2.2_Filling the Coolant} Temperature
adjustment unit
(7) Disconnect the temperature adjustment unit relay cable from the
NFI51A board connector of the FPD and the cable connector of the
temperature adjustment unit.
[Disconnect]
Relay cable
NFI51A board Temperature

adjustment unit
#2
[Remove]
Stand jig
FPD
DRMS4157.ai
Temperature
DRMS4156 ai

MC-69
(9) Install the temperature adjustment unit. (10) Connect the connector (NFI1) of the temperature adjustment unit to
REFERENCE
the rear of the FPD.
retaining the temperature adjustment unit before installing the unit. Inserting the NFI51A board
screwdriver can prevent the temperature adjustment unit from dropping. Remove
the screwdriver after completion of the operation. FPD
DETAIL A
[Insert] A
A Screwdriver
Screw Temperature
adjustment unit
cable
Screw
DETAIL A
DRMS4146.ai
[Tighten]
TP3x12 (x3)
[Connect]
Connector
NFI1
FPD
Temperature DRMS4252 ai
adjustment unit (11) Put on the covers.

DRMS4158.ai Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

MC-70
3.3 Collimator (6) Wait for approx. 2 to 7 minutes until the machine is discharged.
CAUTION WARNING
The collimator is attached via a snap-fit jig. The collimator, if rotated clockwise Electrical charge (residual charge) accumulated by a capacitor might remain in
40 degrees, may drop. a circuit after the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard is turned OFF.
Make sure that the collimator is kept at such position that it will not drop. Be sure to proceed with operations after you are sure that the charge has been
completely discharged, due to fears of electric shock hazards.
 INSTRUCTIONS  - “PSU MAINS” LED on the power supply unit (PSU): The green LED is unlit.
- Always adjust the irradiation fields (X-ray irradiation field and light irradiation field) - LED on the MFI board: The yellow LED is unlit.
after the collimator is dismounted and then again mounted.
- After the collimator is removed, cover the opening with a paper towel or the like to (7) Remove the swivel arm lower cover.
prevent dust from entering the collimator.
(8) Disconnect the cable connectors (X2 and X3) and the protective
 Removal Procedures ground wire.
 NOTE  [Disconnect]
Protective ground wire
Replace the collimator as a whole unit. You cannot replace a bulb or a filter disk, for
example.
(1) Rotate the swivel arm to the 0° position, and move it up or down to an
easy-to-work height.
(3) Press the system OFF button on the control pad. [Disconnect]
Connector (X3)
(5) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard. [Disconnect]
Connector (X2)
WARNING Collimator
To avoid electric shock hazards, be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker on the DRMS4209.ai
distribution switchboard.

MC-71
(9) Loosen the screw (inside a copper ring) on the front of the collimator.  Reinstallation Procedures
Do not fully remove the screw.
(1) Reinstall the collimator.
[Loosen] Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
Screw  INSTRUCTION 
Although the collimator is retained, carefully tighten the collimator screw not to
Copper ring damage the snap-fit jig.
(2) Check the collimator.

{IN:28.5_Checking the Collimator}
(3) Put on all of the covers.
(4) Adjust the irradiation field.
{MC:11._Adjusting the Irradiation Field}
Collimator
(5) Check for image problems and check the S value.
DRMS4210.ai
(10) Remove the collimator.

 INSTRUCTION 
The collimator is attached via a snap-fit tool. Rotating by approx. 40 degrees, the
collimator comes off. Exercise care not to drop the collimator.
[Remove]
Collimator
DRMS4211.ai

MC-72
3.3.1 Checking the Collimator Mounting Angle REFERENCE
{IN:28.5.1_Checking the Collimator Mounting Angle} See below for the standard of the collimator mounting angle.
u INSTRUCTION u DETAIL A
Always adjust the irradiation fields (X-ray irradiation field and light irradiation field) |a-b| should be ≤ 1 mm
Exposure frame
after checking the collimator mounting angle if the collimator has been dismounted
and then again mounted. a b
3.3.2 Adjusting the Collimator Mounting Angle

WARNING
To avoid electric shock hazards, do not touch the connector on the collimator
rear with your finger or the like when adjusting the collimator mounting angle.
Light irradiation field
u NOTE u
Be sure to keep the compression plate frame put on when checking and adjusting the A
Opposite chest
collimator mounting angle. wall side
This is because the irradiation field size varies depending on the presence of the
compression plate frame. Remove the compression plate (plastic plate part) to Light irradiation
eliminate an adjustment error due to light refraction. field
Exposure stand
Exposure frame
DRMS4425.ai

MC-73
(1) Remove the swivel arm lower cover. 3.3.3 Checking the Collimator Lamp
{MC:2.1.2_Swivel Arm Lower Cover} {IN:28.5.2_Checking the Collimator Lamp}
(2) Put on the 18x24 compression plate (24x30 compression plate for the
FDR-1000DRLZ). 3.3.4 Checking the Irradiation Field Size
(3) Remove the compression plate (plastic plate part). {IN:28.5.3_Checking the Irradiation Field Size}
{MC:3.5.3_Compression Plate (Plastic Plate Part)}
(5) Turn ON the circuit breaker of the controller unit.
(6) Press the system start button of the control pad.
(8) Light up the light irradiation field lamp.
(9) Adjust the collimator mounting angle.
Again check the collimator mounting angle after the adjustment.
#1 [Loosen]/
#3 [Tighten]
Screw
Copper ring
#2
[Adjust]
Collimator
DRMS4426.ai

MC-74
3.4 Single Tank Unit n Removal/Reinstallation Flowchart
WARNING  NOTE 
When removing/reinstalling the single tank unit, two or more persons should The different flowchart is followed when the single tank unit is to be replaced.
always cooperate to do so. {MC:3.4.3_Replacing the Single Tank Unit}
The mass of the single tank unit is approx. 30 kg.
START
 INSTRUCTION 
1. Recording the exposure count
Hold the four corners of the single tank unit to remove/reinstall it.
Single tank unit
2. Removal of the single tank unit
Hold here.
3. Installing the single tank unit
5. Adjusting the generator

Hold here.
6. FPD calibration
7. Adjusting the irradiation field
8. Checking for image problems

DRMS4220.ai
END

MC-75
3.4.1 Removing the Single Tank Unit n Removal Procedures
 INSTRUCTION  (1) Rotate the swivel arm to the 0° position.
After the single tank unit is removed, cover the opening with a paper towel or the like (2) Lower the swivel arm to its lowermost position.
to prevent dust from entering the single tank unit.
n Checking the Exposure Count (4) Press the system OFF button on the control pad.
 NOTE 
Check the exposure count before removing the single tank unit, and record it.
WARNING
(1) Start up the Zigma Webserver.
To avoid electric shock hazards, be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker on the
{MU:2._Zigma Webserver_n Starting Up and Exiting the Zigma Webserver} distribution switchboard.
(2) Click “Generator”.
(3) Check the Exposure Counter value. (7) Wait for approx. 2 to 7 minutes until the machine is discharged.
Record the indicated value. WARNING
Electrical charge (residual charge) accumulated by a capacitor might remain in
a circuit after the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard is turned OFF.
(8) Remove the swivel arm left-hand side cover.

(9) Remove the collimator.
{MC:3.3_Collimator}

MC-76
(10) Remove the inner cover (MFI board). (11) Disconnect the cable connectors (X4, X5 and X8) from the MFI board
(D910).
#1
[Loosen] #2
M4x6 (x10) [Disconnect]
Connector (X5)
#1 #3
Inner cover Connector (X4) Connector (X8)
(MFI board)
DRMS4051.ai
MFI board
DRMS4212.ai

MC-77
(12) Disconnect the protective ground wire from the single tank unit. (13) Disconnect the cable connector (X9) from the CBA board (D905).
[Disconnect]
Q6x12
W6 CBA board
Protective ground wire DETAIL A DETAIL B

#1
[Disconnect]
Connector (X9)
#2
[Remove] #3
N3 [Remove]
Cable tie
DRMS4214.ai
DRMS4213.ai

MC-78
(14) Mark the attachment of the cover retaining bracket. (16) Remove the screws retaining the single tank unit.
Make marks on both the right and left sides.
Single tank unit
REFERENCE
Align with the marks to reinstall the cover retaining bracket.
#2
[Remove]
Cover retaining Q6x12
bracket
#1
[Remove]
[Mark] Q6x36 (special screw)
Bracket attachment
DRMS4216.ai
DRMS4215.ai
(15) Remove the cover retaining bracket.
Cover retaining bracket
[Remove]
M4x6 (x4) DRMS4217.ai

MC-79
(17) Remove the single tank unit. 3.4.2 Reinstalling the Single Tank Unit
WARNING  INSTRUCTION 
When removing/reinstalling the single tank unit, two or more persons should Always proceed with the following actions after you remove/reinstall the single tank
always cooperate to do so. unit.
The mass of the single tank unit is approx. 30 kg. - Checking the collimator mounting angle
{IN:28.5.1_Checking the Collimator Mounting Angle}
REFERENCE - Adjusting the generator
{MC:9._Generator Adjustment}
The single tank unit is carried in the guard rails.
- FPD calibration
{Calibration (CA)}
- Adjusting the irradiation field
CHECK1 {MC:11._Adjusting the Irradiation Field}
- Checking for image problems and checking the S value
[Remove]
Single tank unit
DRMS4218.ai

MC-80
(1) Reinstall the single tank unit. n Check/Adjustment Procedures
REFERENCE l CHECK 1
Move the single tank unit to the rightmost position and fix as pressed against the
It is recommended that the cable on the rear of the single tank unit fixed by a
positioning ring.
tape to improve workability.
[Stick] #1
Tape [Move right]
Single tank unit
Cable
Single tank unit
DETAIL A
DRMS4219.ai
#2
[Press]
Positioning ring
DRMS4221.ai

MC-81
3.4.3 Replacing the Single Tank Unit 14. Backing up the machine-specific data
n Replacement Flowchart
15. Checking for image problems
START
END
1. Recording the exposure count
2. Removal of the single tank unit
3. Installing the new single tank unit
4. Changing the serial No. of the single tank unit registered in the
AWS
6. Adjusting the generator
7. FPD calibration
8. Adjusting the irradiation field
9. Adjusting the irradiation field dose calculation LUT
10. Adjusting the sensitivity variation correction factor LUT
11. Checking the AEC accuracy
12. Confirming the dose per exposure mode
13. Checking the variation in X-ray output

MC-82
n Checking the Exposure Count (4) Check the collimator mounting angle.
{IN:28.5.1_Checking the Collimator Mounting Angle}
 NOTE 
(5) Adjust the generator.
Check the exposure count before removing the single tank unit, and record it.
(1) Start up the Zigma Webserver. (6) Calibrate the FPD.

{MU:2._Zigma Webserver_n Starting Up and Exiting the Zigma Webserver} {Calibration (CA)}
(2) Click “Generator”. (7) Adjust the irradiation field.

(3) Check the Exposure Counter value. {MC:11._Adjusting the Irradiation Field}
Record the indicated value. (8) Adjust the irradiation field dose calculation LUT.
{MC:10.3_Irradiation Field Dose Calculation LUT Adjustment}
n Replacement Procedures
(9) Adjust the sensitivity variation correction factor LUT.
(1) Remove the single tank unit. {MC:10.4_Sensitivity Variation Correction Factor LUT Adjustment}
{MC:3.4.1_Removing the Single Tank Unit}
(10) Check the AEC accuracy.
(2) Install the new single tank unit. {IN:25.1_Confirmation of AEC Accuracy}
{MC:3.4.2_Reinstalling the Single Tank Unit}
(11) Confirm the dose per exposure mode.
(3) Change the serial No. of the single tank unit registered in the AWS. {IN:25.2_Confirmation of Dose per Exposure Mode}
Refer to the AWS Service Manual for details.
(12) Back up the machine-specific data.
REFERENCE
{IN:21.8_Backing Up the RU Data}
The serial No. of the single tank unit is mentioned on the front face of the single (13) Check for image problems and check the S value.
tank unit.
Single tank unit
<Display example>
Serial No.
DRMS4370.ai

MC-83
3.5 Compression Unit (7) Remove the swivel arm left-hand front cover.
{MC:2.1.10_Swivel Arm Left-Hand Front Cover}
 INSTRUCTIONS 
(8) Remove the swivel arm right-hand front cover.
- Always check that the compression plate is not recorded in the image after the {MC:2.1.12_Swivel Arm Right-Hand Front Cover}
compression unit is removed/reinstalled. If the compression plate is recorded in the
image, white streaks are observed on the wall chest plane side. (9) Remove the inner cover (CBA board).
- Be sure to check and adjust the compression thickness after the compression unit is #1
removed/reinstalled.
[Remove]
M4x6 (x2)
#2
(1) Rotate the swivel arm to the 0° position, and move it up or down to an [Loosen]
easy-to-work height. M4x6 (x7)

WARNING
To avoid electric shock hazards, be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker on the Inner cover DRMS4048.ai
(6) Wait for approx. 2 to 7 minutes until the machine is discharged.

WARNING

MC-84
(10) Disconnect the cable connectors from the CBA board (D905). (11) Remove the compression unit.
Compression
unit
A
CBA (D905) board
[Remove]
Q6x12 (x4)
DETAIL A CBA (D905) board
W6 (x4) DRMS4057.ai
Cable connector Cable connector
(CBA D905 X5) (CBA D905 X18)
DRMS4056.ai
 INSTRUCTION 
Disconnect also the cable connector X7 when the biopsy positioner kit or the
stereo exposure kit is mounted.

MC-85
n Reinstallation Procedures (2) Retain the compression unit.
Butt end surfaces of the compression plate and the carbon cover with each other.
(1) Put on the carbon cover.
REFERENCE
Put on the carbon cover for alignment to retain the compression unit. Remove
the carbon cover to install other components after the compression unit is
retained.
#2
[Tighten]
Q6x12 (x4)
W6 (x4)
DETAIL A
Compression plate
#1
[Butt] End surface
of the compression
plate and end
surface of the
carbon cover
Carbon cover
DRMS4222.ai

MC-86
(3) Connect the cable connectors to the CBA board (D905). (4) Put on the inner cover (CBA board).
#3
[Tighten]
M4x6 (x2)
#2
[Tighten]
M4x6 (x7)
Inner cover
A
CBA (D905) board
DETAIL A CBA (D905) board

Inner cover
#1
[Route]
Cable connector
(MBL X1 W107)
[Connect] [Connect] DRMS4353.ai
Cable connector Cable connector

(CBA D905 X5) (CBA D905 X18)
DRMS4352.ai
 INSTRUCTION 

MC-87
(5) Turn ON the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard. (15) Remove the carbon cover.
(6) Turn ON the circuit breaker of the controller unit. REFERENCE
(7) Press the system start button on the control pad. Once remove the carbon cover to attach all the components. The following
components cannot be attached unless the carbon cover is removed.
(8) Turn ON the power of the AWS. - Swivel arm front covers right and left
(9) Record a uniform image and check it. - Compression unit side covers right and left
{IN:27.1._Checking for Image Problems}
(16) Put on all of the covers.
 INSTRUCTION 
Take the removal procedures (9) and those follow reversely for reinstallation.
Always check that the compression plate is not recorded in the image. If the
(17) Check the compression unit.
compression plate is recorded in the image, the compression unit might tilt.
Reposition the unit. {IN:28.4_Checking the Compression Unit}

WARNING

WARNING

MC-88
3.5.1 Checking the Compression Unit (4) Click [Compression Unit] and enter the Compression Unit window.
{IN:28.4_Checking the Compression Unit} Main menu window
3.5.2 Correcting the Compression Thickness Indication

(1) Place the acrylic board of 40 mm on the exposure stand.
(2) Compress the acrylic board with approx. 100 N. [Click]
“Compression Unit”
[Compress]
Acrylic board Compression Unit window
DRMS4282.ai

{MU:2._Zigma Webserver_n Starting Up and Exiting the Zigma Webserver}
DRMS4225.ai

MC-89
(5) Click [Change] of “CNU Parameters” and enter the CNU Parameters (6) Change the value of “Thickness Offset Compensation”.
window. Enter a correction value to attain the indication on the display of 40 mm.
Compression Unit window REFERENCE
When the compression thickness indication on the display is 39 mm, for example,
enter “-1” and when the indication is 41 mm, enter “1”.
You can enter the value 1-mm-stepwise over the range of -10 to 10.
(7) Click [Set].

CNU Parameters window
[Click]
“Change”
(6) #1
[Input]
“-10 to 10”
(7) #1
CNU Parameters window [Click]
“Set”
DRMS4227.ai
(8) Click the system OFF button of the control pad.

(9) Click the system start button of the control pad.
REFERENCE
Restarting the mammographic stand makes the changed settings effective.
(10) Check the compression thickness indicated on the display.

If the compression thickness indicated on the display is other than 40 mm, repeat
DRMS4226.ai
the procedures (6) to (9).

(11) Cancel the compression.
(12) Exit the Zigma Webserver.

MC-90
3.5.3 Compression Plate (Plastic Plate Part) (2) Remove the compression plate (plastic plate part).
Compression unit
 NOTE  A
Exercise care not to damage the lock of the plastic plate part when removing/
reinstalling the compression plate (plastic plate part).
Compression plate
A (plastic plate part)
(1) Install the compression plate on the compression unit.
 NOTE 
Remove/install the compression plate (plastic plate part) while it is mounted on Lock
the compression unit. (right and left)
DETAIL A
Frame
[Install]
Compression
plate
DRMS4344 ai
#1 #1
[Open] [Open]
Lock Lock
#2
Plastic plate part
[Pull out]
Do not open the locks excessively. Plastic plate part
DRMS4345.ai
n Reinstallation procedures

MC-91
3.6 CBA Board (D905) (7) Wait for approx. 2 to 7 minutes until the machine is discharged.
CAUTION WARNING
When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. If Electrical charge (residual charge) accumulated by a capacitor might remain in
your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage electronic a circuit after the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard is turned OFF.
components on the board. Be sure to proceed with operations after you are sure that the charge has been
- Be sure to back up the configuration data of the mammographic stand when a board - LED on the MFI board: The yellow LED is unlit.
is to be replaced. Also restore the configuration data of the mammographic stand
after the board is replaced. If the data is not backed up/restore, adjustments on the
generator, compression unit, collimator and grid must be carried out. (8) Remove the swivel arm left-hand front cover.
- Record the exposure count before removing the board when the board is to be {MC:2.1.10_Swivel Arm Left-Hand Front Cover}
replaced. The exposure count is not recorded in the configuration data.
(9) Remove the swivel arm right-hand front cover.
{MC:2.1.12_Swivel Arm Right-Hand Front Cover}
 Removal Procedures (10) Remove the inner cover (CBA board).
(1) Back up the configuration data of the mammographic stand. #1
{MC:8.1.1_Backing Up the Configuration Data of the Mammographic Stand} [Remove]
M4x6 (x2)
easy-to-work height. #2
(3) Turn OFF the power of the AWS. [Loosen]
M4x6 (x7)
WARNING
Inner cover DRMS4048.ai

MC-92
(11) Disconnect the cable connectors (14 pcs.) from the CBA board (D905). (12) Remove the CBA board (D905).
CBA board
A
[Remove]
CBA (D905) board M4x6 (x7)
DETAIL A X12 X14
X13
DRMS4050.ai
X15
X9 (1) Put on the CBA board (D900).
(2) Re-write the firmware of the mammographic stand with the same
X4 X11 version as that before replacement.
u NOTE u
The procedures are similar to those for updating the firmware to be referred to.
Do not update now, however.
{MT:3.11_The 15-74 Error Occurs}
X2
The configuration data backed up in the procedures is also restored.
X1 X16
X3 X5 X18 X17
DRMS4049.ai
 INSTRUCTION 

MC-93
3.7 Grid Assembly (5) Turn OFF the power of the AWS.
 INSTRUCTION 
Check the grid position after the grid assembly is removed/reinstalled.
3.7.1 Removing the Grid Assembly WARNING

 NOTE  To avoid electric shock hazards, be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker on the
Retreat the grid (set at the park position) before removing/reinstalling the grid
assembly.
(1) Rotate the swivel arm to the 0° position, and move it up or down to an WARNING
(2) Start up the Zigma Webserver. a circuit after the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard is turned OFF.
{MU:2._Zigma Webserver_n Starting Up and Exiting the Zigma Webserver} Be sure to proceed with operations after you are sure that the charge has been
(3) Click [Table] and enter the Table window.
(4) Click [Out] in “Move Grid”. - “PSU MAINS” LED on the power supply unit (PSU): The green LED is unlit.
The grid moves to the park position. - LED on the MFI board: The yellow LED is unlit.
Table window
[Click]
“Out”
DRMS4230.ai

MC-94
(10) Remove the compression unit. (12) Remove the swivel arm right-hand front cover retaining bracket.
(11) Remove the swivel arm left-hand front cover retaining bracket.
A
Swivel arm left-hand front cover
retaining bracket
A
[Remove] Swivel arm right-hand front cover
Q6x10 (x2) retaining bracket
[Remove]
Q6x10 (x2)
DETAIL A
DETAIL A
[Remove]
Q6x10 (x2)
[Remove]
Q6x10 (x2) DRMS4233.ai
DRMS4232.ai

MC-95
(13) Remove the grid guides. (15) Remove the grid assembly.
[Remove] CAUTION
TP3x6 (x4)
Exercise care not to scratch the FPD exposure plane when removing/reinstalling
the grid assembly.
B
Spacer x4
Grid assembly
Grid guide
A
DRMS4234.ai
FPD exposure
(14) Disconnect the cable connectors (X16 and X17) from the CBA board plane
(D905).
CBA board
DETAIL A DETAIL B
[Disconnect]
Connector (X16)
[Disconnect]
Connector (X17)
[Remove] [Remove]
M6 M6
DRMS4235.ai
DRMS4231.ai

MC-96
3.7.2 Installing the Grid Assembly (2) Connect the cable connectors (X16 and X17) to the CBA board (D905).
 INSTRUCTION 
(3) Attach the grid guide.
Check the grid position after the grid assembly is removed/reinstalled.
 NOTE 
(1) Install the grid assembly while aligning with a half punch of the FPD. Surely insert the grid into the groove of the grid guide.
Retain the grid assembly with the screws while pushing the grid assembly against
the FPD.
#2 #2
#1 [Align] Half-punch of the FPD #1 [Align] Half-punch of the FPD [Tighten]
[Tighten] Spacer x2
Spacer x2 TP3x6 (x2)
TP3x6 (x2)
Frame of the grid Frame of the grid
Grid assembly
#1 #1
B [Insert] Grid Grid [Insert]
Grid guide Grid guide
FPD
A
DETAIL A #3 [Tighten] DETAIL B #3 [Tighten] FPD exposure

M6 M6 plane
DRMS4362.ai
#2 [Push] #2 [Push]
Grid assembly Grid assembly
DRMS4245.ai

MC-97
(4) Reinstall the swivel arm right-hand front cover retaining bracket. (2) Set the CBA board (D905) DIP switch (S1004-8) to ON.
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. REFERENCE
(5) Reinstall the swivel arm left-hand front cover retaining bracket. By setting the CBA board DIP switch (S1004-8) to ON, the mammographic stand
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. can be started with the compression unit removed.
(6) Check the grid position.
{IN:18.10_Checking the Grid Position (1)}
 INSTRUCTION 
If the grid position is out of the standard, adjust the grid sensor.
{MC:3.7.4_Adjusting the Grid Sensor}
A CBA board
(7) Reinstall the compression unit.

(8) Put on all the covers.
3.7.3 Checking the Grid Position DETAIL A

[ON]
DIP switch
(S1004-8)
3.7.4 Adjusting the Grid Sensor
 INSTRUCTION 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Remove the compression unit and set the DIP switch (S1004-8) on the CBA board to
ON before adjusting the grid position.
Upon completion of the check and adjustment of the grid position, be sure to return
the DIP switch (S1004-8) on the CBA board to OFF.
ON
n Preparation
(1) Remove the compression unit.
DRMS4236.ai

MC-98
(3) Turn ON the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard. (4) Adjust the position of the grid park position sensor.
(4) Turn ON the circuit breaker of the controller unit.  INSTRUCTION 
(5) Press the system start button on the control pad. Adjust the position of the grid park position sensor so that the distance between
the tip of the grid and the FPD end surface is 167 ± 1 mm.
FPD end
n Adjusting the Park Position Sensor surface Grid end surface
 NOTES 
- Make preparations before adjusting the grid sensor.
{MC:3.7.4_Adjusting the Grid Sensor_n Preparation}
- Be sure to return the CBA board DIP switch (S1004-8) to OFF after completion of
the grid sensor adjustment.

[Check]
(3) Click [Out] in “Move Grid”. 167±1 mm Distance
The grid moves to the park position. DRMS4237.ai
Table window
[Click] [Adjust]
“Out” Grid park position
sensor
DRMS4242.ai
DRMS4230.ai
(5) Set the CBA board DIP switch (S1004-8) to OFF.

MC-99
n Adjusting the Grid IN Sensor (4) Adjust the position of the grid IN sensor.
 NOTES   INSTRUCTION 
- Make preparations before adjusting the grid sensor. Adjust the position of the grid IN sensor so that the distance between the tip of
the grid and the FPD end surface is 2 ± 1 mm.
{MC:3.7.4_Adjusting the Grid IN Sensor_n Preparation}
- Be sure to return the CBA board DIP switch (S1004-8) to OFF after completion of Grid end surface
the grid sensor adjustment. FPD end
surface
(3) Click [In] in “Move Grid”.
The grid moves to the grid IN position.
Table window
[Check]
Distance
2±1 mm
DRMS4239.ai
[Click]
“In”
[Adjust]
DRMS4238.ai
Grid IN sensor
DRMS4243.ai

MC-100
n Adjust the Grid Oscillation Sensor (Right and Left) (4) Adjust the positions of the grid oscillation times (right and left).
 NOTES   NOTE 
- Make preparations before adjusting the grid sensor. Mark the current positions of the grid oscillation sensors (right and left) with a
{MC:3.7.4_Adjusting the Grid Sensor_n Preparation} pencil or the like before adjustment, so that you can see their original positions.
- Be sure to return the CBA board DIP switch (S1004-8) to OFF after completion of
the grid sensor adjustment.  INSTRUCTION 
- Check the adjustment of the grid oscillation sensors (right and left) while the carbon
Adjust the position of the grid oscillation sensors (right and left) so that the grid
cover is put on.
oscillation times (right and left) indicated on the display come within a range of
(1) Start up the Zigma Webserver. 200 to 250 msec.
{MU:2._Zigma Webserver_n Starting Up and Exiting the Zigma Webserver} <Display example>
(2) Click [Table] and enter the Table window. Display
(3) Click [Start] in “Adjust grid oscillation sensors”.
Grid Times
Transfer
The grid starts to oscillate.
Table window
729 714
Reverse
209 206
[Check] [Check]
Grid oscillation time Grid oscillation time
(left) (right) DRMS4241.ai
[Adjust]
[Click] Grid oscillator sensor
“Start” (left)
DRMS4240.ai
[Adjust]
Grid oscillator sensor
(right)
DRMS4244.ai
(5) Click [Stop] in “Stop adjustment”.


MC-101
3.8 MFI Board (D910) Assembly (7) Remove the swivel arm right-hand side cover.
CAUTION
(8) Remove the XIF51A board.
When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. If {MC:3.9_XIF51A Board}
your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage electronic
components on the board. (9) Remove the inner cover (MFI board).
 INSTRUCTION  #1
Be sure to carry out generator adjustment after the MFI board (D910) is replaced. [Loosen]
M4x6 (x10)
n Removal Procedures Inner cover

(MFI board)
DRMS4051.ai

(10) Disconnect the cable connector from the MFI board (D910).
X6 X5 X9
WARNING X4

WARNING X8
X1
You can check the discharge by the following indications. X2 X3 DRMS4052.ai

MC-102
(11) Remove the MFI board (D910) assembly.
#2
[Remove]
MFI board assembly
#1
[Remove]
M4x12 (x4)
DRMS4053.ai
 INSTRUCTION 
Be sure to carry out generator adjustment after the MFI board (D910) is replaced.

MC-103
3.9 XIF51A Board (7) Remove the swivel arm right-hand side cover.
CAUTION
(8) Remove the XIF51A board.
When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. If
your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage electronic
XIF51A board
components on the board.
(3) Press the system OFF button on the control pad. #1
(4) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the controller unit. [Disconnect] #4
Connector (XIF3) [Remove]
(5) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard. TP3x6 (x3)
WARNING #2
[Disconnect]
To avoid electric shock hazards, be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker on the Connector (XIF1) #3
distribution switchboard. [Disconnect]
Connector (XIF2)
(6) Wait for approx. 2 to 7 minutes until the machine is discharged. DRMS4100 ai
WARNING n Reinstallation Procedures

Electrical charge (residual charge) accumulated by a capacitor might remain in Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

MC-104
3.10 Fan (For Cooling the Single Tank Unit) (7) Remove the swivel arm right-hand side cover.
n Removal Procedures (8) Remove the inner cover (MFI board).
easy-to-work height. #1
[Loosen]
(2) Turn OFF the power of the AWS. M4x6 (x10)
Inner cover
(5) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard. (MFI board)
WARNING
distribution switchboard. DRMS4051.ai
(9) Disconnect the cable connector (X8) from the MFI board (D910).
WARNING
a circuit after the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard is turned OFF. [Disconnect]
Be sure to proceed with operations after you are sure that the charge has been Connector
completely discharged, due to fears of electric shock hazards. (X8)
DRMS4268.ai

MC-105
(10) Removel the fan (for cooling the single tank unit). n Check/Adjustment Procedures
[Remove] l CHECK 1
Q4x45 (x4)
CHECK1 Check the arrows engraved on the fan to have the label surface visible when
reinstalling the fan.
Fan (for cooling the Engraved

single tank unit) mark
DRMS4247.ai
Fan (for cooling the
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. single tank unit)
Label surface
DRMS4248.ai

MC-106
4. Elevation Stand Unit (7) Disconnect the cable connectors.
DETAIL A Motor inverter lift
4.1 Motor Inverter Lift

CDF X3 LIFT
LIFT X5 A
W502
(3) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the controller unit. DETAIL B
WARNING CDF LIFT B
X1 W129
(5) Wait for approx. 2 to 7 minutes until the machine is discharged. CDF LIFT CDF LIFT
X2 W126 X2 W126
WARNING DRMS4040.ai
(8) Remove the motor inverter lift.

completely discharged, due to fears of electric shock hazards. #2
You can check the discharge by the following indications. [Remove]
M4x12
Motor inverter lift
(6) Remove the elevation stand inner cover (upper).

#1
{MC:2.2.8_Elevation Stand Inner Cover (Upper)} [Loosen]
M4x12
DRMS4041.ai

MC-107
 Reinstallation Procedures 4.2 Motor Inverter Rotate
REFERENCE  Removal Procedures
When the motor inverter lift is to be replaced with a new one, you need to remove the (1) Turn OFF the power of the AWS.
retaining brackets from the motor inverter lift which has been removed and reposition
them on the new motor inverter lift. (2) Press the system OFF button on the control pad.
[Reposition] (3) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the controller unit.
Bracket
WARNING

WARNING
DRMS4042.ai
(6) Remove the elevation stand inner cover (upper).

{MC:2.2.8_Elevation Stand Inner Cover (Upper)}

MC-108
(7) Disconnect the cable connectors.  Reinstallation Procedures
DETAIL A Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
REFERENCE
CDF X3 When the motor inverter rotate is to be replaced with a new one, you need to remove
ROTATION the retaining brackets from the motor inverter rotate which has been removed, and
reposition them on the new motor inverter rotate.
[Reposition]
Bracket
ROT X5 W502 CDF ROT X6 A
DETAIL B
CDF ROT
X1 W129 B
Motor inverter rotate DRMS4042.ai
CDF ROT CDF ROT

X2 W126 X2 W126
DRMS4043.ai
(8) Remove the motor inverter rotate.
#2
[Remove]
M4x12
Motor inverter rotate
#1
[Loosen]
M4x12
DRMS4044.ai

MC-109
4.3 CBS Board (D900) (6) Wait for approx. 2 to 7 minutes until the machine is discharged.
CAUTION WARNING
When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. Electrical charge (residual charge) accumulated by a capacitor might remain in
If your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage a circuit after the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard is turned OFF.
electronic components on the board. Be sure to proceed with operations after you are sure that the charge has been
- Be sure to back up the configuration data of the mammographic stand when a board - LED on the MFI board: The yellow LED is unlit.
is to be replaced. Also restore the configuration data of the mammographic stand
after the board is replaced. If the data is not backed up/restore, adjustments on the
generator, compression unit, collimator and grid must be carried out. (7) Remove the elevation stand inner cover (lower).
- Record the exposure count before removing the board when the board is to be {MC:2.2.7_Elevation Stand Inner Cover (Lower)}
replaced. The exposure count is not recorded in the configuration data. (8) Disconnect the cable connectors (17 pcs.) from the CBS board (D900).
CHECK1 X25 X26 X27

(1) Back up the configuration data of the mammographic stand. X5 X28
{MC:8.1.1_Backing Up the Configuration Data of the Mammographic Stand}
X6
X29
(3) Press the system OFF button on the control pad. X10

X19
(5) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard. X12
WARNING X23
To avoid electric shock hazards, be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker on the X22
CBS board
X17
X16 X11 X1 X3
DRMS4046.ai

MC-110
(9) Remove the CBS board (D900).  Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the CBS board (D900).
(2) Re-write the firmware of the mammographic stand with the same
CBS board (D900)
version as that before replacement.
u NOTE u
The procedures are similar to those for updating the firmware to be referred to.
Do not update now, however.
#1
[Remove] {MT:3.11_The 15-74 Error Occurs}
M4x20 The configuration data backed up in the procedures is also restored.
#2  Check/Adjustment Procedures
[Remove]
M4x6 (x6)
l CHECK 1
Check that the cable connector (X5) is not connected with the cable connector (X24)
by mistake.
DRMS4047.ai
X5
X24
DRMS4363.ai

MC-111
4.4 Lithium Battery (CBS Board) (6) Wait for approx. 2 to 7 minutes until the machine is discharged.
CAUTIONS WARNING
- If you improperly replace the battery, an explosion may occur. Electrical charge (residual charge) accumulated by a capacitor might remain in
Use our designated lithium battery when replacing the battery. Be sure to a circuit after the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard is turned OFF.
return the old lithium battery to the parts center. Be sure to proceed with operations after you are sure that the charge has been
- When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body.
If your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage You can check the discharge by the following indications.
electronic components on the board. - “PSU MAINS” LED on the power supply unit (PSU): The green LED is unlit.
u INSTRUCTIONS u
(7) Remove the elevation stand inner cover (lower).
- Be sure to back up the configuration data of the mammographic stand before
removing the lithium battery. Also restore the configuration data of the {MC:2.2.7_Elevation Stand Inner Cover (Lower)}
mammographic stand after the battery is detached/attached. If the data is not (8) Remove the lithium battery from the CBS board.
backed up, adjustments on the generator, compression unit, collimator and grid
must be carried out.
- When the lithium battery is removed, the exposure count is reset. Be sure to
record the exposure count before removing the battery. The exposure count is not
recorded in the configuration data of the mammographic stand.
 Removal Procedures [Remove]

(1) Back up the configuration data of the mammographic stand. Lithium battery
(CBS board)
DRMS4095.ai
(4) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the controller unit.  Reinstallation Procedures
(5) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard.  NOTE 
WARNING Model: CR2032
FUJIFILM Part No.: W11G3082146
distribution switchboard. (1) Reinstall the lithium battery.
(2) Restore the configuration data of the mammographic stand.
{MC:8.1.2_Restoring the Configuration Data of the Mammographic Stand}

MC-112
4.5 Power Supply Unit (PSU) (7) Remove the terminal block cover from the power supply unit (PSU).
WARNING
distribution switchboard. A
(5) Wait for approx. 2 to 7 minutes until the machine is discharged. DETAIL A
WARNING Terminal block cover

[Remove]
(6) Remove the elevation stand inner cover (lower). TP3x6
{MC:2.2.7_Elevation Stand Inner Cover (Lower)} DRMS4250.ai

MC-113
(8) Disconnect the cable connectors and the power supply cables from  Reinstallation Procedures
the power supply unit (PSU).
(1) Reinstall the power supply unit (PSU).
[Tighten]
A U-nut M5 (x4)
B Power supply
unit (PSU)
DETAIL A DETAIL B CHECK1
X3 X4 X5 X2
N
L1 DRMS4356.ai
E E
X7 X6
DRMS4054.ai
(9) Remove the power supply unit (PSU).

#1
[Remove]
U-nut M5 (x4)
#2
[Remove]
Power supply unit
(PSU)
DRMS4055.ai

MC-114
(2) Connect two ground cables to the terminal block of the (3) Connect the power supply cable of the mammographic stand.
mammographic stand.
#1 #2
WARNING
The two ground cables of the mammographic stand are tightened together and
connected to the FG. In doing so, the power supply cable (ground cable) of the
mammographic stand should be connected first.
A
#1 #1 DETAIL A
[Connect]
Ground cable
(power supply cable of the mammographic Power supply cable
A stand)
W6 (x2) Na6
FG #1/#2 DETAIL A
[Connect]
L1 cable (black)/N cable (white)
(power supply cable of the mammographic
Ground cable stand)
Power supply cable
#2 #2 DETAIL B L1
Terminal
[Connect] block
Ground cable (black) N (white)
(Mammographic stand) DRMS4355 ai
B
W6 (x3) Na6
FG
Ground cable
DRMS4251 ai

MC-115
(4) Connect the cable connectors. (5) Put on the terminal block cover.
REFERENCE WARNING
The two cable connectors (X4) to be connected in this procedure can be
Be sure to put on the terminal block cover to avoid electric shock hazards.
connected to either.
Be sure to put on the terminal block cover.
A Terminal block cover
[Tighten]
DETAIL A TP3x6
DRMS4358.ai
X3
X6
X2
X7
X4 X5
DRMS4357.ai

MC-116
(6) Check that the power supply cable of the mammographic stand routed (7) Put on all the covers.
behind the machine is surely fixed. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
Check to make sure that the power supply cable does not shift in position when
pulled.
WARNING
If the power supply cable shifts in position when pulled, hold the cable with the
cable retaining bracket.
Elevation stand
Power supply
cable
Power supply
unit (PSU)
DETAIL A
[Verify]
The power supply cable is surely fixed and
FPD signal cable does not shift in position when pulled.
FPD power
supply cable
18 mm or less
(recommended value)
Cable retaining bracket
DRMS4359 ai

MC-117
4.6 Emergency Stop Switch 4.7 Display Board (D903)
WARNING WARNING
To avoid electric shock hazards, be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker on the To avoid electric shock hazards, be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker on the
distribution switchboard. distribution switchboard.
REFERENCE CAUTION
The removal/reinstallation procedures for the emergency stop switch are common When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body.
both to the right and left switches. The procedures for the left switch are mentioned If your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage
below as an example. electronic components on the board.

(1) Remove the elevation stand left-hand side cover. (1) Remove the display cover assembly.
{MC:2.2.2_Elevation Stand Left-Hand Side Cover}
(2) Remove the display board (D903).
(2) Remove the emergency stop switch.
#2
 Reinstallation Procedures [Remove]
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. M2.5x6 (x4)
(self-tapping screw)
Display cover
#1 assembly
[Disconnect]
Connector Display board (D903)
(DYS1 X1 W122) DRMS4076 ai

MC-118
4.8 Control Pad 4.9 Control Pad Cable
WARNING
distribution switchboard. (1) Turn OFF the power of the AWS.
 Removal Procedures (3) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the controller unit.
(1) Remove the control pad. (4) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard.
#1 WARNING
[Disconnect]
Connector To avoid electric shock hazards, be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker on the
(Contol Box X2) distribution switchboard.

WARNING
(6) Remove the control pad.

Control pad (rear)
DRMS4077 ai
{MC:4.8_Control Pad}
 Reinstallation Procedures {MC:2.2.7_Elevation Stand Inner Cover (Lower)}
(1) Reinstall the control pad.

 NOTE 
Insert the connector (Control Box X2) into its position before retaining with
screws. If the connector is not fully inserted, the machine cannot normally boot
up.

MC-119
(8) Disconnect the control pad cable.
CBS board
[Disconnect]
Connector
D900 (X17)
Control pad cable
DRMS4078 ai

MC-120
4.10 Foot Switch (7) Disconnect the cable connectors (X22 and X23) of the foot switches,
and remove the foot switches.
 Removal Procedures CBS board

Foot switch
(3) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the controller unit. cable [Disconnect]
Connector x2
(X22/X23)
WARNING

WARNING
DRMS4079 ai
a circuit after the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard is turned OFF. Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
Be sure to proceed with operations after you are sure that the charge has been REFERENCE
The cable connectors of the two foot switches can be connected with either the
You can check the discharge by the following indications. connector X22 or the connector X23 of the CBS board.

{MC:2.2.7_Elevation Stand Inner Cover (Lower)}

MC-121
4.11 Motor Lift (2) Open the box and remove the new motor, 4 bolts and washers, cable
ties and bubble wrap packaging (see the right picture).
4.11.1 Preparation
(1) Cover the detector using bubble wrap, packaging/soft materials.
u INSTRUCTION u
Leaving the fan inlet cover free from obstructions.
DRMS4456.ai
(3) Remove the stand top and side covers. Attach the emergency stop
short-circuit cables.
DRMS4455.ai
DRMS4457.ai

MC-122
(4) Remove the stand rear cover. (6) Remove the swivel arm top and bottom (tube head) covers.
(5) Turn on the stand and AWS and move the swivel arm its lowest limit. (7) Remove the swivel arm left and right covers.
DRMS4459.ai DRMS4461 ai

MC-123
(8) Fix the swivel arm. #3 Rotate the swivel arm to approximately. -120/+120 degrees and then fix the
#1 Locate the swivel arm four securing holes from the back side of the stand to two bolts and washers on right side by hand.
decide in which direction to move, up or down to align the holes. Then move
the swivel arm in the appropriate direction aligning the holes.
DRMS4464 ai
#4 Rotate the swivel arm back to 0 degrees again and turn off the stand and
DRMS4462 ai
room power supply breakers.
#2 Fix two bolts and washers on left side by hand.
(9) Open the elevation stand inner covers (upper and lower).
DRMS4463 ai
DRMS4465 ai

MC-124
(10) Mark BL and BR with a marker pen (see the right picture) on the (12) Remove the earth strap and disconnect the motor power supply cable.
bottom shutter guides and then remove them.
REFERENCE
BL=Bottom Left, BR=Bottom Right
This procedure helps you distinguish each part when reinstall it later.
DRMS4468.ai
(13) Disconnect the motor control cable from connector X26 on the CBS
board.
DETAIL A
DRMS4466.ai
(11) Mark the holes where the cable harness containing the motor cables
(see the right picture) is attached to the stand with a marker pen and
then cut and remove all the cable ties holding this harness in place.
DRMS4469.ai
DRMS4467.ai

MC-125
(14) Move out of the way and hook up the cable harness caterpillar 4.11.2 Remove the Motor
(E-chains).
(1) Bend the stand frame to make a space for the motor removal.
You have to make space for the removal of the bolt and washer holding the
spindle and sprocket before removing the motor.
The easiest solution is by cutting slots with a junior hacksaw above and below the
washer diameter and then using plumber's pliers bend the frame away from the
bolt head about 5 mm just enough to remove the bolt and washer as in pictures.
DRMS4470.ai
(15) Pay attention to the other cables (See right picture) and remove both
power and control motor cables.
DRMS4472 ai
#1 Mark the desired area with a marker pen. Cut the frame to a depth of around
10 mm using a hacksaw. (Cut the top then the bottom sides.)
DRMS4471.ai
u NOTE u
If it is difficult, remove the top shutter guides again after labeling correctly with a
marker pen TL and TR and try again.
DRMS4473.ai

MC-126
#2 Using plumber's pliers bend the frame away from the bolt and washer (see #2 Using a permanent marker, draw a line under the chain tensioning spring
the right picture). device. This is to indicate the level of tension already applied to the motor
drive chain.
DRMS4474.ai
DRMS4476.ai
(2) Remove the chain tensioning spring device.

#3 Fix cable ties around the top and bottom of the chain tensioning spring
#1 Then remove the two bolts holding the acrylic chain guard in place (see the device steel blocks.
right picture).
REFERENCE u INSTRUCTION u
This procedure might be easier with one engineer holding the bolts from behind Position one set of cable ties behind the bottom tensioning screw and one set
the stand while the other engineer un-tightens the bolts from the front access in front in order to fasten the springs securely and tightly in place. (See the right
holes. picture) This is very important for the re-fitting of the new motor later.
DETAIL A
DRMS4475.ai
DRMS4477 ai

MC-127
#4 Release the locking nut on the bottom tensioning screw and carefully #2 Remove the bolt and washer holding the motor sprocket and spindle in
proceed to remove the screw itself. place. When the bolt has been loosened, the spindle and sprocket can be
#5 Remove the two bolts holding the tensioning spring device and chain in pushed forward giving more room to remove the bolt and washer if required
place. (See the right picture).
u NOTES u
- Be careful making sure to hold the chain and locating block at the back of the
tensioning spring device as this may fall when the bolts are removed.
- Keep the cable ties in place while the device is removed.
DRMS4480.ai
#3 Once the bolt and washer have been removed push the spindle and sprocket
as far as possible and out of the motor housing toward the front of the stand.
REFERENCE
DRMS4478 ai
This will give access to the four bolts holding the motor in place.
(3) Remove the motor. #4 Remove the four bolts holding the motor in place.
#1 Fill the bottom of the stand and underneath the lift motor with the bubble
wrap, which came with the motor. u NOTE u
REFERENCE Three of these bolts can be accessed from the backside of the stand and one
from the front.
This is to help hold the motor in place when the fixing bolts are removed later.
DRMS4481 ai
DRMS4479 ai

MC-128
#5 Remove the motor from the positioning bracket while sliding the sprocket 4.11.3 Reassembly the New Motor
and spindle out of the motor housing.
(1) Check the new motor's fixing holes with the original bolts to remove
any debris, which may be there.
DRMS4482 ai
#6 Take the motor out of the stand.

DRMS4484 ai
(2) Place the bubble wrap across the bottom of the stand making sure
you have access to the cables at the right hand back side of the stand.
DRMS4483.ai
DRMS4485 ai

MC-129
(3) Place the motor on the bubble wrap in the bottom of the stand. (5) Reattach the new motor.
#1 Align the new motors fixing holes with the positioning bracket. While doing
u NOTE u
so slide the spindle and sprocket into the motor housing.
The two motor cables in the stand should be temporally positioned next to the
original cable harness on the right hand side of the stand looking from the back. u NOTE u
Taking care to align with the locating key on the spindle with the motor housing.
#2 Replace the four bolts then slide the spindle and sprocket fully through the
motor housing.
DRMS4486.ai
(4) Loosely attach a cable tie round the new motor cables and the original
cable harness to hold the new cables in place temporally while the DRMS4488 ai
motor is fitted. #3 Fix the spindle back in place with the bolt and washer.

MC-130
(6) Position the chain locating metal keyed block back into the slot. 4.11.4 Adjust the Motor Chain Tension
u NOTE u (1) Replace the tensioning screw and nut. Tighten the screw until the
Make sure the chain is correctly positioned back around the bottom of the motor tension on the springs and chain is back to the original force and
drive sprocket. permanent marker lines made earlier.
DRMS4492 ai
(2) Overtighten slightly passed the line then back off the bolt.
DRMS4490.ai
(7) Re-position the chain tensioning spring device back into place. Then REFERENCE
replace the two fixing bolts securing the chain and tensioning spring
This procedure makes the tensioning spring device sit exactly back on the lines
device back into the original positions. in the original position and at the original tension.
u NOTE u
Be careful to keep the cable ties tight at all times.
DRMS4493.ai
DRMS4491.ai
(8) When the bolts are fully secured and tightened carefully, cut the cable
ties and remove from around the tensioning spring device.

MC-131
(3) Lock the screw in this position with the locking nut. (5) Replace the bottom bolt of the chain guard.
(4) Replace the acrylic chain guard back onto the front of the motor
positioning bracket.
REFERENCE
This is easier done by locating the bottom hole first and then fixing the top bolt.
DRMS4495.ai

MC-132
4.11.5 Finishing #5 Remove the two locking bolts and washers on the left hand side of the stand.
(1) Remove the swivel arm locking bolts and washers.

#1 Temporally reconnect the motor power cable to the inverter.
DRMS4499.ai
#6 Remove the two locking bolts on the right hand side of the swivel arm.
DRMS4497 ai
#2 Temporally reconnect the motor control cable to the CBS board on connector
X26.
DRMS4500.ai
#7 Check the stand up and down lift movement.

#8 If this is ok, turn the stand off again at the console control pad and the
breaker.
DRMS4498 ai
#3 Turn on the breaker and power on the stand.

#4 Elevate the swivel arm a millimeter or so to release any tension that may
have been applied to the bolts in the procedure.

MC-133
(2) Route the Cables. #3 Route the cables through the stand chassis at the appropriate places.
#1 Disconnect the motor power cable from the inverter and the motor control u INSTRUCTION u
cable from the CBS board connector X26.
Make sure the cables will not catch on any moving parts.
#2 Correctly route and permanently secure the new motor cables to the stand
and original cable harness with new cable ties at the positions marked earlier
with the marker pen.
DRMS4503 ai
DRMS4501.ai
#4 Make sure the cable lengths are correct and the earth strap will fit on to the
motor power cable exposed braid. Firmly secure the cables in place with
REFERENCE cable ties when the correct positions have been found.
If required hold the cable harness caterpillar track (E-Chain) out of the way in
order to fix the cables correctly.
DRMS4504.ai
DRMS4502.ai

MC-134
#5 Route the motor control cable through the stand chassis for correct cable #7 Attach the earth strap around the motor power cables exposed braiding and
positioning. secure firmly to the threaded fixing post with the nut and washer.
DRMS4505 ai DRMS4507 ai
#6 Fix all the other cables in place using cable ties.

(3) Reinstall the covers.
#1 Replace the top and bottom stand inner side covers.
DRMS4506 ai
DRMS4508 ai

MC-135
#2 Replace the swivel arm right and left covers. #4 Replace the stand rear cover.
#3 Replace the swivel arm top and bottom (tube head) covers.
DRMS4510 ai

MC-136
4.11.6 Check the Performance (4) Turn the stand off, remove the emergency stop short-circuit cables.
(1) Cover the detector with bubble wrap and then place the old motor on (5) Replace the left and right hand side covers and the stand top cover.
it. (6) Restart the stand and perform final quality checks.
REFERENCE
To test to prove the motor stability, the old motor is used as a test weight to
simulate additional load (15 kgf=150 N).
DRMS4512.ai
(2) Turn on the stand from the breaker and the console control pad. Make
sure the CU and AWS are powered on.
(3) Conduct the test below.
Test procedure;
#1 Move the swivel arm to its lowest limit position.
#2 Wait 60 sec.
#3 Press the lift up button for 1 sec.
#4 Release the lift button then immediately repress the lift up button for a further
1 sec. Repeat steps #3. and #4. in the above procedure four times.
#5 Lower the swivel arm back to its lowest limit and repeat from step #2.
#6 Repeat this procedure 5 times.
u INSTRUCTION u
Please remember to wait 60 sec between each repetition and check the AWS for
errors.

MC-137
5. Controller Unit 5.1 Controller Unit Covers
WARNING
u NOTES u
- The mass of the controller unit is approx. 22 kg. When lifting the controller unit, two distribution switchboard.
or more persons should always cooperate to do so.
- When lifting the controller unit, be sure to hold the stay inside the rear of the
controller unit. If the controller unit is lifted with the cover of the unit held, the cover  Removal Procedures
gets damaged.
(1) Remove the cover.
A Controller unit
#1
[Remove]
T4x8 (x6)
#2
[Remove]
Cover
DETAIL A
GOOD NO GOOD
DRMS4001.ai
Hold the stay. Do not hold the cover to lift.
DRMS4360.ai

MC-138
(2) Remove the inner cover. 5.2 MIF51A Board
WARNING
#2
[Remove]
Inner cover
CAUTION
When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body.
#1 electronic components on the board.
[Remove]
TP3x6 (x26)
(1) Remove the controller unit cover and the inner cover.
DRMS4002.ai
{MC:5.1_Controller Unit Covers}
(2) Remove the MIF51A board assembly.
 Reinstallation Procedures #1
#1 #1
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. [Disconnect]
Connector (MIF3) Connector (MIF1)
Connector (MIF2)
#3
[Remove]
MIF51A board
assembly
#1 #2
[Disconnect] [Remove]
Connector (NIF4) TP3x6 (x2) DRMS4003.ai

MC-139
5.3 MPI51A Board 5.4 CPS51B/CPS51C Board
WARNING WARNING
CAUTION CAUTION
When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body.
If your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage If your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage
electronic components on the board. electronic components on the board.

(1) Remove the controller unit cover and the inner cover. (1) Remove the controller unit cover and the inner cover.
{MC:5.1_Controller Unit Covers} {MC:5.1_Controller Unit Covers}
(2) Remove the MPI51A board assembly. (2) Remove the CPS51B/CPS51C board assembly.
#1 #1 #1
#1
[Disconnect] [Disconnect] [Disconnect]
[Disconnect]
Connector (MPI4) Connector (MPI5) Connector (MPI5)
Connector (MPI3)
#2 #2
[Remove] [Remove]
TP3x6 (x3) TP3x6 (x2)
#3 #3
[Remove] [Remove]
MPI51A board CPS51B/CPS51C
assembly board assembly
#1 DRMS4005.ai
[Disconnect]
Connector (MPI2)  Reinstallation Procedures
DRMS4004.ai


MC-140
5.5 PAT51A Board (3) Remove the PAT51A board assembly.
WARNING #1
[Unclamp] PAT51A board
To avoid electric shock hazards, be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker on the Clamp assembly
CAUTION
#1
When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. #1 [Unclamp]
If your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage [Unclamp] Clamp
electronic components on the board. Clamp
#2
[Remove]
{MC:5.1_Controller Unit Covers} TP3x6 (x4) DRMS4008.ai
(2) Disconnect the cable connectors. (4) Remove the PAT51A board.
#1
A [Remove]
TP3x6 (x6)
DETAIL A PAT51A board

PAT8 PAT12 PAT10
#2
PAT4 [Remove]
PAT51A board
PAT11
PAT1 DRMS4009.ai
PAT7 PAT3  Reinstallation Procedures

PAT6 PAT2
PAT9 PAT5
DRMS4007.ai

MC-141
5.6 CFI51A Board (Memory Board) 5.7 Compact Flash Card
WARNING WARNING
CAUTION CAUTION
REFERENCE
When the Compact Flash Card is replaced with a new one, install the RU software
(1) Remove the controller unit cover and the inner cover. and restore the data.
(2) Remove the Compact Flash Card.  Removal Procedures
(3) Remove the CFI51A board (memory board). (1) Remove the controller unit cover and the inner cover.
(3) #4 {MC:5.1_Controller Unit Covers}
[Disconnect]
Connector (CFI1) (2) Remove the Compact Flash Card.
(3) #2 (3) #3
[Remove]
[Remove]
TP3x6 (x3) CFI51A board Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
(memory board)
u INSTRUCTION u
When the Compact Flash Card is replaced with a brand-new one, perform the
(2) #1 following procedures:
[Remove]
l Installing the RU software
Compact Flash
Card {IN:21._Installing the RU Software}
l Restoring data
(3) #1 - Machine-specific data
[Disconnect] - Configuration data
Connector (CFI3)
DRMS4006.ai - AEC file
{MC:8.2.2_Restoring the RU Data}

MC-142
5.8 CPU51A Board (Motherboard) (6) Remove the CPU51A board (motherboard).
WARNING #1
[Disconnect]
To avoid electric shock hazards, be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker on the Connectors
distribution switchboard. CHECK1
CPU51A board
CAUTIONS CPU30
- When the lithium battery is exhausted, replace the board.

- The board removed for replacement purposes must be returned to the parts CPU29
center (factory).
- If you improperly replace the battery, an explosion may occur.
- Do not remove the lithium battery. Otherwise, the basic software (BIOS)
which is installed will be erased. CPU19
If your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage Network cable
electronic components on the board. CPU28
#2
(1) Remove the controller unit cover and the inner cover. [Remove]
{MC:5.1_Controller Unit Covers} TP3x6 (x9)
(2) Remove the MIF51A board assembly.

DRMS4010.ai
{MC:5.2_MIF51A Board}
(3) Remove the MPI51A board assembly.
{MC:5.3_MPI51A Board}
(4) Remove the CPS51B/CPS51C board assembly.
{MC:5.4_CPS51B/CPS51C Board}
(5) Remove the PAT51A board assembly.
{MC:5.5_PAT51A Board}

MC-143
 Reinstallation Procedures  Check/Adjustment Procedures
 CHECK 1
 INSTRUCTION 
Connect the cable connector (CPU30) to the CPU51A board (motherboard) with the
When the CPU51A board (motherboard) is to be replaced with a new one, remove the label (“UP” indication) facing upward.
memory board from the CPU51A board (motherboard) which has been removed, and Label (“UP” indication)
reposition it on the new board. Connect with the UP
The FDR-1000DRSZ is equipped with a single memory board, and the FDR- indication facing upward.
1000DRLZ is equipped with two memory boards.
Reposition the
memory board.
UP
DRMS4011.ai
DRMS4012.ai

MC-144
5.9 Memory Board  Reinstallation Procedures
WARNING Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
CAUTION
When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body.
electronic components on the board.
(2) Remove the PAT51A board assembly.
{MC:5.5_PAT51A Board}
(3) Remove the memory board.
[Remove]
Memory board
(PRIMARY) (*)
DRMS4080.ai
*: For the FDR-1000DRLZ, remove the two memory boards, PRIMARY and
SECONDARY.

MC-145
5.10 IND51A Board 5.11 NFB51A Board
WARNING WARNING
CAUTION CAUTION

(1) Remove the controller unit cover and the inner cover. (1) Remove the controller unit cover and the inner cover.
{MC:5.1_Controller Unit Covers} {MC:5.1_Controller Unit Covers}
(2) Remove the IND51A board. (2) Remove the NFB51A board.
#2 NFB51A board
#1 [Remove]
IND51A board [Disconnect] TP3x6 (x4)
Connector (CN8)
#2
[Remove]
TP3x6 (x2)
#1
DRMS4081.ai
#1
 Reinstallation Procedures [Disconnect] [Disconnect]
Connector (NFB1) Connector (NFB2) DRMS4022.ai

MC-146
5.12 Controller Unit Cooling Fans (FAN1, FAN 2 (3) Remove the controller unit cooling fans (FAN1, FAN 2 and FAN3).
and FAN3) CHECK1 #3

[Remove]
WARNING Fan (FAN1)
TP3x12 (x2)
#2 #3
[Disconnect] [Remove]
Connector Fan (FAN2)
 Removal Procedures (CN5, CN6, CN7) TP3x12 (x2)
(1) Remove the controller unit cover and the inner cover. #1
#3 [Unclamp]
[Remove] Clamp
(2) Remove the controller unit cooling fan assembly. Fan (FAN3)
TP3x12 (x2)
DETAIL B
#3
DRMS4016.ai
#2 [Remove]  Reinstallation Procedures

[Remove] Fan assembly
A TP3x6
(x6)
DETAIL A
#1
[Disconnect]
Connector
(CN5, CN6, CN7)
DRMS4015.ai

MC-147
 Check/Adjustment Procedures 5.13 Power Supply (Alpha II 650)
 CHECK 1  Removal Procedures
Check that the fans (FAN1, FAN2 and FAN3) are mounted on the bracket with their
labeled faces facing upward. (1) Turn OFF the power of the AWS.
Label (2) Press the system OFF button on the control pad.
Engraved
mark (3) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the controller unit.
WARNING
Label {MC:5.1_Controller Unit Covers}
Bracket
DRMS4017.ai

MC-148
(6) Disconnect the cable connectors from the left-hand side of the power (7) Remove the cable connectors (PAT1, PAT2, PAT 3 and PAT4) from the
supply (Alpha II 650). PAT51A board.
A
A
DETAIL A DETAIL A PAT51A board

[Disconnect]
Power supply (Alpha II 650)
Connector
(PAT4)
[Disconnect]
Connector (ACIN) [Disconnect]
Connector
(PAT1)
[Disconnect]
Connector
(PAT3)
[Disconnect]
[Disconnect] Connector
Connector (ACE) (PAT2)
DRMS4253.ai
DRMS4018.ai

MC-149
(8) Remove the clamps. (9) Remove the power supply (Alpha II 650).
#2
[Draw out]
Power supply
(Alpha II 650)
#2
[Remove]
Clamp
A
#1
[Remove]
TP4x6 (x4)
DRMS4020.ai
DETAIL A
#1
[Remove]
Clamp
DRMS4019.ai

MC-150
 Reinstallation Procedures 5.14 Circuit Breaker
CAUTION
Exercise care not to mistake the cable connector connection position when a
cable alone is to be replaced. An erroneously connected cable connector might (2) Press the system OFF button on the control pad.
result in damage of the machine.
WARNING
Power supply
(Alpha II 650)
Slot 4-GND
Slot 4-24V
Slot 3-GND Slot 3
Slot 3-12V
Slot 2-GND Slot 2
Slot 2-5V
Slot 1-GND Slot 1
Slot 1-24V
DRMS4021.ai

MC-151
(6) Remove the circuit breaker.  Reinstallation Procedures
 NOTE 
Set the switch to the OFF position when reinstalling the circuit breaker.
 CHECK 1
Check that the connector is connected with its correct position.
 CHECK 2
CHECK1 Make sure that the circuit breaker is attached in their correct orientations.
#3
[Remove] #1
Circuit [Disconnect]
breaker Connector
(NFB-OUT) Circuit breaker
#2
CHECK2 [Disconnect]
Connector (NFB-IN)
DRMS4082.ai
OFF side
DRMS4083.ai

MC-152
5.15 Terminal Block (TB1) (7) Remove the terminal block (TB1).
WARNING (2) #1
(3) #3
[Loosen]
[Remove] Cable retaining screw
To avoid electric shock hazards, be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker on the TP3x6 (x2) x6
distribution switchboard. Terminal block
(TB1) (2) #2
[Remove]
(5) Remove the controller unit cover and the inner cover. TB-N/L2
(white) Cable x6
(6) Disconnect the cables from the terminal block (TB1). TB-L1 TB-NOUT
(black) (white)
TB-LOUT
(black)
TB-E (green)
CHECK1 TB-EOUT
(yellow/green)
DRMS4084.ai

MC-153
 Reinstallation Procedures 5.16 Terminal Block (TB2)
 CHECK 1 (2) Press the system OFF button on the control pad.
Do not make an erroneous combination of the power supply cables on the distribution
switchboard side and the cables on the terminal block (TB2) side. (3) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the controller unit.
 Single phase: Three wires  Single phase: Two wires (4) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard.
TB-N/L2 TB-N/L2 WARNING
Distribution TB-E TB-L1 TB-E TB-L1 To avoid electric shock hazards, be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker on the
switchboard side
L1 N L2 L1 N L2
TB-NOUT TB-NOUT
Terminal block
(TB2) side TB-LOUT TB-LOUT
TB-EOUT TB-EOUT
DRMS4085.ai

MC-154
(6) Remove the terminal block cover. (7) Disconnect the cables from the terminal block (TB2).
(8) Remove the terminal block (TB2).
(3) #1
TB1-N (white) CHECK1 [Remove]
[Remove] TB2-N (white) Cable retaining screw x6
Terminal block cover
TB2-NOUT
TB1-L (black) (white)
TB2-L (black)
TB2-LOUT
(black)
TB1-E TB2-EOUT
(yellow/green) (yellow/green)
TB2-E
(yellow/green)
(3) #2
(4) #1 [Remove]
Terminal block [Remove] Cable x9
DRMS4086.ai
(TB1) TP3x6 (x2)
DRMS4087.ai

MC-155
 CHECK 1
Do not make an erroneous combination of the power supply cables on the terminal
block (TB1) side and the cables on the machine side.
Terminal block
(TB1) side Machine side
TB1-N (white)
TB2-N (white)
TB2-NOUT
TB1-L (black) (white)
TB2-L (black)
TB2-LOUT
(black)
TB1-E
(yellow/green) TB2-EOUT
TB2-E (yellow/green)
(yellow/green)
DRMS4088.ai

MC-156
6. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse  Fuse Replacement Procedures
Locations CAUTIONS
 Fuse Classification electronic components on the board.
- When replacing the fuse, check the rated amperage of the fuse to be replaced,
 How to understand fuse notations and replace it with a fuse of the same rated amperage.
An example of a fuse classification symbol and rated amperage is shown below: At that time, check the rated amperage (A) silk-screened on the board as well.
- To remove the fuse, pull it straight up and off.
- When attaching the fuse, exercise care not to bend the pins of the fuse.
Rated amperage of 1.6A

(1) Pull out the fuse, and replace it with a new one.
Fuse classification symbol
FRAH3D01.eps
#1
 How to identify rated amperage [Remove]
Fuse
Fuse notation Rated amperage
(A)
LM 03 (D) 0.3
05 (D) 0.5 Pins
10 (D) 1
13 (D) 1.3
16 (D) 1.6
20 (D) 2
32 (D) 3.2
40 (D) 4 FRAH3D02.EPS
50 (D) 5

MC-157
6.1 Fuse Locations of the FPD 6.1.2 SND51B Board Fuses
6.1.1 PTC51A Board Fuses

 Fuse Locations
 Fuse Locations
F208
F203
F201
F206
F204
F403 F205
F402 F202 F207
F401
DRMS4024.ai
F404
 Fuse Information
DRMS4023.ai
Board Rated voltage Rated
Type
 Fuse Information indications (V) amperage (A)
F201 LM 48 3.2
Type
indications (V) amperage (A) F202 LM 48 3.2
F401 LM 48 1 F203 LM 48 1
F402 LM 48 2 F204 LM 48 1
F403 LM 48 2 F205 LM 48 2
F404 (*) LM 48 1 F206 LM 48 1
*: Fuses are soldered with the board. Therefore, a fuse cannot be replaced by itself. F207 LM 48 1
F208 LM 48 3.2

MC-158
6.1.3 TRC51A Board Fuses
 Fuse Locations
F101
F105 F102
F104 F103
DRMS4025.ai
Type
indications (V) amperage (A)
F101 LM 48 1.6
F102 LM 48 3.2
F103 LM 48 3.2
F104 LM 48 3.2
F105 LM 48 3.2

MC-159
6.2 Fuse Locations of the Controller Unit 6.2.2 CPS51B/CPS51C Board Fuse
6.2.1 MPI51A Board Fuses

 Fuse Location
 Fuse Locations
F301 F74
DRMS4027.ai
F302  Fuse Information

DRMS4026.ai
Type
F74 (*) LM 48 4
Type *: Fuse is soldered with the board. Therefore, a fuse cannot be replaced by itself.
F301 (*) LM 48 2
F302 LM 48 0.5
*: Fuses are soldered with the board. Therefore, a fuse cannot be replaced by itself.

MC-160
6.2.3 PAT51A Board Fuses
 Fuse Locations
F1
F3
F9
F7
F6
F8
F10
F2
F4
DRMS4028.ai
Type
F1 LM 48 2
F2 ST 125 20
F3 ST 125 10
F4 LM 48 1
F6 LM 48 5
F7 LM 48 5
F8 LM 48 2
F9 LM 48 2
F10 ST 125 10

MC-161
6.3 Fuse Location of the Swivel Arm
6.3.1 XIF51A Board Fuse
 Fuse Location
F600
DRMS4029.ai
Type
F600 LM 48 1

MC-162
7. Updating Software Versions (3) Select the RU to be updated from the “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, and
click [FTP].
#2 #1
7.1 Updating the RU Software Versions [Click] [Select ]
“FTP” <Display example>
(1) Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the AWS. Con igu at on(C)
EACH RU SETT NG
CONNECTION TES
RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION
MARS 192.168.0.101 FDR-1000D ＊.＊
RU NAME LIST OF EX STING RU
RU IP DDR
(2) Click [START] on the entrance window.

Entrance window
BACKUP RESTORE
ALL RUs SETTING
[Click] #3
“START” [Click]
“X”
DRMS4424.ai
DRMS4414.ai

MC-163
(4) Verify the IP address and click [OK]. (6) Click [OK].
#1
[Verify]
Indication
[Click]
“OK”
DRMS4417.ai
(7) Verify the “RU VERSION” and click [OK].

#1
[Verify]
<Display example> “RU VERSION”
#2
[Click]
“OK”
DRMS4418.ai
#2
[Click]
“OK” DRMS4415.ai
(5) Select the RU to be updated from the “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, and
click [VERSION UP].
#1
[Select ]
<Display example>
Con igu at on( )
MARS 192.168.0.101 FDR-1000D ＊.＊
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME L ST OF EXISTING RU
RU IP ADDR
#2
BACKUP RESTORE
ALL RUs SETTING

[Click]
“VERSION UP” DRMS4416.ai

MC-164
(8) Click [OK]. (9) Upon completion of the write into the Compact Flash Card, press the
ENTER key.
CAUTION
REFERENCE
While write into the Compact Flash Card is in progress, never turn OFF the It takes approx. 5 minutes to write into the Compact Flash Card.
circuit breaker of the controller unit. If the RU power is turned OFF, the data on
the Card gets damaged, and the RU cannot boot up as a result.
#1
[Check]
#2
[Click]
“OK”
#2
[Press]
Enter key DRMS4420.ai
(10) Click [OK].
[Click]
“OK”
DRMS4421.ai
DRMS4419.ai

MC-165
(11) Check the version of the RU software, and close SetUp PC-TOOL. (12) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the controller unit.
#2 (13) Turn OFF the power of the AWS.
[Click]
“X” (14) Press the system OFF button on the control pad.
<Display example>
Con igu at on(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME LIST OF EXIST NG RU RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION (15) Press the system start button on the control pad.
MARS 192.168.0.101 FDR-1000D
RU IP ADDR

BACKUP RESTORE
(18) Check the following points.

ALL RUs SETTING
#1
[Check] - The machine normally boots up.
● GOOD indication - There is no error occurrence.
Character color is "black". - No error is found after checking for image problems and checking the S value.
● NO GOOD indication {IN:27_Checking for Image Problems and Checking the S Value}
Character color is "red".
#3
[Click]
“EXIT” DRMS4422.ai
u INSTRUCTION u
When NO GOOD, return to the procedure (1) and repeat the software version
updating procedures.

MC-166
8. Backup and Restore of the (5) Click [Generator] and enter the generator main window.
Main menu window
Configuration Data
8.1 Configuration Data of the Mammographic

Stand
[Click]
u INSTRUCTION u “Generator”
Always back up and restore the configuration data of the mammographic stand before
the following operations:
- Replacement of the CBS board
- Replacement of the CBA board
- Replacement of the lithium battery of the CBS board
Generator main window

8.1.1 Backing Up the Configuration Data of the
Mammographic Stand
u INSTRUCTION u
Record the exposure count before backing up the configuration data of the
mammographic stand. The exposure count is not recorded in the configuration data
of the mammographic stand.
n Recording the Exposure Count

(4) Start up the Zigma Webserver and enter the main menu window.
DRMS4186.ai

MC-167
(6) Check the exposure counter value. (7) Click [Main] and return to the main menu window.
Record the indicated value. Generator main window
[Click]
“Main”
[Check]
“Exposure Counter”
value
DRMS4187.ai Main menu window
DRMS4189.ai

MC-168
n Backing Up the Configuration Data (2) Click [Backup].
Configuration Data window
(1) Click [Configuration Data] and enter the Configuration Data window.
Main menu window
[Click]
“Configuration Data”
[Click]
“Backup” DRMS4192.ai
(3) Store the configuration data in a desired domain, referring to the

instructions appearing on the screen.
Default file name: config.mcf
DRMS4423.ai

MC-169
8.1.2 Restoring the Configuration Data of the (6) Select the backup file and click [Restore].
Mammographic Stand Clicking the [Restore], the Config File Upload window appears, and the restore
is completed in approx. one minute. Upon completion of the restore, the
(1) Turn ON the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard. mammographic stand is rebooted automatically.
(2) Press the system start button on the control pad. Configuration Data window

(5) Click [Configuration Data] and enter the Configuration Data window.
Main menu window
[Click]
#2
[Select]
Backup file
#3
[Click]
“Restore” #1
[Click]
“Reference”
Config File Upload window
DRMS4193.ai
DRMS4423.ai

MC-170
(7) When the mammographic stand is rebooted, click [Back to the Main- (8) Click [Configuration Data] and enter the Configuration Data window.
Menu], and enter the main menu. Main menu window
Config File Upload window
[Click]
[Click]
“Back to Main-Menu”
Main menu window
DRMS4194.ai
DRMS4423.ai

MC-171
(9) Make settings so that all of the indications in “State” are “valid”. (10) Click [Back to the Main Menu] and enter the main menu window.
Configuration Data window Configuration Data window
#3
[Check] [Click]
State indication “Back to Main-Menu”
#1
[Click]
“Set Valid”
Main menu window
#2
[Click]
“Back to Configuration”
DRMS4196.ai
DRMS4197.ai

(13) Set the date and time.
{IN:22._Time Setting for the Mammographic Stand}

MC-172
8.2 RU Data (3) Select the item to be restored from the RESTORE pull-down menu.
RU PC-TOOL window
8.2.1 Backing Up the RU Data
{IN:21.8_Backing Up the RU Data}
8.2.2 Restoring the RU Data

CAUTION
Never turn OFF the circuit breaker of the controller unit and the circuit breaker
of the distribution switchboard while restoring the data, as the Compact Flash
Card of the controller unit is accessed. Otherwise, the contents of the Compact
Flash Card of the controller unit are damaged, and the RU cannot restart.
RESTORE #1
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL. [Click]
{MU:3._RU PC-TOOL_n Starting Up and Exiting the RU PC-TOOL}
CONFIGURATION
(2) Select RU from the LIST OF EXISTING RU. INDIVIDUAL DATA (HD->RU) #2
Con igu at on(C)
EACH RU SETTING <Display example> INDIVIDUAL DATA [Select]

Data
CONNECTION TEST

OF EXIST NG RU
MANAGEMENT INFORMATION (HD->RU)

RU NAME
RU IP ADDR
MARS 192.168.0.101 FDR-1000D 1.3

BACKUP RESTORE
DRMS4453.ai
ALL RUs SETTING (4) Click [EXECUTE].

DRMS4433.ai
RU PC-TOOL window
[Click]
“EXECUTE”
DRMS4454.ai

MC-173
(5) Click [OK] when “Completed” appears.
(6) Press the system OFF button on the control pad, and turn OFF the RU
power.
(7) Press the system start button on the control pad, and turn ON the RU
power.
Check that the machine can normally start.
8.2.3 Installing the Machine-Specific Data

{IN:21.5_Installing the Machine-Specific Data}

MC-174
9. Generator Adjustment (4) Click [Generator] and enter the generator main window.
Main menu window
Generator adjustment is done for optimization of the tube current and the tube voltage
control. Carry out generator adjustment after the following actions take place.
- The single tank unit is removed/reinstalled or replaced.
- The MFI board (D910) is replaced
- Preventive maintenance
u INSTRUCTION u [Click]
If the generator adjustment is not normally completed, the LED of the exposure button “Generator”
goes out (the LED flashes in green when normal adjustment takes place). Again carry
out the generator adjustment when the adjustment is not normally completed.
If the second generator adjustment cannot be normally completed, confirm the error
code on the Zigma Webserver and replace the MFI board or the single tank unit.
u NOTE u
Each exposure in this procedure takes approx. 30 seconds. Keep pressing the Generator main window
exposure button until the LED of the button begins to flash in green. If you release
the exposure button before the LED begins to flash in green, you can resume the
operation by clearing the error on the AWS.
(1) Mount the compression plate of 18x24 size.

REFERENCE
Exposures cannot be made without the compression plate mounted.
(2) Place lead (protective apron or the like) on the exposure stand.
u NOTE u
Place the lead or the like to protect the detector from the X-rays to be irradiated
during the exposure. Otherwise, the detector might deteriorate.
(3) Start up the Zigma Webserver and enter the main menu window. DRMS4186.ai

MC-175
(5) Click [Gen Adjust] and enter the Generator Adjust window. (6) Click [Enable Reset].
Generator main window Clicking [Enable Reset], the Enable Reset window appears.
Generator Adjust window
[Click]
“Gen Adjust”
[Click]
“Enable Reset”
Enable Reset window
DRMS4201.ai
DRMS4200.ai

MC-176
(7) Press the decompression button on the control pad. (9) Click [Start Adjust] in Main Inverter Adjust.
Clicking [Start Adjust], the Adjust Main Inverter window appears.
Control pad Generator Adjust window
[Press] [Click]
Decompression “Start Adjust”
button
DRMS4202.ai
(8) Click [Gen Adjust] and return to the Generator Adjust window.
Enable Reset window
Adjust Main Inverter window
[Click]
“Gen Adjust”
DRMS4204.ai
(10) Press the exposure button.

Keep pressing the exposure button until the LED of the button begins to flash in
green.
DRMS4203.ai

MC-177
(11) Click [Gen Adjust] and return to the Generator Adjust window. (15) Select “Large Wolfram” in the Filament Adjust, and click [Start Adjust].
(12) Select “Large Moly” in the Filament Adjust, and click [Start Adjust]. Clicking [Start Adjust], the Adjust Focus window appears.
Clicking [Start Adjust], the Adjust Focus window appears. Generator Adjust window
#1
#1 [Click]
[Click] “Large Wolfram”
“Large Moly”
#2
#2 [Click]
[Click] “Start Adjust”
“Start Adjust”
Adjust Focus window

Adjust Focus window
DRMS4206.ai
DRMS4205.ai
(16) Press the exposure button.
(13) Press the exposure button. Keep pressing the exposure button until the LED of the button begins to flash in
green.
Keep pressing the exposure button until the LED of the button begins to flash in
green. (17) Click [Gen Adjust] and return to the Generator Adjust window.

MC-178
(18) Select “Small Moly” in the Filament Adjust, and click [Start Adjust]. (21) Select “Small Wolfram” in the Filament Adjust, and click [Start Adjust].
Clicking [Start Adjust], the Adjust Focus window appears. Clicking [Start Adjust], the Adjust Focus window appears.
Generator Adjust window Generator Adjust window
#1 #1
[Click] [Click]
“Small Moly” “Small Wolfram”
#2
#2
[Click]
[Click]
“Start Adjust”
“Start Adjust”
Adjust Focus window Adjust Focus window
(19) Press the exposure button. (22) Press the exposure button.
Keep pressing the exposure button until the LED of the button begins to flash in Keep pressing the exposure button until the LED of the button begins to flash in
green. green.

MC-179
10. Checking and Adjusting the AEC 10.3 Irradiation Field Dose Calculation LUT
Carry out checks and adjustments for the following operations.
Adjustment
Sensitivity Doses for exposure under various conditions are measured, and the dose correction
Irradiation LUT (lookup table) is calculated in the following procedures.
Confirmation variation
Confirmation of field dose
of dose per correction
AEC accuracy
exposure mode
calculation LUT
factor LUT u INSTRUCTION u
adjustment
adjustment When both “irradiation field dose calculation LUT adjustment” and “sensitivity variation
Installation of the correction factor LUT adjustment” need be carried out, always carry out the “irradiation
  - -
machine field dose calculation LUT adjustment” first.
Replacement of the
   
FPD
When the single tank u NOTE u
   
unit is replaced It is desirable to use a dosimeter of an ion chamber type in the procedures below.
Preventive Employ values with the influences of temperature and atmospheric pressure corrected
 - - -
maintenance for measurement of the dose. Refer to the operation manual or the like of the
dosimeter for the correction method.
10.1 Confirmation of AEC Accuracy
{IN:25.1_Confirmation of AEC Accuracy} n Preparations
(1) Mount the 18x24 compression plate (24x30 compression plate for the
10.2 Confirmation of Dose per Exposure Mode FDR-1000DRLZ).
{IN:25.2_Confirmation of Dose per Exposure Mode} (2) Raise the compression plate to its uppermost position.

MC-180
(3) Set the dosimeter at the predetermined position. (4) Put on a lead sheet on the exposure stand.
A
[Put]
Lead sheet
[Fix]
Dosimeter
Exposure stand DRMS4432.ai
DETAIL A n Dose Measurement Under Various Conditions

Exposure center Make measurement of dose for each set of exposure conditions.
The mAs value should be fixed to 100 mAs.
Exposure Targer/Filter Tube voltage Dose
stand 23 kV
Mo/Mo 28 kV
35 kV
23 kV
60
Mo/Rh 28 kV
35 kV
Chest wall plane
23 kV
Dosimeter
W/W 28 kV
35 kV
DETAIL B X-ray detecting position Dosimeter
40
Exposure
stand Unit: mm
DRMS4431.ai

MC-181
(1) Set the exposure conditions on the AWS. n Data Input and LUT Calculation
Exposure menu: RMI156 (any exposure menu will do)
AEC: Manual (1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
Target/Filter: Mo/Mo {MU:3._RU PC-TOOL_n Starting Up and Exiting the RU PC-TOOL}
Tube voltage: 23 kV
(2) Select RU from the LIST OF EXISTING RU.
mAs: 100 Con igu at on( )
<Display example>
(2) Make exposure.
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST

RU NAME OF EXISTING RU
RU IP ADDR
(3) Take a note of the value indicated on the dosimeter (dose value). MARS 192.168.0.101 FDR-1000D 1.3
BACKUP RESTORE
(4) Set the tube voltage to 28 kV and make exposures. ALL RUs SETTING
Change only the tube voltage without changing other settings.

DRMS4433.ai
(3) Click “Launcher” from the Program of the menu bar, and enter the
(5) Take a note of the value indicated on the dosimeter (dose value).
Launcher menu window.
(6) Set the tube voltage to 35 kV and make exposures. [Click]
Change only the tube voltage without changing other settings. RU PC-TOOL window Program\Launcher
(7) Take a note of the value indicated on the dosimeter (dose value).
(8) Change Target/Filter to Mo/Rh, and follow the procedures of (1) to (7).
Measure the dose values when making exposures with the Target/Filter set to Mo/Rh
with voltages of 23 kV, 28 kV and 35 kV. Take notes of the respective values.
(9) Change Target/Filter to W/W, and follow the procedures of (1) to (7).
Measure the dose values when making exposures with the Target/Filter set to W/W
with voltages of 23 kV, 28 kV and 35 kV. Take notes of the respective values.
(10) Dismount the dosimeter and the lead sheet from the exposure stand.
Launcher menu window
DRMS4434.ai

MC-182
(4) Select “AecExpDoseCalc” from the pull-down menu on the Launcher (5) Input measurement values (dose values) in “Measurement Dosage”
menu window, and click [EXECUTE]. and click [Start Calc].
#1 [Click] AecExpDoseCalc window <Input example>
Launcher menu window Pull-down
#2 [Click]
“AecExpDoseCalc”
#1 [Input]
Measurement
value
#3 [Click]
“EXECUTE” DRMS4435 ai
#2 [Click]
“Start Calc” DRMS4436.ai
(6) Click [OK] when “Success!!” appears.
[Click]
“Start Calc”
DRMS4437 ai
(7) Click and exit from the AecExpDoseCalc window.

MC-183
10.4 Sensitivity Variation Correction Factor LUT (3) Click “Launcher” from the Program of the menu bar, and enter the
Launcher menu window.
Adjustment [Click]
In the procedures below, the AEC correction LUT (lookup table) is calculated from RU PC-TOOL window Program\Launcher
dose values when exposures are made under various conditions.
u INSTRUCTION u
When both “irradiation field dose calculation LUT adjustment” and “sensitivity variation
correction factor LUT adjustment” need be carried out, always carry out the “irradiation
field dose calculation LUT adjustment” first.
n Preparations
Settings for storing the AEC data for every exposure are made in the procedures
below.
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
(2) Select the RU from the LIST OF EXISTING RU.
Con igu at on(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
<Display example>
RU NAME OF EXIST NG RU
RU IP ADDR
MARS 192.168.0.101 FDR-1000D 1.3

BACKUP RESTORE
ALL RUs SETTING
DRMS4433.ai
DRMS4434.ai

MC-184
(4) Select “MntTool” from the pull-down menu on the Launcher menu (5) Click “Connect” from the Connection of the menu bar.
window, and click [EXECUTE].
REFERENCE
#1 [Click]
Clicking “Connect”, the MntTool (maintenance tool) and the AEC board come into
communication, causing the buttons to be active.
MNT Tool window
#2 [Click] [Click]
“MntTool” Connection\
Connect
#3 [Click]
DRMS4439 ai

MC-185
(6) Click the AEC/PTC tab, and click [AEC dump mode ON]. (7) Check to make sure that no “.csv” file is stored in the data destination
REFERENCE
folder.
Destination folder: C\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\FDR-1000DRSZ\SYSTEM\
Clicking [AEC dump mode ON], the AEC data dump for every exposure is COMMON\TOOL\MntTool\FILE\AEC\DUMP
transferred to a predetermined folder when Calib\Field Calibration takes place on
the AWS window. u NOTE u
If a “.csv” file is present, delete it or move to another folder. If the operation proceeds
MNT Tool window while the “.csv” file is kept, new data and old data are mixed up. The LUT calculation
cannot be correctly done, resulting in an error.
#1
(8) Start up the MUTL.
[Click]
AEC/PTC tab {MU:4._MUTL_n Starting Up and Exiting the MUTL}
(9) Click [Set Aec Sens Disp Calc] of the Calibration (Field).
REFERENCE
#2 Clicking [Set Aec Sens Disp Calc], the AEC sensitivity variation data
[Click] measurement starts when Calib\Field Calibration takes place on the AWS
“AEC dump mode ON” window.
#1 [Click]
Calibration (Field)
MUTL window
#2 [Click]
“Set Aec Sens
Disp Calc”
DRMS4440E ai
DRMS4441E.ai

MC-186
n Data Measurement (2) Dismount the 18x24 compression plate (24x30 compression plate
for the FDR-1000DRLZ) from the compression unit, and put it on an
(1) Place the 20 mm acrylic board on the exposure stand. acrylic plate.
Place the acrylic board to protrude from the chest wall plane of the exposure stand. Directly put the compression plate on the acrylic plate, and do not carry out
compression.
Compression unit
A
[Place]
Acrylic board [Place]
Compression plate
Exposure
Exposure stand
stand
DETAIL A
Acrylic board
Exposure (20 mm) DRMS4443.ai
stand
(3) Click [Calib] on the inspetion window of the AWS, and click “Field
Calibration”.
Chest wall
plane Acrylic board
DRMS4442.ai #2
[Click]
“Field Calibration”
#1
[Click]
“Calib”
DRMS4444.ai

MC-187
(4) Make exposures in response to “Make exposures for calibration” n AEC Correction LUT Calculation
appearing on the AWS window.
The exposure conditions are automatically set, and the AEC data is transferred (1) Select “AecDispCalc” from the pull-down menu on the Launcher menu
each time the exposure button is pressed. window, and click [EXECUTE].
u NOTE u #1 [Click]
A total of 17 exposures are made. The acrylic board of 20 mm is used for the first
and second exposures, and the acrylic board of 40 mm is used for the third to
17th exposures.
The number of exposures is displayed as a count.
#2 [Click]
(5) Upon completion of the second exposure, replace the acrylic board of “AecDispCalc”
20 mm with the acrylic board of 40 mm.
Mount the compression plate on the acrylic board similarly to the setting of the
acrylic board of 20 mm.
REFERENCE
When the second exposure is completed, the exposure count appearing on the
AWS window is shown as “3/17”.
Compression unit
#3 [Click]
#2 “EXECUTE” DRMS4446 ai
[Put] Use AecDispCalc (16 ch) for the 1824FPD, and AecDispCalc (32 ch) for the
Compression plate 2430FPD.
Exposure
stand
#1 [Replace]
Acrylic board
(40 mm) DRMS4445.ai
(6) Make exposures in response to “Make exposures for calibration”

appearing on the AWS window.
Make a total of 15 exposures.

MC-188
(2) Click [Start Calc] on the AecDispCalc window. n Reflection of the AEC Correction LUT
LUT calculation starts.
(1) Select “MntTool” from the pull-down menu on the Launcher menu
AecDispCalc window
window, and click [EXECUTE].
#1 [Click]
#2 [Click]
“MntTool”
#3 [Click]
[Click]
“Start Calc” DRMS4447.ai
[Click]
“Start Calc”
DRMS4437.ai
(4) Click and exit from the AecDispCalc window.

MC-189
(2) Click “Connect” from the Connection of the menu bar. (3) Click Power [On] in the AEC tab.
REFERENCE MNT Tool window
Clicking “Connect”, the MntTool (maintenance tool) and the AEC board come into
communication, causing the buttons to be active.
[Click]
Powe”On”
MNT Tool window
[Click]
Connection\
Connect
DRMS4448 ai
DRMS4439 ai

MC-190
(5) Click Mnt Mode [On] in the AEC tab. (7) Click EEPROM [Initialize] in the AEC tab.
MNT Tool window MNT Tool window
[Click]
Mnt Mode”On” [Click]
EEPROM
”Initialize”
(6) Click [OK] when “Success!!” appears. (8) Click [OK] when “Success!!” appears.

MC-191
(9) Click EEPROM [Sum Calc] in the AEC tab. (11) Click and exit from the MNT Tool window.
MNT Tool window (12) Exit from the Launcher menu window.
[Click] [Click]
EEPROM ”CANCEL” DRMS4452.ai
”Sum Calc” (14) Click , and exit from the RU PC-TOOL window.
(15) Click the system OFF button of the mammographic stand.
(16) Click the system start button of the mammographic stand.
DRMS4451 ai

MC-192
11. Adjusting the Irradiation Field n Operation Flow
Mentioned in this section is the method of adjusting the X-ray irradiation field and the
START
light irradiation field. When both of the X-ray irradiation field and the light irradiation
field need be adjusted, make adjustment of the X-ray irradiation field first.
The irradiation field is to be adjusted when:
- the single tank unit is removed/reinstalled or replaced; Preparation
- the collimator is removed/reinstalled or replaced.
u INSTRUCTION u
Set the swivel arm to the 0° position before adjusting the irradiation field. Adjustment of Mo large focus
11.1 Adjusting the X-Ray Irradiation Field
Adjustment methods of the X-ray irradiation field include adjusting the irradiation field
while checking images by means of a film (cassette) larger than the exposure area. Adjustment of W large focus
However, it is sometimes assumed that the film image cannot be checked depending
on the installation conditions. Described below are the procedures for adjusting the
X-ray irradiation field without using the film.
11.1.1 Adjustment Flow Adjustment of Mo small focus (*)

The adjustment procedures are outlined below.
- Change the set value via the Zigma Webserver to locate the X-ray irradiation field
within the exposure area.
↓ Adjustment of W small focus (*)
- Measure the coordinates of the respective edges (chest wall side, opposite chest
wall side, right side and left side) of the X-ray irradiation field and input them in the
Excel sheet.
↓
- Change the set value of the X-ray irradiation field stepwise, measure the coordinates END DRMS4391.ai
of the respective edges, and input them in the Excel sheet.

↓ *: Adjustment of the Mo small focus and W small focus does not take place on a
- Calculate the optimum set value from the relation between the set value and the machine not equipped with the magnification exposure stand (option).
coordinates of the respective edges (Excel automatic calculation). REFERENCE
↓
The focus mentioned above refers to a point where electrons irradiated from the
- Change the set value to the optimum value via the Zigma Webserver (adjustment
complete). filament in the X-ray tube collide against the target and the X-rays are generated.
The large focus refers to a focal size to be used in contact exposure.
Make adjustment for each of the Mo large focus, W large focus, Mo small focus (*) The small focus refers to a focal size to be used only in magnification and
and W small focus (*). magnification spot exposure.
*: Make the adjustment of the Mo small focus and W small focus only when the
magnification exposure stand (option) is installed.
u INSTRUCTION u
If the customer separately purchases the magnification exposure stand (option),
make the irradiation field adjustment for the Mo small focus and W small focus when
installing the magnification exposure stand (option).

MC-193
n Standard Value of the X-ray Irradiation Field n Aimed Adjustment Value of the X-ray Irradiation Field
The area of the X-ray irradiation field with respect to the image area is shown below. The aimed adjustment values of the X-ray irradiation field for the procedures are
The standard value refers to a value when the swivel arm is located at the 0° position shown below:
and uniquely specified for the machine with a variation in rotating the swivel arm is X-ray irradiation area
taken into consideration.
Image area Opposite chest wall side
X-ray irradiation area
Image area Opposite chest wall side b’ Aimed adjustment
values of the X-ray
b
irradiation field
c’ d’
Left side Right side
c d
Left side Right side
a’
a Chest wall side DRMS4393.ai
Chest wall side Mo large focus W large focus Mo small focus W small focus
DRMS4392 ai
a' 5 5 5 5
Mo large focus W large focus Mo small focus W small focus
b' 5 5 2.5 2.5
a 3<a<9 3<a<9 3<a<9 3<a<9
c' 5 5 5 2.5
b 3 < b < 13 3 < b < 13 0<b<5 0<b<5
d' 5 5 5 2.5
c 3 < c < 13 3 < c < 13 3 < c < 13 0<c<5
Unit: mm
d 3 < d < 13 3 < d < 13 3 < d < 13 0<d<5
a+b < 19.5
c+d < 19.5
a+b+c+d < 26
Unit: mm

MC-194
11.1.2 How to Measure the Coordinates n Viewing the Measurement Positions (Edges)
Refer to the following figures to measure the coordinates to minimize variations in the
n Viewing the Image Via the Image J measurement. The measurement position on the chest wall side is described as an
example in the following figures.
u NOTE u
<Measurement position of coordinate> <Simplified gray scale>
The “Image J” software program is used to display the raw image data (RAW data)
and check the edge coordinates in the mentioned procedures.
If another software program is to be used to check the images, fully understand the
operation contents, and exercise care not to misread the coordinates.
The way of viewing the image is as follows when a raw image is displayed by the
Image J.
○ Measurement
<Image displayed by the Image J>
position of
coordinate
Right side
Origin (0,0)
of the Image J
A B
X-ray irradiation × Do not measure at this point.
area ×○
<Commonly mistakable example> <Simplified gray scale>

Opposite
Chest wall side
chest wall side
○ Measurement
position of
Left side
coordinate
DETAIL A Out of the image area DETAIL B

Border of Markers on
the image the opposite × Do not measure at this point.
Right edge of chest wall ××○
area
DRMS4406.ai
the X-ray side

irradiation field Image area
DRMS4405.ai

MC-195
n Procedures for the Coordinate Measurement (2) Click [Magnifying glass] on the menu bar to set the magnification
percentage to 100%.
u NOTE u
Make measurement approximately at the center of each edge. It is necessary to u NOTE u
always align the center position of the edge whose coordinate is to be measured when Always display the image with a magnification percentage of 100% to measure
the irradiation field set value is changed per focus. the coordinates. Otherwise, variations in measurement may increase.
When the irradiation field set value is changed and its coordinate is to be measured,
for example, measure the X-coordinate at the same position as the Y-coordinate which REFERENCES
is first measured, for measurement of the chest wall/opposite chest wall. Measure
the Y-coordinate at the same position as the X-coordinate which is first measured, for - You can also increase/decrease the magnification percentage by “+” and “-”
measurement of the right/left measurement. keys on the keyboard.
- The magnification percentage is displayed on the image file. Note, however,
(1) Check the coordinate of the edge center of the image, and write it that the percentage does not appear when it is 100%.
down.
The edge center position may be approximate. Magnification
REFERENCES percentage
- Example of writing down the edge center coordinates
Y-coordinate for measurement of chest wall/opposite chest wall: 2400
X-coordinate for right/left measurement: 1600
- Selecting the line button, you can easily make measurement as the cursor
appears as a crosshair.
#5 #3 #1
[Check] [Check] [Click]
X-coordinate Y-coordinate Line button DRMS4408.ai
Right side
#4
[Align]
Cursor
[Click]
“Magnifying glass”
DRMS4409.ai
Chest wall Opposite

side chest wall side
#2
[Align]
Cursor
Left side
DRMS4407.ai

MC-196
(3) Measure the coordinate on the chest wall side. (4) Measure the coordinate on the opposite chest wall side
Align the Y-coordinate with the position checked in the procedure (1). Input the Align the Y-coordinate with the position checked in the procedure (1). Input the
coordinate value obtained in the measurement in the Excel sheet. coordinate value obtained in the measurement in the Excel sheet.
#3 #1 #2
[Check] [Click] [Check]
X-coordinate Line button X-coordinate
Chest wall Opposite

side chest wall side
#2 #1
[Align] [Align]
Cursor Cursor
#4 #3
[Input] [Input]
X-coordinate value X-coordinate
<Excel sheet (input example)> <Excel sheet (input example)> value

MC-197
(5) Measure the right coordinate. (6) Measure the left coordinate.
Align the X-coordinate with the position checked in the procedure (1). Input the Align the X-coordinate with the position checked in the procedure (1). Input the
coordinate value obtained in the measurement in the Excel sheet. coordinate value obtained in the measurement in the Excel sheet.
#2 #2
[Check] [Check]
Y-coordinate Y-coordinate
Right side
#1
[Align]
Cursor
#1
[Align]
Cursor
Left side
#3 #3
[Input] [Input]
X-coordinate X-coordinate
value value
<Excel sheet (input example)> <Excel sheet (input example)>

MC-198
11.1.3 Preparation (3) Click [Raw Image Transfer Mode ON].
REFERENCES
n Mounting the Compression Plate
- Clicking [Raw Image Transfer Mode ON], the raw image is automatically stored
(1) Mount the 18x24 compression plate (24x30 compression plate for the for every exposure. The raw image is stored in the following folder:
FDR-1000DRLZ). C\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\FDR-1000DRSZ\SYSTEM\192.168.0.101\LOG\
CRCT
(2) Remove the compression plate (plastic plate part). - The raw image file is stored under a different name for each exposure and the
{MC:3.5.3_Compression Plate (Plastic Plate Part)} number in the file name is incremented. The file name always starts with one
of “B”, “D” and “P” and has an extension of “.tdt”.
n Setting the Raw Image Transfer (Example) DG001.tdt
(1) Start up the MUTL. #1 [Click]

{MU:4._MUTL_n Starting Up and Exiting the MUTL} “Raw Image Transfer
<Correct window> Mode ON”
(2) Click [Correct], and display the Correct window.
<MUTL window> #1
[Click]
PC-MUTL (192.168.0.101)
Sequence Mechanical Erase
“Change category”
<Correct window>
#2 DRMS4372E.ai
[Click]
“Correct”
DRMS4371E.ai

MC-199
n Installing the Coordinate Check Software Program (Image J) n Measurement of Marker Position
u NOTE u REFERENCES
Upon completion of the irradiation field adjustment, uninstall the “Image J” which has - The marker appears only on the opposite chest wall side.
been installed in the AWS PC. - The lower end coordinate of the first marker measured in this procedure is used as
analysis data.
(1) Install the “Image J” in a local disk (the C drive for example) of the
AWS PC. (1) Register the exposure conditions via the AWS.
(2) Double-click the “Image J” icon on the desk top to start the program.
AEC: Manual
Target/Filter: Mo/Mo
n Starting the Excel File for Analysis mAs: 50
Focus Spot: H-mode
REFERENCE
Grid: IN
The Excel program is used for data analysis necessary for adjustment of the X-ray
irradiation field. It is recommended that you keep the Excel file in your maintenance
(2) Make exposures.
PC or the like for convenience of workability. (3) Click [File] →[Import] →[Raw] in the Image J menu bar.
(1) Open the Excel file for analysis.
[Click]
Raw
DRMS4373.ai

MC-200
(4) Select the raw image file, and open the file. (5) Magnify the first marker on the opposite chest wall side to an easy-to-
measure size.
u NOTE u
REFERENCE
Selecting the file, the Import window appears. Make the following settings.
- Image Type: 16-bit Unsigned Select the magnifying glass command and left-click the mouse on a point to be
- Width: 4096 pixels magnified. The window is magnified.
- Height: 4988 pixels
- Check “White is Zero” (6) Measure the lower end coordinate (Y-coordinate) of the first marker on
- Check “Little-Endian Byte Order” the opposite chest wall side.
<Import window> REFERENCES
- The first marker is longer than other markers.
“16-bit Unsigned” - Selecting the line command makes the measurement easy as the cursor
appears as a crosshair.
Width: 4096pixels - The coordinate is displayed under the menu bar.
Height: 4988pixels
(6) #1 (5) #1
[Click] [Click]
Line button Magnifying glass button
Check “White is Zero”
Check “Little-Endian (6) #3
Byte Order” [Check]
(5) #2 [Click]
Y-coordinate
Left button of the mouse
* Align the cursor in the vicinity
DRMS4374.ai Right side of the first marker and click.
REFERENCE
First marker
The raw image file is stored in the following folder:
C\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\FDR-1000DRSZ\SYSTEM\192.168.0.101\LOG\
CRCT
(6) #2
File name: (Example) DG001.tdt
Opposite [Align]
chest wall side Cursor
Second
marker
Left side
DRMS4375.ai

MC-201
(7) Input the lower end coordinate (Y-coordinate) of the first marker which 11.1.4 Adjusting the Mo Large Focus and the W Large Focus
is measured in the procedure (6) in the Excel sheet.
u NOTE u
<Input example> Described below are the procedures for adjusting the Mo large focus as an example.
Upon completion of the adjustment of the Mo large focus, adjust the W large focus.
[Input] Read “Moly” as “Tungsten” and “Mo” as “W” in the text for the adjustment.
First marker coordinate Moly→Tungsten
Mo→W
n Collecting Data for Calculating the Relation Between the Set

Value and the Irradiation Field Edge Position
l Data input before changing the setting
DRMS4376.ai

MC-202
(2) Click [Collimator] and enter the Collimator window. (4) Input the set values of Large Moly in the Excel sheet.
u NOTE u u NOTE u
Never click [Enable] of the Collimator Adjust Mode on the Collimator window. The set values appearing on the Details window are displayed in the order
Clicking [Enable] disables the automatic irradiation field adjustment function, and viewed from the X-ray source. Therefore, the values are listed reversely to those
you cannot make the irradiation field adjustment correctly. viewed from the chest wall side. Input the LL (Left) value in the LR cell and LR
(Right) value in the LL cell.
Do not click “Enable”. Do not mix up the LL (Left) value and the LR (Right) value when inputting the
<Collimator window> values in the Excel sheet.
- LV (Front) value → Input in the LV cell.
- LH (Back) value → Input in the LH cell.
- LL (Left) value → Input in the LR cell.
- LR (Right) value → Input in the LL cell.
<Details window> <Display example>
DRMS4377.ai
(3) Click [Details] and enter the Details window. [Input]

Large Moly set value
<Excel sheet>
DRMS4378.ai
(5) Click [Back to Collimator] and return to the Collimator window.

MC-203
l Changing the X-ray irradiation field area (1) (2) Change the set value to locate the X-ray irradiation field area within
As the irradiation field area before changing the set value is usually located outside the exposure area.
the exposure area, you cannot view the edge positions of the irradiation field. Change The set value may be arbitrary. You can determine whether the X-ray irradiation field
the set value to locate the irradiation field edges within the exposure area. area is within the exposure area by the raw image after the exposure. Check the raw
image, and if the X-ray irradiation field area is not within the exposure area, again
(1) Check “Moly large” in Select lamellae to set. change the set value.
<Collimator window> REFERENCES
- Check the raw image via the Image J.
- The number of steps to be changed is as follows when each item in Select step
size is selected and [in] or [out] is clicked:
Single: 1 step
Small: 10 steps
Medium: 50 steps
Large: 100 steps
- If the set value exceeds the minimum value by repetitively clicking [in], the
value returns to the maximum value. If the value is returned to the maximum
value, it does not return to the minimum value by clicking [out].
<Collimator window>
[Check]
“Moly large”
DRMS4379.ai
#2 #1
[Click] [Select]
“in” of each “Select step size”
edge
#2
[Click]
“in” of each edge
DRMS4380.ai

MC-204
(3) Click [Details] and enter the Details window. (7) Measure the coordinates of the respective edges, and input them in
the Excel sheet.
(4) Input the set values of Large Moly after the change in the Excel sheet.
{MC:11.1.2_How to Measure the Coordinates}
<Details window> <Display example> [Input]
Coordinate value
of each edge
<Excel sheet> <Input example>
898 5440 410 6858
DRMS4382.ai
[Input]
<Excel sheet>
DRMS4381.ai
(5) Register the exposure conditions via the AWS.

AEC: Manual
mAs: 50
Focus Spot: H-mode
Grid: IN
(6) Make exposures.

MC-205
l Changing the X-ray irradiation field area (2) (3) Click [Details] and enter the Details window.
Data collection takes place to calculate the correlation showing how far an irradiation (4) Input the set values of Large Moly after the change in the Excel sheet.
field edge moves for an amount of change in the set value. To improve accuracy of the
correlation calculation, coordinate measurement data is desirably n=5 or larger. <Details window> <Display example>
(1) Click [Collimator] and enter the Collimator window.
(2) Click [in] or [out] of each edge, and change the set value of the
irradiation field.
u NOTE u 998 5140 710 6558
Change each set value as much as possible to improve the data accuracy for
position adjustment.
<Collimator window>
[Input]
<Excel sheet>
DRMS4384.ai

#2 #1 Exposure menu: RMI156 (any exposure menu will do)
[Click] [Select] AEC: Manual
“in” or “out” “Select step size” Target/Filter: Mo/Mo
of each edge mAs: 50
Focus Spot: H-mode
Grid: IN
(6) Make exposures.
#2
[Click]
“in” or “out” of
each edge
DRMS4383.ai

MC-206
(7) Measure the coordinates of the respective edges, and input them in n Checking the Data
the Excel sheet.
{MC:11.1.2_How to Measure the Coordinates} (1) Display the graph sheet of the Excel.
[Input] <Excel sheet> <Display example> <Graph sheet>
Coordinate value
<Input example> of each edge
<Excel sheet>
DRMS4385.ai
[Click]
Tab “(figure)”
(8) Repeat the procedures (1) to (7) until the coordinate measurement
data is n=5.
DRMS4387.ai
Measurement data (n=5) DRMS4386.ai

MC-207
(2) Check that each measurement data is approximately on the n Changing the Set Value
approximation curve.
Check all of graphs of “Front”, “Back”, “Left” and “Right”. (1) Display the calculation results (vact) of the Excel sheet.
u INSTRUCTION u <Excel sheet>
If the measurement data largely deviates from the approximation curve, take the
following procedures and check the accuracy of the data.
- Again display the image data of interest and make another measurement.
- Set the irradiation field set values the same as those of the conditions where
the data deviates, make exposures, and again make measurement.
- Change the set values of the irradiation field, make exposures and again make
measurement (to increase the measurement data).
<Display example>
<Display example>
Approximation curve
[Check]
Measurement
data
[Check]
Calculation result (vact)
DRMS4389.ai
DRMS4388.ai
(2) Click [Collimator] of the Zigma Webserver, and enter the Collimator
window.

MC-208
(3) Click [in] or [out] of each edge, and change the set values of the 11.1.5 Adjusting the Mo Small Focus and the W Small Focus
irradiation field to attain the calculation results (vact).
Alternately display the Collimator window and the Details window, and check the u NOTES u
set values. - Adjustment of the Mo small focus and the W small focus is not necessary for a
machine not equipped with the magnification exposure stand.
<Collimator window> #1 - Described below are the procedures for adjusting the Mo small focus as an example.
#2 Upon completion of the adjustment of the Mo small focus, adjust the W small focus.
[Click] [Select]
“Select step size” Read “Moly” as “Tungsten” and “Mo” as “W” in the text for the adjustment.
“in” or “out” Moly→Tungsten
of each edge
Mo→W
n Collecting Data for Calculating the Relation Between the Set

Value and the Irradiation Field Edge Position
#2
[Click] l Data input before changing the setting
“in” or “out”
#3 (1) Carry out preparation.
of each edge
[Click] {MC:11.1.3_Preparation}
“Details”
(2) Mount the magnification exposure stand (option).
{Operation Manual}
<Details window> <Display example> {MU:2._Zigma Webserver_n Starting Up and Exiting the Zigma Webserver}
619 5693 166 7160
#5 #4
[Click] [Check]
“Back to Collimator” Set value
DRMS4390.ai

MC-209
(4) Click [Collimator] and enter the Collimator window. (6) Input the set values of Small Moly in the Excel sheet.
u NOTE u u NOTE u
Never click [Enable] of the Collimator Adjust Mode on the Collimator window. The set values appearing on the Details window are displayed in the order
Clicking [Enable] disables the automatic irradiation field adjustment function, and viewed from the X-ray source. Therefore, the values are listed reversely to those
you cannot make the irradiation field adjustment correctly. viewed from the chest wall side. Input the LL (Left) value in the LR cell and LR
(Right) value in the LL cell.
Do not click “Enable”. Do not mix up the LL (Left) value and the LR (Right) value when inputting the
<Collimator window> values in the Excel sheet.
- LV (Front) value → Input in the LV cell.
- LH (Back) value → Input in the LH cell.
- LL (Left) value → Input in the LR cell.
- LR (Right) value → Input in the LL cell.
<Details window> <Display example>
680 4530 952 6328
DRMS4377.ai
(5) Click [Details] and enter the Details window. [Input]

Small Moly set value
<Excel sheet>
DRMS4394.ai
(7) Click [Back to Collimator] and return to the Collimator window.

MC-210
l Changing the X-ray irradiation field area (1) (2) Change the set value to locate the X-ray irradiation field area within
As the irradiation field area (on the chest wall side) before changing the set value is the exposure area.
usually located outside the exposure area, you cannot view the edge positions of the The set value may be arbitrary. You can determine whether the X-ray irradiation field
irradiation field. Change the set value to locate the irradiation field edges within the area is within the exposure area by the raw image after the exposure. Check the raw
exposure area. image, and if the X-ray irradiation field area is not within the exposure area, again
change the set value.
(1) Check “Moly small” in Select lamellae to set.
REFERENCES
<Collimator window>
- Check the raw image via the Image J.
- The number of steps to be changed is as follows when each item in Select step
size is selected and [in] or [out] is clicked:
Single: 1 step
Small: 10 steps
Medium: 50 steps
Large: 100 steps
- If the set value exceeds the minimum value by repetitively clicking [in], the
value returns to the maximum value. If the value is returned to the maximum
value, it does not return to the minimum value by clicking [out].
<Collimator window>
[Check]
“Moly small”
DRMS4395.ai
#2 #1
[Click] [Select]
“in” of each “Select step size”
edge
#2
[Click]
“in” of each edge
DRMS4380.ai

MC-211
(3) Click [Details] and enter the Details window. (7) Measure the coordinates of the respective edges, and input them in
the Excel sheet.
(4) Input the set values of Small Moly after the change in the Excel sheet.
{MC:11.1.2_How to Measure the Coordinates}
<Details window> <Display example> [Input]
Coordinate value
of each edge
1080 4730 752 6528
DRMS4397.ai
[Input]
<Excel sheet>
DRMS4396.ai

AEC: Manual
mAs: 50
Focus Spot: H-mode
Grid: IN
(6) Make exposures.

MC-212
l Changing the X-ray irradiation field area (2) (3) Click [Details] and enter the Details window.
Data collection takes place to calculate the correlation showing how far an irradiation (4) Input the set values of Small Moly after the change in the Excel sheet.
field edge moves for an amount of change in the set value. To improve accuracy of the
correlation calculation, coordinate measurement data is desirably n=5 or larger. <Details window> <Display example>
(2) Click [in] or [out] of each edge, and change the set value of the
irradiation field. 880 5130 652 6628
u NOTE u
Change each set value as much as possible to improve the data accuracy for
position adjustment.
<Collimator window>
[Input]
<Excel sheet>
DRMS4398.ai

#2 #1 Exposure menu: RMI156 (any exposure menu will do)
[Click] [Select] AEC: Manual
“in” or “out” “Select step size” Target/Filter: Mo/Mo
of each edge
mAs: 50
Focus Spot: H-mode
Grid: IN
#2 (6) Make exposures.

[Click]
each edge
DRMS4383.ai

MC-213
(7) Measure the coordinates of the respective edges, and input them in n Checking the Data
the Excel sheet.
{MC:11.1.2_How to Measure the Coordinates} (1) Display the graph sheet of the Excel.
[Input] <Excel sheet> <Display example> <Graph sheet>
Coordinate value
<Input example> of each edge
<Excel sheet>
DRMS4385.ai
[Click]
Tab “(figure)”
(8) Repeat the procedures (1) to (7) until the coordinate measurement
data is n=5.
DRMS4387.ai
Measurement data (n=5) DRMS4399.ai

MC-214
(2) Check that each measurement data is approximately on the n Changing the Set Value
approximation curve.
Check all of graphs of “Front”, “Back”, “Left” and “Right”. (1) Display the calculation results (vact) of the Excel sheet.
u INSTRUCTION u <Excel sheet>
If the measurement data largely deviates from the approximation curve, take the
following procedures and check the accuracy of the data.
- Again display the image data of interest and make another measurement.
- Set the irradiation field set values the same as those of the conditions where
the data deviates, make exposures, and again make measurement.
- Change the set values of the irradiation field, make exposures and again make
measurement (to increase the measurement data).
<Display example>
<Display example>
Approximation curve
[Check]
Measurement
data
[Check]
Calculation result (vact)
DRMS4400.ai

DRMS4388.ai

MC-215
(3) Click [in] or [out] of each edge, and change the set values of the 11.2 Adjusting the Light Irradiation Field
irradiation field to attain the calculation results (vact).
Alternately display the Collimator window and the Details window, and check the When both of the X-ray irradiation field and the light irradiation field need be adjusted,
set values. make adjustment of the X-ray irradiation field first.
<Collimator window> n Standard Value of the Light Irradiation Field

#2 #1
[Select] The light irradiation field area is located as shown below, in relation to the X-ray
[Click] irradiation field area.
“in” or “out” “Select step size”
of each edge Light irradiation field area
a1 b1
X-ray irradiation
field area
#2
[Click]
“in” or “out”
#3 of each edge
[Click]
“Details” b2
a2
<Details window> <Display example> |a1|+|a2|≤13 mm

|b1|+|b2|≤13 mm
DRMS4402.ai
662 5624 201 6995
#5 #4
[Click] [Check]
“Back to Collimator” Set value
DRMS4401.ai

MC-216
n Adjustment Procedures (5) Check “Light” in Select lamellae to set.
<Collimator window>
u NOTE u
Be sure to adjust the light irradiation field while the compression plate frame is
mounted. It is because the irradiation field size differs between cases where the
compression plate frame is present and absent. Remove the compression plate (plastic
plate part) to eliminate errors in adjustment due to refraction of light.
(1) Mount the 18x24 compression plate (24x30 compression plate for the
FDR-1000DRLZ).
(2) Remove the compression plate (plastic plate part). [Check]
{MC:3.5.3_Compression Plate (Plastic Plate Part)} “Light”

u NOTE u
Never click [Enable] of the Collimator Adjust Mode on the Collimator window.
Clicking [Enable] disables the automatic irradiation field adjustment function, and
you cannot make the irradiation field adjustment correctly. DRMS4403.ai
Do not click “Enable”.

<Collimator window>
DRMS4377.ai

MC-217
(6) Adjust the light irradiation field so that the field is of the same as that REFERENCE
of the exposure frame. An approximate amount of shift of each edge of the light irradiation field is as
Click [in] or [out] of each edge, and change the set values of the irradiation field. follows when each step size is selected. The value refers to an amount of shift of
the light irradiation field when you click [in] or [out] once.
u NOTE u
The amount of shift of the light irradiation field when “Single” is selected is so
Make adjustment of the light irradiation field while viewing the whole field, as an small that the description is omitted.
opposite side to the side to be adjusted moves concurrently.
Opposite chest
Chest wall side Right side Left side
wall side
<Collimator window>
#2 Small Approx. 0.7 Approx. 0.3 Approx. 0.4 Approx. 0.4
#1
[Click] [Select] Medium Approx. 2.5 Approx. 1.8 Approx. 2 Approx. 2
“in” or “out” “Select step size”
of each edge Large Approx. 5 Approx. 3.6 Approx. 4 Approx. 4
Unit: mm
REFERENCE
#2 Clicking [in] or [out], the light irradiation field lamp automatically lights up.
[Click]
each edge
#3
[Check]
Exposure stand
Exposure frame
DRMS4404.ai

MC-218
12. Checking for Image Problems
{IN:27_Checking for Image Problems and Checking the S Value}
REFERENCE
Check the images after the following actions take place.
- Installation of the machine
- Removal/reinstallation of the compression unit
- Updating the software version
- Preventive maintenance

MC-219
13. Jigs
13.1 List of Jigs

REF
Name Appearance PART No. Manufacturer Remarks
No.
Water supply jig Closure hose

(temperature
adjustment unit)
Water supply jig FUJIFILM

1 133Y100033
(for AC100 V) Corporation
Closure joint
(FPD) *1 Used to fill or drain the coolant.
Power supply cable length: Approx. 5 m
DRMS4347.ai The water supply jig does not include the coolant.
{MC:13.2_How to Use the Water Supply Jig}
*1: If the closure joint (FPD) is broken or lost, purchase a
Water supply jig Closure hose closure hose (REF No.3) as a substitute.
Closure joint (FPD) *1 (temperature
adjustment unit)
Water supply jig FUJIFILM

2 133Y100036
(for AC200 V) Corporation
Transformer Adapter
DRMS4348.ai

MC-220
REF
No.
3-2
REF No.3-1
370N100155 Used to close the coolant hose of the FPD. The closure
hose (FPD) is handled as a substitute for the closure joint
Closure hose FUJIFILM (FPD).
3 {MC:13.2.4_Connecting the Closure Hose (FPD
(FPD) Corporation
and Temperature Adjustment Unit)}
REF No.3-2
3-1 316S2094
DRMS4123.ai
Closure hose Used to close the temperature adjustment unit.

FUJIFILM
4 (temperature 370N100156 {MC:13.2.4_Connecting the Closure Hose (FPD
Corporation
adjustment unit) and Temperature Adjustment Unit)}
DRMS4124.ai
3 4
Closure hose FUJIFILM
5 370Y100224 REF Nos. 3 and 4 can be purchased as a set.
assembly Corporation
DRMS4349.ai

MC-221
REF
No.
357Y100257
(*1)
Used to temporarily place the FPD. Also used when
FUJIFILM attaching/detaching the temperature adjustment unit.
6 Stand jig
Corporation *1: For FDR-1000DRSZ
*2: For FDR-1000DRLZ
357Y100270
(*2)
DRMS4255.ai
FUJIFILM Used to attach/detach the FPD. Retaining screws (TP3x6

7 Handle 356Y100836
Corporation (x3)) are included.
DRMS4256.ai
Emergency stop CAUTION
FUJIFILM Used to boot up the system while the right- and left-hand
8 short-circuiting 136Y101179
Corporation side covers are not put on the elevation stand.
cable DRMS4350.ai
Temperature
FUJIFILM Used to circulate the coolant while the temperature
9 adjustment unit 136Y101389
Corporation adjustment unit is removed.
relay cable DRMS4257.ai
Used in “checking/adjusting the compression thickness”

and “sensitivity variation correction factor LUT
adjustment”.
Used to check/adjust the compression thickness.
Four acrylic boards of 10 mm can be used as a substitute
Acrylic board for an acrylic board of 40 mm.
10 (20 mm/40 mm - -
thick) {MC:3.5.1_Checking the Compression Unit}
{MC:3.5.2_Correcting the Compression
Thickness Indication}
DRMS4258.ai
{MC:10.4_Sensitivity Variation Correction
Factor LUT Adjustment}

MC-222
13.2 How to Use the Water Supply Jig  Features
WARNING The water supply jig can fill or drain the coolant in the temperature adjustment unit
reserve tank. The coolant can be filled or drained by changing over the fill/drain dial.
Keep the coolant (bottle) tightly closed in a well-ventilated space.
Avoid direct sunlight or fire. If the coolant is heated, content propylene glycol Water supply jig A
might catch fire due to a rise in temperature.
Coolant bottle
 INSTRUCTION 
Make sure of the following conditions before connecting the power supply cable of the
Fill/drain changeover dial
water supply jig to the outlet.
- The power switch of the water supply jig is OFF.
- The tapped joint is closed.
If the power switch is ON and the tapped joint is opened when the power supply cable
is to be connected to the outlet, the coolant might splash.
 NOTE 
Fill or drain the coolant on a sheet to prevent the coolant from splashing on the Tapped joint
machine or the floor.
If the coolant accidentally attaches to the machine or the floor, immediately wipe it off.
 Components DETAIL A
{MC:13.1_List of Jigs}
Power supply
switch
: OFF
: ON
Power supply cable
DRMS4104.ai

MC-223
 Setting the Fill/Drain Dial  Insertion/Disconnection of the Hose
Described below are the procedures for inserting the hose into the joint and
 For filling disconnecting the hose from the joint. Although the illustrations below show a tapped
joint as an example, the hose can be detached from/attached to the joint of the
reserve tank of the temperature adjustment unit in the similar ways.
 Inserting the hose

Fill/drain dial Insert the hose into the joint all the way in.
Joint Hose
Joint [Insert]
Hose
DRMS4105.ai
 For draining * Push the hose all the way

into the joint (until it stops).
DRMS4107.ai
Fill/drain dial  Disconnecting the hose

Pull out the hose while pushing the open ring toward the joint.
Open ring
#1
[Push]
Open ring Hose
Joint Joint
DRMS4106.ai
* Pull out the hose while

pushing the open ring
toward the joint.
#2
[Pull out]
Hose
DRMS4108.ai

MC-224
13.2.1 Connecting the Water Supply Jig (1) Disconnect the hose (white) from the tapped joint of the water supply
jig.
 NOTE 
 NOTE 
The coolant might drip from the tip of the hose when disconnecting the hose from the
joint. Prepare a paper towel or the like beforehand. The water supply jig has two tapped joints. Do not disconnect a wrong hose.
Otherwise, the coolant cannot be filled/drained normally.
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
Shown below is a simplified view of the connection of the water supply jig.
Connect the water supply jig hose (white), which is disconnected in this step, to
Water supply jig hose (white)
FPD hose (thick) the joint of the reserve tank.
FPD Pump Water supply jig
Cooling unit
Hose disconnecting position
Temperature
adjustment unit
Reserve tank
Hose (blue)
FPD hose (thin)
Hose (white)
Water supply jig
DRMS4346 ai #1
[Disconnect]
Hose (white)
Tapped joint
DRMS4109.ai

MC-225
(2) Disconnect the FPD hose (thin) from the joint of the reserve tank. (3) Connect the hose (white) of the water supply jig which is removed in
REFERENCE
the procedure (1) to the joint of the reserve tank.
Connect the FPD hose (thin), which is disconnected in this step, to the tapped (4) Connect the FPD hose (thin) which is removed in the procedure (2) to
joint of the reserve tank. the tapped joint of the water supply pump.
(1) #1
[Connect]
Water supply jig hose
(white)
Joint of the reserve tank

Reserve tank
Reserve tank
[Disconnect]
FPD hose (thin)
Water supply jig
Tapped joint of
the water supply jig
DRMS4111.ai
(2) #1
[Connect]
FPD hose (thin)
DRMS4110.ai

MC-226
13.2.2 Filling the Coolant (3) Set the fill/drain changeover dial to the fill position.
{MC:13.2_How to Use the Water Supply Jig_n Setting the Fill/Drain Dial}
 NOTE 
(4) Open the two taps of the water supply jig.
Absorb waste coolant in paper and dispose of as burnable garbage.
(1) Connect the water supply jig.

(2) Attach the coolant bottle to the water supply jig.
REFERENCE
When the coolant bottle is to be installed/removed, rotate the bottle. The bottle
cap cannot rotate as the hose is attached.
Hose
[Remove] [Open]
Tapped joint Tap x2
Empty coolant bottle
Water supply jig

Hose
DRMS4113.ai
(5) Turn ON the power of the water supply pump.
[Attach]
Coolant bottle
DRMS4112.ai

MC-227
(6) Check that the coolant is filled to the vicinity of the upper surface of (8) Close the two taps of the water supply jig.
the reserve tank and that there remains no bubble in the hose.
REFERENCE
If the coolant cannot be filled to the vicinity of the upper surface of the reserve
tank, the attachment of the water supply jig might be wrong.
[Check]
Coolant liquid level
Hose
[Close]
Tapped joint Tap x2
DRMS4125.ai
(7) Turn OFF the power of the water supply pump.
Hose
DRMS4114.ai

MC-228
(9) Disconnect the hose (white) of the water supply jig from the joint of (10) Disconnect the FPD hose (thin) from the tapped joint of the water
the reserve tank. supply jig.
 NOTE   NOTE 
The coolant might drip from the tip of the hose when disconnecting the hose from The coolant might drip from the tip of the hose when disconnecting the hose from
the joint. Prepare a paper towel or the like beforehand. the joint. Prepare a paper towel or the like beforehand.
REFERENCE
When the FPD hose is to be disconnected from the tapped joint of the water
supply jig, it is recommended that you disconnect the hose above the joint of the
[Disconnect] reserve tank, to prevent the coolant from dripping.
Hose (white) of
Joint of the Joint of the

reserve tank reserve tank
Tapped joint of
DRMS4116.ai
The coolant may hardly drip
if the reserve tank joint and
the tapped joint of the water
supply jig are at the
approximately same height.
[Disconnect]
FPD hose (thin)
DRMS4115.ai

MC-229
(11) Connect the FPD hose (thin) which is removed in the procedure (10) to (12) Connect the hose (white) of the water supply jig which is removed in
the joint of the reserve tank. the procedure (9) to the tapped joint.
Water supply jig
Hose connecting position

Hose (blue)
Hose (white)
Reserve tank
[Insert]
FPD hose (thin)
#1
DRMS4134.ai
[Insert]
Hose (white)
Tapped joint
DRMS4135.ai

With the power supply of the controller unit turned ON, the coolant starts to circulate.

MC-230
(14) Check the liquid level of the coolant in the reserve tank.
If the coolant liquid level is not good, return to the procedure (1), and again fill the
coolant.
CAUTION
If the liquid level which has been located in the vicinity of the upper surface of
the reserve tank gets lower than the joint of the reserve tank and the liquid level
further continues to lower, leakage is suspected. Immediately turn OFF the
circuit breaker of the controller unit, and check if the leakage occurs.
GOOD NO GOOD
The liquid level of the coolant is higher The liquid level of the coolant is lower
than the joint of the reserve tank. than the joint of the reserve tank.
DRMS4117.ai

MC-231
13.2.3 Draining the Coolant (3) Set the fill/drain changeover dial to the drain position.
{MC:13.2_How to Use the Water Supply Jig_n Setting the Fill/Drain Dial}
 NOTE 
(4) Open the two taps of the water supply jig.
Absorb waste coolant in paper and dispose of as burnable garbage.
 INSTRUCTION 
After the coolant is drained, attach the closure jig (closure hose) according to the
procedures in the manual. The coolant remains in the FPD and the temperature
adjustment unit after the coolant is drained via the water supply jig. To prevent the
coolant remaining in the unit from leaking, the closure jig (closure hose) need be
attached.
(1) Connect the water supply jig.

(2) Attach an empty coolant bottle to the water supply jig.
REFERENCE
Hose
When the coolant bottle is to be installed/removed, rotate the bottle. The bottle
cap cannot rotate as the hose is attached. [Open]
Tapped joint Tap x2
Hose
[Attach] DRMS4113.ai
Empty coolant bottle (5) Turn ON the power of the water supply pump.
(6) When drainage of the coolant in the reserve tank (lowering of the
liquid level) stops, turn OFF the power of the water supply pump.
Water supply jig
REFERENCE
DRMS4118.ai
The coolant in the reserve tank cannot be drained completely.

MC-232
(7) Close the two taps of the water supply jig. (8) Disconnect the FPD hose (thin) from the tapped joint of the water
supply jig.
 NOTE 
The coolant might drip from the tip of the hose when disconnecting the hose from
the joint. Prepare a paper towel or the like beforehand.
Tapped joint of
Hose
[Close]
Tapped joint Tap x2
[Disconnect]
FPD hose (thin)
Hose
DRMS4136.ai
DRMS4114.ai

MC-233
(9) Disconnect the hose of the water supply jig from the joint of the (10) Connect the hose of the water supply jig which is removed in the
reserve tank. procedure (9) to the tapped joint.
 NOTE  Water supply jig
The coolant might drip from the tip of the hose when disconnecting the hose from
the joint. Prepare a paper towel or the like beforehand.
Hose connecting position
Hose (blue)
Hose (white)
#1
Joint of the [Insert]
reserve tank Hose (white)
[Disconnect]
Hose of the water supply jig
(white) DRMS4119.ai
Tapped joint
DRMS4135.ai
(11) Connect the closure hose to the FPD and the temperature adjustment
unit.
{MC:13.2.4_Connecting the Closure Hose (FPD and Temperature Adjustment
Unit)}

MC-234
13.2.4 Connecting the Closure Hose (FPD and Temperature (1) Disconnect the FPD coolant hose (thick) from the joint on the rear of
Adjustment Unit) the temperature adjustment unit.
 NOTE 
n Connection of the Closure Jig (FPD) The coolant might drip from the tip of the hose when disconnecting the hose from
Use the closure hose (FPD) or the closure joint (FPD) to close the FPD. Shown below the joint. Prepare a paper towel or the like beforehand.
are the procedures for the closure hose (FPD) as an example.
Closure hose (FPD) Closure joint (FPD)
[Disconnect]
DRMS4361.ai
REFERENCE
Put on two hose clamps on the closure hose (FPD) before using the hose.
Hose clamp
Joint
DRMS4091.ai
Closure hose (FPD) DRMS4120.ai

MC-235
(2) Pull out the FPD coolant hose (thick) from the temperature adjustment (3) Connect the closure hose (FPD) to the FPD coolant hose.
unit.
Coolant hose (thick) FPD
DETAIL A
#1
[Unclamp] Closure hose
Clamp
Coolant hose (thin)

Temperature adjustment unit [Connect]
Closure hose (FPD)
DRMS4121.ai
#3
[Pull out]
Coolant hose
(thick)
DRMS4092.ai

MC-236
n Connecting the Closure Jig (Temperature Adjustment Unit)
(1) Attach the closure hose (temperature adjustment unit) to the
#1 [Route]
Closure hose B
(temperature
adjustment unit)
A
Temperature
adjustment unit
DETAIL A DETAIL B
Reserve tank #3
Joint of the [Connect]
reserve tank Closure hose
#2
[Connect] Joint on the rear of the
Closure hose temperature adjustment unit
DRMS4122.ai

MC-237
14. Tools Phillips screwdriver No. 1 Phillips screwdriver No. 2
Reference type: NO.6300-1 Reference type: NO.6300-2
14.1 Standard Tools

Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer:
VESSEL VESSEL
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
 NOTE  Remarks:
Remarks:
To service the machine, use the servicing instruments and tools that have been
inspected and calibrated.
been inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be Thin-blade screwdriver Phillips stubby screwdriver
guaranteed. Reference type: NO.110-4 Reference type: NO.135-4
PB PB
Adjustable wrench 150 mm Nippers 150 mm Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Reference type: W-120 Reference type: N-25 Remarks: Remarks:

HOZAN HOZAN
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks: Thin-blade stubby screwdriver High-frequency screwdriver

Reference type: NO.195-2 Reference type: D-29
PB HOZAN
Long-nose pliers 150 mm Pliers 150 mm Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Reference type: P-22 Reference type: JP-200 Remarks: Remarks:

HOZAN HOZAN
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks: Jeweler's screwdriver set Combination box-open-end wrench (5.5 mm)
Reference type: NO.146 Reference type: M41-5.5
ENGINEER KTC
Water pump pliers Tweezers 125 mm Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Reference type: P-245 Reference type: P-87 Remarks: Remarks:

HOZAN HOZAN
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks: Combination box-open-end wrench (7 mm) Combination box-open-end wrench (8 mm)
Reference type: M41-7 Reference type: M41-8
FDRMS4126.ai Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer:

KTC KTC
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks:
DRMS4127.ai

MC-238
Combination box-open-end wrench (10 mm) Combination box-open-end wrench (13 mm) Steel rule (150 mm) Steel rule (300 mm)
Reference type: M41-10 Reference type: M41-13 Reference type: Type C Reference type: Type C
Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer:
KTC KTC YAMAYO YAMAYO
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks: Remarks: Remarks:

Inspection required Inspection required
Allen wrench set Midget ratchet set Steel tape measure (5.5 m) Soldering iron (30W)
Reference type: BLX-9 Reference type: 7331 Reference type: WS5005 Reference type: Dash15

Boudhus CHAPMAN NEOLOCK HAKKO
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks: Remarks: Remarks:
Digital multimeter Crimp pliers Solder Desoldering tool with a vacuum attachment
Reference type: CD731 Reference type: P-73 Reference type: NO.66 Reference type: US140
SANWA HOZAN HAKKO EDSYN
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Inspection and Remarks: Remarks: Remarks:

calibration required
Wire stripper Scissors Adapter plug Penlight

Reference type: P-95 Reference type: - Reference type: 999-1 Reference type: BF-318
HOZAN Any commercially available one HAKKO MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks: Remarks:

Remarks:
Cutter Calipers Loupe Blower

Reference type: - Reference type: N-15 Reference type: 10X Reference type: JUMBO
Any commercially available one Mitutoyo PEAK HURRICANE
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks:Inspection required Remarks: Remarks:

A block gauge for use in
inspection requires calibration.

MC-239
14.2 Special Tools and Measuring Instruments
Cloth Wristband
Reference type: - Reference type: -  NOTE 
Reference manufacturer: - Reference manufacturer: - To service the machine, use the servicing instruments and tools that have been
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 inspected and calibrated.
Remarks: Remarks:
been inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be
guaranteed.
Push-pull gauge Dosimeter

Vacuum cleaner Maintenance PC
Reference type: - Reference type:
Reference type: - Reference type:
Reference manufacturer: - Reference manufacturer:
Reference manufacturer:
Reference manufacturer: -
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1 Any commercially available one
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: For 1kg. Remarks: Calibration required
Inspection and calibration Remarks: Remarks:
required
DRMS4130.ai
Dust-free paper
Reference type: Kimwipe
CRECIA
Qty.: 1
Remarks:
DRMS4131.ai

MC-240
14.3 Special Consumables 14.4 Semi-Standard Tools
Semi-standard tools are tools that are not needed normally, but improve ease of
Electrical tape Cable tie servicing when available.
Reference type: 33+ Reference type: PLT1M
Reference manufacturer: Box driver (7 mm) Box driver (8 mm)
Reference manufacturer: 3M KITAGAWA KOGYO
Reference type: D-50 (2757) Reference type: D-50 (2758)
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 50
Remarks: Remarks: HOZAN HOZAN
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks:
Cable tie Cable tie

Reference type: PLT1.5M Reference type: PLT2M
Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer: IC clip IC clip
KITAGAWA KOGYO KITAGAWA KOGYO
Reference type: TC-16 Reference type: TC-24
Qty.: 50 Qty.: 50
Reference manufacturer: 3M Reference manufacturer: 3M
Remarks: Remarks:
Qty.: 1 Qty.: 1
Remarks: Remarks:
Screw locking bond Lubricant

Reference type: #1401B Reference type: Molykote
EM-30L Magnetized Phillips screwdriver Closed wrench (17 mm)
Three Bond
Reference manufacturer: Reference type: Reference type:
Qty.: 1
Qty.: 1 Reference manufacturer: Reference manufacturer:
Remarks:
Remarks: Qty.: 1 Qty.: 2
Remarks: Remarks:
DRMS4132.ai
DRMS4133.ai

MC-241
BLANK PAGE

MC-242
BLANK PAGE

MC-243
BLANK PAGE

Control Sheet
09.30.2008 01(1) Release for manual DR (FM5466) All pages
10.20.2008 01(1) New Release (FM5466) All pages
FDR MS-1000 Service Manual 05.20.2009

03.14.2011
02(1)
03
Revision (FM5550)
Revision
All pages
All pages
Service Parts List (SP)

SP-1
How to Use ● Fault RANK characters (which

provide reference for determining the
■ PART NUMBER
PART NUMBER is a code number that is
■ REFER TO
The "REFER TO" column shows reference
Service Parts List recom-mended stock quantity) unique to each part. An alphabetic letter at
the rightmost position of the code number
sections concerning the part.Clicking
All parts are assigned with one of the reference section in the "REFER
has the following meaning. TO" column jumps to the top page of
characters A through E.
■ RANK Character Significance the reference section where the related
○ For hardware
Consumable parts or parts The alphabet denotes the version number information is in.
● Handling RANK characters (parts A that will be replaced at short of a part. If parts have different version
that are handled in a special intervals. ■ Quantities of recommended spare
numbers, they are upward-compatible.
manner during parts operation, Parts that may become faulty
○ For software parts
such as management) B accidentally and have a
The alphabet denotes a difference in the It is recommended as a rough guide to hold
relatively high failure rate.
Character Under Warranty Out of Warranty Parts that have a sufficiently long
specifications. Parts differing in the suffix in stock a certain quantity of parts according
R Must be returned. Repairable C MTBF, but are expected to have are not compatible with each other. Version to the rank (A, B, C, D, E) assigned to the
Must be returned. a relatively high failure rate. number is omitted in the list. parts, as follows. For periodically replaced
Q (We use for Not repairable Parts that have a sufficiently parts, hold them in stock separately. Adjust
analysis.) D long MTBF, but are expected to ■ PART NAME the stock quantity of service parts depending
become faulty. PART NAME represents a general name of
Must Not be on the number of working units (N).
returned. Parts that are necessary for fault a part. Quantity used in a single system : Q
(Consumable analysis, or parts that may be
E needed in case of unexpected ■ QTY. ○N=1
T part. Not Not repairable
accidents such as man-induced ○ QTY. denotes the quantity of parts used Rank A ＝ 1 ＋ Q × 0.3
applicable to
free-of-charge damage. in each unit. Rank C ＝ 1 ＋ Q × 0.05
warranty.) Rank D ＝ 1 ＋ Q × 0.02
<The RANK guide> ○ A part whose quantity is suffixed with -S
without Must Not be The Fault RANK characters, Handling represents a small part that is shipped in ○ 2 ≦ N ≦ 10
Not repairable
R, Q, T returned. RANK characters, and Export regulation- packs of 50. (Even if such a part is ordered Rank A ＝ 2 ＋ N × Q × 0.3
applicable character are assigned in that in quantity of 1, a pack containing 50 pieces Rank C ＝ 2 ＋ N × Q × 0.05
● Export regulation-applicable order. of that part is supplied.) Rank D ＝ 2 ＋ N × Q × 0.02
character(Parts with the following Thus, at least one character or up to three
■ REMARKS ○ 11 ≦ N ≦ 300
character are controlled by Export characters are assigned in the RANK
Rank A ＝ 3 ＋ N × Q × 0.3
The REMARKS column indicates a unique
regulation.) column.
Rank C ＝ 3 ＋ N × Q × 0.05
name of a part or relevant information of
Character Significance ■ REF.NO. each part. Rank D ＝ 2 ＋ N × Q × 0.02
Parts applicable to export
＋
regulations.
REF. NO. is a part number indicated in the ■ SERIAL NUMBER ■ Precautions to be Observed When
Service Parts Exploded Views. For parts The units may contain different parts Returning Parts for Repair
having different functions, they are clearly depending on their shipment control number.
distinguished in the REMARKS and SERIAL When returning a component for repair,
SERIAL NUMBER indicates the shipment
NUMBER columns. pack it in the same manner as for the
control number to which the relevant parts
supplied substitute, using the substitute
are applicable. If the SERIAL NUMBER
packing materials.
column is blank, the parts are applicable to
The use of different packing materials or
all the relevant units. The shipment control
packing methods may incur damage to
number is represented by lower five digits
packed component during transit.
of eight-digit number indicated on the rating
indication label.
019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual SP-1

SP-2
INDEX
INDEX 01
● カバー
COVER
INDEX 02
● マンモユニット
MAMMO UNIT
INDEX 03
● 制御部
CONTROLLER UNIT
INDEX 04
● その他
OTHERS
INDEX 05
● 治具
JIG
INDEX 06
● ケーブル
CABLE
INDEX 07
● 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
INDEX 08
● 部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
INDEX 09
● 締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
019-201-03C FDR MS-1000 Service Manual SP-2

SP-3
01A カバー 1
COVER 1
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
Elevation Stand
昇降スタンド
E 1 W11G10415588 Right-Hand Side 1
右側面カバー
Cover
昇降スタンド Elevation Stand Left-
E 2 W11G10415589 1
左側面カバー Hand Side Cover
昇降スタンド Elevation Stand Top
E 3 W11G10140032 1
上カバー Cover
昇降スタンド Elevation Stand Rear
E 4 W11G10140033 1
背面カバー Cover
D 5 W11G10140036 ディスプレイカバー Display Cover 1
D 6 W11G10140034 ベースカバー Base Plate Cover 1
ディスプレイボード Display Board
C 7 W11G10139907 1
アセンブリ（D903） Assembly (D903)
Emergency Stop
D 8 W11G10139846 緊急停止スイッチ 2
Switch
D 9 W11G06343144 フェイスガード Face Guard 1

SP-4
01B カバー 2
COVER 2
FPD Right-Hand
FPD 右カバー
D 1 350Y100950A Cover 1
（右アームレスト）
(Right-Hand Armrest)
D 2 350N100868C FPD 下カバー FPD Lower Cover 1 For FDR-1000DRSZ
D 3 376N100016A エアフィルタ Air Filter 1
D 4 360N100074G フィルタカバー Filter Cover 1
C 5 W11G10415617 操作パネル Control Panel 2
FPD 左カバー FPD Left-Hand Cover
D 6 350Y100949A 1
（左アームレスト） (Left-Hand Armrest)
D 7 376N100021A エアフィルタ Air Filter 1 For FDR-1000DRSZ
D 8 376N100023B エアフィルタ Air Filter 1
D 9 350N100930B カバー（左） Cover (Left) 1
D 10 350N100931B カバー（右） Cover (Right) 1
スイベルアーム
D 11 W11G10415612 Swivel Arm Top Cover 1
上カバー
スイベルアーム Swivel Arm Right-
D 12 350Y100861B 1
右側面カバー Hand Side Cover
D 13 350Y100931D 1 For FDR-1000DRSZ
右前面カバー Hand Front Cover
スイベルアーム Swivel Arm Lower
D 14 W11G10415613 1
下カバー Cover
スイベルアーム Swivel Arm Left-Hand
D 15 W11G10415615 1 For FDR-1000DRSZ
左前面カバー Front Cover
D 16 W11G10415616 1
左側面カバー Side Cover
D 17 405N101115 銘板 Label 1
D 18 350N101267 FPD 下カバー FPD Lower Cover 1 For FDR-1000DRLZ
D 19 376N100039 エアフィルタ Air Filter 1 For FDR-1000DRLZ
D 20 350Y100930C 1 For FDR-1000DRLZ
右前面カバー Hand Front Cover
D 21 350Y100929C 1 For FDR-1000DRLZ
左前面カバー Front Cover

SP-5
02A マンモユニット 1
MAMMO UNIT 1
For FDR-1000DRSZ,
クーラント（250ml）
Flat Panel Detector
CR 1 848Y100054F 平面検出器（FPD） 1 含む／
(FPD)
Coolant (250ml) is
included.
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
CR 2 113Y1970C 1
XIF51A XIF51A
Temperature 含む／
CR 3 379Y100034E/F 温度調整ユニット 1
Adjustment Unit Coolant (250ml) is
included.
A 4 359Y100048 クーラント Coolant 2
For FDR-1000DRSZ,
C 5 350Y100820L カーボンカバー Carbon Cover 1 スイッチ含む／
Switch is included.
For FDR-1000DRSZ,
スイッチ含まない／
D 6 350Y100595L カーボンカバー Carbon Cover 1
Switch is not
included.
D 7 119Y100028B ファン Fan 2 *1
For FDR-1000DRLZ,
Flat Panel Detector
CR 8 848Y100065B 平面検出器（FPD） 1 含む／
(FPD)
Coolant (250ml) is
included.
For FDR-1000DRLZ,
C 9 350Y101006A カーボンカバー Carbon Cover 1 スイッチ含む／
Switch is included.
For FDR-1000DRLZ,
D 10 350Y101005 カーボンカバー Carbon Cover 1 スイッチ含まない／
Switch is not included.
E 11 370Y100306 ホースアセンブリ Hose Assembly 1
48V/1A
A 12 137S1417 ヒューズ Fuse １
For XIF51A F600
CR 13 113Y1952F 1
PTC51A PTC51A
*1: FDR-1000DRLZ には 3 個使用／ Use 3 pcs for FDR-1000DRLZ

SP-6
02B マンモユニット 2（FDR-1000DRSZ）

MAMMO UNIT 2 (FDR-1000DRSZ)
C 1 W11G10501290 圧迫ユニット Compression Unit 1
圧迫ユニット Compression Unit
E 2 W11G10140045 1
前面カバー front Cover
C 3 W11G10415626 グリッドアセンブリ Grid Assembly 1
Standard
D 5.1 W11G10139950 圧迫板 Compression Plate 1
18x24 (Low)
Standard
D 5.2 W11G10139952 圧迫板 Compression Plate 1
18x24 (High)
D 6 350N101272 カバー Cover 2
18x24圧迫板（Low）
圧迫板（プラスチッ Compression Plate 用／
D 7.1 W11G10139940 1
クプレート部） (Plastic plate) For Compression
Plate 18x24 (Low)
18x24 圧迫板（High）
D 7.2 W11G10139942 1
Plate 18x24 (High)
・角型スポット圧迫
板用／
For Compression
Plate, Rectangle
圧迫板（プラスチッ Compression Plate Spot
D 7.3 W11G10139970 1
クプレート部） (Plastic plate) ・拡大角型スポット
圧迫板用／
For Compression
Plate, Rectangle
Spot Magnification
腋窩撮影用圧迫板用
圧迫板（プラスチッ Compression Plate ／ For Compression
D 7.4 W11G10139972 1
クプレート部） (Plastic plate) Plate for Axilla
Radiography
拡大撮影用圧迫板用
圧迫板（プラスチッ Compression Plate
D 7.5 W11G10139943 1 ／ For Compression
クプレート部） (Plastic plate)
Plate for Magnification
2D バイオプシ
圧迫板（プラスチッ Compression Plate 圧迫板用
D 7.6 W11G10139824 1
クプレート部） (Plastic plate) ／ For Compression
Plate, 2D Biopsy
圧迫ユニット Compression Unit
D 8 W11G10415618 1
左側面カバー Left-Hand Side Cover
Compression Unit
圧迫ユニット
D 9 W11G10415619 Right-Hand Side 1
右側面カバー
Cover

SP-7
02C マンモユニット 3（FDR-1000DRLZ）

MAMMO UNIT 3 (FDR-1000DRLZ)
C 1 W11G10501290 圧迫ユニット Compression Unit 1
圧迫ユニット前面カ Compression Unit
E 2 W11G10140045 1
バー front Cover
C 3 W11G10415596 グリッドアセンブリ Grid Assembly 1
Standard 24x30
D 5 W11G10139964 圧迫板 Compression Plate 1
(Low)
D 6 350N101272 カバー Cover 2
18x24 圧迫板（Low）
D 7.1 W11G10139940 1
Plate 18x24 (Low)
D 7.2 W11G10139942 1
Plate 18x24 (High)
・角型スポット圧迫
板用／
For Compression
Plate, Rectangle
圧迫板（プラスチッ Compression Plate Spot
D 7.3 W11G10139970 1
クプレート部） (Plastic plate) ・拡大角型スポット
圧迫板用／
For Compression
Plate, Rectangle
Spot Magnification
腋窩撮影用圧迫板用
D 7.4 W11G10139972 1
クプレート部） (Plastic plate) Plate for Axilla
Radiography
拡大撮影用圧迫板用
D 7.5 W11G10139943 1
クプレート部） (Plastic plate) Plate for
Magnification
2D バイオプシ圧迫
圧迫板（プラスチッ Compression Plate 板用
D 7.6 W11G10139824 1
クプレート部） (Plastic plate) ／ For Compression
Plate, 2D Biopsy
24x30 圧迫板（Low）
D 7.7 W11G10139974 1
Plate 24x30 (Low)
D 7.8 W11G10139944 1
Plate 24x30 (High)
圧迫ユニット左側面 Compression Unit
D 8 W11G10415618 1
カバー Left-Hand Side Cover
Compression Unit
圧迫ユニット右側面
D 9 W11G10415619 Right-Hand Side 1
カバー
Cover

SP-8
02D マンモユニット 4
MAMMO UNIT 4
C 1 W11G10141960 シングルタンク Single Tank Unit 1
C 2 W11G10139621 コリメータ Collimator 1
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly MFI
C 3 W11G10139931 1
MFI (D910) (D910)
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly CBA
C 4 W11G10501291 2
CBA (D905) (D905)
E 5 W11G07061989 ファン Fan 1

SP-9
02E マンモユニット 5
MAMMO UNIT 5
D 1 W11G10415592 昇降モータドライバ Motor Inverter Lift 1
D 2 W11G10139779 回転モータドライバ Motor Inverter Rotate 1
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly CBS
C 3 W11G10501292 1
CBS (D900) (D900)
Power Supply Unit
C 4 W11G10139644 電源部（PSU） 1
(PSU)
C 5 W11G03082146 電池 LITHIUM BATTERY 1 CR2032 3V
E 6 356Y100803 ブラケット Bracket 1
D 7 FW11G10415593 昇降モータ Motor Lift 1

SP-10
03A 制御部 1
CONTROLLER UNIT 1
D 1 345N1823D ルーバ Louver 6
D 2 376N0238 エアフィルタ Air Filter 3
D 3 317N100022B キャップ Cap 6
D 4 351Y100004F カバー Cover 1

SP-11
03B 制御部 2
CONTROLLER UNIT 2
CR 1 113Y1980A 1
MIF51A MIF51A
CR 2 113Y1963D 1
MPI51A MPI51A
CR 3 113Y1964B 2 For FDR-1000DRSZ
CPS51B CPS51B
メモリカード
Memory Card
C 4 114N100013 （コンパクトフラッ 1 For FDR-1000DRSZ
(CF Card)
シュカード）
C 5 113Y1977A 1
CFI51A CFI51A
*1
C 6 113N100091/A/B メモリボード Memory Board 1
DIMM 1GB
CR 7 814Y100132A/B/C CPU51A（マザー CPU51A 1
ボード） (Motherboard)
CR 8 113Y1965C 1
PAT51A PAT51A
C 9 113Y1962D 1
IND51A IND51A
48V/0.5A
A 10 137S1456 ヒューズ FUSE 1
for MPI51A F302
48V/2A
for PAT51A F1, F8, F9
125V/20A
for PAT51A F2
125V/10A
for PAT51A F3, F10
48V/1A
for PAT51A F4
48V/5A
for PAT51A F6, F7
CR 16 113Y100273C 3 For FDR-1000DRLZ
CPS51C CPS51C
メモリカード
Memory Card
C 17 114N100026 （コンパクトフラッ 1 For FDR-1000DRLZ
(CF Card)
シュカード）
*1: FDR-1000DRLZ には 2 個使用／ Use 2 pcs for FDR-1000DRLZ

SP-12
03C 制御部 3
CONTROLLER UNIT 3
D 1 119S0043 ファン FAN 3
E 2 350N2774C カバー Cover 4
ナット
E 3 305N100033 Nut (Anchor Bolt) 4
（アンカーボルト）
CR 4 125Y100032 電源 Power Supply 1 Alpha II 650
D 5 135S0829 端子台 Terminal Block 1 TB2
D 6 135Y100008 端子台 Terminal Block 1 TB1
D 7 128S1088 スイッチ Switch 1
C 8 113Y1979A 1
NFB51A NFB51A
E 9 304S1000820 ボルト Bolt 4
E 10 309S0220008 ばね座金 Spring Washer 4
E 11 309S0120008 平座金 Washer 4
E 12 *** ケーブル Cable * Refer to INDEX06
E 13 370N100272 スペーサ Spacer 4

SP-13
04A その他（付属品）
OTHERS (ACCESSORIES)
1 DETAIL A D 1 W11G10415606 コントロールパッド Control Pad 1
コントロールパッド
E 2 W11G10139656 Control Pad Cable 1
ケーブル
1 セット＝右＋左／
D 3 W11G10139755 フットスイッチ Foot Switch 1
1set=right+left
D 4 357Y100226A 操作卓 Operation Desk 1
D 5 350Y100935B サイドカバー Side Cover 2
D 6 350Y100933C フロントカバー Front Cover 1
A 2 E 7 304S1000820 ボルト Bolt 2

E 8 309S0220008 ばね座金 Spring Washer 2
E 9 309S0120008 平座金 Washer 2
E 10 305N100033 ナット Nut 2
E 11 W11G14409787 曝射スイッチ Exposure Switch 1
E 12 120S5268 テーブルタップ Power Strip 1 For Japan
3
4
C
DETAIL B DETAIL C
5
5
7
8
9
10
6
12
11
DRMS605.pdf

SP-14
04B その他（オプション：ステレオ撮影キット）
OTHERS (OPTION: STEREO EXPOSURE KIT)
D 1 350Y101608 カバー Cover 1 For 18x24
D 2 350Y101609 カバー Cover 1 For 24x30
For 24x30
D 3 350Y101550 アームレスト L Arm rest L 1 ( 軽量版／
Lightweight version)
For 24x30
D 4 350Y101551 アームレスト R Arm rest R 1 ( 軽量版／
Lightweight version)
E 5 356N104378B ブラケット Bracket 1
E 6 136Y102382C ケーブル Cable 1
E 7 356N104569 ブラケット Bracket 1
D 8 350Y101589 カバー Cover 1
E 9 356N104614C ブラケット Bracket 1
E 10 136Y102395B ケーブル Cable 1
E 11 136Y102826A ケーブル Cable 1
E 12 136Y102825A ケーブル Cable 1
E 13 350N101834A カバー Cover 1
E 14 136N100143 導電板 Bracket 2
E 15 356N105032 ブラケットナット Bracket 2
E 16 316S0256 クランプ Clamp 1
A 17 316S1082 束線部品 Tie 1
E 18 308S0414 六角頭ＴＰねじ Screw 1 TP3x6
E 19 308S9780612 六角頭ねじ Screw 1 BR6x12
E 20 301S7000310 ねじ (SUS) Screw 1 S3x10(SUS)
Stereo Exposure
D 21 358Y100111A ステレオ撮影プラグ 1
Plug

SP-15
04C その他（オプション：車載キット ※日本以外向け）

OTHERS (OPTION: MOBILE KIT *FOR OTHER THAN JAPAN)
1.1 ブラケットアセンブ Wall Retaining
E 1 356Y101132A Bracket Assy 1
1 リ Bracket
2 E 1.1 346N100689 補助板 Auxiliary Plate 1
E 1.2 356N104719 ブラケット Bracket 1
2.1
E 1.3 346N100690 補助板 Auxiliary Plate 1
トップカバーアセン
D 2 350Y101488 Top Cover Assy 1
ブリ
1.2 E 2.1 316S4016 ファスナ Stud 4 M6-12(Snap screw)
E 2.2 315S0057 止め輪 Retainer 4
D 3 350N101744B コリメータカバー Collimator Cover 1
2.2 E 4 386Y100040 緩衝機材アセンブリ Shock Absorber Assy 1
1.3 E 4.1 386N100337A 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 1
E 4.2 386N100336A 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 1
E 5 316S2106 ベルト Belt 1
モニタブラケットア
E 6 356Y101134B Monitor Bracket Assy 1
センブリ
PC ブラケットアセ
E 7 356S1138 PC Bracket Assy 1
ンブリ
4.1* 6
4.2*
4.3*
4.4*
*4 = 4.1 + 4.2 + 4.3 + 4.4 5
DRMS605B.ai

SP-16
05 治具
JIG
クーラントは含まな
給水治具 Water Supply Jig
E 1.1 133Y100033A 1 い／ Coolant is not
（AC100V 用） (For AC100V)
included.
・クーラントは含ま
ない／ Coolant is
not included.
給水治具 Water Supply Jig ・アダプタ、トラン
E 1.2 133Y100036A 1
（AC200V 用） (For AC200V) スフォーマを含
む／ Adaptor and
transformer are
included.
E 2 357Y100257 スタンド Stand Jig 1 For FDR-1000DRSZ
・左右 1 セット／
One set includes
the left and right
handles.
E 3 356Y100836 取手 Handle 1
・取付ネジ（TP3 x 6）
1.1 含む／ Retaining
screws (TP3 x 6)
are included.
緊急停止ショート Emergency Stop
E 4 136Y101179 1
治具ケーブル Short-Circuit Cable
Temperature
温度調整ユニット
E 5 136Y101389 adjustment unit relay 1
中継治具ケーブル
cable
E 6 370N100155 閉栓ホース（FPD） Closure Hose (FPD) 1
E 7 316S2094 クランプ Clamp 2
Closure Hose
閉栓ホース
E 8 370N100156 (Temperature 1
（温度調整ユニット）
1.2 Adjustment Unit)
Closure Hose
E 9 370Y100224 閉栓ホースアセンブリ 1
Assembly
E 10 357Y100270 スタンド Stand Jig 1 For FDR-1000DRLZ
2,10
3
CAUTION
CAUTION
4 5
6
8
7 7
DRMS609.pdf

SP-17
06 ケーブル
CABLE
CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM *2
E 1 136Y101145 ケーブル Cable 1 5/11,9/11
E 2 136Y101146 ケーブル Cable 1 5/11,8/11
E 3 136Y101152 ケーブル Cable 1 3/11,8/11,9/11,11/11
E 4 136Y101153 ケーブル Cable 1 5/11
E 5 136Y101180A ケーブル Cable 1 2/11
E 6 136Y101181A ケーブル Cable 1 2/11
E 7 136Y101183 ケーブル Cable 1 For Alpha II 650 2/11,3/11
E 8 136Y101184A ケーブル Cable 1 For Alpha II 650 2/11,3/11
E 11 136Y101187 ケーブル Cable 1 4/11
E 12 136Y101189 ケーブル Cable 1 3/11
E 13 136Y101190A ケーブル Cable 1 4/11,5/11
E 14 136Y101191 ケーブル Cable 1 4/11,5/11
E 15 136Y101192 ケーブル Cable 1 4/11,5/11
E 16 136Y101193 ケーブル Cable 1 4/11,6/11
E 17 136Y101194 ケーブル Cable 1 4/11,6/11
E 18 136Y101195A ケーブル Cable 1 4/11
E 19 136Y101196 ケーブル Cable 1 5/11
E 20 136Y101197 ケーブル Cable 1 5/11
E 21 136Y101198 ケーブル Cable 1 6/11
E 22 136Y101199C ケーブル Cable 1 6/11
E 23 136Y101200B ケーブル Cable 1 11/11
E 24 136Y101202B/C ケーブル Cable 1 2/11
E 25 136Y101382A ケーブル Cable 1 2/11
E 26 136Y101383 ケーブル Cable 1 2/11
E 27 136Y101384 ケーブル Cable 1 2/11
E 28 136Y101385B ケーブル Cable 1 5/11
E 29 136Y101386 ケーブル Cable 1 11/11
E 30 136Y101387D ケーブル Cable 1 11/11
E 31 136Y101533 ケーブル Cable 1 2/11
*1 ケーブルは FDR-1000DRSZ と FDR-1000DRLZ で共通
The cables for FDR-1000DRSZ and FDR-1000DRLZ the same.
*2 FDR-1000DRSZ の場合は「07A 回路図」を参照し、FDR-1000DRLZ の場合は「07B 回路図」を参照すること
Refer to the “07A CIRCUIT DIAGRAM” for FDR-1000DRSZ / the “07B CIRCUIT DIAGRAM” for FDR-1000DRLZ.

SP-16
07A 回路図（For FDR-1000 DRSZ）

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (For FDR-1000 DRSZ)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
シスム電
設置時冶具ハーネス Power supply 温調電源PTC基板用 136Y101183
A ＡｌｐｈａⅡ６５０ A
Slot4 Slot4_GND 1 +24V_GND 橙 ORN
136Y101179 S_Slot4_24VG1 3
2 +24V_GND 橙 ORN
S_Slot4_24VG2 3
STOP_L 1 1 STOP_R
2 2 Slot4_24V 1 +24V 赤 RED
S_Slot4_24V1 3
2 +24V 赤 RED
S_Slot4_24V2 3
オプション（25ｍ） S_Slot1
136Y101389
B
1 1 EXT_1 Slot1 Slot1_GND 1 +24V_GND 橙 ORN
B
136Y101178 ※組図No.136Y101532 EXT_2 S_Slot1_24VG1 3
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6 6 2 +24V_GND 橙 ORN
S_Slot1_24VG2 3
2 2
1 L 1 7 7
L1 Slot1_24V 1 +24V 赤 RED
1 N 1 3 3 S_Slot1_24V1 3
N2 2 +24V 赤 RED
1 E 1 8 8 S_Slot1_24V2 3
FG2
4 4
9 9 システム電源各基板用
5 5
C
10 10 C
システム電源CPU基板用
136Y101184
Slot2 Slot2_GND
S_Slot2 1 +5V_GND 橙 ORN
S_Slot2_5VG1 3
2 +5V_GND 橙 ORN
S_Slot2_5VG2 3
オプション（15ｍ）
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Slot2_5V 1 +5V 赤 RED
136Y101201 ※組図No.136Y101531 S_Slot2_5V1 3
TB１ 2 +5V 赤 RED
S_Slot2_5V2 3
(MBK6/E-Z-4P)
D L 黒 BLK L D
L 1 1 1
1 N 1 1 白 WHT N 136Y101185
N
1 E 1 1 緑/黄 E Slot3
FG Slot3_GND 1 +12V_GND 橙 ORN
S_Slot3_12VG1 3
2 +12V_GND 橙 ORN
S_Slot3_12VG2 3
S_Slot3
136Y101382 Slot3_12V 1 +12V 赤 RED
S_Slot3_12V1 3
136Y101383 2 +12V 赤 RED
S_Slot3_12V2 3
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
136Y101384
E システム電源CPU基板用 E
TB2 136Y101186
丸端子端子台
SLOT1_5VSB 灰 GRY
S_Slot1_5VSB 3
ブレーカー SLOT1_CNT 灰 GRY
TB2-LOUT TB1-L S_Slot1_CNT 3
1 L 1 1 L 黒 BLK (SER-F-11-62F-3A-BWT) SLOT2_5VSB 灰 GRY
L_X S_Slot2_5VSB 3
SLOT2_CNT 灰 GRY
NFB_IN S_Slot2_CNT 3
TB2-L SLOT3_5VSB 灰 GRY
1 L 黒 BLK 黒 BLK L 1 NFB51A S_Slot3_5VSB 3
SLOT3_CNT 灰 GRY
N2 136Y101181 113N1979 S_Slot3_CNT 3
F F
TB2-NOUT TB1-N NFB_OUT NFB1 NFB2 136Y101202
1 N 1 1 N 白 WHT
N_X 1 L 黒 BLK 1 1
TB2-N 2 2 3 AC_IN
1 N 白 WHT 白 WHT N白 WHT 3 2 L 黒 BLK 1 SCN1 1
4 N 白 WHT 2 2
TB2-EOUT TB1-E
E E 黄/緑 3
FG_X 1 1 1 E 緑/黄 1 +5Vｽﾀﾝﾊﾞｲ電源用
AC_E 4
TB2-E 5
1 E 緑/黄 E 6
G ファストン端子 G
BTB50C3 136Y101180 FG_POW

1
1
136Y101381 ※組図No.136Y101533 FG_OUT
機種 5010 ユニット -
H 名称回路図補助名称 MARS[18x24] H
コード Z22N5010000E Rev. -

頁
富士フイルム株式会社 2
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-17

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
制御部背面中継コネクタ
部
A A A
N
PAT51A 4
-
136Y101183
136Y101152
橙 ORN +24V_GND 1 PAT1 136Y101189
2 S_Slot4_24VG1
赤 RED +24V 5
2 S_Slot4_24V1 CN1-P CN1-J
橙 ORN +24V_GND 2
2 S_Slot4_24VG2 PAT11 1 橙 ORN +24V_P1 1 1 白 WHT +24V_P1
赤 RED +24V 6 SND_+24V1 8
B 2 S_Slot4_24V2 6 橙 ORN GND_P1 6 6 青 BLU GND_P1 B
橙 ORN +24V_GND 3 SND_GND1 8
2 S_Slot1_24VG1 2 橙 ORN +24V_P2 2 2 赤 RED +24V_P2
赤 RED +24V 7 SND_+24V2 8
2 S_Slot1_24V1 7 橙 ORN GND_P2 7 7 灰 GRY GND_P2
2 S_Slot1_24VG2 3 橙 ORN +24V_A 3 3 黒 BLK +24V_A
赤 RED +24V 8 TRC_+24V 9
2 S_Slot1_24V2 8 橙 ORN GND_A 8 8 茶 BRN GND_A
TRC_GND 9
4 橙 ORN +24V_T1 4 4 緑 GRN +24V_T1
PTC_+24V1 11
9 橙 ORN +24V_T2 9 9 黄 YEL +24V_T2
PTC_+24V2 11
5 橙 ORN GND_T1 5 5 橙 ORN GND_T1
PTC_DGND1 11
10 橙 ORN GND_T2 10 10 桃 PIK GND_T2
PTC_DGND2 11
C C
136Y101184
橙 ORN +5V_GND 1 PAT2

2 S_Slot2_5VG1
赤 RED +5V 4
2 S_Slot2_5V1
2
5
橙 ORN +5V_GND 3
2 S_Slot2_5VG2
D
赤 RED +5V 6 D
2 S_Slot2_5V2
136Y101185

2 S_Slot3_12VG1
赤 RED +12V 3
2 S_Slot3_12V1
橙 ORN +12V_GND 2
2 S_Slot3_12VG2
赤 RED +12V 4
2 S_Slot3_12V2
E E
136Y101186
灰 GRY Slot1_5VSB 1 PAT4

2 S_Slot1_5VSB
灰 GRY Slot1_CNT 2
2 S_Slot1_CNT
灰 GRY Slot2_5VSB 3
2 S_Slot2_5VSB
灰 GRY Slot2_CNT 4
2 S_Slot2_CNT
2 S_Slot3_5VSB
灰 GRY Slot3_CNT 6
2 S_Slot3_CNT
F
7 F
G G
コード Z22N5010000E Rev. -

頁
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-18

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
136Y101191
136Y101187 P A PAT6 1 +3V 橙 ORN

CPU_3V1 5
N 11 +3V 橙 ORN
CN5 CPU_3V2 5
2 +3V 橙 ORN
A +24 1 4 FAN1_+24V FAN1_+24V 青 BLU 1 PAT5 CPU_3V3 5 A
PAT51A 3 12 -12V 橙 ORN
NC 2 3 FAN1_GND 青 BLU 2 - CPU_-12V 5
3 GND 橙 ORN
CN5 ALARM 3 2 FAN2_+24V 青 BLU 3 CPU_GND1 5
13 GND 橙 ORN
GND 4 1 FAN1_GND FAN2_GND 青 BLU 4 CPU_GND2 5
4 +5V 橙 ORN
FAN3_+24V 青 BLU 5 CPU_5V1 5
14 PS_ON# 橙 ORN
FAN3_GND 青 BLU 6 CPU_PSON 5
5 GND 橙 ORN
7 CPU_GND3 5
15 GND 橙 ORN
8 CPU_GND4 5
6 +5V 橙 ORN
9 CPU_5V2 5
16 GND 橙 ORN
10 CPU_GND5 5
7 GND 橙 ORN
B CPU_GND6 5 B
17 GND 橙 ORN
CPU_GND7 5
CN6 8 PWR_OK 橙 ORN
CPU_PWROK 5
+24 1 4 FAN2_+24V 18 -5V 橙 ORN
CPU_-5V 5
NC 2 3 9 +5VSB 橙 ORN
CPU_5VSB 5
CN6 ALARM 3 2 19 +5V 橙 ORN
CPU_5V3 5
GND 4 1 FAN2_GND 10 +12V 橙 ORN
CPU_+12V 5
20 +5V 橙 ORN
CPU_5V4 5
C C
136Y101192
PAT7 1 GND 橙 ORN

CPU_PWRGND1 5
3 +12V 橙 ORN
CPU_PWR12V1 5
2 GND 橙 ORN
CPU_PWRGND2 5
4 +12V 橙 ORN
CN7 CPU_PWR12V2 5
+24 1 4 FAN3_+24V
NC 2 3
CN7 ALARM 3 2 136Y101193
D
GND 4 1 FAN3_GND PAT8 D
1 PWR_ON 灰 GRY
PWR_ON 6
2 PWR_COM 灰 GRY
PWR_COM 6
3
136Y101194
PAT9
1 +5V 橙 ORN
CFIPWR_5V 6
2 +5V_GND 橙 ORN
CFIPWR_GND 6
E E
IND51A
113Y1962
136Y101190
ＰＡＴ１２ 1 +5V_L 灰 GRY 1 IND1
2 +5V_DGND 灰 GRY 2
D_GND 1 PAT10
5 Fuse_GND1 3 +5V_L 灰 GRY 3
+24V_P1_Det 2
5 Fuse_+24V_P1_Det 4 +5V_DGND 灰 GRY 4
+24V_P2_Det 3
5 Fuse_+24V_P2_Det 5 +5V_L 灰 GRY 5
D_GND 4
5 Fuse_GND2 6 +5V_DGND 灰 GRY 6
+24V_A_Det 5
5 Fuse_+24V_A_Det
F +24V_F_Det 6 F
5 Fuse_+24V_F_Det 136Y101195
D_GND 7
5 Fuse_GND3 パワーオン表示灯
+5V_L_Det 8
5 Fuse_+5V_L_Det
+5V_SB_Det 9
5 Fuse_+5V_SB_Det
D_GND 10
5 Fuse_GND4
+24V_T_Det 11
5 Fuse_+24V_T_Det
+24V_TF_Det 12
5 Fuse_+24V_TF_Det
D_GND 13
5 Fuse_GND5
Reserve1 14
5 Fuse_Reserve1
Reserve2 15
5 Fuse_Reserve2
G PER_OFF 16 G
5 Fuse_PWR_OFF
D_GND 17
5 Fuse_GND6
Zigma_ON_C 18
5 Zigma_ON_C
Zigma_ON_A 19
5 Zigma_ON_A
D_GND 20
5 Fuse_GND7
コード Z22N5010000E Rev. -

頁
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-19

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
136Y101190 Image_signal[1:37] 9
P A MPI2
1
D_GND 1 MPI5 Y Image_signal2
4 Fuse_GND1 2 136Y101145
+24V_P1_Det 2
4 Fuse_+24V_P1_Det
A +24V_P2_Det 3 Image_signal17 A
4 Fuse_+24V_P2_Det 17
D_GND 4 Image_signal18
4 Fuse_GND2 18
+24V_A_Det 5 Image_signal19
4 Fuse_+24V_A_Det 19
+24V_F_Det 6 Image_signal20
4 Fuse_+24V_F_Det 20
D_GND 7
4 Fuse_GND3
+5V_L_Det 8 Image_signal36
4 Fuse_+5V_L_Det 36
+5V_SB_Det 9 Image_signal37
4 Fuse_+5V_SB_Det 37
D_GND 10
4 Fuse_GND4 136Y101146
+24V_T_Det 11
4 Fuse_+24V_T_Det
+24V_TF_Det 12
4 Fuse_+24V_TF_Det MPI3 1 茶 BRN MNb_A 1 MIF3 1 黒 BLK MNb_A
B D_GND 13 MIF4 MNb_A 8 B
4 Fuse_GND5 2 赤 RED MNb_B 2 14 緑 GRN MNb_B
Reserve1 14 MNb_B 8
4 Fuse_Reserve1 3 橙 ORN MDin_A 3 2 赤 RED MDin_A
Reserve2 15 MDin_A 8
4 Fuse_Reserve2 4 黄 YEL MDin_B 4 15 橙 ORN MDin_B
PER_OFF 16 MDin_B 8
4 Fuse_PWR_OFF 5 緑 GRN MDout_A 5 3 白 WHT MDout_A
D_GND 17 MDout_A 8
4 Fuse_GND6 6 青 BLU MDout_B 6 16 黄 YEL MDout_B
Zigma_ON_C 18 MDout_B 8
4 Zigma_ON_C 7 紫 SND_INTb_A 7 4 青 BLU SND_INTb_A
Zigma_ON_A 19 SND_INTb_A 8
4 Zigma_ON_A 8 灰 GRY SND_INTb_B 8 17 桃 PIK SND_INTb_B
D_GND 20 SND_INTb_B 8
4 Fuse_GND7 9 白 WHT GND 9 5 緑 GRN GND
MPI_GND1 8
10 黒 BLK GND 10 18 青 BLU GND
MPI_GND2 8
11 茶 BRN MCLK_A 11 6 白 WHT MCLK_A
C MCLK_A 8 C
12 赤 RED MCLK_B 12 19 緑 GRN MCLK_B
MCLK_B 8
13 橙 ORN MPI_IN1_A 13 7 赤 RED MPI_IN1_A
MPI_IN1_A 8
14 黄 YEL MPI_IN1_B 14 20 黄 YEL MPI_IN1_B
MPI_IN1_B 8
15 緑 GRN MPI_OUT1_A 15 8 黒 BLK MPI_OUT1_A
MPI_OUT1_A 8
16 青 BLU MPI_OUT1_B 16 21 橙 ORN MPI_OUT1_B
MPI_OUT1_B 8
17 紫 MPI_OUT2_A 17 9 桃 PIK MPI_OUT2_A
MPI_OUT2_A 8
18 灰 GRY MPI_OUT2_B 18 22 黒 BLK MPI_OUT2_B
MPI_OUT2_B 8
19 白 WHT N.C 19 10 赤 RED N.C
MPI_NC1 8
C 1A 20 黒 BLK N.C 20 23 桃 PIK N.C
MPI_NC2 8
21 茶 BRN N.C 21 11 白 WHT N.C
D 9 6 MPI_NC3 8 D
22 赤 RED N.C 22 24 橙 ORN N.C
MPI_NC4 8
CPU51A 6 23 橙 ORN N.C 23 12 青 BLU N.C
136Y101191 - MPI_NC5 8
24 黄 YEL N.C 24 25 黄 YEL N.C
MPI_NC6 8
25 緑 GRN N.C 25 13
+3V 1
CPU28
4 CPU_3V1 26 青 BLU N.C 26 X線源部
+3V 11
4 CPU_3V2
4 CPU_3V3
+3V 2 136Y101153 XIF
-12V 12 136Y101196 Y 7 136Y101385
4 CPU_-12V
GND 3
4 CPU_GND1 MPI4 1 茶 BRN Zigma_ON_C 1 MIF1 MIF2 1 黒 BLK Zigma_ON_C 1 XIF2 XIF1 1 1 X11
GND 13
4 CPU_GND2 2 赤 RED Zigma_ON_A 2 14 緑 GRN Zigma_ON_A 14 2 2
+5V 4
E 4 CPU_5V1 3 橙 ORN PREP_C 3 2 赤 RED PREP_C 2 3 3 E
PS_ON#14
4 CPU_PSON 4 黄 YEL PREP_A 4 15 橙 ORN PREP_A 15 4 4
GND 5
4 CPU_GND3 5 緑 GRN STATE_C 5 3 白 WHT STATE_C 3 5 5
GND 15
4 CPU_GND4 6 青 BLU STATE_A 6 16 黄 YEL STATE_A 16 6 6
+5V 6
4 CPU_5V2 7 紫 X-RAY_C 7 4 青 BLU X-RAY_C 4 7 7
GND 16
4 CPU_GND5 8 灰 GRY X-RAY_A 8 17 桃 PIK X-RAY_A 17 8 8
GND 7
4 CPU_GND6 9 白 WHT READY_C 9 5 緑 GRN READY_C 5 9 9
GND 17
4 CPU_GND7 10 黒 BLK READY_A 10 18 青 BLU READY_A 18 10 10
PWR_OK 8
4 CPU_PWROK 11 茶 BRN RSV_TX_C 11 6 白 WHT RSV_TX_C 6 11 11
-5V 18
4 CPU_-5V 12 赤 RED RSV_TX_A 12 19 緑 GRN RSV_TX_A 19 12 12
+5VSB 9
F 4 CPU_5VSB 13 橙 ORN RSV_RX_C 13 7 赤 RED RSV_RX_C 7 13 13 F
+5V 19
4 CPU_5V3 14 黄 YEL RSV_RX_A 14 20 黄 YEL RSV_RX_A 20 14 14
+12V 10
4 CPU_+12V 15 緑 GRN COM_TX_C 15 8 黒 BLK COM_TX_C 8 15 15
+5V 20
4 CPU_5V4 16 青 BLU COM_TX_A 16 21 橙 ORN COM_TX_A 21 16 16
17 紫 COM_RX_C 17 9 桃 PIK COM_RX_C 9 17 17
136Y101192 18 灰 GRY COM_RX_A 18 22 黒 BLK COM_RX_A 22 18 18
19 白 WHT FPD_ON_C 19 10 赤 RED FPD_ON_C 10 19 19
GND 1
CPU29
20 黒 BLK FPD_ON_A 20 23 桃 PIK FPD_ON_A 23 20 20
4 CPU_PWRGND1
+12V 3 21 茶 BRN RSV_TX_NC_C 21 11 白 WHT RSV_TX_NC_C 11
4 CPU_PWR12V1
GND 2 22 赤 RED RSV_TX_NC_A 22 24 橙 ORN RSV_TX_NC_A 24
4 CPU_PWRGND2
G +12V 4 23 橙 ORN RSV_RX_NC_C 23 12 青 BLU RSV_RX_NC_C 12 G
4 CPU_PWR12V2 XIF3 1
24 黄 YEL RSV_RX_NC_A 24 25 黄 YEL RSV_RX_NC_A 25
PCI_SLOTx MPI1 緑 GRN N.C 2
25 25 13 13
青 BLU N.C 3
26 26
27 紫 N.C 27
28 灰 GRY N.C 28
29 白 WHT N.C 29
30 黒 BLK N.C 30 制御部背面
H 136Y101197 名称回路図補助名称 MARS[18x24] H
コード Z22N5010000E Rev. -

頁
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-20

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
継クタ
P
A A
CPU51A 5
-
136Y101198
F5 CPU19
CFI1 1 1 1 1
136Y101194 2 2 2 2
B 3 3 3 3 B
CFI3 4 4
+5V 1 4 4
4 CFIPWR_5V
GND 2 フラットケーブル
4 CFIPWR_GND 37 37
37 37
38 38 38 38
39 39 39 39
40 40 40 40
CFI51A-CFI1 ←→ CPU51A-CPU19
C Signal name № Signal name C
PHDDRST# 1 2 GND
PDD(7) 3 4 PDD(8)
PDD(6) 5 6 PDD(9)
PDD(5) 7 8 PDD(10)
PDD(4) 9 10 PDD(11)
PDD(3) 11 12 PDD(12)
PDD(2) 13 14 PDD(13)
PDD(1) 15 16 PDD(14)
PDD(0) 17 18 PDD(15)
GND 19 20 KEY(NC)
PDDRQ 21 22 GND
PDIOW# 23 24 GND
D D
PDIOR# 25 26 GND
PIORDY# 27 28 CSEL(PD)
PDDACK# 29 30 GND 136Y101199
IRQ14 31 32 IOCS16#(NC) CN4
PDA1 33 34 PDMA66DET CPU5 MDI0+
PDA0 35 36 PDA2 1 1 N
PDCS1# 37 38 PDCS3* 2 MDI0- 2
HDDLED* 39 40 GND 3 MDI1+ 3
4 MDI1- 4
1 CPU30
5 MDI2+ 5
2 MDI2-
6 6
3 MDI3+
E 7 7 E
4 MDI3-
8 8
5
136Y101193 6
7 136Y101388
PWR_ON 灰 GRY 8
4 PWR_ON
9
PWR_COM 灰 GRY 10 1 MDI0+ 1
4 PWR_COM
11 2 MDI0- 2
12 3 MDI1+ 3
13 4 MDI1- 4
F 14 5 MDI2+ 5 F
15 6 MDI2- 6
16 7 MDI3+ 7
CPU51A-CN30 (Board Side)
17 8 MDI3- 8
Signal name № Signal name
PWR LED+ 1 14 HDD LED+ 18
PWR LED+ 2 15 Reserve 19 制御部 - ＨUB間ＬＡＮケーブル
PWR LED- 3 16 HDD LED- 20
Error LED+ 4 17 P-SW+ (O/R)
Error LED+ 5 18 P-SW- GND 21
Error LED- 6 19 P-SW+ 22
EXT_SMI 7 20 P-SW- SHORT 灰 GRY 23
G +5V 8 21 RST-SW+ 24 G
GND 9 22 RST-SW-
SPEAKER- 10 23 P-SW+ 25
NC 11 24 +5VCNT 26
Internal SPEAKER 12 25 STANBY LED+
SPEAKER+ 13 26 STANBY LED-
コード Z22N5010000E Rev. -

頁
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-21

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
D
A N A
SND51B 8
136Y101154 - 136Y101156
136Y101188
MZ1 CN9-2 CN9-1
1 青 BLU MZ1_BLUE 5 1 MZ1_BLUE 青 BLU 1 SND6 SND1 1 灰 GRY SZ1_VCC
SZ1_VCC 10
2 青 BLU MZ1_RED 4 2 MZ1_RED 青 BLU 2 2 茶 BRN SZ1_VOUT
SZ1_VOUT 10
3 青 BLU MZ1_ORANGE 3 3 MZ1_ORANGE 青 BLU 3 3 黒 BLK SZ1_GND
副走査モータ SZ1_GND 10
MZ1 4 青 BLU MZ1_GREEN 2 4 MZ1_GREEN 青 BLU 4 4 ツイスト
5 青 BLU MZ1_BLACK 1 5 MZ1_BLACK 青 BLU 5 5
B B
6
SND8 1 灰 GRY ERS_V1

ERS_V1 10
2 灰 GRY ERS_V2
C ERS_V2 10 C
3 灰 GRY ERS_GND1
ERS_GND1 10
4 灰 GRY ERS_GND2
136Y101155 ERS_GND2 10
5 灰 GRY ERS_OK
ERS_LED_CHK 10
6 灰 GRY LED_ADJ
LED_ADJ 10
7 灰 GRY ERS_GND3
灰 GRY PTC_TxD 1 SND4 ERS_GND3 10
11 PTC_TxD
灰 GRY PTC_RxD 2
11 PTC_RxD
灰 GRY GND 3
11 PTC_GND1
灰 GRY GND 4
11 PTC_GND2
灰 GRY PTC_RESET_N 5
11 PTC_RESET_N
D
灰 GRY PTC_IN1 6 D
11 PTC_IN1
灰 GRY PTC_IN2 7
11 PTC_IN2
灰 GRY PTC_OUT1 8 SND10 1 灰
GRY AEC_FG
11 PTC_OUT1 AEC_FG 10
灰 GRY PTC_OUT2 9 2 灰
GRY AEC_TxD
11 PTC_OUT2 AEC_TxD 10
3 灰
GRY AEC_RxD
AEC_RxD 10
4 灰
GRY AEC_GND1
AEC_GND1 10
5 灰
GRY AEC_IN1
AEC_IN1 10
6 灰
GRY AEC_IN2
AEC_IN2 10
7 灰
GRY AEC_OUT1
AEC_OUT1 10
8 灰
GRY AEC_OUT2
AEC_OUT2 10
9 灰
GRY AEC_+5V
E AEC_+5V 10 E
10 灰
GRY AEC_GND2
AEC_GND2 10
11 灰
GRY AEC_-5V
AEC_-5V 10
136Y101157
SND12 1 灰 GRY GND1

LED_GND1 10
2 灰 GRY LED_V1
F LED_V1 10 F
3 灰 GRY GND2
LED_GND2 10
4 灰 GRY LED_V2
LED_V2 10
5 灰 GRY GND3
LED_GND3 10
6 灰 GRY LED_V3
LED_V3 10
7 灰 GRY GND4
LED_GND4 10
8
G G
コード Z22N5010000E Rev. -

頁
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-22

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
D
A
N A
SND51B 7
136Y101146 -
136Y101158
MNb_A 黒 BLK 1 SND5
5 MNb_A SND3 1 灰
GRY TEN_N
MNb_B 緑 GRN 14 TEN_N 9
5 MNb_B 2 黒
BLK GND
MDin_A 赤 RED 2 TRC_DGND1 9
5 MDin_A 3 灰
GRY TDATA_O
MDin_B 橙 ORN 15 TDATA_O 9
5 MDin_B 4 黒
BLK GND
MDout_A 白 WHT 3 TRC_DGND2 9
5 MDout_A 5 灰
GRY TDATA_I
MDout_B 黄 YEL 16 TDATA_I 9
5 MDout_B 6 黒
BLK GND
SND_INTb_A 青 BLU 4 TRC_DGND3 9
B 5 SND_INTb_A 7 灰
GRY TCLK B
SND_INTb_B 桃 PIK 17 TCLK 9
5 SND_INTb_B 8 黒
BLK GND
GND 緑 GRN 5 TRC_DGND4 9
5 MPI_GND1 9 灰
GRY Start_N
GND 青 BLU 18 Start_N 9
5 MPI_GND2 10 黒
BLK GND
MCLK_A 白 WHT 6 TRC_DGND5 9
5 MCLK_A 11 灰
GRY R_LEDON
MCLK_B 緑 GRN 19 R_LEDON 9
5 MCLK_B 12 黒
BLK GND
MPI_IN1_A 赤 RED 7 TRC_DGND6 9
5 MPI_IN1_A 13 灰
GRY TRCINT_N
MPI_IN1_B 黄 YEL 20 TRCINT_N 9
5 MPI_IN1_B 14 黒
BLK GND
MPI_OUT1_A 黒 BLK 8 TRC_DGND7 9
5 MPI_OUT1_A 15 灰
GRY TRSV_OUT
MPI_OUT1_B 橙 ORN 21 TRSV_OUT 9
5 MPI_OUT1_B 16 黒
BLK GND
MPI_OUT2_A 桃 PIK 9 TRC_DGND8 9
C 5 MPI_OUT2_A 17 灰
GRY TRSV_IN C
MPI_OUT2_B 黒 BLK 22 TRSV_IN 9
5 MPI_OUT2_B 18 黒
BLK GND
N.C 赤 RED 10 TRC_DGND9 9
5 MPI_NC1 19
N.C 桃 PIK 23 ツイスト
5 MPI_NC2 20
N.C 白 WHT 11
5 MPI_NC3
N.C 橙 ORN 24
5 MPI_NC4
N.C 青 BLU 12
5 MPI_NC5
N.C 黄 YEL 25
5 MPI_NC6
13 136Y101159
136Y101152 高圧
136Y101152 ｯ
D D
SND7 1 HigPow_+24V 灰 GRY 1 VH1
白 WHT +24V_P1 +24V_P1 1 SND9
3 SND_+24V1 2 GND 灰 GRY 2
+24V_P1 2
3 HV_EN_A 灰 GRY 3
青 BLU GND_P1 GND_P1 3
3 SND_GND1 4 25KV_SEL 灰 GRY 4
GND_P1 4
赤 RED +24V_P2 +24V_P2 5 5
3 SND_+24V2 5 GND 灰 GRY
+24V_P2 6 6
6 PLY1_A 灰 GRY
灰 GRY GND_P2 GND_P2 7 7
3 SND_GND2 7 PLY2_A 灰 GRY
GND_P2 8 8
8 PLY3_A 灰 GRY
9 9
10 GND 灰 GRY 10
E E
TNC1
1
2 136Y101147
1 SND2 HV_AG
閉端子 3
2 1 HV_AG 9
4
3
5
4
5 HV_OUT 1 HV_OUT 9
TNC2 6
1 7
F
2 8 F
閉端子 3 9
4 10
5 11
12
TNC3
1 136Y101160
2 1 SND11
SND13
3 2 1 橙 ORN GND
閉端子 ADC_GND 9
4 3 2 橙 ORN -24V
ADC_-24V 9
G 5 4 G
5
TNC4 6
1 7
2 8
閉端子 3 9
4 10
5 11
12
13
コード Z22N5010000E Rev. -

頁
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-23

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
バイス
136Y101158
A A
TEN_N 灰 GRY 1 TRC2
8 TEN_N
GND 黒 BLK 2
8 TRC_DGND1 デバイス
TDATA_O 灰 GRY 3
8 TDATA_O
GND 黒 BLK 4
8 TRC_DGND2 1 DB1
TDATA_I 灰 GRY 5 8 HV_OUT
8 TDATA_I
GND 黒 BLK 6
8 TRC_DGND3
TCLK 灰 GRY 7
8 TCLK
GND 黒 BLK 8
8 TRC_DGND4
Start_N 灰 GRY 9
8 Start_N
GND 黒 BLK 10
B 8 TRC_DGND5 ＡＤＡ B
R_LEDON 灰 GRY 11
8 R_LEDON
GND 黒 BLK 12 1 9 6
8 TRC_DGND6
TRCINT_N 灰 GRY 13 136Y101147
8 TRCINT_N ADC2
GND 黒 BLK 14 茶 BRN 1
8 TRC_DGND7 8 HV_AG
TRSV_OUT 灰 GRY 15
8 TRSV_OUT
GND 黒 BLK 16
8 TRC_DGND8
TRSV_IN 灰 GRY 17
8 TRSV_IN
GND 黒 BLK 18
8 TRC_DGND9
ツイスト 19 TRC4 ADC5
1 1
C
20 C
ＦＰＣ５１B 113Y1969 DB101
ADC制御信号 ADC101 1 1
100 80
71 71
TRC5 1 1 ADC3
136Y101152
ＦＰＣ５１B 113Y1969
+24V_A 黒 BLK TRC1 胸壁側信号・
3 TRC_+24V 1 ・
GND_A 茶 BRN 100 80
3 TRC_GND 2 ・
D 3 ・ D
・
TRC6 1 1 ADC4 ・
ＦＰＣ５１B 113Y1969 ・
反胸壁側信号・
100 80 ・
・
DB116
ADC116 1 1
136Y101160
E E
5 Image_signal[1:37] 71 71
TRC3 1 GND 橙 ORN GND 1 ADC1
TRC7 2 +3.3V 橙 ORN +3.3V 2
1
Image_signal2 3 GND 橙 ORN GND 3
2
4 +3.3V 橙 ORN +3.3V 4
17
Image_signal18 6 +3.3V 橙 ORN +3.3V 6
18
19
Image_signal20 8 -3.3V 橙 ORN -24V 8
20
9 橙 ORN GND 9
F F
Image_signal36 橙 ORN -3.3V 10
36
Image_signal37 37
136Y101145
TRC51A-TRC7 ←→ MPI51A-MPI2
G Signal name № Signal name G
GND 1 16 GND
DATA3+ 2 17 DATA7+
DATA3- 3 18 DATA7-
GND 4 19 GND 8 ADC_GND
CLK0+ 5 20 CLK1+
CLK0- 6 21 CLK1-
GND 7 22 GND 8 ADC_-24V
DATA2+ 8 23 DATA6+
DATA2- 9 24 DATA6-
GND 10 25 GND
DATA1+ 11 26 DATA5+ 機種 5010 ユニット -
DATA1- 12 27 DATA5-
H GND 13 28 GND 名称回路図補助名称 MARS[18x24] H
DATA0+ 14 29 DATA4+
DATA0- 15 30 DATA4- コード Z22N5010000E Rev. -
頁
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-24

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
ﾃﾞﾊｲｽ内
T A
A
136Y101156 A
136Y101161
SZ1_VCC 灰 GRY 1 JCT8 JCT7 1 灰 GRY SZ1_VCC 1
7 SZ1_VCC SZ1
SZ1_VOUT 茶 BRN 2 2 茶 BRN SZ1_VOUT 2
7 SZ1_VOUT 副走査ＨＰ検出
SZ1_GND 黒 BLK 3 3 黒 BLK SZ1_GND 3
7 SZ1_GND
ツイスト 4 4 ツイスト
5 5
6 6
B B
136Y101162
ER A
4
ERS_V1 灰 GRY 1 JCT4 JCT3 1 灰 GRY ERS_V1 1 ERS1
7 ERS_V1
ERS_V2 灰 GRY 2 2 灰 GRY ERS_V2 2
7 ERS_V2
ERS_GND1 灰 GRY 3 3 灰 GRY ERS_GND 3
7 ERS_GND1
ERS_GND2 灰 GRY 4 4 灰 GRY ERS_GND 4
C 7 ERS_GND2 C
ERS_LED_CHK 灰 GRY 5 5 灰 GRY ERS_LED_CHK 5
7 ERS_LED_CHK
LED_ADJ 灰 GRY 6 6 灰 GRY ERS_ADJ 6
7 LED_ADJ
ERS_GND3 灰 GRY 7 7 灰 GRY ERS_NC 7
7 ERS_GND3
D
136Y101163 AE A D
AEC_FG 灰 GRY 11 JCT6 JCT5 7

11 灰 AEC1
GRY AEC_FG AEC_FG
7 AEC_FG 1
AEC_TxD 灰 GRY 10 10 灰
GRY AEC_TxD AEC_RxD 2
7 AEC_TxD
AEC_RxD 灰 GRY 9 9 灰
GRY AEC_RxD AEC_TxD 3
7 AEC_RxD
AEC_GND1 灰 GRY 8 8 灰
GRY AEC_GND1 AEC_GND 4
7 AEC_GND1
AEC_IN1 灰 GRY 7 7 灰
GRY AEC_IN1 AEC_OUT1 5
7 AEC_IN1
AEC_IN2 灰 GRY 6 6 灰
GRY AEC_IN2 AEC_OUT2 6
7 AEC_IN2
AEC_OUT1 灰 GRY 5 5 灰
GRY AEC_OUT1 AEC_IN1 7
7 AEC_OUT1
AEC_OUT2 灰 GRY 4 4 灰
GRY AEC_OUT2 AEC_IN2 8
7 AEC_OUT2
AEC_+5V 灰 GRY 3 3 灰
GRY AEC_+5V AEC_+5V 9
7 AEC_+5V
E AEC_GND2 灰 GRY 2 2 灰
GRY AEC_GND2 AEC_GND 10 E
7 AEC_GND2
AEC_-5V 灰 GRY 1 1 灰
GRY AEC_-5V AEC_-5V 11
7 AEC_-5V
136Y101151
136Y101157 LE
7
F GND1 灰 GRY 1 JCT2 JCT1 1 FG 1 LED1 F
7 LED_GND1
LED_V1 灰 GRY 2 2 GND 2
7 LED_V1
GND2 灰 GRY 3 3 LED_V1 3
7 LED_GND2
7 LED_V2
7 LED_GND3
7 LED_V3
7 LED_GND4
8 8 GND 8
9 FG 9
金ﾒｯｷFFCｹｰﾌﾞﾙ
G G
コード Z22N5010000E Rev. -

頁
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-25

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
部 136Y101152 P A ＮＩＡ
温調ユニット
136Y101164 136Y101168
N 136Y101167
CN10-J CN10-P CN11-1 CN11-2 PE1
緑 GRN +24V_T 1 1 橙
ORN +24V 1 PTC5 PTC1 1 青 BLU PE1_+24V 1 NFI2 NFI1 1 青
BLU PE1_+24V 1 1
赤 PEL_+24V
A 3 PTC_+24V1 ﾍﾟﾙﾁｪ A
黄 YEL +24V_T 3 3 橙
ORN +24V 2 3 青 BLU PE1_GND 6 6 青
BLU PE1_GND 2 2
黒_PEL_GND
3 PTC_+24V2
橙 ORN GND_T 2 2 橙
ORN
3 2 青 BLU PE2_+24V 2 2 青
BLU PE2_+24V
3 PTC_DGND1
桃 PIK GND_T 4 4 橙
ORN GND 4 4 青 BLU PE2_GND 7 7 青
BLU PE2_GND
3 PTC_DGND2
GND 5 青 BLU PO_+24V 3 3 青
BLU PO_+24V ｻｰﾓｽﾀｯﾄ
6 青 BLU PO_GND 8 8 青
BLU PO_GND CN22-1 CN22-2 136Y101200
TN1 TN2
青 BLU PO_IL 4 4 青
BLU PO_IL 1 1 1 1
灰 GRY FAN2_+24V 9 9 灰
GRY FAN2_+24V 2 2
136Y101155
灰 GRY FAN2_FAIL 5 5 灰
GRY FAN2_FAIL
灰 GRY FAN2_GND 10 10 灰
GRY FAN2_GND
灰 GRY PTC_TxD 1 PTC4 PTC2 1
B 7 PTC_TxD B
灰 GRY PTC_RxD 2 2 CN12-Ｊ CN12-P
7 PTC_RxD
灰 GRY GND 3 3 PO_+24V 1 1 赤 P1_+24V 1 .
7 PTC_GND1
灰 GRY GND 4 PO_GND 2 2 黒_P1_GND 2 .
7 PTC_GND2 ポンプ
灰 GRY PTC_RESET_N 5 PO_IL 3 3 白_P1_IL 3 .
7 PTC_RESET_N
灰 GRY PTC_IN1 6
7 PTC_IN1
灰 GRY PTC_IN2 7
7 PTC_IN2
灰 GRY PTC_OUT1 8
7 PTC_OUT1
灰 GRY PTC_OUT2 9
7 PTC_OUT2 CN13
FAN2_+24V 灰 GRY 4 1 +24
C 3 2 NC C
FAN2_FAIL 灰 GRY 2 3 ALARM FAN7
FAN2_GND 灰 GRY 1 4 GND
デバイス室内
1 PTC7 PTC3 1 FAN4_+24V 灰 GRY 4 NFI6 NFI5 1 1 .
136Y101170 2 2 FAN4_GND 3 2 2 .
TDB51A 136Y101182 FAN9
113Y1961 3 3 FAN4_FAIL 灰 GRY 2 3 3 .
CN14-2 CN14-1 4 4 FAN3_+24V 灰 GRY 1 4
TDB1-2 4赤 TH2_+5V 1 4赤 TH2_+5V 赤 5 5 FAN3_GND
D
リード線 D
3黄 TH2_OUT 2 3黄 TH2_OUT 黄 6 6 FAN3_FAIL
2白 TH2_GND 3 2白 TH2_GND 白 7 7 FAN2_+24V
1黒 TH2_FG 4 1黒 TH2_FG 黒 8 8 FAN2_GND
TH3_+5V 赤 9 9 FAN2_FAIL
機内冷却風 TH3_OUT 黄 10 10 FAN1_+24V 灰 GRY 4 NFI4 NFI3 1 1 .
TH3_GND 白 11 11 FAN1_GND 3 2 2 . FAN8
TH3_FG 黒 12 12 FAN1_FAIL 灰 GRY 2 3 3 .
TDB51A 灰 GRY 1 4
113Y1961
リード線
E TDB1-3 4赤 TH3_+5V
E
3黄 TH3_OUT
2白 TH3_GND
1黒 TH3_FG
機内雰囲気側
PTC8 1 4 NFI8 NFI7 1 1 .
2灰
GRY
3 2 2 . FAN10
3灰
GRY
2 3 3 .
4 1 4
5灰
GRY
リード線
6灰
GRY
F F
136Y102110
デバイス室内
CN16-1 CN16-2
灰 GRY 3 1 1 .
灰 GRY 2 2 2 . 機内循環用ﾌｧﾝ
G FAN6 （ｼﾛｯｺﾌｧﾝ） G
灰 GRY 1 3 3 .
136Y101386 136Y101387
X20 CN30-R CN30-P RSW
1黒黒1 1 1
2白白2 2 2 機種 5010 ユニット -
コード Z22N5010000E Rev. -

頁
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-26
07B 回路図（For FDR-1000 DRLZ）

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (For FDR-1000 DRLZ)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
シスム源
ＰＳＵ５１Ａ 125Ｎ100011 温調電源PTC基板用 136Y101183
A A
S_Slot4_24VG1 3
2 +24V_GND 橙 ORN
S_Slot4_24VG2 3

S_Slot4_24V1 3
2 +24V 赤 RED
S_Slot4_24V2 3
S_Slot1
B
136Y101178 ※組図No.136Y101532
B
S_Slot1_24VG1 3
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2 +24V_GND 橙 ORN
S_Slot1_24VG2 3
1 L 1
L1 Slot1_24V 1 +24V 赤 RED
1 N 1 S_Slot1_24V1 3
N2 2 +24V 赤 RED
1 E 1 S_Slot1_24V2 3
FG2
システム電源各基板用
C C
システム電源CPU基板用
136Y101184
Slot2 Slot2_GND
S_Slot2 1 +5V_GND 橙 ORN
S_Slot2_5VG1 3
2 +5V_GND 橙 ORN
S_Slot2_5VG2 3
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
136Y101201 ※組図No.136Y101531
S_Slot2_5V1 3
TB１ 2 +5V 赤 RED
S_Slot2_5V2 3
(MBK6/E-Z-4P)
D L 黒 BLK L D
L 1 1 1
1 N 1 1 白 WHT N 136Y101185
N
1 E 1 1 緑/黄 E Slot3
FG Slot3_GND 1 +12V_GND 橙 ORN
S_Slot3_12VG1 3
2 +12V_GND 橙 ORN
S_Slot3_12VG2 3
S_Slot3
136Y101382 Slot3_12V 1 +12V 赤 RED
S_Slot3_12V1 3
136Y101383 2 +12V 赤 RED
S_Slot3_12V2 3
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
136Y101384
E システム電源CPU基板用 E
TB2
（BTB50C3） 136Y101186
丸端子端子台
SLOT1_5VSB 灰 GRY
S_Slot1_5VSB 3
TB2-LOUT TB1-L
ブレーカー SLOT1_CNT 灰 GRY
S_Slot1_CNT 3
1 L 1 1 L 黒 BLK (SER-F-11-62F-3A) SLOT2_5VSB 灰 GRY
L_X S_Slot2_5VSB 3
SLOT2_CNT 灰 GRY
TB2-L
NFB_IN S_Slot2_CNT 3
SLOT3_5VSB 灰 GRY
1 L 黒 BLK 黒 BLK L 1 NFB51A S_Slot3_5VSB 3
SLOT3_CNT 灰 GRY
N2 136Y101181 113Ｙ1979 S_Slot3_CNT 3
F F
TB2-NOUT TB1-N NFB_OUT NFB1 NFB2 136Y101202
1 N 1 1 N 白 WHT
N_X 1 L 黒 BLK 1 1
TB2-N 2 2 3 AC_IN
1 N 白 WHT 白 WHT N白 WHT 3 2 L 黒 BLK 1 SCN1 1
4 N 白 WHT 2 2
TB2-EOUT TB1-E
E E 黄/緑 3
FG_X 1 1 1 E 緑/黄 1 +5Vｽﾀﾝﾊﾞｲ電源用
AC_E 4
TB2-E 5
1 E 緑/黄 E 6
G ファストン端子 G
136Y101180 FG_POW
1
1
136Y101381 ※組図No.136Y101533 FG_OUT
コード Z22N5011000 Rev.
頁
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-27

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
制御部背面中継コネクタ
A A A A
Ｙ
PAT51A 4
-
136Y101183
136Y101152
橙 ORN +24V_GND 1 PAT1 136Y101189
2 S_Slot4_24VG1
赤 RED +24V 5
2 S_Slot4_24V1 CN1-P CN1-J
橙 ORN +24V_GND 2
2 S_Slot4_24VG2 PAT11 1 橙 ORN +24V_P1 1 1 白 WHT +24V_P1
赤 RED +24V 6 SND_+24V1 8
B 2 S_Slot4_24V2 6 橙 ORN GND_P1 6 6 青 BLU GND_P1 B
2 S_Slot1_24VG1 2 橙 ORN +24V_P2 2 2 赤 RED +24V_P2
赤 RED +24V 7 SND_+24V2 8
2 S_Slot1_24V1 7 橙 ORN GND_P2 7 7 灰 GRY GND_P2
2 S_Slot1_24VG2 3 橙 ORN +24V_A 3 3 黒 BLK +24V_A
赤 RED +24V 8 TRC_+24V 9
2 S_Slot1_24V2 8 橙 ORN GND_A 8 8 茶 BRN GND_A
TRC_GND 9
4 橙 ORN +24V_T1 4 4 緑 GRN +24V_T1
PTC_+24V1 11
9 橙 ORN +24V_T2 9 9 黄 YEL +24V_T2
PTC_+24V2 11
5 橙 ORN GND_T1 5 5 橙 ORN GND_T1
PTC_DGND1 11
10 橙 ORN GND_T2 10 10 桃 PIK GND_T2
PTC_DGND2 11
C C
136Y101184

2 S_Slot2_5VG1
赤 RED +5V 4
2 S_Slot2_5V1
2
5
橙 ORN +5V_GND 3
2 S_Slot2_5VG2
D
赤 RED +5V 6 D
2 S_Slot2_5V2
136Y101185

2 S_Slot3_12VG1
赤 RED +12V 3
2 S_Slot3_12V1
橙 ORN +12V_GND 2
2 S_Slot3_12VG2
赤 RED +12V 4
2 S_Slot3_12V2
E E
136Y101186
灰 GRY Slot1_5VSB 1 PAT4

2 S_Slot1_5VSB
灰 GRY Slot1_CNT 2
2 S_Slot1_CNT
2 S_Slot2_5VSB
灰 GRY Slot2_CNT 4
2 S_Slot2_CNT
2 S_Slot3_5VSB
灰 GRY Slot3_CNT 6
2 S_Slot3_CNT
F
7 F
G G
頁
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-28

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
136Y101191
136Y101187 A A PAT6 1 +3V 橙 ORN

CPU_3V1 5
Ｙ 11 +3V 橙 ORN
CN5 CPU_3V2 5
2 +3V 橙 ORN
A +24 1 4 FAN1_+24V FAN1_+24V 青 BLU 1 PAT5 CPU_3V3 5 A
PAT51A 3 12 -12V 橙 ORN
NC 2 3 FAN1_GND 青 BLU 2 - CPU_-12V 5
3 GND 橙 ORN
排気FAN1 CN5 ALARM 3 2 FAN2_+24V 青 BLU 3 CPU_GND1 5
13 GND 橙 ORN
GND 4 1 FAN1_GND FAN2_GND 青 BLU 4 CPU_GND2 5
4 +5V 橙 ORN
FAN3_+24V 青 BLU 5 CPU_5V1 5
14 PS_ON# 橙 ORN
FAN3_GND 青 BLU 6 CPU_PSON 5
5 GND 橙 ORN
7 CPU_GND3 5
15 GND 橙 ORN
8 CPU_GND4 5
6 +5V 橙 ORN
9 CPU_5V2 5
16 GND 橙 ORN
10 CPU_GND5 5
7 GND 橙 ORN
B CPU_GND6 5 B
17 GND 橙 ORN
CPU_GND7 5
CN6 8 PWR_OK 橙 ORN
CPU_PWROK 5
+24 1 4 FAN2_+24V 18 -5V 橙 ORN
CPU_-5V 5
NC 2 3 9 +5VSB 橙 ORN
CPU_5VSB 5
排気FAN2 CN6 ALARM 3 2 19 +5V 橙 ORN
CPU_5V3 5
GND 4 1 FAN2_GND 10 +12V 橙 ORN
CPU_+12V 5
20 +5V 橙 ORN
CPU_5V4 5
C C
136Y101192
PAT7 1 GND 橙 ORN

CPU_PWRGND1 5
3 +12V 橙 ORN
CPU_PWR12V1 5
2 GND 橙 ORN
CPU_PWRGND2 5
4 +12V 橙 ORN
CN7 CPU_PWR12V2 5
+24 1 4 FAN3_+24V
NC 2 3
排気FAN3 CN7 ALARM 3 2 136Y101193
D
GND 4 1 FAN3_GND PAT8 D
1 PWR_ON 灰 GRY
PWR_ON 6
2 PWR_COM 灰 GRY
PWR_COM 6
3
136Y101194
PAT9
1 +5V 橙 ORN
CFIPWR_5V 6
2 +5V_GND 橙 ORN
CFIPWR_GND 6
E E
IND51A
113Y1962
136Y101190
ＰＡＴ１２ 1 +5V_L 灰 GRY 1 IND1
2 +5V_DGND 灰 GRY 2
D_GND 1 PAT10
5 Fuse_GND1 3 +5V_L 灰 GRY 3
+24V_P1_Det 2
5 Fuse_+24V_P1_Det 4 +5V_DGND 灰 GRY 4
+24V_P2_Det 3
5 Fuse_+24V_P2_Det 5 +5V_L 灰 GRY 5
D_GND 4
5 Fuse_GND2 6 +5V_DGND 灰 GRY 6
+24V_A_Det 5
5 Fuse_+24V_A_Det
F +24V_F_Det 6 F
5 Fuse_+24V_F_Det 136Y101195
D_GND 7
5 Fuse_GND3 パワーオン表示灯
+5V_L_Det 8
5 Fuse_+5V_L_Det
+5V_SB_Det 9
5 Fuse_+5V_SB_Det
D_GND 10
5 Fuse_GND4
+24V_T_Det 11
5 Fuse_+24V_T_Det
+24V_TF_Det 12
5 Fuse_+24V_TF_Det
D_GND 13
5 Fuse_GND5
Reserve1 14
5 Fuse_Reserve1
Reserve2 15
5 Fuse_Reserve2
G PER_OFF 16 G
5 Fuse_PWR_OFF
D_GND 17
5 Fuse_GND6
Zigma_ON_C 18
5 Zigma_ON_C
Zigma_ON_A 19
5 Zigma_ON_A
D_GND 20
5 Fuse_GND7
頁
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-29

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
136Y101190 Image_signal[1:37] 9
MPI2
1
D_GND 1 MPI5 Y Image_signal2
4 Fuse_GND1 2 136Y101145 （他社製造）
+24V_P1_Det 2
4 Fuse_+24V_P1_Det
A +24V_P2_Det 3 Image_signal17 A
4 Fuse_+24V_P2_Det 17
D_GND 4 Image_signal18
4 Fuse_GND2 18
+24V_A_Det 5 Image_signal19
4 Fuse_+24V_A_Det 19
+24V_F_Det 6 Image_signal20
4 Fuse_+24V_F_Det 20
D_GND 7
4 Fuse_GND3
+5V_L_Det 8 Image_signal36
4 Fuse_+5V_L_Det 36
+5V_SB_Det 9 Image_signal37
4 Fuse_+5V_SB_Det 37
D_GND 10
4 Fuse_GND4 136Y101146 （他社製造）
+24V_T_Det 11
4 Fuse_+24V_T_Det
+24V_TF_Det 12
4 Fuse_+24V_TF_Det MPI3 1 茶 BRN MNb_A 1 MIF3 F A 1 白 WHT MNb_A
B D_GND 13 MIF4 MNb_A 8 B
4 Fuse_GND5 2 赤 RED MNb_B 2 14 黒 BLK MNb_B
Reserve1 14 Y MNb_B 8
4 Fuse_Reserve1 3 橙 ORN MDin_A 3 2 赤 RED MDin_A
Reserve2 15 MDin_A 8
4 Fuse_Reserve2 4 黄 YEL MDin_B 4 15 黒 BLK MDin_B
PER_OFF 16 MDin_B 8
4 Fuse_PWR_OFF 5 緑 GRN MDout_A 5 3 緑 GRN MDout_A
D_GND 17 MDout_A 8
4 Fuse_GND6 6 青 BLU MDout_B 6 16 黒 BLK MDout_B
Zigma_ON_C 18 MDout_B 8
4 Zigma_ON_C 7 紫 SND_INTb_A 7 4 黄 YEL SND_INTb_A
Zigma_ON_A 19 SND_INTb_A 8
4 Zigma_ON_A 8 灰 GRY SND_INTb_B 8 17 黒 BLK SND_INTb_B
D_GND 20 SND_INTb_B 8
4 Fuse_GND7 9 白 WHT GND 9 5 茶 BRN GND
MPI_GND1 8
10 黒 BLK GND 10 18 黒 BLK GND
MPI_GND2 8
11 茶 BRN MCLK_A 11 6 青 BLU MCLK_A
C MCLK_A 8 C
12 赤 RED MCLK_B 12 19 黒 BLK MCLK_B
MCLK_B 8
13 橙 ORN MPI_IN1_A 13 7 灰 GRY MPI_IN1_A
MPI_IN1_A 8
14 黄 YEL MPI_IN1_B 14 20 黒 BLK MPI_IN1_B
MPI_IN1_B 8
15 緑 GRN MPI_OUT1_A 15 8 橙 ORN MPI_OUT1_A
MPI_OUT1_A 8
16 青 BLU MPI_OUT1_B 16 21 黒 BLK MPI_OUT1_B
MPI_OUT1_B 8
17 紫 MPI_OUT2_A 17 9 桃 PIK MPI_OUT2_A
MPI_OUT2_A 8
18 灰 GRY MPI_OUT2_B 18 22 黒 BLK MPI_OUT2_B
MPI_OUT2_B 8
19 白 WHT N.C 19 10 水 N.C
MPI_NC1 8
C A 20 黒 BLK N.C 20 23 黒 BLK N.C
MPI_NC2 8
21 茶 BRN N.C 21 11 紫 N.C
D Ｙ MPI_NC3 8 D
22 赤 RED N.C 22 24 黒 BLK N.C
MPI_NC4 8
CPU51A 6 23 橙 ORN N.C 23 12 赤 RED N.C
136Y101191 - MPI_NC5 8
24 黄 YEL N.C 24 25 白 WHT N.C
MPI_NC6 8
25 緑 GRN N.C 25 13
+3V 1
CPU28
4 CPU_3V1 26 青 BLU N.C 26 X線源部
+3V 11
4 CPU_3V2
+3V 2 X A
4 CPU_3V3 136Y101153 （他社製造）
-12V 12 136Y101196 Y 7 136Y101385
4 CPU_-12V
GND 3
4 CPU_GND1 MPI4 1 茶 BRN Zigma_ON_C 1 MIF1 MIF2 1 白 WHT Zigma_ON_C 1 XIF2 XIF1 1 1 X11
GND 13
4 CPU_GND2 2 赤 RED Zigma_ON_A 2 14 黒 BLK Zigma_ON_A 14 2 2
+5V 4
E 4 CPU_5V1 3 橙 ORN PREP_C 3 2 赤 RED PREP_C 2 3 3 E
PS_ON#14
4 CPU_PSON 4 黄 YEL PREP_A 4 15 黒 BLK PREP_A 15 4 4
GND 5
4 CPU_GND3 5 緑 GRN STATE_C 5 3 緑 GRN STATE_C 3 5 5
GND 15
4 CPU_GND4 6 青 BLU STATE_A 6 16 黒 BLK STATE_A 16 6 6
+5V 6
4 CPU_5V2 7 紫 X-RAY_C 7 4 黄 YEL X-RAY_C 4 7 7
GND 16
4 CPU_GND5 8 灰 GRY X-RAY_A 8 17 黒 BLK X-RAY_A 17 8 8
GND 7
4 CPU_GND6 9 白 WHT READY_C 9 5 茶 BRN READY_C 5 9 9
GND 17
4 CPU_GND7 10 黒 BLK READY_A 10 18 黒 BLK READY_A 18 10 10
PWR_OK 8
4 CPU_PWROK 11 茶 BRN RSV_TX_C 11 6 青 BLU RSV_TX_C 6 11 11
-5V 18
4 CPU_-5V 12 赤 RED RSV_TX_A 12 19 黒 BLK RSV_TX_A 19 12 12
+5VSB 9
F 4 CPU_5VSB 13 橙 ORN RSV_RX_C 13 7 灰 GRY RSV_RX_C 7 13 13 F
+5V 19
4 CPU_5V3 14 黄 YEL RSV_RX_A 14 20 黒 BLK RSV_RX_A 20 14 14
+12V 10
4 CPU_+12V 15 緑 GRN COM_TX_C 15 8 橙 ORN COM_TX_C 8 15 15
+5V 20
4 CPU_5V4 16 青 BLU COM_TX_A 16 21 黒 BLK COM_TX_A 21 16 16
17 紫 COM_RX_C 17 9 桃 PIK COM_RX_C 9 17 17
136Y101192 18 灰 GRY COM_RX_A 18 22 黒 BLK COM_RX_A 22 18 18
19 白 WHT FPD_ON_C 19 10 水 FPD_ON_C 10 19 19
GND 1
CPU29
20 黒 BLK FPD_ON_A 20 23 黒 BLK FPD_ON_A 23 20 20
4 CPU_PWRGND1
+12V 3 21 茶 BRN RSV_TX_NC_C 21 11 紫 RSV_TX_NC_C 11
4 CPU_PWR12V1
GND 2 22 赤 RED RSV_TX_NC_A 22 24 黒 BLK RSV_TX_NC_A 24
4 CPU_PWRGND2
G +12V 4 23 橙 ORN RSV_RX_NC_C 23 12 赤 RED RSV_RX_NC_C 12 G
4 CPU_PWR12V2 XIF3 1
24 黄 YEL RSV_RX_NC_A 24 25 白 WHT RSV_RX_NC_A 25
PCI_SLOTx MPI1 緑 GRN N.C 2
25 25 13 13
青 BLU N.C 3
26 26
27 紫 N.C 27
28 灰 GRY N.C 28
29 白 WHT N.C 29
30 黒 BLK N.C 30 制御部背面
H 136Y101197 名称回路図補助名称 MARS[24x30] H
頁
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-30

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
面クタ
A 4 0 A
CPU51A 5
-
136Y101198
1 1 CPU19
1 Y 77 CFI1 1 1 Ｃ
136Y101194 2 2 2 2
3 3 PCI_SLOTx ＣＮ1 Ｙ 0
B 3 3 B
CFI3 4 4
+5V 1 4 4
4 CFIPWR_5V
GND 2 フラットケーブル
4 CFIPWR_GND 37 37
37 37
38 38 38 38
39 39 39 39
40 40 40 40
CFI51A-CFI1 ←→ CPU51A-CPU19
PCI_SLOTx ＣＮ1 Ｙ 0
C Signal name № Signal name C
PHDDRST# 1 2 GND
PDD(7) 3 4 PDD(8)
PDD(6) 5 6 PDD(9)
PDD(5) 7 8 PDD(10)
PDD(4) 9 10 PDD(11)
PDD(3) 11 12 PDD(12)
PDD(2) 13 14 PDD(13)
PDD(1) 15 16 PDD(14)
PDD(0) 17 18 PDD(15)
GND 19 20 KEY(NC) Ｃ
PDDRQ 21 22 GND
PDIOW# 23 24 GND PCI_SLOTx ＣＮ1 Ｙ 0
D D
PDIOR# 25 26 GND
PIORDY# 27 28 CSEL(PD)
PDDACK# 29 30 GND
IRQ14 31 32 IOCS16#(NC)
PDA1 33 34 PDMA66DET
PDA0 35 36 PDA2
PDCS1# 37 38 PDCS3*
HDDLED* 39 40 GND
E
1 CPU30 E
2
3
4 136Y101199
5 CN4
136Y101193 6 CPU5 1 MDI0+ 1 AN
7 MDI0-
PWR_ON 灰 GRY 2 2
4 PWR_ON 8 MDI1+
3 3
9 MDI1-
PWR_COM 灰 GRY 4 4
4 PWR_COM 10 MDI2+
F
5 5 F
11 MDI2-
6 6
12 MDI3+
7 7
CPU51A-CN30 (Board Side) 13 MDI3-
8 8
Signal name № Signal name 14
PWR LED+ 1 14 HDD LED+ 15
PWR LED+ 2 15 Reserve 16
PWR LED- 3 16 HDD LED- 17
Error LED+ 4 17 P-SW+ (O/R)
Error LED+ 5 18 P-SW- GND 18
Error LED- 6 19 P-SW+ 19
EXT_SMI 7 20 P-SW- 20
G +5V 8 21 RST-SW+ 21 G
GND 9 22 RST-SW-
SPEAKER- 10 23 P-SW+ 22
SHORT 灰 GRY 23
NC 11 24 +5VCNT
Internal SPEAKER 12 25 STANBY LED+ 24
SPEAKER+ 13 26 STANBY LED- 25
26
頁
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-31

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
影
ND
A Ｙ A
SND51B 8
136Y102000 - 136Y101156
136Y101188
MZ1 CN9-2 CN9-1
1 青 BLU MZ1_BLUE 5 1 MZ1_BLUE 茶 BRN 1 SND6 SND1 1 灰 GRY SZ1_VCC
SZ1_VCC 10
2 青 BLU MZ1_RED 4 2 MZ1_RED 茶 BRN 2 2 茶 BRN SZ1_VOUT
SZ1_VOUT 10
3 青 BLU MZ1_ORANGE 3 3 MZ1_ORANGE 茶 BRN 3 3 黒 BLK SZ1_GND
副走査モータ SZ1_GND 10
MZ1 4 青 BLU MZ1_GREEN 2 4 MZ1_GREEN 茶 BRN 4 4 ツイスト
5 青 BLU MZ1_BLACK 1 5 MZ1_BLACK 茶 BRN 5 5
B B
6
SND8 1 灰 GRY ERS_V1

ERS_V1 10
2 灰 GRY ERS_V2
C ERS_V2 10 C
3 灰 GRY ERS_GND1
ERS_GND1 10
4 灰 GRY ERS_GND2
136Y101155 ERS_GND2 10
5 灰 GRY ERS_OK
ERS_LED_CHK 10
6 灰 GRY LED_ADJ
LED_ADJ 10
7 灰 GRY ERS_GND3
灰 GRY PTC_TxD 1 SND4 ERS_GND3 10
11 PTC_TxD
灰 GRY PTC_RxD 2
11 PTC_RxD
灰 GRY GND 3
11 PTC_GND1
灰 GRY GND 4
11 PTC_GND2
灰 GRY PTC_RESET_N 5
11 PTC_RESET_N
D
灰 GRY PTC_IN1 6 D
11 PTC_IN1
灰 GRY PTC_IN2 7
11 PTC_IN2
灰 GRY PTC_OUT1 8 SND10 1 灰 GRY AEC_FG
11 PTC_OUT1 AEC_FG 10
灰 GRY PTC_OUT2 9 2 灰 GRY AEC_TxD
11 PTC_OUT2 AEC_TxD 10
3 灰 GRY AEC_RxD
AEC_RxD 10
4 灰 GRY AEC_GND1
AEC_GND1 10
5 灰 GRY AEC_IN1
AEC_IN1 10
6 灰 GRY AEC_IN2
AEC_IN2 10
7 灰 GRY AEC_OUT1
AEC_OUT1 10
8 灰 GRY AEC_OUT2
AEC_OUT2 10
9 灰 GRY AEC_+5V
E AEC_+5V 10 E
10 灰 GRY AEC_GND2
AEC_GND2 10
11 灰 GRY AEC_-5V
AEC_-5V 10
136Y101157
SND12 1 灰 GRY GND1

LED_GND1 10
2 灰 GRY LED_V1
F LED_V1 10 F
3 灰 GRY GND2
LED_GND2 10
4 灰 GRY LED_V2
LED_V2 10
5 灰 GRY GND3
LED_GND3 10
6 灰 GRY LED_V3
LED_V3 10
7 灰 GRY GND4
LED_GND4 10
8
G G
頁
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-32

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
ND
A
Ｙ A
SND51B 7
136Y101146 （他社製造） -
136Y101158
MNb_A 白 WHT 1 SND5
5 MNb_A SND3 1 灰
GRY TEN_N
MNb_B 黒 BLK 14 TEN_N 9
5 MNb_B 2 黒
BLK GND
MDin_A 赤 RED 2 TRC_DGND1 9
5 MDin_A 3 灰
GRY TDATA_O
MDin_B 黒 BLK 15 TDATA_O 9
5 MDin_B 4 黒
BLK GND
MDout_A 緑 GRN 3 TRC_DGND2 9
5 MDout_A 5 灰
GRY TDATA_I
MDout_B 黒 BLK 16 TDATA_I 9
5 MDout_B 6 黒
BLK GND
SND_INTb_A 黄 YEL 4 TRC_DGND3 9
B 5 SND_INTb_A 7 灰
GRY TCLK B
SND_INTb_B 黒 BLK 17 TCLK 9
5 SND_INTb_B 8 黒
BLK GND
GND 茶 BRN 5 TRC_DGND4 9
5 MPI_GND1 9 灰
GRY Start_N
GND 黒 BLK 18 Start_N 9
5 MPI_GND2 10 黒
BLK GND
MCLK_A 青 BLU 6 TRC_DGND5 9
5 MCLK_A 11 灰
GRY R_LEDON
MCLK_B 黒 BLK 19 R_LEDON 9
5 MCLK_B 12 黒
BLK GND
MPI_IN1_A 灰 GRY 7 TRC_DGND6 9
5 MPI_IN1_A 13 灰
GRY TRCINT_N
MPI_IN1_B 黒 BLK 20 TRCINT_N 9
5 MPI_IN1_B 14 黒
BLK GND
MPI_OUT1_A 橙 ORN 8 TRC_DGND7 9
5 MPI_OUT1_A 15 灰
GRY TRSV_OUT
MPI_OUT1_B 黒 BLK 21 TRSV_OUT 9
5 MPI_OUT1_B 16 黒
BLK GND
MPI_OUT2_A 桃 PIK 9 TRC_DGND8 9
C 5 MPI_OUT2_A 17 灰
GRY TRSV_IN C
MPI_OUT2_B 黒 BLK 22 TRSV_IN 9
5 MPI_OUT2_B 18 黒
BLK GND
N.C 水 10 TRC_DGND9 9
5 MPI_NC1 19
N.C 黒 BLK 23 ツイスト
5 MPI_NC2 20
N.C 紫 11
5 MPI_NC3
N.C 黒 BLK 24
5 MPI_NC4
N.C 赤 RED 12
5 MPI_NC5
N.C 白 WHT 25
5 MPI_NC6
13 136Y102001 高圧
136Y101152 （他社製造）ﾄ
136Y101152 （他社製造）
D
125Ｎ100010 D
SND7 1 HigPow_+24V 茶 BRN 1 VH1
白 WHT +24V_P1 +24V_P1 1 SND9
3 SND_+24V1 2 GND 茶 BRN 2
+24V_P1 2
3 HV_EN_A 茶 BRN 3
青 BLU GND_P1 GND_P1 3
3 SND_GND1 4 25KV_SEL 茶 BRN 4
GND_P1 4
5 1.7mA_SEL 茶 BRN 5
赤 RED +24V_P2 +24V_P2 5
3 SND_+24V2 6 GND 茶 BRN 6
+24V_P2 6
7 PLY1_A 茶 BRN 7
灰 GRY GND_P2 GND_P2 7
3 SND_GND2 8 PLY2_A 茶 BRN 8
GND_P2 8
9 PLY3_A 茶 BRN 9
10 GND 茶 BRN 10
E E
TNC1
1
2 136Y101147
1 SND2
閉端子 3
2 HV_AG 1 HV_AG 9
4
3
5 136Y101148 （デバイス附属ハーネス）
4
5 HV_OUT 1 HV_OUT 9
TNC2 6
1 7
F
2 8 F
閉端子 3 9
4 10
5 11
12
TNC3
1 136Y101160
2 1 SND11
SND13
3 2 1 橙 ORN GND
閉端子 ADC_GND 9
4 3 2 橙 ORN -24V
ADC_-24V 9
G 5 4 G
5
TNC4 6
1 7
2 8
閉端子 3 9
4 10
5 11
12
13
頁
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-33

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
バス内
C A
Ｙ 7
136Y101158
A A
TEN_N 灰 GRY 1 TRC2
8 TEN_N
GND 黒 BLK 2
8 TRC_DGND1 デバイス
TDATA_O 灰 GRY 3
8 TDATA_O 136Y101148 （デバイス附属ハーネス）
GND 黒 BLK 4
8 TRC_DGND2 1 DB1
TDATA_I 灰 GRY 5 8 HV_OUT
8 TDATA_I
GND 黒 BLK 6
8 TRC_DGND3
TCLK 灰 GRY 7
8 TCLK
GND 黒 BLK 8
8 TRC_DGND4
Start_N 灰 GRY 9
8 Start_N
GND 黒 BLK 10
B 8 TRC_DGND5 ＡＣ B
R_LEDON 灰 GRY 11
8 R_LEDON
GND 黒 BLK 12 Y
8 TRC_DGND6
TRCINT_N 灰 GRY 13 136Y101147
8 TRCINT_N ADC2
GND 黒 BLK 14 茶 BRN 1
8 TRC_DGND7 8 HV_AG
TRSV_OUT 灰 GRY 15
8 TRSV_OUT
GND 黒 BLK 16
8 TRC_DGND8
TRSV_IN 灰 GRY 17
8 TRSV_IN
GND 黒 BLK 18
8 TRC_DGND9
ツイスト 19 TRC4 ADC5
1 1
C
20 C
ＦＰＣ５１B 113Y1969 DB101
ADC制御信号 ADC101 1 1
100 80
71 71
TRC5 1 1 ADC3
136Y101152 （他社製造）
ＦＰＣ５１B 113Y1969
+24V_A 黒 BLK TRC1 胸壁側信号・
3 TRC_+24V 1 ・
GND_A 茶 BRN 100 80
3 TRC_GND 2 ・
D 3 ・ D
・
TRC6 1 1 ADC4 ・
ＦＰＣ５１B 113Y1969 ・
反胸壁側信号・
100 80 ・
・
DB120
ADC120 1 1
136Y101160
E E
5 Image_signal[1:37] 71 71
TRC3 1 GND 橙 ORN GND 1 ADC1
TRC7 2 +3.3V 橙 ORN +3.3V 2
1
2
4 +3.3V 橙 ORN +3.3V 4
Image_signal17 5 GND 橙 ORN GND 5 DB121
17
Image_signal18 6 +3.3V 橙 ORN +3.3V 6 ADC6 1 1
18
19
Image_signal20 8 -3.3V 橙 ORN -24V 8
20
9 橙 ORN GND 9 5 5
F F
Image_signal36 橙 ORN -3.3V 10
36
Image_signal37 37
136Y101145 （他社製造）
TRC51A-TRC7 ←→ MPI51A-MPI2
G Signal name № Signal name G
GND 1 16 GND
DATA3+ 2 17 DATA7+
DATA3- 3 18 DATA7-
GND 4 19 GND 8 ADC_GND
CLK0+ 5 20 CLK1+
CLK0- 6 21 CLK1-
GND 7 22 GND 8 ADC_-24V
DATA2+ 8 23 DATA6+
DATA2- 9 24 DATA6-
GND 10 25 GND
DATA1+ 11 26 DATA5+ 機種 5011 ユニット -
DATA1- 12 27 DATA5-
H GND 13 28 GND 名称回路図補助名称 MARS[24x30] H
DATA0+ 14 29 DATA4+
DATA0- 15 30 DATA4- コード Z22N5011000 Rev.
頁
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-34

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
ﾊﾞｽ内
J T5
136Y101156
A
95 A
136Y102002
SZ1_VCC 灰 GRY 1 JCT8 JCT7 1 灰 GRY SZ1_VCC 1
7 SZ1_VCC SZ1
SZ1_VOUT 茶 BRN 2 2 茶 BRN SZ1_VOUT 2
7 SZ1_VOUT 副走査ＨＰ検出
SZ1_GND 黒 BLK 3 3 黒 BLK SZ1_GND 3
7 SZ1_GND
ツイスト 4 4 ツイスト
5 5
6 6
B B
136Y102003
ER
Ｙ 7
ERS_V1 灰 GRY 1 JCT4 JCT3 1 茶 BRN ERS_V1 1 ERS1
7 ERS_V1
ERS_V2 灰 GRY 2 2 茶 BRN ERS_V2 2
7 ERS_V2
ERS_GND1 灰 GRY 3 3 茶 BRN ERS_GND 3
7 ERS_GND1
ERS_GND2 灰 GRY 4 4 茶 BRN ERS_GND 4
C 7 ERS_GND2 C
ERS_LED_CHK 灰 GRY 5 5 茶 BRN ERS_LED_CHK 5
7 ERS_LED_CHK
LED_ADJ 灰 GRY 6 6 茶 BRN ERS_ADJ 6
7 LED_ADJ
ERS_GND3 灰 GRY 7 7 茶 BRN ERS_NC 7
7 ERS_GND3
D
136Y102004 E 5 D
12 AEC1
AEC_FG 灰 GRY 11 JCT6 JCT5 茶 BRN AEC_FG Ｙ 7
7 AEC_FG 11 11
AEC_TxD 灰 GRY 10 10 茶 BRN AEC_TxD 10
7 AEC_TxD
AEC_RxD 灰 GRY 9 9 茶 BRN AEC_RxD 9
7 AEC_RxD
AEC_GND1 灰 GRY 8 8 茶 BRN AEC_GND1 8
7 AEC_GND1
AEC_IN1 灰 GRY 7 7 茶 BRN AEC_IN1 7
7 AEC_IN1
AEC_IN2 灰 GRY 6 6 茶 BRN AEC_IN2 6
7 AEC_IN2
AEC_OUT1 灰 GRY 5 5 茶 BRN AEC_OUT1 5
7 AEC_OUT1
AEC_OUT2 灰 GRY 4 4 茶 BRN AEC_OUT2 4
7 AEC_OUT2
AEC_+5V 灰 GRY 3 3 茶 BRN AEC_+5V 3
7 AEC_+5V
E AEC_GND2 灰 GRY 2 2 茶 BRN AEC_GND2 2 E
7 AEC_GND2
AEC_-5V 灰 GRY 1 1 茶 BRN AEC_-5V 1
7 AEC_-5V
136Y102005
136Y101157 D
Ｙ 0 7
F GND1 灰 GRY 1 JCT2 JCT1 1 FG 1 LED1 F
7 LED_GND1
7 LED_V1
7 LED_GND2
7 LED_V2
7 LED_GND3
7 LED_V3
7 LED_GND4
8 8 GND 8
9 FG 9
金ﾒｯｷFFCｹｰﾌﾞﾙ
G G
頁
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-35

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
影 A Ａ
温調ユニット
136Y101152 （他社製造） 136Y101164 136Y102006
ＹＹ 136Y101167
CN10-J CN10-P CN11-1 CN11-2 PE1
緑 GRN +24V_T 1 1 橙
ORN +24V 1 PTC5 PTC1 1 青 BLU PE1_+24V 1 NFI2 NFI1 1 青
BLU PE1_+24V 1 1
赤 PEL_+24V
A 3 PTC_+24V1 ﾍﾟﾙﾁｪ A
黄 YEL +24V_T 3 3 橙
ORN +24V 2 3 青 BLU PE1_GND 6 6 青
BLU PE1_GND 2 2
黒_PEL_GND
3 PTC_+24V2
橙 ORN GND_T 2 2 橙
ORN
3 2 青 BLU PE2_+24V 2 2 青
BLU PE2_+24V リード線
3 PTC_DGND1
桃 PIK GND_T 4 4 橙
ORN GND 4 4 青 BLU PE2_GND 7 7 青
BLU PE2_GND
3 PTC_DGND2
GND 5 青 BLU PO_+24V 3 3 青
BLU PO_+24V ｻｰﾓｽﾀｯﾄ
6 青 BLU PO_GND 8 8 青
BLU PO_GND CN22-1 CN22-2 136Y101200
TN1 TN2
青 BLU PO_IL 4 4 青
BLU PO_IL 1 1 1 1
茶 BRN FAN2_+24V 9 9 灰
GRY FAN2_+24V 2 2
136Y101155
茶 BRN FAN2_FAIL 5 5 灰
GRY FAN2_FAIL
茶 BRN FAN2_GND 10 10 灰
GRY FAN2_GND
灰 GRY PTC_TxD 1 PTC4 PTC2 1
B 7 PTC_TxD B
灰 GRY PTC_RxD 2 2 CN12-Ｊ CN12-P
7 PTC_RxD
灰 GRY GND 3 3 PO_+24V 1 1 赤 P1_+24V 1 .
7 PTC_GND1
灰 GRY GND 4 PO_GND 2 2 黒_P1_GND 2 .
7 PTC_GND2 ポンプ
灰 GRY PTC_RESET_N 5 PO_IL 3 3 白_P1_IL 3 .
7 PTC_RESET_N
灰 GRY PTC_IN1 6
ﾘｰﾄﾞ線
7 PTC_IN1
灰 GRY PTC_IN2 7
7 PTC_IN2
灰 GRY PTC_OUT1 8
7 PTC_OUT1 136Y102006
灰 GRY PTC_OUT2 9
7 PTC_OUT2 CN13
FAN2_+24V 灰 GRY 4 1 +24
C 3 2 NC C
FAN2_FAIL 灰 GRY 2 3 ALARM FAN7
FAN2_GND 灰 GRY 1 4 GND
デバイス室内
1 PTC7 PTC3 1 FAN4_+24V 茶 BRN 4 NFI6 NFI5 1 1 .
136Y101170 2 2 FAN4_GND 3 2 2 .
TDB51A 136Y101182 FAN9
113Y1961 3 3 FAN4_FAIL 茶 BRN 2 3 3 .
CN14-2 CN14-1 4 4 FAN3_+24V 茶 BRN
1 4
TDB1-2 4赤 TH2_+5V 1 4赤 TH2_+5V 赤 5 5 FAN3_GND
D
リード線 D
3黄 TH2_OUT 2 3黄 TH2_OUT 黄 6 6 FAN3_FAIL
2白 TH2_GND 3 2白 TH2_GND 白 7 7 FAN2_+24V
1黒 TH2_FG 4 1黒 TH2_FG 黒 8 8 FAN2_GND
TH3_+5V 赤 9 9 FAN2_FAIL
機内冷却風 TH3_OUT 黄 10 10 FAN1_+24V 茶 BRN 4 NFI4 NFI3 1 1 .
TH3_GND 白 11 11 FAN1_GND 3 2 2 . FAN8
TH3_FG 黒 12 12 FAN1_FAIL 茶 BRN 2 3 3 .
TDB51A 茶 BRN 1 4
113Y1961
リード線
E TDB1-3 4赤 TH3_+5V
E
3黄 TH3_OUT
2白 TH3_GND
1黒 TH3_FG
機内雰囲気側
PTC8 1 FAN5_+24V 茶 BRN 4 NFI8 NFI7 1 1 .
2 FAN5_GND 3 2 2 . FAN10
3 FAN5_FAIL 茶 BRN 2 3 3 .
4 茶 BRN 1 4
5 136Y102006 リード線
6
F F
136Y102006
デバイス室内
CN16-1 CN16-2
茶 BRN 3 1 1 .
茶 BRN 2 2 2 . 機内循環用ﾌｧﾝ
G FAN6 （ｼﾛｯｺﾌｧﾝ） G
茶 BRN 1 3 3 .
リード線
136Y101387
136Y101386
X20 CN30-R CN30-P RSW
1黒黒1 1 灰
GRY
1
2白白2 2 灰
GRY
2 機種 5011 ユニット -

頁
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-36
08 部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No
113N100091/A/B 03B-6 136Y101202B/C 06-24 350N101272 02C-6 376N100021A 01B-7 W11G10140045 02C-2
113Y100273C 03B-16 136Y101382A 06-25 350N101744B 04C-3 376N100023B 01B-8 W11G10141960 02D-1
113Y1962D 03B-9 136Y101383 06-26 350N101834A 04B-13 376N100039 01B-19 W11G10415588 01A-1
113Y1963D 03B-2 136Y101384 06-27 350N2774C 03C-2 379Y100034E/F 02A-3 W11G10415589 01A-2
113Y1964B 03B-3 136Y101385B 06-28 350Y100595L 02A-6 386N100335A 04C-4.4 W11G10415592 02E-1
113Y1965C 03B-8 136Y101386 06-29 350Y100820L 02A-5 386N100336A 04C-4.2 W11G10415596 02C-3
113Y1970C 02A-2 136Y101387D 06-30 350Y100861B 01B-12 386N100337A 04C-4.1 W11G10415606 04A-1
113Y1977A 03B-5 136Y101389 05-5 350Y100929C 01B-21 386N100338A 04C-4.3 W11G10415612 01B-11
113Y1979A 03C-8 136Y101533 06-31 350Y100930C 01B-20 386Y100040 04C-4 W11G10415613 01B-14
113Y1980A 03B-1 136Y102382C 04B-6 350Y100931D 01B-13 405N101115 01B-17 W11G10415615 01B-15
114N100013 03B-4 136Y102395B 04B-10 350Y100933C 04A-6 814Y100132A/B/C 03B-7 W11G10415616 01B-16
114N100026 03B-17 136Y102825A 04B-12 350Y100935B 04A-5 848Y100054F 02A-1 W11G10415617 01B-5
119S0043 03C-1 136Y102826A 04B-11 350Y100949A 01B-6 848Y100065B 02A-8 W11G10415617 02B-4
119Y100028B 02A-7 137S1374 03B-12 350Y100950A 01B-1 W11G03082146 02E-5 W11G10415617 02C-4
120S5268 04A-12 137S1417 02A-12 350Y101005 02A-10 W11G06343144 01A-9 W11G10415618 02B-8
125Y100032 03C-4 137S1417 03B-14 350Y101006A 02A-9 W11G07061989 02D-5 W11G10415618 02C-8
128S1088 03C-7 137S1420 03B-11 350Y101488 04C-2 W11G10139621 02D-2 W11G10415619 02B-9
133Y100033A 05-1.1 137S1423 03B-15 350Y101550 04B-3 W11G10139644 02E-4 W11G10415619 02C-9
133Y100036A 05-1.2 137S1436 03B-13 350Y101551 04B-4 W11G10139656 04A-2 W11G10415626 02B-3
135S0829 03C-5 137S1456 03B-10 350Y101589 04B-8 W11G10139755 04A-3 W11G10501290 02B-1
135Y100008 03C-6 301S7000310 04B-20 350Y101608 04B-1 W11G10139779 02E-2 W11G10501290 02C-1
136N100143 04B-14 304S1000820 03C-9 350Y101609 04B-2 W11G10139824 02B-7.6 W11G10501291 02D-4
136Y101145 06-1 304S1000820 04A-7 351Y100004F 03A-4 W11G10139824 02C-7.6 W11G10501292 02E-3
136Y101146 06-2 305N100033 03C-3 356N104378B 04B-5 W11G10139846 01A-8 W11G14409787 04A-11
136Y101152 06-3 305N100033 04A-10 356N104569 04B-7 W11G10139907 01A-7
136Y101153 06-4 308S0414 04B-18 356N104614C 04B-9 W11G10139931 02D-3
136Y101179 05-4 308S9780612 04B-19 356N104719 04C-1.2 W11G10139940 02B-7.1
136Y101180A 06-5 309S0120008 03C-11 356N105032 04B-15 W11G10139940 02C-7.1
136Y101181A 06-6 309S0120008 04A-9 356S1138 04C-7 W11G10139942 02B-7.2
136Y101183 06-7 309S0220008 03C-10 356Y100803 02E-6 W11G10139942 02C-7.2
136Y101184A 06-8 309S0220008 04A-8 356Y100836 05-3 W11G10139943 02B-7.5
136Y101185A 06-9 315S0057 04C-2.2 356Y101132A 04C-1 W11G10139943 02C-7.5
136Y101186A 06-10 316S0256 04B-16 356Y101134B 04C-6 W11G10139944 02C-7.8
136Y101187 06-11 316S1082 04B-17 357Y100226A 04A-4 W11G10139950 02B-5.1
136Y101189 06-12 316S2094 05-7 357Y100257 05-2 W11G10139952 02B-5.2
136Y101190A 06-13 316S2106 04C-5 357Y100270 05-10 W11G10139964 02C-5
136Y101191 06-14 316S4016 04C-2.1 358Y100111A 04B-21 W11G10139970 02B-7.3
136Y101192 06-15 317N100022B 03A-3 359Y100048 02A-4 W11G10139970 02C-7.3
136Y101193 06-16 345N1823D 03A-1 360N100074G 01B-4 W11G10139972 02B-7.4
136Y101194 06-17 346N100689 04C-1.1 370N100155 05-6 W11G10139972 02C-7.4
136Y101195A 06-18 346N100690 04C-1.3 370N100156 05-8 W11G10139974 02C-7.7
136Y101196 06-19 350N100868C 01B-2 370N100272 03C-13 W11G10140032 01A-3
136Y101197 06-20 350N100930B 01B-9 370Y100224 05-9 W11G10140033 01A-4
136Y101198 06-21 350N100931B 01B-10 370Y100306 02A-11 W11G10140034 01A-6
136Y101199C 06-22 350N101267 01B-18 376N0238 03A-2 W11G10140036 01A-5
136Y101200B 06-23 350N101272 02B-6 376N100016A 01B-3 W11G10140045 02B-2

SP-37
09 締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
1. 締結用および配線用のサービス部品について 1. Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
● 発注の際は部品コードと発注数量を明記すること。発注数量は 100 個単位とする。 l Clearly indicate the part code and quantity required when ordering service parts.
Service parts can be ordered in sets of 100.
2. ねじ類
2. Screws
● サービス部品一覧表の中のねじの記載方法の例を以下に示す。この記載方法はサービ
スマニュアル内の記載方法と同じである。 l The following is an example of how screws in the service parts table are described.
This description method is the same as that in this Service Manual.

SP-38
09 締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
ネジナット
参考情報参考情報
記号部品コード Reference information 記号部品コード Reference information
Symbol Parts code 形状部品名称材質、処理など Symbol Parts code 形状部品名称材質、処理など
Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc. Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc.
鋼ステンレス
座金組込みばね座金 + みがき丸座金六角ナット不動態化処理
Na
十字穴付六角ボルト亜鉛メッキ + 白色 3 価クロメート Hexagon nut Stainless steel
BR4x20 308S0410 Cross recessed 色：うすい白色 Passive state treatment
BR6x12 308S9780612 hexagon head Steel
screw with spring Zinc plating/White trivalent
and plain washers chromating
Color: Light white 配線用部品
鋼
参考情報
亜鉛メッキ + 白色 3 価クロメート
六角頭 TP ネジ記号部品コード Reference information
TP3x6 308S0414 色：うすい白色
Cross recessed Symbol Parts code
TP3x12 308S0419 Steel 形状部品名称
hexagon head TP
TP4x6 308S0416 Zinc plating/White trivalent Shape Parts name
screw
chromating
LWS-0711Z 316S1027
Color: Light white
LWS-1211Z 316S1028
ばね・平座金組込コードクランプ
六角穴付ボルト LWSM-0511 316S0259 Code clamp
Hexagon socket
BQ6x16
head cap screws LWSM-0306 316S0258
with spring and
plain washer
六角穴付ボルトコードクランプ
LES-0510 316S0256
Q6x40 Hexagon socket Code clamp
head cap screws
六角穴付 EMT-3N 316S1309 クランプ
ボタンボルト Clamp
EMT-6N 316S1310
Hexagon socket
button head screws 束線バンド
PLT2S 316S1082
Cable tie
Cross recessed
S3x10 301S7000310 十字穴付サラ小ネジ
flat-head screw

SP-39
BLANK PAGE

SP-40
BLANK PAGE

SP-41
BLANK PAGE

Control Sheet
FDR MS-1000
Service Manual
Preventive Maintenance (PM)

PM-1
1. Preventive Maintenance Program 1.2 Notation of Age
The following notations are mentioned for the respective maintenance programs.
Check what the notation means before starting the task.
n Precautions in Preventive Maintenance
Temperature is not controlled in the FPD, when the power of the controller unit 1Y : Procedure performed at an age of 1 year.
is turned OFF. Therefore, check that the indoor environments (temperature and 2Y : Procedure performed at an age of 2 years.
humidity) conform to the specifications when working with the power of the controller 3Y : Procedure performed at an age of 3 years.
unit OFF. If the environments are out of the specifications, the machine might get 4Y : Procedure performed at an age of 4 years.
degraded by the influence of the environments.
5Y : Procedure performed at an age of 5 years.
{Product Specifications: 1.2.2_FPD Specifications} 6Y : Procedure performed at an age of 6 years.
7Y : Procedure performed at an age of 7 years.
1.1 How to Use the Preventive Maintenance 8Y : Procedure performed at an age of 8 years.
Volume 9Y : Procedure performed at an age of 9 years.
- Perform the corresponding maintenance programs according to the notations of age

( 1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y , 6Y , 7Y , 8Y , 9Y ).
- The preventive maintenance program list is prepared for the respective ages of 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9 years. As the tasks to be performed depend on the age of service,
follow the list in carrying out the preventive maintenance program.
019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual PM-1

PM-2
1.3 Preventive Maintenance Program List
u INSTRUCTION u
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power supply cable and additional protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining screws.
To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are
restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
l Preventive maintenance program list

Refer to the corresponding procedure for preventive maintenance when the age of the machine reaches the specified value.
Shown below is the correspondence between the list of maintenance programs and the age of the machine.
Refer to sections 1.3.1 and later for the preventive maintenance program for each age. m: Procedure which must be performed for each preventive maintenance
Time
Maintenance program 1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 6Y 7Y 8Y 9Y requirements Replacement parts Jigs/tools/measuring instruments used
2. Checking the Error Log m m m m m m m m m 10 min
3. Checking the Exposure Count m m m m m m m m m 2 min
4. Checking the Elevation Stand and the Operation Desk m m m m m m m m m 5 min
5. Removing the Covers m m m m m m m m m 15 min
6. Cleaning the Air Filter m - m - m - m - m 10 min
7. Replacing the Air Filter - m - m - m - m - 10 min Air filter
8. Checking the Coolant m m m m m m m m m 5 min
9. Checking the Single Tank Unit m m m m m m m m m 3 min
10. Replacing the Lithium Battery (CBS Board) - - m - - m - - m 15 min Lithium battery
11. Reinstalling the Covers m m m m m m m m m 15 min
Positioner retainer
12. Checking the 1.8-Fold Magnification Exposure Stand S *1 - m - m - m - m - 5 min (as needed)
13. Checking the Elevation of the Swivel Arm m m m m m m m m m 10 min
14. Checking the Rotation of the Swivel Arm m m m m m m m m m 10 min
15. Checking the Stereo Motion of the Swivel Arm *2 m m m m m m m m m 5 min
16. Checking the Emergency Stop Switches m m m m m m m m m 10 min
17. Checking the Compression Unit m m m m m m m m m 20 min Compression gauge, 40 mm acrylic board
18. Checking the Collimator m m m m m m m m m 10 min
19. Generator Adjustment m m m m m m m m m 10 min
20. FPD Calibration m m m m m m m m m 120 min
21. Checking the Exposure Recognition Function m m m m m m m m m 5 min
22. Checking the AEC m m m m m m m m m 15 min Dosimeter, 40 mm acrylic board
23. AEC Sensitivity Error Detection m m m m m m m m m 10 min 40 mm acrylic board
24. Checking the Variation in X-ray Output m m m m m m m m m 25 min
25. Checking for Image Problems m m m m m m m m m 10 min
26. SDM Calibration *2 m m m m m m m m m 15 min
27. Checking the AWS m m m m m m m m m 10 min
28. Clearing the Error Log m m m m m m m m m 5 min
29. Visual Inspection and Cleaning of the Machine m m m m m m m m m 10 min
30. Protective Grounding Test m m m m m m m m m -
31. Measurement of Leakage Current and Patient Leakage Current m m m m m m m m m -
*1: Only when the 1.8-fold magnification exposure stand kit S (optional) is mounted
*2: Only when the stereo exposure kit (optional) is mounted

PM-3
1.3.1 Maintenance Program at the Age of 1, 5 and 7 Years 1.3.2 Maintenance Program at the Age of 2, 4 and 8 Years
l Maintenance program at the age of 1, 5 and 7 years ( 1Y , 5Y , 7Y ) l Maintenance program at the age of 2, 4 and 8 years ( 2Y , 4Y , 8Y )
Jigs/tools/ Jigs/tools/
Time Replacement Time Replacement
Maintenance program measuring Maintenance program measuring
requirements parts requirements parts
instruments used instruments used
2. Checking the Error Log 10 min 2. Checking the Error Log 10 min
3. Checking the Exposure Count 2 min 3. Checking the Exposure Count 2 min
4. Checking the Elevation Stand and the 4. Checking the Elevation Stand and the
5 min 5 min
Operation Desk Operation Desk
5. Removing the Covers 15 min 5. Removing the Covers 15 min
6. Cleaning the Air Filter 10 min 7. Replacing the Air Filter 10 min Air filter
8. Checking the Coolant 5 min 8. Checking the Coolant 5 min
9. Checking the Single Tank Unit 3 min 9. Checking the Single Tank Unit 3 min
11. Reinstalling the Covers 15 min 11. Reinstalling the Covers 15 min
Positioner
13. Checking the Elevation of the Swivel 12. Checking the 1.8-Fold Magnification
10 min 5 min retainer
Arm Exposure Stand S *1 (as needed)
14. Checking the Rotation of the Swivel 13. Checking the Elevation of the Swivel
10 min 10 min
Arm Arm
15. Checking the Stereo Motion of the 14. Checking the Rotation of the Swivel
5 min 10 min
Swivel Arm *2 Arm
16. Checking the Emergency Stop 15. Checking the Stereo Motion of the
10 min 5 min
Switches Swivel Arm *2
Compression 16. Checking the Emergency Stop Switches 10 min
17. Checking the Compression Unit 20 min gauge, 40 mm Compression
acrylic board 17. Checking the Compression Unit 20 min gauge, 40 mm
18. Checking the Collimator 10 min acrylic board
19. Generator Adjustment 10 min 18. Checking the Collimator 10 min
20. FPD Calibration 120 min 19. Generator Adjustment 10 min
21. Checking the Exposure Recognition 20. FPD Calibration 120 min
5 min
Function 21. Checking the Exposure Recognition 5 min
Dosimeter, 40 mm Function
22. Checking the AEC 15 min
acrylic board Dosimeter, 40 mm
22. Checking the AEC 15 min
40 mm acrylic acrylic board
23. AEC Sensitivity Error Detection 10 min board 23. AEC Sensitivity Error Detection 10 min 40 mm acrylic board
24. Checking the Variation in X-ray Output 25 min 24. Checking the Variation in X-ray Output 25 min
25. Checking for Image Problems 10 min 25. Checking for Image Problems 10 min
26. SDM Calibration *2 15 min 26. SDM Calibration *2 15 min
27. Checking the AWS 10 min 27. Checking the AWS 10 min
28. Clearing the Error Log 5 min 28. Clearing the Error Log 5 min
29. Visual Inspection and Cleaning of the 29. Visual Inspection and Cleaning of the
10 min 10 min
Machine Machine
30. Protective Grounding Test - 30. Protective Grounding Test -
31. Measurement of Leakage Current and 31. Measurement of Leakage Current and
- -
Patient Leakage Current Patient Leakage Current
*2: Only when the stereo exposure kit (optional) is mounted *1: Only when the 1.8-fold magnification exposure stand kit S (optional) is mounted

PM-4
1.3.3 Maintenance Program at the Age of 3 and 9 Years 1.3.4 Maintenance Program at the Age of 6 Years
l Maintenance program at the age of 3 and 9 years ( 3Y , 9Y ) l Maintenance program at the age of 6 years ( 6Y )
Jigs/tools/ Jigs/tools/
Time Replacement Time Replacement
Maintenance program measuring Maintenance program measuring
requirements parts requirements parts
instruments used instruments used
2. Checking the Error Log 10 min 2. Checking the Error Log 10 min
3. Checking the Exposure Count 2 min 3. Checking the Exposure Count 2 min
4. Checking the Elevation Stand and the 4. Checking the Elevation Stand and the
5 min 5 min
Operation Desk Operation Desk
5. Removing the Covers 15 min 5. Removing the Covers 15 min
6. Cleaning the Air Filter 10 min 7. Replacing the Air Filter 10 min Air filter
8. Checking the Coolant 5 min 8. Checking the Coolant 5 min
9. Checking the Single Tank Unit 3 min 9. Checking the Single Tank Unit 3 min
10. Replacing the Lithium Battery (CBS 11. Reinstalling the Covers 15 min
15 min Lithium battery
Board)
Positioner
11. Reinstalling the Covers 15 min 12. Checking the 1.8-Fold Magnification
5 min retainer
Exposure Stand S *1
13. Checking the Elevation of the Swivel (as needed)
10 min
Arm 13. Checking the Elevation of the Swivel Arm 10 min
14. Checking the Rotation of the Swivel 14. Checking the Rotation of the Swivel Arm 10 min
10 min
Arm
15. Checking the Stereo Motion of the Swivel
15. Checking the Stereo Motion of the 5 min
5 min Arm *2
Swivel Arm *2
16. Checking the Emergency Stop Switches 10 min
16. Checking the Emergency Stop 10 min Compression
Switches
17. Checking the Compression Unit 20 min gauge, 40 mm
Compression acrylic board
17. Checking the Compression Unit 20 min gauge, 40 mm
acrylic board 18. Checking the Collimator 10 min
18. Checking the Collimator 10 min 19. Generator Adjustment 10 min
19. Generator Adjustment 10 min 20. FPD Calibration 120 min
20. FPD Calibration 120 min 21. Checking the Exposure Recognition
5 min
Function
21. Checking the Exposure Recognition 5 min Dosimeter, 40 mm
Function 22. Checking the AEC 15 min
acrylic board
Dosimeter, 40 mm
22. Checking the AEC 15 min 40 mm acrylic
acrylic board 23. AEC Sensitivity Error Detection 10 min
board
40 mm acrylic
23. AEC Sensitivity Error Detection 10 min 24. Checking the Variation in X-ray Output 25 min
board
24. Checking the Variation in X-ray Output 25 min 25. Checking for Image Problems 10 min
25. Checking for Image Problems 10 min 26. SDM Calibration *2 15 min
26. SDM Calibration *2 15 min 27. Checking the AWS 10 min
27. Checking the AWS 10 min 28. Clearing the Error Log 5 min
28. Clearing the Error Log 5 min 29. Visual Inspection and Cleaning of the
10 min
Machine
29. Visual Inspection and Cleaning of the 10 min 30. Protective Grounding Test -
Machine
30. Protective Grounding Test - 31. Measurement of Leakage Current and -
Patient Leakage Current
31. Measurement of Leakage Current and - *1: Only when the 1.8-fold magnification exposure stand kit S (optional) is mounted
Patient Leakage Current

PM-5
2. Checking the Error Log (6) From Window’s Start menu, choose “Run...”, type in or select [“C:\
Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\Tool\RuPcTool\RuPCTool.exe”], and click
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 6Y 7Y 8Y 9Y
[OK].
...........
n Checking the Error Log of the RU ...........
...........
...........
(2) Turn ON the circuit breaker of the controller unit. ...........
...........
Run... #1 [Click]
.... Run ?
(5) Press the AWS's [Windows] key to open the Start menu of Windows. .... Type the name of a program, folder, document, or
Internet resource, and Windows will open it for you.
Press Open: "C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\Tool\RuPcTool\RuPCTool.exe" #2

[Type in
#3 [Click] OK Cancel Browse...
DRMS9003.ai
or select]
RU PC-TOOL window <Display example>

Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU
RU IP ADDR
BACKUP RESTORE
ALL RUs SETT NG
DRMS9004.EPS

PM-6
(7) Open the ERROR DB window, and check the error log. (8) Click on the upper right of the RU PC-TOOL screen to exit the RU
Check to make sure that no serious error occurs. PC-TOOL.
u INSTRUCTION u RU PC-TOOL window <Display example>
RU PC-TOOL Ver.*.*
If a serious error occurs, take the countermeasures. Configuration(C) Operation(O)
EACH RU SETTING
Store the log file as needed. CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME ru0 LIST OF EXISTING RU
RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE ER
RU IP ADDR 192 168 0 101 ru0 192.168.0.101 MARS (7). #1 [Select/Click]
MUTL PING MON FTP DELETE
INSTALL VERSION UP EDIT HISTORY EDIT CONFIGURATION
EDIT CL NAME
BACKUP RESTORE
ERROR LOG
EXECUTE EXECUTE
I/O TRACE EXPERT ERROR DB
ALL RUs SETTING

UNINSTALL
(7). #2 [Click]
(8). #1
(7). #3
[Click]
ERROR-DB [Scroll]
window <Display example>
(7). #4
[Click]
(7). #5
[Check]
Details of
the error
DRMS9005.ai

PM-7
n Checking the Error Log of the Mammographic Stand (2) Click [Error Log] to open the error log window.
Main menu window
(1) Start up the Zigma Webserver, and open the main menu window.
Main menu window
[Click]
“Error Log”
Error log window

DRMS9006.ai
DRMS9007.ai

PM-8
(3) Check the error log. (4) Click [Back to Main-Menu] to return to the main menu window.
Check to make sure that no serious error occurs. [Click]
u INSTRUCTION u Error log window “Back to Main-Menu”
If a serious error occurs, take the countermeasures.

Store the log file as needed.
#1
[Scroll]
#2 Scroll bar
[Check]
Error log window “Error Log”
Main menu window
DRMS9008.ai
DRMS9009.ai

PM-9
3. Checking the Exposure Count (1) Click [Generator] on the main menu window to open the generator
main window.
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 6Y 7Y 8Y 9Y Main menu window
REFERENCE
The exposure count is recorded in the memory in the CBS board. When the
lithium battery in the CBS board has no voltage applied or the battery is removed,
the exposure count is reset. Record the exposure count during the preventive
maintenance to know the exposure count.
[Click]
“Generator”
DRMS9010.ai

PM-10
(2) Check the exposure counter value.
Record the indicated value.
[Check]
“Exposure counter”
value
DRMS9011.ai

PM-11
4. Checking the Elevation Stand and 4.2 Checking the Operation Desk
the Operation Desk (1) Check that the anchor bolt is not loose.
If the bolt is loose, retighten it.
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 6Y 7Y 8Y 9Y
4.1 Checking the Elevation Stand

(1) Remove the base plate cover.
{MC:2.2.6_Base Plate Cover}
Operation A B
desk
(2) Check that the anchor bolt is not loose.
If the bolt is loose, retighten it.
DETAIL A DETAIL B
[Retighten]
Anchor bolt x5
DRMS9012.EPS
(3) Reinstall the base plate cover. [Retighten] [Retighten]

Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation. Anchor bolt Anchor bolt
DRMS9013 ai

PM-12
5. Removing the Covers (3) Turn OFF the power of the AWS.
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 6Y 7Y 8Y 9Y
(2) Lower the swivel arm to its lowermost position.
WARNINGS
(1). #1 [Rotate]/
(2). #1 [Lower] l Be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard to
Swivel arm avoid electric shock hazards.
OFF.
DRMS9014.ai

PM-13
(7) Remove the compression plate and the face guard. (9) Remove the swivel arm lower cover.
#1
[Remove] Swivel arm
Face guard lower cover
#2
[Remove]
Compression DRMS9016.ai
plate (10) Remove the swivel arm left-hand side cover.

DRMS9056.ai
(8) Remove the swivel arm top cover.

Swivel arm top

cover
Swivel arm
DRMS9017.ai
DRMS9015.ai

PM-14
(11) Remove the swivel arm right-hand side cover. (13) Remove the filter cover and the air filter from the carbon cover.
#2
Swivel arm [Remove]
right-hand side cover Filter cover/
air filter
#1
[Remove]
Bind screw
(M3x6)
DRMS9023.ai
DRMS9018.ai
(12) Remove the FPD lower cover.

FPD lower cover
DRMS9019.ai

PM-15
6. Cleaning the Air Filter 6.2 Air Filter of the FPD Lower Cover
1Y 3Y 5Y 7Y 9Y (1) Remove the air filter from the FPD lower cover.
u NOTE u
[Remove]
Replace the filter if the filter cannot be cleaned with a vacuum cleaner.
Air filter
6.1 Air Filter of the Carbon Cover

(1) Remove the air filter from the filter cover of the carbon cover.
[Remove]
Air filter FPD lower cover
DRMS9025.ai
(2) Clean the air filter with a vacuum cleaner.

Filter cover
(3) Reinstall the air filter.
DRMS9024.ai
(2) Clean the air filter with a vacuum cleaner.


PM-16
6.3 Air Filter of the Swivel Arm Right-Hand (2) Clean the air filter with a vacuum cleaner.
Side Cover
(1) Remove the air filter from the swivel arm right-hand side cover.
Swivel arm
Filter retaining
bracket
[Clean]
Air filter
DRMS9027.ai

#1 Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
[Remove]
TP3x6
#2
#3 [Remove]
[Remove] Filter retaining
Air filter bracket
DRMS9026.ai

PM-17
7. Replacing the Air Filter 7.2 Air Filter of the FPD Lower Cover
2Y 4Y 6Y 8Y (1) Remove the air filter from the FPD lower cover.
7.1 Air Filter of the Carbon Cover [Remove]

Air filter
(1) Remove the air filter from the filter cover of the carbon cover.
[Remove]
Air filter
FPD lower cover
Filter cover
DRMS9025.ai
(2) Install a new air filter.

DRMS9024.ai


PM-18
7.3 Air Filter of the Swivel Arm Right-Hand
Side Cover
(1) Remove the air filter from the swivel arm right-hand side cover.
Swivel arm
#1
[Remove]
TP3x6
#2
#3 [Remove]
[Remove] Filter retaining
Air filter bracket
DRMS9026.ai


PM-19
8. Checking the Coolant (2) Check the liquid level of the coolant in the reserve tank.
u INSTRUCTION u
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 6Y 7Y 8Y 9Y
If the liquid level of the coolant is as shown in the figure “NO GOOD”, replenish
(1) Remove the side cover from the temperature adjustment unit. the coolant.
{MC:13.2.2_Filling the Coolant}
Reserve tank
DETAIL A
Side cover of the GOOD NO GOOD
temperature adjustment unit
[Remove] than the joint of the reserve tank. than the joint of the reserve tank.
TP3x6 (x5) DRMS9029.ai
(3) Put on the side cover of the temperature adjustment unit.

DRMS9028.ai

PM-20
9. Checking the Single Tank Unit (2) Check to make sure that there is no leakage of oil on the joint of the
single tank unit.
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 6Y 7Y 8Y 9Y u INSTRUCTION u
(1) Check to make sure that the single tank unit retaining screws are not If oil leakage or oozing is found at the joint of the single tank unit, replace the
loose. single tank unit.
If the screw is loose, retighten it. {MC:3.4_Single Tank Unit}
Single tank unit

Single tank unit
A [Check]
Single tank unit joint
(whole circumference)
DETAIL A DRMS9031.ai
[Check]
Single tank unit
retaining screw
DRMS9030.ai

PM-21
10. Replacing the Lithium Battery (CBS (4) Turn OFF the power of the AWS.
Board) (6) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the controller unit.
3Y 6Y 9Y
CAUTIONS WARNINGS
- If you improperly replace the battery, an explosion may occur.
When replacing the lithium battery, use the one recommended by FUJIFILM. avoid electric shock hazards.
Be sure to return the old lithium battery to the parts center.
- When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. in a circuit after the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard is turned
If your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage OFF.
electronic components on the board. Be sure to proceed with operations after you are sure that the charge has
u INSTRUCTIONS u You can check the discharge by the following indications.
- Back up the configuration data of the mammographic stand before removing the - “PSU MAINS” LED on the power supply unit (PSU): The green LED is unlit.
lithium battery. If the data is not backed up, the generator, the compression unit, the - LED on the MFI board: The yellow LED is unlit.
collimator and the grid must be adjusted after the replacement of the battery.
- When the lithium battery is removed, the exposure count is reset. Be sure to
record the exposure count before removing the battery. The exposure count is not
recorded in the configuration data of the mammographic stand.
(1) Back up the configuration data of the mammographic stand.

(2) Replace the lithium battery (CBS board).
{MC:4.4_Lithium Battery (CBS Board)}
(3) Restore the configuration data of the mammographic stand.
{MC:8.1.2_Restoring the Configuration Data of the Mammographic Stand}

PM-22
11. Reinstalling the Covers (3) Reinstall the swivel arm right-hand side cover.
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 6Y 7Y 8Y 9Y
(1) Reinstall the filter cover and the air filter of the carbon cover.
Swivel arm
Filter cover/
air filter
[Tighten] DRMS9018.ai
Bind screw (4) Reinstall the swivel arm left-hand side cover.
(M3x6) {MC:2.1.3_Swivel Arm Left-Hand Side Cover}
DRMS9043.ai
(2) Reinstall the FPD lower cover.

Swivel arm
FPD lower cover

DRMS9017.ai
DRMS9019.ai

PM-23
(5) Reinstall the swivel arm lower cover. (7) Reinstall the compression plate and the face guard.
#2
[Reinstall]
Swivel arm Face guard
lower cover
#1
DRMS9016.ai
[Reinstall]
Compression plate
(6) Reinstall the swivel arm top cover.
DRMS9057.ai
Swivel arm top

cover
DRMS9015.ai

PM-24
12. Checking the 1.8-Fold Magnification (2) Remove the positioner retainer, and check if its wear has reached the
limit (root of the sphere).
Exposure Stand S
2Y 4Y 6Y 8Y
Limit Wear
*: Only when the 1.8-fold magnification exposure stand kit S (optional) is mounted.
Check to make sure that no rattling is observed in attachment of the positioner.
(1) Check to make sure that there is no gap between the positioner
retainer and the positioner when the 1.8-fold magnification exposure
stand S is locked.
Positioner retainer
DRMS9099.ai
l If the wear does not reach the limit:

Reposition the positioner.
{IN:Appendix 8.2_Adjustment of the Position of the Positioner}
No gap
l If the wear exceeds the limit:
Replace the positioner retainer, and adjust the position.
{IN:Appendix 8.1_Putting the Positioner Retainer}
{IN:Appendix 8.2_Adjustment of the Position of the Positioner}
DRMS9098.ai
l When no gap is observed:

End the inspection of the 1.8-fold magnification exposure stand S.
l If a gap is found:
Go to procedure (2).

PM-25
13. Checking the Elevation of the
Swivel Arm
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 6Y 7Y 8Y 9Y
{IN:28.1_Checking the Elevation of the Swivel Arm}

PM-26
14. Checking the Rotation of the
Swivel Arm
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 6Y 7Y 8Y 9Y
{IN:28.2_Checking the Rotation of the Swivel Arm}

PM-27
15. Checking the Stereo Motion of the
Swivel Arm
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 6Y 7Y 8Y 9Y
*: Only when the stereo exposure kit (optional) is mounted.

{IN:Appendix 10.7.1_Checking the Stereo Motion of the Swivel Arm}

PM-28
16. Checking the Emergency Stop
Switches
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 6Y 7Y 8Y 9Y
{IN:28.3_Checking the Emergency Stop Switches}

PM-29
17. Checking the Compression Unit
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 6Y 7Y 8Y 9Y
{IN:28.4_Checking the Compression Unit}

PM-30
18. Checking the Collimator
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 6Y 7Y 8Y 9Y
{IN:28.5_Checking the Collimator}

PM-31
19. Generator Adjustment
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 6Y 7Y 8Y 9Y
{MC:9_Generator Adjustment}

PM-32
20. FPD Calibration
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 6Y 7Y 8Y 9Y
{Calibration (CA)}

PM-33
21. Checking the Exposure Recognition
Function
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 6Y 7Y 8Y 9Y
{IN:24._Checking the Exposure Recognition Function}

PM-34
22. Checking the AEC
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 6Y 7Y 8Y 9Y
Check AEC accuracy.

{IN:25.1_Confirmation of AEC Accuracy}

PM-35
23. AEC Sensitivity Error Detection (4) Put the 40 mm acrylic board on the exposure stand.
u INSTRUCTIONS u
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 6Y 7Y 8Y 9Y
- Use a uniform acrylic board.
(1) Start up the MUTL. - Put the acrylic board to completely cover the AEC sensor area of the exposure
stand.
{MU:4._MUTL_n Starting Up and Exiting the MUTL}
(2) Click [Calibration (Field)] – [Set Aec Sens Fail Detect]. (5) Make exposure according the exposure instruction of the AWS.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the compression plate before making exposures.
(6) Check to make sure that no error occurs.

u INSTRUCTION u
If an error occurs, restart the machine, and again follow the procedures of (1) to (6).
If the error again occurs, sample the log (ALL LOGS), and commission the design
department for analysis.
{MU:3.13._BACKUP}
DRMS9100.ai
(3) Click [Calib]-[Field Calibration] on the AWS.
DRMS9101.ai

PM-36
24. Checking the Variation in X-Ray
Output
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 6Y 7Y 8Y 9Y
{IN:26_Checking the Variation in X-ray Output}

PM-37
25. Checking for Image Problems
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 6Y 7Y 8Y 9Y

PM-38
26. SDM Calibration
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 6Y 7Y 8Y 9Y
*: Only when the stereo exposure kit (optional) is mounted.

{IN:Appendix 10.8_Creating the Correction Data}

PM-39
27. Checking the AWS
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 6Y 7Y 8Y 9Y
Refer to the AWS Service Manual.

PM-40
28. Clearing the Error Log
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 6Y 7Y 8Y 9Y
n Clearing the RU Error Log

{IN:29.1_Clearing the RU Error Log}
n Clearing the Error Log of the Mammographic Stand

{IN:29.2_Clearing the Error Log of the Mammographic Stand}

PM-41
29. Visual Inspection and Cleaning of
the Machine
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 6Y 7Y 8Y 9Y
{IN:32._Visual Inspection and Cleaning of the Machine}

PM-42
30. Protective Grounding Test
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 6Y 7Y 8Y 9Y
Test the protective grounding as needed, in compliance with the local regulations.

PM-43
31. Measurement of Leakage Current
and Patient Leakage Current
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 6Y 7Y 8Y 9Y
Measure the leakage current and the patient leakage current as needed, in
compliance with the local regulations.

Control Sheet
FDR MS-1000
Service Manual
Installation (IN)

IN-1
1. Installation Work Flowchart 11.1 Marking and Drilling on the Installation Position
11.2 Securing the Mammographic Stand

START
12. Connecting the Cables to the Controller Unit
2. Installation Preparations
13. Connecting the Cables to the Mammographic Stand

2.1 Preinstallation Work
2.2 Tools and Measuring Instruments Necessary for 14. Changing the Swivel Arm Height (Uppermost Position)
Installation
15. Removing the Covers
3. Precautions in Installation
4. Transfer 16. Removing the Packing Material of the Swivel Arm (2)
4.1 Unloading and Preparation for Transfer 17. Unpacking and Temporarily Installing the FPD
4.2 Transferring the Mammographic Stand 17.1 Unpacking the FPD

4.3 Transferring Other Packed Items 17.2 Temporarily Installing the FPD
5. Checking the Items Supplied 18. Installing the FPD
6. Installing the Operation Desk 18.1 Removing the Carbon Cover
18.2 Removing the Inner Cover and the Cable Retaining Bracket
7. Installing the AWS
18.3 Mounting the FPD
8. Installing the Controller Unit
18.4 Connecting the Cable Connectors and Attaching the
Cable Retaining Brackets
9. Connecting the Power Supply Cable
18.5 Putting on the Inner Cover
9.1 Connecting the Power Supply Cable of the Controller Unit
18.6 Attaching the Grid Guide
9.2 Connecting the Power Supply Cable of the Mammographic
Stand 18.7 Changing the DIP Switch Setting on the CBA (D905) Board
9.3 Checking the Wiring Connections and Connecting to 18.8 Putting on the Swivel Arm Right- and Left-Hand Front Covers
the Distribution Switchboard
18.9 Putting on the Compression Unit Right- and Left-Hand
Side Covers
10. Removing the Packing Material of the Swivel Arm (1)
18.10 Checking the Grid Position (1)
11. Installing the Mammographic Stand
18.11 Putting on the Carbon Cover
019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual IN-1

IN-2
18.12 Checking the Grid Position (2) 25. Checking the AEC
19. Installing the Temperature Adjustment Unit 25.1 Confirmation of AEC Accuracy
20. Putting on the Covers 25.2 Confirmation of Dose per Exposure Mode
20.1 Putting on the FPD Right- and Left-Hand Covers (Right- 26. Checking the Variation in X-ray Output
and Left-Hand Armrests)
27. Checking for Image Problems and Checking the S Value
20.2 Putting on the FPD Lower Cover
20.3 Putting on the Swivel Arm Right- and Left-Hand Side Covers 28. Checking the Operation of the Mammographic Stand
20.4 Putting on the Swivel Arm Top and Lower Covers 28.1 Checking the Elevation of the Swivel Arm
20.5 Putting on the Elevation Stand Covers 28.2 Checking the Rotation of the Swivel Arm
21. Installing the RU Software 28.3 Checking the Emergency Stop Switches
28.4 Checking the Compression Unit

21.1 Installing the RU PC-TOOL
21.2 Setting the IP Address 28.5 Checking the Collimator
21.3 Setting the AWS and Checking Connection 29. Clearing the Error Log
21.4 Installing the RU Software 30. Protective Grounding Test (Outside Japan)
21.5 Installing the Machine-Specific Data
31. Measurement of Leakage Current and Patient Leakage Current
21.6 Replacing the Controller Unit AEC File (Outside Japan)
21.7 Replacing and Merging the AEC File in the AWS
32. Visual Inspection and Cleaning of the Machine
21.8 Backing Up the RU Data
33. Measurement of Power Source Impedance [Only Inside Japan]
22. Time Setting for the Mammographic Stand
34. Measurement of Installation Environment
23. FPD Calibration
34.1 Measurement of Installation Environment (Temperature
24. Checking the Exposure Recognition Function and Humidity)
34.2 Measurement of Installation Environment (Power Supply

Voltage) [Only Inside Japan]
END

IN-3
2. Installation Preparations n Installation Site Requirements
Avoid the following installation sites:
WARNINGS - Places where the temperature changes drastically.
- Places near heat sources such as heaters.
- Works of handling heavy objects during installation must be carried out by - Places where water leakage or equipment submersion may occur.
the contractors. - Places where corrosive gas may be generated.
- Commit to the contractors beforehand in preparation for the installation. - Dusty places.
- In preparation for the installation of the system, check to make sure that the - Places where the machine is subject to constant or excessive vibration or shock.
distribution switchboard on the installation site is equipped with a circuit - Places that are exposed to direct sunlight.
breaker. Do not use the distribution switchboard without the breaker. - Places that are not ventilated.
2.1 Preinstallation Work

The installation site of the machine must conform to the requirements mentioned
below in the “n Installation Site Requirements”, and in “Safety Precautions” and
“Product Specifications”.
Necessary works for buildings, electric facilities and air-conditioning equipment should
be completed in advance.

IN-4
BLANK PAGE

IN-5
2.2 Tools and Measuring Instruments n List of Tools
Necessary for Installation Name Appearance Qty. Remarks
Prepare the following tools and measuring instruments before installing the machine. Water
u NOTE u supply jig Closure hose
Used to fill or drain the coolant.
Servicing tools and jigs to be used in installing the machine must be checked/ (Cable length: approx. 5.0 m)
Water supply
The water supply jig does not
calibrated. Otherwise, the inherent machine performance cannot be assured. jig 1
include the coolant.
(for AC100 V)
REFERENCES Parts No.: 133Y100033
- The machine includes portions where components are intricately assembled. When Closure joint
DRMS8161.ai
accessing the screws for retaining those components, use of a flexible screwdriver
kit as a jig improves working efficiency. Water
Note, however, the flexible screwdriver kit is not a required tool. It is recommended supply jig Closure hose
that the flexible screwdriver kit be prepared in advance when you wish to improve
the working efficiency for installing the machine.
Flexible screwdriver shaft Used to fill or drain the coolant.
(including one set of (Cable length: approx. 5.0 m)
Water supply
screwdriver bits) The water supply jig does not
jig 1
Closure joint include the coolant.
(for AC200 V)
Torque screwdriver Parts No.: 133Y100036
Set of hexagonal bits
(2.0/2.5/3.0/4.0/5.0/6.0 mm)
DRMS8162.ai
Transformer
- The adjuster bolts attached to the pedestal are turned to adjust the tilt of the Adapter
mammographic stand. It is recommended that you prepare a wrench of 13x13 mm.
DRMS8280.ai
A DETAIL A
A Adjuster bolt
Pedestal A Used to temporarily place
13 mm the FPD. Also used when
A attaching/detaching the
A Stand jig 1
13 mm
DRMS8259.ai
Parts No.: 357Y100257
DRMS8159 ai
Used to attach/detach the FPD.

Retaining screws (TP3x6 (x3))
Handle 1 are included.
Parts No.: 356Y100836

DRMS8160.ai

IN-6
Name Appearance Qty. Remarks
Used to boot up the system
while the right- and left-hand
Emergency stop CAUTION
side covers are not put on the

short-circuit 1
elevation stand.
cable DRMS8214.ai
Parts No.: 136Y101179

Used to circulate the coolant
Temperature while the temperature adjustment
adjustment unit 1 unit is removed.
CAUTION
relay cable DRMS8182 ai
Parts No.: 136Y101389
n List of Measuring Instruments

Appearance of instruments listed is just for example.
Name Appearance Qty. Remarks
Acrylic board
1
(40 mm thick)
DRMS8183.ai
Mammographic Used to measure the

compression 1 compression pressure of the
gauge machine.
DRMS8184.ai
Used to measure dose/dose

Dosimeter 1
rate.
DRMS8185.ai

IN-7
3. Precautions in Installation WARNING
Be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard to turn
WARNINGS OFF the power of the mammographic stand, instead of turning OFF the main
circuit breaker. This is because your fingers might touch the terminals of the
l Be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard to power supply cable and get an electric shock as the main circuit breaker of the
avoid electric shock hazards. mammographic stand is close to the terminal block of the power supply unit.
l Electrical charge (residual charge) accumulated by a capacitor might remain Note that the power supply to the mammographic stand is not suspended only
in a circuit after the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard is turned by turning OFF the circuit breaker of the controller unit.
OFF.
Be sure to proceed with operations after you are sure that the charge has some reason, turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard, and
been completely discharged, due to fears of electric shock hazards. make sure that the charge has been completely discharged, before you turn
You can check the discharge by the following indications. OFF the main circuit breaker of the mammographic stand.
Mammographic stand
Main circuit breaker of

the mammographic stand
Terminal
block
[Check]
LED (PSU MAINS)
DRMS8192.ai Terminals of
- LED on the MFI board: The yellow LED is unlit. power supply cable
DRMS8206 ai
MFI board WARNING/CAUTION

Observe the warning and precautions mentioned in “Safety Precaution”.
[Check] LED
DRMS8193 ai

IN-8
4. Transfer CAUTION
The FPD need be unpacked under such temperature and humidity conditions
WARNING that the FPD performance can be kept. Therefore, do not unpack the FPD until
Works of handling heavy objects during installation must be carried out by the instructed in the manual. Carry the handles on the packing box when lifting the
contractors. box packing the FPD.
Dot not unpack the FPD box until

4.1 Unloading and Preparation for Transfer instructed in the manual.
{IN:Appendix 5.1_Unloading and Preparation for Transfer}
CAUTIONS
- When unloading the machine, two or more persons should always cooperate Handles DRMS8170.ai
to do so.
- Wear safety shoes for operation.
- Before unloading the machine, secure a proper machine transfer route. u INSTRUCTIONS u
- The mass of the mammographic stand is approx. 320 kg. When the crate - Fully leave the machine with the plastic cover put on in the room. If the cover is put
packing the mammographic stand is to be unloaded from the platform of the off immediately after the machine is transferred into the room, the machine might
truck, confirm the gravity center for balance. get condensation.
Mammographic stand - Do not remove the protective sheets and the packing material until instructed in the
manual.
Do not remove the protective Do not remove the protective
sheet and the packing material sheet of the collimator until
of the grid until instructed. instructed.
Gravity center marker

DRMS8093.ai
Do not remove the

packing material
until instructed.
DRMS8171.ai

IN-9
4.2 Transferring the Mammographic Stand 4.3 Transferring Other Packed Items
{IN:Appendix 5.2_Transferring the Mammographic Stand} {IN:Appendix 5.3_Transferring Other Packed Items}
WARNINGS
- The mass of the mammographic stand is approx. 320 kg. When transferring
the mammographic stand, two or more persons should always cooperate to
do so.
- If the machine is to be transferred over differing floor levels, slowly move the
machine not to shock it. Note that the carrier can come over a differing level
up to approx. 10 mm.
CAUTION
The mass of the mammographic stand is approx. 320 kg. When unloading the
mammographic stand and standing it up, four or more persons should always
cooperate to do so.

IN-10
5. Checking the Items Supplied No. Item Appearance Qty. Remarks
Check the components against the packing list supplied.

Mammographic stand
n Standard Accessories (FDR MS-1000) 3-1 Power supply cable 1
power supply cable
No. Item Appearance Qty. Remarks DRMS8283.ai
FPD left-hand cover

3-2 1
1-1 FPD 1 (left-hand armrest)
DRMS8284 ai
DRMS8281.ai
FPD right-hand
3-3 cover (right-hand 1
armrest)
DRMS8285.ai
2-1 Controller unit 1
3-4 Control pad cable 1

1 set of right and left

3-5 Foot switch 1
switches
DRMS8314.ai
3-6 LAN cable 1
DRMS8410.ai

IN-11
No. Item Appearance Qty. Remarks No. Item Appearance Qty. Remarks
4-9 CD-ROM 1 Application

DRMS8294.ai
Temperature
4-1 1
adjustment unit Machine specific data
4-10 CD-R or DVD-R 1 FDR-1000DRSZ: CD-R
DRMS8294.ai
FDR-1000DRLZ: DVD-R
DRMS8286 ai
4-11 Cover 1 For the FPD left-hand cover

DRMS8295 ai
4-2 FPD lower cover 1
4-12 Cover 1 For the FPD right-hand cover

For the controller unit anchor

4-3 Air filter 1 For the FPD lower cover 4-13 Cover 4
bolt
4-14 Cap 6 For the controller unit cover

4-4 Coolant bottle 1 Filled with coolant
DRMS8298 ai
DRMS8289.ai
4-15 Grid guide 2

4-5 Operation manual 1 DRMS8299.ai
DRMS8401.ai
4-16 Anchor bolt 5 For the mammographic stand

For the FPD front DRMS8300.ai
4-6 Chest wall pad 3
Spare: 2 pcs.
DRMS8291.ai
For the FPD left-hand side

4-7 Left axilla pad 3
Spare: 2 pcs.
DRMS8292 ai
For the FPD right-hand side

4-8 Right axilla pad 3
Spare: 2 pcs.
DRMS8293 ai

IN-12
- For retaining the - For retaining the FPD
Hexagon socket head
mammographic stand left-hand cover: 1 pc.
cap screw with spring
power supply cable: 2 4-22 2 - For retaining the FPD
and plain washer
pcs. right-hand cover:
(BQ4x25)
DRMS8308.ai
Special screw - For retaining the
4-17 8 1 pc.
(TP3x6)
DRMS8302.ai controller unit power
supply cable: 2 pcs. For retaining
Special screw
- For retaining the grid 4-23 3 the temperature
(TP3x12)
guide: 4 pcs. DRMS8302.ai adjustment unit
Hexagon socket - For retaining the

head cap screw 2 FPD left-hand cover:
(Q4x12) DRMS8303.ai
For retaining the covers Special screw 2 pcs.
4-18 4-24 4
(Nos. 4-11 and -12) (TP4x6) - For retaining the FPD
DRMS8302.ai
Washer right-hand cover:
2 2 pcs.
(W4) DRMS8304.ai
Hexagon socket Cross recessed screw For retaining the FPD

head cap screw 6 4-25 3
(Bind 3x6) lower cover
(Q4x12) DRMS8303.ai DRMS8309.ai
4-19 Washer For retaining the FPD Anchor 2

6 DRMS8306.ai
(W4) DRMS8304.ai
Hex head bolt

Spring washer 2
6 (R8x20) DRMS8307.ai
(SW4) For retaining the
4-26
DRMS8305.ai
Washer operation desk anchor

Hexagon socket 2
(W8)
head cap screw 4 DRMS8304.ai
(Q6x15) DRMS8303.ai
Spring washer
2
4-20 Washer For retaining the FPD (SW8)
4 DRMS8305.ai
(W6) DRMS8304.ai
Hexagon socket head For retaining the
Spring washer 4-27 cap screw 6 elevation stand rear
4 (Q6x25) DRMS8303.ai
cover
(SW6) DRMS8305.ai
Anchor 4 4-28 Spacer 4 For the grid guide

DRMS8310.ai
DRMS8306.ai
Hex head bolt

4
(R8x20) 18x24 compression Only for the FDR-
DRMS8307.ai
4-29 1
For retaining the controller plate (Low) 1000DRSZ
4-21
Washer unit anchor
4 DRMS8315 ai
(W8) DRMS8304.ai
Spring washer 18x24 compression Only for the FDR-

4 4-30 1
(SW8) DRMS8305.ai plate (High) 1000DRSZ
DRMS8316.ai

IN-13
4-31 Face guard 1

DRMS8311.ai
6-1 Operation desk 1 For AWS
4-32 Second label 1

DRMS8317.ai
DRMS8415.ai
CAUT ON
Emergency stop For retaining the operation

4-33 2 6-2 Bracket 2
short-circuit cable DRMS0089.ai desk anchor
DRMS8402.ai
4-34 Letter of guarantee 1 Only inside Japan

DRMS8290.ai 6-3 M6x15 2 For retaining the bracket
DRMS8403.ai
Performance check
4-35 1 Only inside Japan
sheet
DRMS8401.ai
Confirmation of use
4-36 1 Only inside Japan
of the AMULET
DRMS8416.ai
Mammographic
7-1 1
stand
5-1 Control pad 1
DRMS8312.ai
DRMS8318.ai
For the mammographic

7-2 Base plate cover 1
stand
DRMS8319.ai

IN-14
Elevation stand
8-1 right-hand side 1 Elevation stand left-
9-1 1
cover hand side cover
DRMS8320.ai
DRMS8322 ai
Elevation stand top

9-2 1
cover
DRMS8323.ai
Elevation stand
8-2 1
rear cover
 Standard Accessories (FDR-1000AWS)

DRMS8321 ai

IN-15
 Options (FDR MS-1000)
: With option, -: Without option
Abbreviation Item Qty. FDR-1000DRSZ FDR-1000DRLZ Remarks
COMP PLATE SPOT 9X9 #(E) Compression plate, rectangle spot 1  

COMP PLATE AXILLA 8X20 #(E) Compression plate for axilla radiography 1  
TABLE KIT #(E) 1.8-fold magnification exposure stand kit (18x24) 1  -
TABLE KIT L #(E) 1.8-fold magnification exposure stand kit (24x30) 1 - 
MAG TABLE #(E) 1.8-fold magnification exposure stand kit S 1  
COMP PLATE MAG1.8 16X20 #(E) Compression plate for magnification 1  
COMP PLATE MAG1.8 SPOT 9X9 #(E) Compression plate, rectangle spot magnification 1  
EXPOSURE SWITCH REMOTE #(E) Exposure switch (remote type) 1  
EXPOSURE SWITCH FOOT #(E) Exposure switch (foot switch type) 1  
PROTECT BOARD FOR CL #(E) X-ray protective board 1   16 kg (grass-made)
CHEST WALL PAD #(E) Chest wall pad supplement 1   Set of 3 pcs.
AXILLA PAD LEFT #(E) Left axilla pad supplement 1   Set of 3 pcs.
AXILLA PAD RIGHT #(E) Right axilla pad supplement 1   Set of 3 pcs.
MONITOR ARM #(E) Monitor arm 1  
DR 1000 AC CORD 15M #(E) 15 m power supply cable 1   Only inside Japan.
DR 1000 AC CORD 25M #(E) 25 m power supply cable 1   Only inside Japan.
COMP PLATE 18X24 LOW EDGE #(E) 18x24 compression plate (Low) 1 - 
COMP PLATE 18X24 HIGH EDGE #(E) 18x24 compression plate (High) 1 - 
COMP PLATE 18X24 FLEX #(E) 18x24 compression plate (Flex) 1  
COMP PLATE 24X30 LOW EDGE #(E) 24x30 compression plate (Low) 1 - 
COMP PLATE 24X30 HIGH EDGE #(E) 24x30 compression plate (High) 1 - 
COMP PLATE 24X30 FLEX #(E) 24x30 compression plate (Flex) 1 - 
COMP PLATE 2D BIOPSY #E 2D biopsy compression plate 1  

IN-16
DR 1000 DR L Z MBL KIT E Mobile kit 1 -  Only for use in Europe and Australia.
POSITIONER KIT BIOPSY #(E) Biopsy positioner kit 1   Includes the face guard W.
STEREO EXPOSURE KIT #(E) Stereo exposure kit 1  
FACE GUARD W #(E) Face guard W 1   Needed when using the stereo exposure kit.
FRONT COVER KIT BIOPSY 18×24 #(E) Front cover kit (18x24) 1   Needed when using the biopsy positioner kit
FRONT COVER KIT BIOPSY 24×30 #(E) Front cover kit (24x30) 1   or the stereo exposure kit.
BIOPSY AC CORD 20M # Biopsy power supply cable (20 m) 1   Only inside Japan.
 Options (FDR-1000AWS)
 Separately Available Accessories

: With option, -: Without option
EQUIPMENT RACK #(E) Equipment rack 1  

ANCHOR PLATE #(E) Anchor plate 1   For operation desk and equipment rack (*1).
FCR 1 shot Phantom M Plus 1  
Booster transformer 1   Only inside Japan.
WALL HOLDER FOR COMP PLATE #E Compression plate wall-hanging holder (*2) 1  
*1: The operation desk or the equipment rack must be fixed to the floor with the anchor bolts. If anchor bolt holes cannot be made on the floor as requested by the customer, however, you need use
the optional anchor plate to fix the operation desk and the equipment rack.
*2: Attach the compression plate wall-hanging holder to a sufficiently rigid wall.

IN-17
6. Installing the Operation Desk u NOTE u
Available means for retaining the operation desk include use of the anchor bolt and
The operation desk can be equipped with optional items and the separately available the use of the anchor plate. Check the customer’s demand before installing the
equipment rack depending on the need of the installation site. operation desk.
[Fully equipped with options] Appearance Remarks
X-ray protective board [Separately available accessory]
(optional) For retaining the operation desk and the separately
available equipment rack.
Monitor arm
(optional)
Operation desk DRMS8152.ai When the anchor plate of this type is used, stick the
anchor plate to the floor via a double-faced adhesive tape.
Otherwise, the operation desk may topple down.
REFERENCE
Anchor plate When the operation desk is to be used in combination with the separately available
(separately available equipment rack, fix the operation desk by means of the anchor bolts and the anchor
accessory) plate only on the operation desk.
DRMS8155 ai
Couple the operation desk with the rear of the equipment rack via the bolts to fix.
[Combination with the equipment rack] <When the operation desk is to be combined with the equipment rack
via the anchor bolts.>
Equipment rack Operation desk
(separately
[When viewed from the [When viewed from the available accessory) [Retain]
Operation equipment rack] operation desk] Anchor bolt
desk [Retain] M8x20 (x2)/
Equipment rack M6x12 (x2)/ SW8 (x2)/
(separately SW6 (x2)/ W8 (x2)
W2 (x2) <standard accessory>
available Operation Operation
accessory) desk desk
<When the operation desk is to be combined with the equipment rack
+
via the anchor plate.>
Equipment rack Operation desk
(separately
[Retain]
available accessory)
Anchor bolt
M8x20 (x2)/
Equipment rack Equipment rack [Retain] SW8 (x2)/
(separately available (separately available M6x12 (x2)/ W8 (x2)
accessory) accessory) SW6 (x2)/ <standard accessory>
DRMS8156 ai W2 (x2) Anchor plate
(separately available
accessory)
DRMS8260.ai

IN-18
(1) Move the operation desk to its installation position. (5) Remove the lower shelf plate.
#1
(2) Check the installation space and the servicing space at the installation [Open]
position. Right- and left-hand side covers
{Product Specifications:1.4_Installation Space and Servicing Space}
(3) Check with the customer regarding the installation position, and gain
approval.
(4) Remove the front cover of the operation desk.
Operation desk
Operation desk
[Remove]
Front cover
#2
DRMS8084.ai [Remove]
Lower shelf plate
DRMS8085.ai

IN-19
(6) Put the anchor retaining brackets on the operation desk. (8) Drill a hole on the two positions marked on the floor by the oil-based
pen, the center punch or the like.
(7) Mark the anchor nut embedded positions on the floor with an oil-
based pen, a center punch or the like. - Drill diameter: Φ12.5 mm
- Depth: 35–37 mm
- Use a drill that is suitable for floor hole drilling.
- When drilling the anchor holes, take dust-preventive measures by a vacuum
A B cleaner or the like. If no vacuum cleaner is available, protect the machine
against dust by covering it with a plastic sheet.
DETAIL A Bracket DETAIL B Bracket A A

<standard <standard
accessory> accessory>
DETAIL A
(6) #1 (7) #1 (7) #2 (6) #2

[Retain] [Mark] [Mark] [Retain]
M6x15 With center punch With center punch M6x15 #1
DRMS8086.ai
[Drilling] Drill
2 places
Drill diameter: Φ12.5 mm
Depth: 35-37 mm
DRMS8157.ai

IN-20
(9) With a vacuum cleaner or like device, remove concrete chips and dust (11) Fix the operation desk.
from the drilled holes.
(10) Embed the anchor nuts in the holes.
- Remove the cuttings that are stuck in the holes.
- To protect the anchor nut bolt insertion holes, attach a disposable bolt (M8x15)
to the anchor nut.
- Embed the anchor nuts until their upper surface is 0.5 to 1.0 mm below the
floor surface.
Anchor nut upper surface
Floor
#1 [Loosen]/
0.5-1.0 mm #3 [Tighten]
Screw
A A
DRMS8009.ai
#1 [Loosen]/
#3 [Tighten]
Screw
#1 #2 #3 #4
[Insert] [Attach] [Embed] [Remove] DETAIL A
Anchor nut x4 Disposable Anchor nut Disposable #2 Spring washer (SW8)
M8x35 bolt x4 bolt <standard accessory>
[Secure]
<standard accessory> M8x15 Anchor bolt Washer (W8)
(recommended) M8x20 (x2) <standard accessory>
<standard
35 to accessory>
37 mm
Machine
main Pedestal
DRMS8010 ai body
DRMS8158 ai
(12) Reinstall the lower shelf plate which is removed in the procedure (5).

IN-21
(13) Attach the optional monitor arm to the operation desk.
The procedure need not be taken when the optional monitor arm is not to be
attached to the operation desk.
{IN:Appendix 6._Installing the Optional Monitor Arm}
(14) Attach the optional X-ray protective board to the operation desk.
The procedure need not be taken when the optional X-ray protective board is not to
be attached to the operation desk.
{IN:Appendix 7._Installing the Optional X-Ray Protective Board}
(15) Put on the front cover of the operation desk which is removed in the
procedure (4).

IN-22
7. Installing the AWS
Refer to the AWS Service Manual for the detailed procedures.
 NOTE 
The serial No. of the single tank unit and the identification code (FPD serial No.) are
required to set the AWS. Take a note of the respective serial Nos. when removing the
top cover of the mammographic stand and unpacking the FPD.
{IN:15._Removing the Covers}
{IN:17.1_Unpacking the FPD}

IN-23
8. Installing the Controller Unit (1) Put off the cover.
Cover
 NOTES 
- The mass of the controller unit is approx. 22 kg. When lifting the controller unit, two
or more persons should always cooperate to do so.
- When lifting the controller unit, be sure to hold the stay inside the rear of the
controller unit. If the controller unit is lifted with the cover of the unit held, the cover
gets damaged.
A Controller unit
[Remove]
T4x8 (x6)
DRMS8020 ai
based pen, a center punch or the like.
DETAIL A
GOOD NO GOOD
A A
Hold the stay. Do not hold the cover to lift.
A A
DRMS8022 ai
DETAIL A
[Mark]
With center punch
DRMS8257.ai

IN-24
(3) Drill a hole on the marked position on the floor with an oil-based pen, (4) Remove concrete chips and dust from the drilled holes with a vacuum
a center punch or the like. cleaner.
- Drill diameter: Φ12.5 mm (5) Embed the anchor nuts in the holes.
- Depth: 35–37 mm
 NOTES 
- Remove the cuttings that are stuck in the holes.
- Use a drill that is suitable for floor hole drilling.
- To protect the anchor nut bolt insertion holes, embed the anchor nuts while
- When drilling the anchor holes, take dust-preventive measures by a vacuum disposable bolts are attached to the anchor nuts.
cleaner or the like. If no vacuum cleaner is available, protect the machine
- Embed the anchor nuts until their upper surface is 0.5 to 1.0 mm below the
against dust by covering it with a plastic sheet.
floor surface.
Anchor nut upper surface
Floor
0.5-1.0 mm
DRMS8009.ai
A A #1 #2 #3 #4
[Insert] [Attach] [Embed] [Remove]
Disposable
A A Anchor nut x4
bolt
Anchor nut Disposable
DETAIL A M8x35
M8x15
x4 bolt
<standard accessory>
(recommended)
35 to
[Drilling]
37 mm
4 places Drill
Drill diameter: Φ12.5
Depth: 35-37 mm DRMS8010.ai
DRMS8062.ai

IN-25
(6) Fix the controller unit with the anchor bolts.
A A
A A
#1
DETAIL A [Secure]
#2 Anchor bolt
[Put] (M8x20 (x2))
Anchor cover <standard
accessory> Spring washer
(SW8)
<standard
Controller accessory>
unit Plain washer
(W8)
<standard
accessory>
Pedestal
DRMS8107.ai

IN-26
9. Connecting the Power Supply Cable 9.1 Connecting the Power Supply Cable of the
Controller Unit
CAUTION
Connect the power supply cable from the distribution switchboard to the controller
The power supply cable installation work should be performed by electricians. unit.
CAUTION
u INSTRUCTIONS u
- Use the locally obtained power supply cables for the controller unit, conforming to Do not connect the power supply cable to the distribution switchboard until
the local specifications. instructed in the manual, to avoid electric shock hazards.
- Connect the controller unit power supply cable through the conduit. The diameter of
a hole for the conduit cable tube (metallic) on the left-hand side of the controller unit u NOTE u
is Φ40 mm.
The connection procedure varies depending on whether a single-phase two-wire
system or single-phase three-wire system is employed. Refer to the procedures
DETAIL A conforming to the installation site to make power supply cable connections. The
factory default setting provides the connection to a single-phase two-wire system.
l Single-phase two-wire type (factory default)

(1) Remove the inner cover of the controller unit.
Inner cover
A Φ40 mm [Remove]
TP3x6 (x26)
Controller unit
Hole of the conduit cable tube

DRMS8172.ai
REFERENCE DRMS8021.ai
The machine can be connected to either a single-phase two-wire system or a single-

phase three-wire system.

IN-27
(2) Insert the power supply cable into the controller unit and fix the (3) Connect the power supply cable to the terminal block (TB1).
conduit tube.
u NOTE u
Controller unit
Insert the power supply cable through the lower insertion hole into the controller
unit.
#1
[Insert]
Power supply cable
#2 #1 Terminal
[Fix] [Connect] block (TB1)
Nut Power supply cable (x3)
L1 N L2
TB-N/L2 (white)
TB-L1 (black)
Conduit tube TB-E (green)
#2
[Secure]
Clamp
DRMS8174.ai
DRMS8173.ai

IN-28
 For single-phase three-wire system (2) Insert the power supply cable into the controller unit and fix the
conduit tube.
(1) Remove the inner cover of the controller unit.
u NOTE u
Inner cover Insert the power supply cable through the lower insertion hole into the controller
unit.
[Remove]
TP3x6 (x26)
#1
[Insert]
Power supply cable
#2
DRMS8021.ai
[Fix]
Nut
Conduit tube
DRMS8173 ai

IN-29
(3) Connect the power supply cable to the terminal block (TB1). (4) Change the connection of the cable (TB-N OUT) with the terminal
block (TB1) from the N terminal to the L2 terminal.
Controller unit
Controller unit
#1
[Connect] Terminal
Power supply cable (x3) block (TB1)
[Change
connection] Terminal block (TB1)
TB-N/L2 (white)
L1 N L2
TB-N OUT_cable
L1 N L2
connected with the
N-terminal
TB-L1 (black)
TB-E (green)
#2
[Secure]
Clamp Terminal block (TB1) TB-N OUT_cable
DRMS8175.ai connected with the
L1 N L2
L2-terminal
DRMS8176.ai

IN-30
9.2 Connecting the Power Supply Cable of the (3) Remove the cover of the terminal block (TB2).
Mammographic Stand
Connect the power supply cable of the mammographic stand to the controller unit and Controller unit
the mammographic stand.
(1) Insert the power supply cable of the mammographic stand into the
controller unit.
Controller unit
[Insert]
Power supply
cable
<standard
accessory>
DRMS8026.ai
Terminal block
(TB2)
(2) Retain the power supply cable of the mammographic stand.
[Tighten]
TP3x6 (x2)
Power supply
cable [Remove]
Cover
DRMS8027 ai
DRMS8028 ai

IN-31
(4) Connect the power supply cable of the mammographic stand to the (6) Remove the terminal block cover from the power supply unit of the
terminal block (TB2). mammographic stand.
Terminal block (TB2) Mammographic stand
#2
[Connect]
Power supply
cable x3
TB-NOUT (white)
Terminal block cover
[Remove]
TB-LOUT (black)
TP3x6 (x2)
TB-EOUT (green)
#1
[Route]
Power supply cable
x3
#3
[Secure]
Clamp x3
Power supply unit
DRMS8029.ai
DRMS8178.ai
(5) Reinstall the cover of the terminal block (TB2).

IN-32
(7) Disconnect the ground cable from the frame of the mammographic (8) Connect the power supply cable of the mammographic stand which is
stand. connected with the terminal block of the controller unit and the ground
cable which is removed in the procedure (7) to the terminal block of
REFERENCE
the mammographic stand.
When the power supply cable (ground cable) of the mammographic stand is to WARNING
be connected to the FG of the stand, tighten it together with the ground cable
disconnected in this procedure. In doing so, since the power supply cable (ground The two ground cables are tightened together and connected to the FG. Be sure to
cable) of the mammographic stand need be connected first, the ground cable connect the power supply cable (ground cable) of the mammographic stand first.
should be once disconnected.
#1
#1 DETAIL A
Mammographic stand [Connect]
Ground cable (power supply cable of
DETAIL A the mammographic stand)
A W6 (x2) Na6
FG
Ground cable
Power supply
cable
#2 #2 DETAIL B
FG [Connect]
Ground cable removed in procedure (7)
Ground cable
(mammographic stand)
#1 B
[Disconnect] W6 (x3) Na6
Na6 (x2)/W6 (x5) FG
A DRMS8179.ai
Ground cable
#3 #3 #3 DETAIL C
[Connect]
L1 cable (black)/N cable (white)
(power supply cable of
the mammographic stand)
C
Terminal
L1 block
(black) N (white)
Power supply cable DRMS8180.ai

IN-33
(9) Put the terminal block cover on the power supply unit of the (10) Route the power supply cable of the mammographic stand to the rear
mammographic stand. of the machine and fix it there.
WARNING WARNING
Be sure to put on the terminal block cover to avoid electric shock hazards. Retain the power supply cable with cable retaining bracket to prevent the cable
from shifting in position if pulled when routing and fixing the power supply
Mammographic stand cable to the rear of the machine.
Elevation stand
Be sure to put on the terminal block
cover. #1
Terminal block cover [Route]
[Tighten]
Power supply cable
TP3x6 (x2)
Power supply unit

(PSU)
Power supply unit DETAIL A #3

DRMS8181.ai
[Check]
The power supply cable is securely retained
FPD signal cable
and does not shift in position when pulled.
FPD power
supply cable
18 mm or less
(recommended value)
Cable retaining
bracket #2
[Tighten]
Na
DRMS8095.ai

IN-34
9.3 Checking the Wiring Connections and
Connecting to the Distribution Switchboard
WARNINGS
l When connecting the power supply cable to the distribution switchboard,
use a switchboard equipped with a breaker. Do not use the distribution
switchboard without the breaker.
l The input voltage of the machine is 208/230/240 V ~ ±10% (single-phase, AC).
Do not use the input voltage incorrectly.
l To avoid electric shock hazards, be sure to observe the followings.
- Do not touch the power supply terminal by hand.
- Do not touch the probe (metal portion) of the multimeter by hand during
voltage measurement.
- Be sure to turn OFF the distribution switchboard breaker before connecting
the power supply cable to the distribution switchboard.
CAUTION
Follow the local regulations in connecting the power supply cable of the
machine to the distribution switchboard.

IN-35
BLANK PAGE

IN-36
10. Removing the Packing Material of (2) Connect the control pad cable to the CBS board (D900) of the
mammographic stand.
the Swivel Arm (1) CBS board (D900)
[Connect]
REFERENCE Connector
You can remove the packing material of the swivel arm by turning ON the power of the D900 (X17)
machine and raising the swivel arm.

Mammographic stand
Elevation stand inner

[Loosen]
cover (lower)
M4x6 (x14)
Control pad cable
Mammographic stand
DRMS8325.ai
(3) Connect the network cable (standard accessory) to the CBS board
(D900).
DRMS8196.ai
Connector
[Connect] (X10)
Network cable
<standard accessory of
the mammographic stand>
CBS board (D900) DRMS8198.ai

IN-37
(4) Connect the control pad cable which has been connected with the (5) Connect the emergency stop short-circuit cables to the emergency
CBS board (D900) of the mammographic stand to the control pad. stop switch connector of the mammographic stand.
u NOTE u REFERENCE
Insert the connector (Control Box X2) into its position before retaining with The machine cannot boot up while the elevation stand cover is not put on. The
screws. If the connector is not fully inserted, the machine cannot normally boot emergency stop short-circuit cable need be connected to the emergency stop
up. switch connector when the machine is to be booted up without the elevation
stand cover on.
Mammographic stand
Emergency stop short-
A circuit cable
Mammographic stand
Control pad cable

DETAIL A DETAIL B
Control pad (rear)
[Connect] [Connect]
Emergency stop Emergency stop
short-circuit cable short-circuit cable
[Connect]
Control pad cable connector
(Control Box X2)

IN-38
WARNING
(7) Turn ON the main circuit breaker of the mammographic stand.
Make sure that the “PSU MAINS” LED of the power supply unit (PSU) lights up in Be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard to turn
green. OFF the power of the mammographic stand, instead of turning OFF the main
circuit breaker. This is because your fingers might touch the terminals of the
#1 [ON]
power supply cable and get an electric shock as the main circuit breaker of the
Main circuit breaker
mammographic stand is close to the terminal block of the power supply unit.
Note that the power supply to the mammographic stand is not suspended only
by turning OFF the circuit breaker of the controller unit.
some reason, turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard, and
make sure that the charge has been completely discharged, before you turn
A OFF the main circuit breaker of the mammographic stand.
Mammographic stand
Main circuit breaker of

DETAIL A the mammographic stand
Terminal
block
Terminals of
power supply cable
DRMS8206 ai
#2 [Verify]
LED lit (PSU MAINS)
DRMS8186 ai

IN-39
(8) Press the system start button of the control pad. (9) Turn ON the power of the AWS.
Check that the control pad emergency stop switch has been cancelled. All LEDs light up when the machine normally starts, and the inspection window
REFERENCES appears on the AWS monitor.
REFERENCE
- When the system start button is pressed, the LED on the power supply unit
(PSU) lights up and initialization of the machine starts. Sound is heard in a You can start the mammographic stand without starting the AWS by clicking
uniform rhythm. This sounds while home positioning of the collimator proceeds “System\Enable Reset” from the Main menu window and pressing the
and is not abnormal noise. decompression button, when the Zigma Webserver can start up.
- The home positioning of the grid does not take place when the power is turned {MU:2.14.8_Enable Reset}
ON for the first time since the machine is shipped with the DIP switches on the
board controlling the grid set to OFF.
DETAIL A [Verify]
Control pad #1 [Check] All LEDs light up.
Emergency stop switch
#2 [Press]
System start button
DETAIL A DRMS8188 ai
LED lights up
DRMS8187.ai

IN-40
(10) Press the up button on the swivel arm control panel to move up the (11) Remove the packing material.
swivel arm. Swivel arm
CAUTION
Never press the right/left button on the control panel when removing the
packing material for protecting the swivel arm. If the right/left button is
accidentally pressed, the machine gets damaged.
Never press the right/left button.
Control panel
Left button
Right button
[Remove]
DRMS8189 ai
Packing material
DRMS8015.ai
Swivel arm (12) Turn OFF the power of the AWS.

Control pad
[Press]
System OFF button
Control panel
[Press] DRMS8191.ai
Up button
Packing material
DRMS8190 ai

IN-41
(15) Wait for approx. 2 to 7 minutes until the system is discharged.
Make sure that the “PSU MAINS” LED on the power supply unit (PSU) or the LED
on the MFI board is unlit.
WARNINGS
OFF.
[Check]
LED (PSU MAINS)
DRMS8192.ai
MFI board
[Check] LED
DRMS8193 ai

IN-42
11. Installing the Mammographic Stand (4) Drill a hole on the five positions marked on the floor by the oil-based
pen, the center punch or the like.
- Drill diameter: Φ12.5 mm
WARNING - Depth: Approx. 100 mm
Works of handling heavy objects during installation must be carried out by the  INSTRUCTIONS 
contractors. - Use a drill that is suitable for floor hole drilling.
- When drilling the anchor holes, take dust-preventive measures by a vacuum
cleaner or the like. If no vacuum cleaner is available, protect the machine
11.1 Marking and Drilling on the Installation against dust by covering it with a plastic sheet.
Position
REFERENCE
(1) Move the mammographic stand to its installation position. The anchor bolt used to fix the mammographic stand is of the following type.
based pen, a center punch or the like. Φ8 mm
96 mm
DRMS8258.ai
DETAIL A
A
A
[Mark]
A
5 places #1
Center punch A [Drilling]
DRMS8059 ai
A Drill 5 places
(3) Move the mammographic stand away to a location not interfering with
the drilling of anchor holes.
DRMS8060 ai
(5) With a vacuum cleaner or like device, remove concrete chips and dust
from the drilled holes.

IN-43
11.2 Securing the Mammographic Stand (3) Fix the mammographic stand with the anchor bolts.
(1) Return the mammographic stand to its installation position.

A
(2) Check the tilt of the mammographic stand by means of a level.
REFERENCE
A A
Adjust the tilt of the mammographic stand by turning the adjustable bolts attached
to the pedestal when the stand is tilted. It is recommended that you use a wrench
of 13x13 mm for the adjustment.
A DETAIL A A
A Adjuster bolt A
A
Pedestal
13 mm
DETAIL A [Retain]
A Pedestal Anchor bolt
A <standard accessory>
13 mm
DRMS8194.ai
Adjuster bolt
Level
Level [Adjust] DRMS8061.ai
[Adjust]
Adjuster bolt
Adjuster bolt
DRMS8092.ai

IN-44
12. Connecting the Cables to the (2) Connect the network cable to the connector of the controller unit.
Controller Unit CAUTION

Do not connect a telephone line to the network cable connecting connector. The
(1) Connect the cables of the mammographic stand to the connectors on cable compatible with this machine is an IEC950/UL1950-approved cable alone.
the controller unit.
REFERENCE
u INSTRUCTION u
The clamps for retaining the cables are delivered as attached to the left-hand
Use the network cable and the network HUB, which conform to the machine.
side of the controller unit.
{IN:Appendix 1._Requirements Regarding Locally Obtained Parts}
#1 [Connect]
Cable connectors
Mammographic
MIF2
stand Controller unit
Controller unit
NIF4
MPI2
CN1
[Connect]
Network cable
A <locally obtained
Cables
part> DRMS8058.ai
(3) Connect the network cable connected with the connector of the
DETAIL A controller unit to the AWS HUB.
#2 [Retain]
Cables
[Remove/Tighten]
TP3x6
Put the clamp on the cable

5N 6N 6N copper foil.
5N
DRMS8057.ai

IN-45
(4) Accommodate the excess of the cables connected with the controller
unit.
[Accommodate Controller unit

excess]
Cables
DRMS8195.ai
(5) Put on the controller unit cover.

Controller unit
#1
[Tighten]
T4x8 (x6)
#2
[Install]
Cap x6
<standard
accessory>
DRMS8327.ai

IN-46
13. Connecting the Cables to the (3) Put on the elevation stand inner cover (lower).
Mammographic stand
Mammographic Stand
(1) Connect the foot switch (right/left) cables to the connectors (X22) and Elevation stand inner
(X23) of the CBS board (D900). [Tighten]
cover (lower)
M4x6 (x14)
(2) Connect the door switch cable to the connector (X19) of the CBS
board (D900).
(2)
[Connect] Connector
Door switch (X19)
cable
DRMS8326.ai
(4) Route the connected cables to the rear of the mammographic stand
and fix there.
Connector
(1) (X23)
[Connect]
Foot switch cable x2 Connector
(X22) CBS board (D900) DRMS8197.ai
#1 [Remove]/ #2
#3 [Retain] [Route]
Na x2 Cables
Mammographic stand
DRMS8199.ai

IN-47
14. Changing the Swivel Arm Height REFERENCE
You can change the uppermost position of the swivel arm within a range of 2,050 to
(Uppermost Position) 2,320 mm.
The corresponding adjustment range of the uppermost position of the FPD upper
The machine is set in the factory so that the swivel arm stops at 2,320 mm when it surface is 1,200 to 1,500 mm.
is moved up to its uppermost position. Described in this section are the procedures Swivel arm
for repositioning the elevation upper-limit switch only when the customer demands to
change the uppermost position of the swivel arm. Swivel arm elevation
upper-limit switch
CAUTION
FPD
Change only the uppermost position of the swivel arm height.
Never reposition the swivel arm elevation lower-limit switch.
Swivel arm
Adjustable range Lowermost position:
Swivel arm elevation of the uppermost position 1,510 (*)
upper-limit switch of the swivel arm:
2,050 to 2,320
Never reposition Adjustable range Lowermost

the swivel arm of the uppermost position
elevation lower-limit position:
of the FPD: 690 (*)
switch.
1,200 to 1,500
Unit: mm
DRMS8200 ai
(*): The lowermost position (the position where the swivel arm is lowered to its lowest
position) does not change as the elevation lower-limit switch is not repositioned.
DRMS8201.ai

IN-48
(1) Remove the elevation stand inner cover (upper). (3) Move the swivel arm elevation upper-limit switch to the position
demanded by the customer.
REFERENCE
Obtain confirmation of the customer as to how long the switch is to be lowered
Elevation stand inner from the uppermost position as shipped, and move down the swivel arm elevation
cover (upper) upper-limit switch by the distance.
[Loosen]
M4x6 (x14) DETAIL A #1 [Loosen]/
#2 [Move] #3 [Tighten]
Upper-limit Screw x2
switch
DRMS8202.ai
(2) Cut the cable tie which retains the swivel arm elevation upper-limit
switch cable.
[Cut]
Cable tie
DRMS8204.ai
(4) Retain the swivel arm elevation upper-limit switch cable with the cable
tie.
(5) Put on the elevation stand inner cover (upper).
Limit switch cable
DRMS8203.ai
(10) Press the Lift Up/Down button of the swivel arm control panel to move
up/down the swivel arm. Check to make sure that the swivel arm
stops at the uppermost position demanded by the customer.

IN-49
15. Removing the Covers (6) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard.
WARNINGS
(1) Press the right or left button on the swivel arm control panel to turn
the swivel arm to the 0° position. l Be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard to
(2) Press the down button on the swivel arm control panel to lower the
swivel arm to the lowermost position. l Electrical charge (residual charge) accumulated by a capacitor might remain
Swivel arm OFF.
(5) #1 Be sure to proceed with operations after you are sure that the charge has
Control panel
[Press]
DETAIL A been completely discharged, due to fears of electric shock hazards.
Right/left button 0 You can check the discharge by the following indications.
0 196
° mm N - “PSU MAINS” LED on the power supply unit (PSU): The green LED is unlit.
(5) #2
[Verify]
(6)
Arm angle of “0°”
[Press]
Down button
A DRMS8205.ai


IN-50
(7) Remove the swivel arm top cover. (8) Remove the swivel arm lower cover.
u NOTE u #2
[Remove] DETAIL A
Take a note of the serial No. mentioned on the front face of the single tank unit
after removing the swivel arm top cover. The serial No. of the single tank unit is
M5x60 (x3) A
required when setting the AWS.
Single tank unit
<Display example>
#1 [Disconnect]
Protective ground
wire terminal
#2 DETAIL B
[Remove]
M5x60 (x3)
Serial No. B
DRMS8344.ai
[Remove]
M5 (x3) #1 [Disconnect]
Protective ground
Swivel arm
wire terminal
top cover
#3
[Release]
Swivel arm
lower cover
Control panel
#4 Control panel
[Disconnect]
DRMS8207.ai
Connector
(MBL X1 W105) #4
[Disconnect]
Connector
(MBL X1 W106)
DRMS8208.ai

IN-51
(9) Remove the swivel arm left-hand side cover. (10) Remove the swivel arm right-hand side cover.
Swivel arm right-

A hand side cover
Swivel arm left-

hand side cover
DETAIL A
[Remove] [Remove]
M5 (x2) M5x10 (x2),
DRMS8209.ai W5 (x2)
DRMS8210.ai

IN-52
(11) Remove the compression unit left-hand side cover. (12) Remove the compression unit right-hand side cover.
REFERENCE REFERENCE
You can remove the protective cover by pressing the snap-fit with a thin-blade You can remove the protective cover by pressing the snap-fit with a thin-blade
screwdriver or the like. screwdriver or the like.
#1 [Turn] Hexagon socket

head cap screw
Compression unit right-hand side cover

#2 A
[Open] DETAIL A
Compression unit left-hand side #2
DETAIL A
cover [Disconnect]
#3 Protective
A ground wire
[Disconnect]
Protective ground B terminal
wire terminal
DETAIL B
DETAIL B #4
#5
B Connector
Connector
(MBL X1 W107) C (MBL X1 W108)
C #3 [Remove]
#1 [Open]
#4 [Remove] Protective
Compression unit
Protective cover cover
DETAIL C
DETAIL C
#6
[Disconnect] #5
Connector [Disconnect]
(D904 X5 Connector
W142) (D904 X6 W143)
DRMS8212.ai
DRMS8211.ai

IN-53
(13) Remove the swivel arm left-hand front cover. (14) Remove the swivel arm right-hand front cover.

front cover
DETAIL A
Swivel arm right-hand front cover
[Remove]
Q5x8
DRMS8215.ai
#2
[Remove]
Q5x8
#1
[Remove]
Q5x8
DRMS8213.ai

IN-54
16. Removing the Packing Material of
the Swivel Arm (2)
(1) Remove the protective sheet (bubble sheet) and the packing material
from the grid.
Swivel arm
Grid
[Remove]
Packing
material
DRMS8221.ai

IN-55
17. Unpacking and Temporarily 17.1 Unpacking the FPD
Installing the FPD (1) Take out the FPD from the transporting box, which packs the FPD.
u NOTE u
CAUTIONS
Return, to the carrier, all the packing materials (including the phase-change
- The FPD is shipped in a transporting box together with a phase-change medium and desiccant) after the FPD is removed.
medium for keeping the performance of the FPD. Make sure that the
temperature and humidity requirements of the exposure chamber where
the machine is to be installed are kept within the specified range before
unpacking the FPD. If the temperature and humidity requirements are not
kept within the specified range, never take the procedures in this section.
{Product Specifications: 1.2_Machine Specifications}
- The mass of the FPD is approx. 20 kg (approx. 23 kg for the FDR-1000DRLZ).
When unpacking the FPD, two or more persons should always cooperate to Desiccant
do so.
- Fully exercise care not to scratch the exposure plane of the carbon cover put
on the FPD. A scratched exposure plane of the carbon cover might result in
abnormal images.
- Although the dedicated handles are used to carry the FPD, the handles cannot Phase-change
be attached when the carbon cover is put on. Hold the indicated positions in medium
this case.
Phase-change [Take out]
Hold here.
medium
DETAIL A PAD
FPD package
FPD
A Do not scratch the Transporting box

Carbon cover exposure plane.
DRMS8217.ai
DRMS8216.ai
- When temporarily installing the FPD, use the dedicated stand jig.
DRMS8159.ai

IN-56
(2) Break the four corners of the box which packs the FPD. Take out (3) Remove the antistatic plastic sheet from the FPD.
the FPD together with the plastic cover. Place it on a clean shock
absorber or a corrugated fiberboard sheet. u NOTE u
After you remove the antistatic plastic sheet, take a note of the RU identification
u INSTRUCTION u code (serial No.) mentioned on the rear of the FPD. The identification code (serial
Do not remove the antistatic plastic sheet from the FPD while the FPD is put on No.) is required when setting the AWS.
the floor or on a dirty desk. When the antistatic plastic sheet is to be removed,
spread a clean shock absorber or a corrugated fiberboard sheet to protect the
carbon cover from damage or attachment of dust.
#2
[Take out]
FPD FPD package
FPD RU identification code

(serial No.)
DRMS8343 ai
[Remove]
Antistatic plastic sheet
FPD
#1
[Break]
4-corner of the package
#3
[Place]
FPD
Shock absorber or
corrugated fiberboard
DRMS8041.ai
Spread a shock absorber or

a corrugated fiberboard sheet.
DRMS8018.ai

IN-57
17.2 Temporarily Installing the FPD (2) Mount the FPD on the stand jig.
(1) Release the coolant hoses routed to the rear of the FPD downwardly stand jig.
from the joint with the stand jig. Stand jig
Hold here.
u INSTRUCTION u A
You need release the coolant hoses from the joint with the stand jig before FPD
mounting the FPD on the stand jig. Otherwise, the coolant hoses might be
caught between the FPD joint and the stand jig, resulting in damage.
FPD
DETAIL A
Joint
Joint
#1
[Remove]
Clamp
Exercise care not to have

the hoses caught.
Joint DRMS8220.ai
Joint
#2 [Release]
Hose DRMS8219.ai

IN-58
18. Installing the FPD CAUTION
After the carbon cover is removed, the exposure plane and the chest wall plane
18.1 Removing the Carbon Cover are exposed. Never touch the following regions of the FPD when the carbon
cover is not put on.
REFERENCE - Do not push the fingers against the exposure plane or touch it. If the
exposure plane is strongly pushed by fingers or the like, it might get
You need remove the carbon cover before mounting the FPD on the swivel arm. The
damaged, resulting in abnormal images.
FPD cannot be mounted on the swivel arm with the carbon cover put on.
- Do not push the fingers against the chest wall plane or touch it. If the chest
wall plane is strongly pushed by fingers or the like, it might get damaged,
resulting in noise in images.
- Do not peel off the aluminum tape from the chest wall plane. Otherwise,
countermeasures against radio waves will not work.
- Do not remove the five shock absorbers from the chest wall plane. Otherwise,
the carbon cover comes into direct contact with the chest wall plane, resulting
in abnormal images.
DETAIL A
Do not touch the exposure plane.
B
A
DETAIL B
Do not peel off the aluminum tape.
Do not touch the chest wall plane.
Do not remove the shock absorbers.
DRMS8225.ai

IN-59
(1) Remove the filter and the filter cover from the carbon cover. (2) Remove the carbon cover.
[Remove] FPD #1
#2 FPD
Bind screw [Remove]
(M3x6) [Remove] TP3x6 (x10)
TP3x12 (x2)
Filter cover/ Collar

filter
DRMS8222.ai
Collar
#2
[Remove]
TP3x12 (x2)
#3
[Pull out]
Carbon cover
DRMS8223.ai

IN-60
(3) Temporarily place the carbon cover just removed on the shock 18.2 Removing the Inner Cover and the Cable
CAUTION Retaining Bracket
Exercise care not to damage the exposure plane of the carbon cover or allow (1) Disconnect the cable connector of the fan from the NFI51A board.
dust or dirt to attach inside the cover, when temporarily placing the carbon Remove the inner cover.
cover. If the dust or dirt attaches to the cover, abnormal images might result. #3
[Remove]
Inner cover
#2
Do not scratch the [Remove] A
exposure plane. TP3x6 (x28)
Shock absorber or corrugated

fiberboard sheet
[Temporarily place] FPD
DRMS8224.ai
Carbon cover
DETAIL A #1 [Disconnect] Connectors
NFI3
NFI7
NFI5
MFI51A board
NFI5 NFI3
DRMS8226.ai

IN-61
(2) Remove the cable retaining bracket assembly. 18.3 Mounting the FPD
A CAUTIONS
- When mounting/dismounting the FPD, two or more persons should cooperate
to do so.
- Always use the handles when mounting/dismounting the FPD. Exercise care
not to touch, by your hands or body (clothing), the exposure plane and the
chest wall plane of the FPD (including the shock absorbers and the aluminum
tape). If a part other than the handles needs to be held, hold the frame of the
FPD (see the figure).
DETAIL A
Hold here.
Do not touch the
DETAIL A exposure plane.
B
A
DETAIL B

the aluminum tape.
[Remove] Cable retaining
TP3x6 (x8) bracket assembly
Do not touch the chest

wall plane.
Do not touch the shock absorbers.

DRMS8042.ai
DRMS8227 ai

IN-62
(1) Attach the handles to the right- and left-hand sides of the FPD. (2) Put on the compression unit left-hand side cover.
REFERENCE Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
{IN:15._Removing the Covers_Procedure (11)}
The screws (TP3x6) for attaching the handles are shipped together with the
handle as tool parts. Store the screws together with the handles after completion. REFERENCE
Position the swivel arm at the 180° position when mounting the FPD on the
A swivel arm. When the swivel arm is to be rotated or moved up/down, put on the
compression unit side cover with the control panel attached, to turn the swivel
arm. You can put on either the right- or left-hand side cover of the compression
unit.
A
(7) Press the right/left button on the swivel arm control panel to turn the
swivel arm to the 180° position.
Compression unit
side cover DETAIL A
DETAIL A [Tighten]
TP3x6 (x3) 180 196 0
#1 ° mm N
[Press]
Right/left button
FPD
#2
[Verify]
Control panel
Handle
A
DRMS8218.ai
Swivel arm
DRMS8240.ai

IN-63
(8) Turn OFF the power of the AWS. (12) Loosen the screws which retain the grid assembly.
(9) Press the system OFF button on the control pad. REFERENCE
(10) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the controller unit. The position of installing the grid assembly is defined with the half-punches of the
FPD as reference and defined by pressing the entire assembly against the FPD.
(11) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard. You need loosen the retaining screws of the grid assembly beforehand.
WARNINGS
A
OFF.
Grid assembly
DETAIL A DETAIL B
#1 #2
[Loosen] [Loosen]
M6 M6
DRMS8083.ai

IN-64
(13) Remove the FPD from the stand jig. (14) Restore the coolant hoses which were released when temporarily
[Remove] installing the FPD.
FPD u NOTE u
Route the thicker coolant hose outside when retaining the hoses. If the FPD is
mounted on the swivel arm while the hose is not correctly routed, the hose might
be pressed by the frame of the swivel arm to degrade the circulation function of
the coolant.
FPD
A
DETAIL A
Stand jig
DRMS8229.ai
#1
[Route]
Coolant hose
Hose (thin)
Hose (thin)
#2
#2 [Retain] Hose (thick)
Hose (thin) [Retain] Clamp
Clamp
DRMS8230.ai

IN-65
(15) Insert the FPD into the swivel arm while routing the coolant hoses. (16) Push the FPD against the frame of the swivel arm, observing the frame
[Insert] as reference.
FPD
A [Insert]
B FPD
DETAIL A DETAIL B
[Route]
Coolant hose
DETAIL A
Frame of the Frame of the

swivel arm Frame of the FPD Frame of the FPD swivel arm
(reference) (reference)
A
DRMS8231.ai
Hose (thin)
Hose (thick)
DRMS8043.ai

IN-66
(17) Check to make sure that there is no gap between the frames of the (18) Remove the handles.
swivel arm and the FPD. Fix the upper surface of the FPD with the
bolts. [Remove]
TP3x6 (x6)
Top view
Handle
Handle
#1 [Verify]
No gap between the frames of the swivel arm and the FPD
DRMS8232.ai
(19) Fix the right- and left-hand sides of the FPD with the bolts.
B
FPD B
A
A
DETAIL A DETAIL B FPD
DETAIL A DETAIL B
[Tighten]
[Tighten]
Q4x12
Q4x12
SW4/W4
#2 [Tighten] #2 [Tighten] SW4/W4
Q6x25 Q6x25 DRMS8234.ai
SW6/W6 SW6/W6
(Required torque value: 10 N・m) (Required torque value: 10 N・m)
DRMS8233.ai

IN-67
(20) Fix the upper surface of the FPD (inside the sheet metal) with the (21) Fix the grid assembly to align the half-punches on the FPD.
bolts. Retain with the screws while pushing the grid assembly against the FPD.
REFERENCE
DETAIL A DETAIL B
Use an Allen wrench to tighten the bolts.
Allen wrench
#2 [Push] #3 [Tighten] #2 [Push] #3 [Tighten]

Grid assembly M6 Grid assembly M6
Round hole of the sheet metal Hexagon socket head cap screw
DRMS8235.ai
[Tighten] [Tighten]
M4x40 M4x40
Grid
assembly
A
B
#1 [Align] Half-punch of the FPD #1 [Align] Half-punch of the FPD
DRMS8236.ai Frame of the grid Frame of the grid

DRMS8237.ai

IN-68
18.4 Connecting the Cable Connectors and (2) Disassemble the cable retaining bracket removed from each assembly.
Cable retaining
Attaching the Cable Retaining Brackets bracket (large)
(1) Connect the cable connectors (TRC1, CN10, SND9, TRC7 and SND5) to
the FPD board. Cable retaining
bracket (small)
A
[Remove]
TP3x6 (x3)
DRMS8239 ai
DETAIL A
[Connect]
Cable
connectors
#1 #3 #4
(SND5) (SND9) (CN10)
#2 #5
(TRC7) (TRC1)
DRMS8238 ai

IN-69
(3) Attach the cable retaining bracket (large). (4) Attach the cable retaining bracket (small).
Surely hold the copper foil of the cables (TRC1, CN10 and SND9) with the cable Surely hold the copper foil of the cables (TRC7 and SND5) with the cable retaining
retaining bracket. bracket.
A A
FPD FPD
DETAIL A DETAIL A
Bracket (small) Hold the copper foil.
[Tighten] Hold the copper foil.
TP3x6 (x5)
Bracket (large)
Cable
Cable (SND5)
(TPC1, CN10, SND9)
Cable
(TRC7)
[Tighten]
TP3x6 (x6)

IN-70
18.5 Putting on the Inner Cover 18.6 Attaching the Grid Guide
(1) Put the inner cover on the FPD, and connect the cable connector of (1) Turn ON the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard.
the fan.
FPD inner cover
A #1
[Tighten]
TP3x6 (x28) (5) Press the right/left button on the swivel arm control panel to turn the
swivel arm to the 0° position.
Swivel arm
DETAIL A
0 196 0
° mm N
#2
[Verify]
DETAIL A #1 [Connect] Connectors #1
[Press]
FAN x2 MFI51A board FAN x3 Right/left button
Control panel
NFI3
NFI7
NFI3
NFI5
NFI5
A DRMS8241.ai
MFI51A board
Do not connect the connector of the
FDR-1000DRSZ to the NFI7
(center connector).
DRMS8046.ai

IN-71
(6) Turn OFF the power of the AWS. (10) Attach the grid guide (bracket).
(7) Press the system OFF button on the control pad. u NOTE u
(8) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the controller unit. Surely insert the grid into the groove of the grid guide.
Spacer x2 #2 #2 Spacer x2
[Tighten] [Tighten]
WARNINGS <standard
TP3x6 (x2) TP3x6 (x2)
<standard
<standard <standard
l Be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard to accessory> accessory>
OFF.
#1 #1
[Insert] [Insert]
Grid guide Grid Grid
Grid guide
<standard <standard
FPD exposure
plane
DRMS8048 ai

IN-72
18.7 Changing the DIP Switch Setting on the (2) Change the DIP switch setting.
CBA (D905) Board

REFERENCE
Since the grid guide is not mounted on the FPD when the machine is shipped out from
the factory, the DIP switch 6 and the DIP switch 7 of the CBA board are set to ON to
prevent the grid mechanism from working if the power is turned ON. In this section,
the DIP switch setting is changed to normally operate the grid mechanism. A
Note that if the power is turned ON while the DIP switches are all set to OFF without
the grid guide mounted on the FPD, the grid might come into contact with the
exposure plane during initialization, resulting in damage on the exposure plane. CBA (D905) board
(1) Put off the inner cover.
DETAIL A
#2
[Change setting]
[Loosen] After changing
When shipped from
M4x6 (x7) #1 the factory the setting
[Remove]
M4x6 (x2)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Inner cover
ON
DRMS8245.ai
ON
The DIP switches 6 All set to OFF
and 7 are set to ON.
DRMS8246.ai

IN-73
(3) Put on the inner cover. 18.8 Putting on the Swivel Arm Right- and Left-
Hand Front Covers
REFERENCE
You need put on the right- and left-hand front covers of the swivel arm before putting
on the carbon cover.
#2
[Tighten] (1) Put on the swivel arm right-hand front cover.
M4x6 (x7) #3
[Tighten]
M4x6 (x2)
Inner cover
Inner cover
Swivel arm right-hand front cover
[Tighten]
Q5x8
#1
DRMS8247.ai
[Route]
Cable connector
(MBL X1 W107)
DRMS8261.ai

IN-74
(2) Put on the swivel arm left-hand front cover. 18.9 Putting on the Compression Unit Right- and
Left-Hand Side Covers
(1) Put on the compression unit right-hand side cover.
A
Swivel arm left- Compression unit right-hand side cover

hand front cover
DETAIL A
A
DETAIL A
#4
[Connect]
Protective
ground wire
B terminal
#1 DETAIL B
[Tighten] #2
Q5x8 C [Connect]
Connector
(MBL X1 W108)
#5 #3 [Put]
[Put] Protective cover
Compression unit
DETAIL C
#2 #1
[Tighten] [Connect]
Q5x8 Connector
(D904 X6 W143)
DRMS8262.ai
DRMS8264.ai

IN-75
(2) Put on the compression unit left-hand side cover. 18.10 Checking the Grid Position (1)
#5
[Put] 18.10.1 Checking the Grid Wire
DETAIL A (1) Check that the grid wire is routed onto the upper surface of the frame
A (two locations: A and B in the figure below).
#4
[Connect]
Protective ground
wire terminal
DETAIL B
B
B
#2
[Connect]
Connector
C (MBL X1 W107)
#3 [Put]
Protective cover
DETAIL C
A
#1
[Connect]
Connector
(D904 X5 W142)
DETAIL A
GOOD NO GOOD
DRMS8263.ai
Frame
Grid wire
DRMS8356.ai

IN-76
18.10.2 Checking the Grid Park Position (8) Measure the distance between the tip of the grid and the FPD end
surface.
 INSTRUCTION 
If the distance between the tip of the grid and the FPD end surface is not 167 ± 1
(3) Press the system start button on the control pad. mm, adjust the grid park position sensor position.
(4) Turn ON the power of the AWS. {MC:3.7.4_Adjusting the Grid Sensor_n Adjusting the Park Position Sensor}

FPD end
{MU:2._Zigma Webserver_n Starting Up and Exiting the Zigma Webserver} surface Grid end surface
(7) Click [Out] in “Move Grid”.
The grid moves to the park position.
Table window
[Check]
167±1 mm Distance
DRMS8349.ai
[Click]
“Out”
DRMS8348.ai

IN-77
18.10.3 Checking the Grid IN Position (4) Measure the distance between the tip of the grid and the FPD end
surface.
 INSTRUCTION 
If the distance between the tip of the grid and the FPD end surface is not 2 ± 1
(2) Click [Table] and enter the Table window. mm, adjust the grid IN sensor position.
(3) Click [In] in “Move Grid”. {MC:3.7.4_Adjusting the Grid Sensor_n Adjusting the Grid IN Sensor}
The grid moves to the grid IN position.
Table window Grid end surface
FPD end
surface
[Click] [Check]
“In” Distance
2±1 mm
DRMS8351.ai
DRMS8350.ai

IN-78
18.10.4 Checking the Gap between the Grid and the Exposure 18.11 Putting on the Carbon Cover
Plane
u INSTRUCTION u
(1) Check that the tip of the grid is not in contact with the exposure plane. Check to make sure that no dirt or dust remains on the back of the carbon cover and
Check while the grid is in position. on the exposure plane of the FPD before putting on the carbon cover. If some dirt
 INSTRUCTION  or dust is observed, remove them by means of a blower included in the standard
accessories. Never wipe off on the surface with a cloth or the like moistened with
If the grid is in contact with the exposure plane, reposition the grid assembly. ethanol. If a surface is soiled, clean it with a clean cloth moistened with water or a dry
{MC:3.7.2_Installing the Grid Assembly} cloth. Do not forcibly push the exposure plane when wiping off the exposure plane of
the FPD. The FPD might get damaged, resulting in abnormal images.
Grid end surface Grid Grid guide Back of the
carbon cover
Exposure plane
of the FPD
Exposure plane FPD

Do not wipe with a cloth moistened Do not wipe with a cloth moistened
DETAIL A with ethanol. with ethanol.
Grid guide Grid Grid guide DRMS8049 ai
A gap must lie between the

FPD Exposure
grid and the exposure plane.
plane
DRMS8352.ai

IN-79
(1) Put on the carbon cover. #4 [Tighten]
u INSTRUCTIONS u TP3x12 (x2)
Collar
- The carbon cover and the FPD frame are marked in the factory to visually
check if the carbon cover is properly put on. Align the marks when putting on
the carbon cover.
- Make sure that no gap remains between the carbon cover and the FPD frame
when putting on the carbon cover.
A #2 [Connect]
Carbon cover
cable connector
Collar
#1 [Insert]
Carbon cover
TP3x12 (x2) TP3x6 (x10) DRMS8242.ai
Carbon cover A
(2) Put the filter and the filter cover on the carbon cover.
DETAIL A
Carbon cover
GOOD NO GOOD
Carbon cover mark Carbon cover mark
Filter cover/filter
FPD mark FPD mark
[Tighten]
Bind screw
(M3x6)
DRMS8243.ai
(3) Attach the pad of a standard accessory to the carbon cover.

{Operation Manual}
- Chest wall pad
Properly installed with no gap Improperly installed with a gap left - Left axilla pad
DRMS8050.ai
- Right axilla pad

IN-80
18.12 Checking the Grid Position (2) (4) Check the grid oscillation times (right and left) indicated on the
display.
18.12.1 Checking the Oscillation  INSTRUCTION 
Again check the routing of the grid wire if the grid oscillation times (right and left)
u INSTRUCTION u
indicated on the display are not within a range of 200 to 250 msec.
Check oscillation with the carbon cover put on. Otherwise, you cannot check correctly.
{IN:18.10.1_Checking the Grid Wire}
{IN:18.11_Putting on the Carbon Cover}
If improvement is not observed then, replace the grid assembly.
{MC:3.7_Grid Assembly}
u INSTRUCTION u
Check the grid wire if the oscillation time is not stable in value. Fine-adjustment of the <Display example>
route of the wire may stabilize the value.
Display
{IN:18.10.1_Checking the Grid Wire}
Grid Times
(1) Start up the Zigma Webserver. Transfer

729 714
Reverse
209 206
(3) Click [Start] in “Adjust grid oscillation sensors”.
The grid starts to oscillate.
Table window [Check] [Check]
Grid oscillation time Grid oscillation time
(left) (right)
DRMS8354.ai
[Click]
“Start”
DRMS8353.ai

IN-81
19. Installing the Temperature (2) Connect the temperature adjustment unit relay cable to the MFI51A
board connector of the FPD and to the cable connector of the
Adjustment Unit temperature adjustment unit.
Relay cable
(1) Mount the temperature adjustment unit on the stand jig.
A
REFERENCE Temperature
MFI51A board adjustment unit
Three pins are attached to the stand jig to keep the posture of the temperature
adjustment unit and to prevent it from dropping.
Insert the three pins into the three holes for retaining the temperature adjustment
unit when mounting the unit on the stand jig.
FPD Stand jig
[Install]
B
DETAIL A
Temperature
A
DETAIL A DETAIL B
#2
[Connect] Temperature adjustment
Relay cable connector unit cable connector
Stand jig pin
Stand jig
DRMS8244.ai
#1
MFI51A board FPD [Connect]
Relay cable connector
DRMS8248 ai

IN-82
(3) Disconnect the closure hose from the temperature adjustment unit. u NOTE u
u NOTE u When the temperature adjustment unit is of an older version, the hose
(A370Y100306) extending from the rear to the front face of the unit is not supplied
Keep stored the closure hose which has been removed. It is used when servicing together with the machine. Separately prepare the hose and connect it.
the temperature adjustment unit or the FPD, and when replenishing the coolant.
When the FPD is to be replaced, it is shipped with a new closure hose connected
with the unit. <Routing the A370Y100306>
Front Rear
#1
[Disconnect]
Closure hose
A370Y100306
DRMS8426.ai
DRMS8427.ai

IN-83
(4) Disconnect the closure hose from the coolant hose of the FPD. (5) Connect the coolant hose (thick) of the FPD to the temperature
adjustment unit.
u NOTE u
Keep stored the FPD closure hose which has been removed. It is used when
u INSTRUCTION u
servicing the temperature adjustment unit or the FPD, and when replenishing the Securely connect the FPD coolant hoses to the joints. Otherwise, the coolant
coolant. When the FPD is to be replaced, it is shipped with a new closure hose might leak.
connected with the unit.
REFERENCE
Connect the FPD coolant hoses (thick and thin) to the temperature adjustment
unit and water supply jig in the following procedures.
#1
[Insert]
Coolant hose
(thick)
FPD
A
DETAIL A
Coolant hose
(thin)
Closure hose
DRMS8251.ai
Coolant hose (thin)

[Disconnect]
Closure hose
DRMS8250 ai

IN-84
(6) Attach the water supply jig. (9) Remove the stand jig.
REFERENCE
#1
Temporarily connect the coolant hose (thin) to the water supply jig so as to fill the [Raise]
coolant in the procedures below. Temperature
adjustment unit
(7) Replenish the coolant.
{MC:13.2.2_Filling the Coolant}
REFERENCES
- The coolant is shipped with the standard accessories.
DRMS8289.ai
- Connect the coolant hose (thin) to the temperature adjustment unit (the #2
connection for routine operation) upon completion of filling the coolant in the [Remove]
procedures below. Stand jig
(8) Disconnect the connector of the FPD MFI51A board, and the DRMS8253 ai
temperature adjustment unit relay cable from the cable connector of

the temperature adjustment unit.
[Disconnect]
Relay cable
MFI51A board Temperature

adjustment unit
FPD
Temperature
DRMS8252.ai

IN-85
(10) Install the temperature adjustment unit. (11) Connect the cable connector of the temperature adjustment unit to the
REFERENCE
FPD NFI51A board.
retaining the temperature adjustment unit before installing the unit. Inserting the NFI51A board
screwdriver can prevent the temperature adjustment unit from dropping. Remove
the screwdriver after completion of the operation. FPD
DETAIL A
A A
Screw
Temperature
adjustment unit
cable
Screw
[Insert] DETAIL A
Temperature adjustment unit Screwdriver
DRMS8254.ai
[Tighten]
TP3x12 (x3)
<standard accessory> [Connect]
Connector
NFI1
FPD
Temperature
adjustment unit Temperature adjustment unit
DRMS8256.ai
DRMS8255.ai

IN-86
20. Putting on the Covers (1) Put on the FPD right-hand cover (right-hand armrest).
20.1 Putting on the FPD Right- and Left-Hand

Covers (Right- and Left-Hand Armrests) A
u INSTRUCTION u
Be sure to leave no gap between the FPD right- and left-hand covers (right- and left-
hand armrests) and the FPD carbon cover when putting on the FPD right- and left-
hand covers (right- and left-hand armrests). Otherwise, dust might enter the FPD,
resulting in abnormal images.
#4 [Tigten]
Cover (right)
Carbon cover Q4x12/W4
<standard
<standard
accessory>
accessory>
B
DETAIL A #3 [Tigten] DETAIL B #1 [Bring close]
BR4x25 FPD right-hand cover
FP
FPD
<standard <standard accessory>
accessory>
FPD left-hand cover No gap No gap FPD right-hand cover
Carbon cover
#2 [Tigten]
FPD right-hand cover TP4x6 (x2)
No gap <standard accessory>
DRMS8268.ai
DRMS8267.ai

IN-87
(2) Put on the FPD left-hand cover (left-hand armrest). 20.2 Putting on the FPD Lower Cover
(1) Put on the air filter on the FPD lower cover.
[Put]
Air filter
Cover (left) #4 [Tighten]

<standard Q4x12/W4
accessory> <standard accessory> FPD lower cover
B
DETAIL A DETAIL B
DRMS8324.ai
(2) Put on the FPD lower cover.
#2 [Tighten] FPD lower cover

#1 [Bring close] TP4x6 (x2)
FPD left-hand cover <standard accessory>
#3 [Tighten] <standard accessory>
BQ4x25
DRMS8269.ai
[Tighten]
Bind screw
M3x6 (x3)
DRMS8270.ai

IN-88
20.3 Putting on the Swivel Arm Right- and Left- (2) Put on the swivel arm left-hand side cover.
Hand Side Covers

(1) Put on the swivel arm right-hand side cover.
Swivel arm right-hand

side cover

side cover
DETAIL A
[Tighten]
M5 (x2)
DRMS8266.ai
[Tighten]
M5x10 (x2)
W5 (x2)
DRMS8265.ai

IN-89
20.4 Putting on the Swivel Arm Top and Lower (1) Put on the swivel arm lower cover.
Covers
Swivel arm
u INSTRUCTION u lower cover
When putting on the swivel arm lower cover, exercise care not to press the pin on
the swivel arm lower cover against the DC cable connected with the collimator. If
the cover is fixed while the DC cable is pressed against the pin, the connector of the
DC cable might be disconnected. If the machine is booted up while the DC cable
connector is disconnected or incorrectly connected, a failure in DC cable connection
might be recognized, and no home positioning of the collimator takes place, resulting Control panel
in no reaction. #1 Control panel
[Connect]
Connector #1
(MBL X1 W105) [Connect]
Connector
(MBL X1 W106)
Pin #2
[Tighten] DETAIL A
M5x60 (x3) A
X2_24V DC cable #3 [Connect]

Collimator rear Protective ground
wire terminal
#2 DETAIL B
[Tighten]
Collimator
B M5x60 (x3)
#3 [Connect]
Protective ground
wire terminal
Swivel arm lower cover DRMS8271.ai
DRMS8273.ai

IN-90
(2) Put on the swivel arm top cover. 20.5 Putting on the Elevation Stand Covers
[Tighten]
M5 (x3) (1) Put on the base plate cover.
Elevation
stand
[Put]
DRMS8272.ai
Base plate cover
DRMS6274.ai

IN-91
(2) Put on the elevation stand rear cover. (3) Disconnect the emergency stop short-circuit cable.
u NOTE u
Elevation Keep stored the emergency stop short-circuit cable, which has been
stand disconnected.
[Tighten]
Q6x25 (x6) Emergency stop
<standard
A short-circuit cable
accessory>
Elevation stand
Elevation stand
rear cover
B
DETAIL A DETAIL B
Emergency stop Emergency stop
short-circuit cable short-circuit cable
DRMS8275.ai
DRMS8276 ai

IN-92
(4) Connect the cable connector of the emergency stop switch, and put (5) Connect the cable connector of the emergency stop switch, and put
on the elevation stand right-hand side cover. on the elevation stand left-hand side cover.
REFERENCE REFERENCE
If you fail to connect the cable connector of the emergency stop switch, If you fail to connect the cable connector of the emergency stop switch,
initialization will not take place even if the power of the machine is turned ON. initialization will not take place even if the power of the machine is turned ON.
#2
[Put]
Left-hand side cover
#1
[Connect]
Connector
(Emergency stop switch)
Elevation stand
#1
[Connect]
Connector
(Emergency stop switch)
#2
[Put]
Right-hand side cover
Elevation stand
DRMS8278.ai
DRMS8277.ai

IN-93
(6) Put on the elevation stand top cover.
[Tighten]
Q5x8 (x4)
Top cover
Elevation stand
DRMS8279.ai

IN-94
21. Installing the RU Software 21.1 Installing the RU PC-TOOL
(1) Open the “Set Up PC-TOOL” window.
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
Described below are the procedures for setting the following addresses by way of
example: Insert the install disk into the CD drive of the AWS, if not inserted.
- IP address of the RU: 192.168.0.101 Upon inserting the install disk into the CD drive, the “Set Up PC-TOOL” window
- IP address of the AWS: 192.168.0.2 automatically starts.
Set Up PC-TOOL window

n Flow of the Installation Procedures of the RU Software
START
1. Installing the RU PC-TOOL
2. Setting the IP Address
3. Setting the AWS and Checking Connection
4. Installing the RU Software
5. Installing the Machine-Specific Data

DRMS8112 ai
6. AEC File Exchange
7. Backing Up the RU Data
END

IN-95
(2) Click [INSTALL]. (4) Click [Next].
A window for selecting the installation location appears. The window appears, prompting to start the installation (wizard window).
Set Up PC-TOOL window RU PC-TOOL Set Up start window
(wizard window)
[Click]
“INSTALL”
[Click]
“Next”
Installation location
selection window
Window prompting to install

DRMS8122.ai
(wizard window)
(3) Check that the installation location is “For FTP-Server”, and click
[SET] .
RU PC-TOOL Set Up start window (wizard window) appears.
Installation location
selection window
#1
[Verify]
“For FTP-Server” #2 DRMS8124 ai
is selected. [Click]
“SET”
RU PC-TOOL Set Up start window

(wizard window)
DRMS8123 ai

IN-96
(5) Click [Install], and install in the AWS. 21.2 Setting the IP Address
Upon completion of the installation, a wizard window appears, prompting to restart
the AWS to adapt the information changed in the configuration setting of the RU PC- (1) Exit the AWS software which is running.
TOOL.
REFERENCES
(6) Click [Yes], and restart the AWS.
- The AWS software automatically boots up when turning ON the power of the
Restarting the AWS, the information changed in the the configuration setting of the AWS. You need terminate the running AWS software before installing and
RU PC-TOOL is adapted. setting the RU software.
Window prompting installation - When you select “system OFF” from the pull-down menu, the popup menu
(wizard window) appears, inquiring whether the system is to be terminated. When the system
is to be terminated, click OK on the screen while pressing the Shift key on the
keyboard. Keep pressing the Shift key until the indication of termination in
process disappears.
Inspection window
(5) #1
[Click] #1
“Install” [Select]
“System OFF”
Installation completion
window
#2
(wizard window)
[Click]
“OK”
Click while pressing the Shift key
on the keyboard. Keep pressing
(5) #2 the Shift key until the indication
[Click] of termination in process disappears.
“Finish” DRMS8111.ai
Window prompting restart

(6) (wizard window)
[Click]
“Yes” DRMS8125 ai

IN-97
(2) Insert the install disk into the CD drive of the AWS. (4) Check Ping between the RU and the AWS.
Upon inserting the install disk into the CD drive, the “Set UP PC-TOOL” window Check that “Lost=0 (0% loss)” appears on the displayed window. Otherwise, check
automatically starts. the RU IP address and the I/F cable connection.
Set Up PC-TOOL window REFERENCES
- The default value (factory setting) of the RU is “192.168.0.101”. Use the
default value in Ping check in this procedure.
- "Lost=0 (0 % loss)" means that there is no problem as a result of the PING
check. If "Lost=0 (0 % loss)" does not appear, it indicates some problem.
#1
[Verify]
Default value of
NetConfig window “192.168.0.101”
192 168 0 101 #2

[Click]
“EXECUTE”
DRMS8112.ai
Ping check window
(3) Open the NetConfig window. C:￥WINDOWS￥system32￥cmd.exe
Pinging 192.168 0.101 with 32 bytes of date:

Set Up PC-TOOL window NetConfig window Reply from 192.168 0.101:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=64
Reply from 192.168 0.101:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=64
192 168 0 101
Ping statistics for 192.168.0.101:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum =0ms, Average = 0ms
D:￥INITIAL￥NET_CONFIG>
#1
[Pull down] #3
“Menu” [Verify]
Result of
.\ INITIAL \ NET CONFIG \ NET CONFIG TOOL.exe
"Lost=0 (0 % loss)"
DRMS8114.ai
#3 REFERENCE：
[Click] Clicking “SHOW” in the NetConfig
“EXECUTE” window, you can view the current
#2 settings.
[Select]
“.\ INITIAL \ NET_CONFIG \ NET CONFIG TOOL.exe” DRMS8113.ai

IN-98
(5) Set the maintenance mode. (7) Set the SubNet Mask.
REFERENCE REFERENCE
Set the maintenance mode before making the settings in the NetConfig window, The default value (factory setting) of the SubNet Mask is "255.255.255.0".
to halt the window to prevent other functions from automatically working.
NetConfig window (input example)
NetConfig window
192 168 0 101
192 168 0 101
#1
[Input] 192 168 0 101
“192.168.0.101” (arbitrary address) #1
255 255 255 0
#2 [Input] SubNet Mask
[Click] “255.255.255.0” (arbitrary address)/
“Mnt Mode” #2
[Click]
“SET”
192 168 0 2
DRMS8117.ai
DRMS8115.ai
(8) Set the Secure IP Address, Secure SubNet Mask and Default Gateway.
(6) Set the IP address of the RU.
REFERENCE
The default values (factory settings) of the Secure IP Address, Secure SubNet
192 168 0 101 Mask and Default Gateway are "0.0.0.0", respectively.

192 168 0 101 #1 192 168 0 101
[Input] IP address
IP address of the RU
“192.168.0.101”
(arbitrary address)/ 192 168 0 101
#2 #1
255 255 255 0
[Click] [Input]
“SET” 0 0 0 0 Secure IP Address,
192 168 0 2
Secure SubNet Mask and
0 0 0 0
Default Gateway
DRMS8116.ai
0 0 0 0 “0.0.0.0” (arbitrary address)/
#2
192 168 0 2
[Click]
“SET”
DRMS8118.ai

IN-99
(9) Set the FTP Server IP Address (IP address of the AWS). REFERENCE
NetConfig window (input example) If the NetConfig window is closed ( is clicked) with erroneous settings and the
RU is rebooted, continuity between the RU and the AWS (ping) is lost, and the
192 168 0 101
machine cannot start.
As an emergency measure in this case, set the DIP switch settings on the
MPI51A board mounted on the RU controller unit to reboot the RU. Rebooting
192 168 0 101 the RU can restore the IP address to the default value (factory setting) and
tentatively start the machine. After the machine is tentatively started, correct the
255 255 255 0 IP address as desired in the NetConfig window, restore the DIP switch setting to
the default values (factory settings), and reboot the RU.
0 0 0 0
Never carry out any operations other than setting the IP address while the
#1 machine is tentatively started.
0 0 0 0
[Input] FTP Server IP Address
0 0 0 0
IP address of the AWS [Change settings]
“192.168.0.2” (arbitrary address)/ DIP switches
192 168 0 2 #2 (Change the DIP switch settings only when the NetConfig setting fails and the
[Click] machine cannot start. The DIP switches 2 to 4 have no function assigned.)
“SET” DRMS8119.ai
DIP switch (Si) DIP switch (Si)
(10) Exit from the NetConfig window (click ), and reboot the RU. OFF OFF
Rebooting the RU, the values setting in the NetConfig window are effective. ON ON
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
NetConfig window Default settings Settings for restoring the machine
192 168 0 101 (factory settings)
[Click] MPI51A board
192 168 0 101 MIF51A board
255 255 255 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
192 168 0 2
Controller unit
DRMS8120.ai
DRMS8121 ai

IN-100
21.3 Setting the AWS and Checking Connection 21.4 Installing the RU Software
Refer to the AWS Service Manual. u NOTE u
If the AWS software is running, exit the AWS software while pressing the shift button,
to display the normal Windows screen.
u NOTE u
Use the application software CD attaching to the product when the software is
installed anew or the FPD is replaced.
(1) Open the “Set Up PC-TOOL” window.

REFERENCE
Insert the install disk into the CD drive of the AWS, if not inserted.
Upon inserting the install disk into the CD drive, the “Set UP PC-TOOL” window
automatically starts.
Set Up PC-TOOL window
DRMS8130 ai

IN-101
(2) Click [START] to open the RU PC-TOOL window. (3) Click [NEW], and input “RU NAME” and “RU IP ADDR”.
Set Up PC-TOOL window u NOTE u
Input the RU IP address set in the NetConfig window.
RU PC-TOOL window (input example)

#1
[Click]
“START” #1
[Click]
“NEW”
#2
[Input]
RU PC-TOOL window “RU NAME” and “RU IP ADDR”
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME ru0
RU IP ADDR 192 168 0 101
DRMS8127 ai
DRMS8126.ai

IN-102
(4) Click [PING], and check that the input RU address is present and that (5) Click [INSTALL].
it is connected. The window appears, prompting to insert the install disk into the CD drive.
Check that “Lost=0 (0% loss)” appears on the displayed window. Otherwise, check RU PC-TOOL window
the RU IP address and the I/F cable connection.
REFERENCE
"Lost=0 (0 % loss)" means that there is no problem as a result of the PING check.
If "Lost=0 (0 % loss)" does not appear, it indicates some problem. Do not take
the procedures of (5) and later in this case, but solve the problem.
#1
[Click]
RU PC-TOOL window
“INSTALL”
#1
[Click]
“PING” Install disk verification window
C:￥W NDOWS￥system32￥cmd.exe
Pinging 192.168.0.101 with 32 bytes of date:

Reply from 192.168.0.101 bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=64
Reply from 192.168.0.101 bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=64 DRMS8129.ai
(6) Click [OK] to open the RU INSTALL window.
Ping statistics for 192.168.0.101:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds: Install disk verification window
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum =0ms, Average = 0ms
D:￥ NITIAL￥NET_CONFIG>
#2 [Click]
[Verify] “OK”
“Lost=0 (0% loss)”
DRMS8128 ai
RU INSTALL window
MARS V1.5-0201 172.16.1.10
V1.5-0300
DRMS8131.ai

IN-103
(7) Select the software version “INSTALL VERSION” to be installed. (11) Click [EDIT CONFIGURATION].
RU INSTALL window u INSTRUCTION u
MARS V1.5-0201 172.16.1.10
INSTALL VERSION Change the configuration setting as needed. The configuration to be set includes
V1.5-0300 XXX the following two items:
YYY [Select] - EQUIPMENT ID (A-Z):
ID for communication with the AWS. Make the setting according to the AWS to
be connected.
DRMS8132.ai
- Selected Master:
(8) Select the “LANGUAGE”. Input the IP address of the AWS to be connected.
RU INSTALL window
RU PC-TOOL window
MARS V1.5-0201 172.16.1.10
LANGUAGE JAPAN
V1.5-0300
#1 [Click]
“EDIT CONFIGURATION”
DRMS8133 ai
(9) Select start window type “BAND TYPE”.

RU INSTALL window
MARS V1.5-0201 172.16.1.10
EDIT CONFIGURATION window

V1.5-0300
BAND TYPE JAPAN (FMS) RU PC-TOOL / CONFIG
RU Configuration Setting
EQU PMENT ID (A-Z) A
Selected Master 192 168 0 2
DRMS8134.ai
(10) Click [OK], and exit from the RU INSTALL window. #2 [Click]
“SET”
RU INSTALL window SET
DRMS8138.ai
MARS V1.5-0201 172.16.1.10
[Click]
V1.5-0300
“OK”
DRMS8135.ai

IN-104
(12) Click [SET]. Write into the Compact Flash Card starts. (13) Verify that writing into the Compact Flash Card has been completed,
and press the [ENTER] key.
CAUTION Pressing the [ENTER] key, the dialogue appears, indicating that the operation is
complete. Click [OK] in response to the instruction on the screen.
While write into the Compact Flash Card is in progress, never turn OFF the RU
power and the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard. If turned OFF, the #1
data on the Card gets damaged, and the RU cannot boot up as a result. [Verify]
REFERENCE
It takes approx. 30 minutes to write into the Compact Flash Card. It sometimes
takes longer depending on the network environments between the RU and the
AWS.
Install is complete.
CL NAME window
Please RU power off.

#2
[Click]
“SET”
#2
[Press]
ENTER key
#3
[Click]
“OK”
DRMS8141.ai
DRMS8142.ai

IN-105
(14) Check the version of the RU software, and exit the RU PC-TOOL. (15) Press the system OFF button on the control pad, and turn OFF the RU
#1
power.
[Check] LIST OF EXISTING RU
RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VERSION power.
ru0 192.168.0.101 MARS
GOOD indication
#2 Character color is "black".
[Click]
NO GOOD indication
Character color is "red".
#3
[Click]
DRMS8143.ai
u INSTRUCTION u
When NO GOOD, delete the RU information by the [DETAIL] button on the RU
PC-TOOL window, and repeat the installing operation from the procedure (1).
#1
[Select]
192 168 0 101 ru0 192.168.0.101 MARS V1.5-0201 Erroneously installed RU
#2
[Click]
“DELETE”
DRMS8144.ai

IN-106
21.5 Installing the Machine-Specific Data (4) Insert the machine-specific data CD into the AWS CD drive.
(5) Click [EXECUTE].
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
RU PC-TOOL window
(2) Select RU from the LIST OF EXISTING RU.
Con igu at on(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
<Display example>
RU NAME F EXIST NG RU
RU IP ADDR
MARS 192.168.0.101 FDR-1000D 1.3

BACKUP RESTORE
ALL RUs SETTING [Click]

DRMS8395.ai
“EXECUTE”
(3) Select “INDIVIDUAL DATA” from the RESTORE pull-down menu.
RU PC-TOOL window
DRMS8397.ai
(6) Select the MACHINE folder.

Directory selection window
#1
[Click]
³ ´
RESTORE #1
[Click]
#2
CONFIGURATION [Select]
INDIVIDUAL DATA (HD->RU) #2
CD drive
INDIVIDUAL DATA [Select]
MANAGEMENT INFORMATION (HD->RU) Data
#3
DRMS8396.ai
[Double-click]
³0$&+,1(´ IROGHU
DRMS8398.ai

IN-107
(7) Click [OK].
Directory selection window
[Click]
“OK”
DRMS8399.ai
(8) Click [OK] when “Completed” appears.

(9) Press the system OFF button on the control pad, and turn OFF the RU
power.
power.

IN-108
21.6 Replacing the Controller Unit AEC File 21.6.2 24x30 (for Use Outside Europe)
Two kinds of the controller unit AEC files are available, including “for use in Japan” Replace the controller unit AEC file for use in Europe (NHS) with the file for use in
and “for use in Europe (NHS)”. The file “for use in Japan” is stored in the controller Japan.
unit of 18x24 before delivery, and the file “for use in Europe (NHS)” is stored in the
controller unit of 24x30 before delivery. (1) Store the AEC file for use in Japan in the following folder of the AWS.
Therefore, if the model of 18x24 is to be installed in Europe or the model of 24x30 is <Location of storage>
to be installed outside Europe, the AEC file needs to be replaced with the file suitable
C:/Program Files/FujiFilm/FCR/FDR-1000DRLZ
for respective regions (see the shadowed columns in the table below).
<Files (22 files) to be stored>
EXPMODE.LUT, MASCAL1.LUT to MASCAL21.LUT
<Type of the controller unit AEC file when delivered>
(2) Start up the command prompt on the AWS.
Destination
Other than Europe Europe (3) Input “telnet, 192.168.0.101” in the command prompt, and press the
Model
[Enter] key.
For use in Japan
18x24 For use in Japan * Needs to be replaced with the (4) Execute the following command for each of the files stored in the
file “for use in Europe (NHS)”. procedure (1).
copy "file name","/LDISK/SYSTEM/AEC/LUT/file name"
For use in Europe (NHS)
24x30 * Needs to be replaced with the For use in Europe (NHS) (5) Restart the machine from the control pad.
file “for use in Japan”.
21.6.1 18x24 (only for Use in Europe)

Replace the controller unit AEC file for use in Japan with the file for use in Europe
(NHS).
(1) Store the AEC file for use in Europe (NHS) in the following folder of
the AWS.
<Location of storage>
C:/Program Files/FujiFilm/FCR/FDR-1000DRSZ
<Files (22 files) to be stored>
EXPMODE.LUT, MASCAL1.LUT to MASCAL21.LUT
(2) Start up the command prompt on the AWS.
(3) Input “telnet, 192.168.0.101” in the command prompt, and press the
[Enter] key.
(4) Execute the following command for each of the files stored in the
procedure (1).
copy “file name”,"/LDISK/SYSTEM/AEC/LUT/file name”
(5) Restart the machine from the control pad.

IN-109
21.7 Replacing and Merging the AEC File in the 21.7.2 Merging the AEC File
AWS u NOTE u
Replace the AEC file of the AWS as needed. Then, merge the file (AecLut_Dosage. If the AWS software is running, exit the AWS software while pressing the shift button,
csv) in which setting conditions of the exposure interval are defined with the AEC file. to display the normal Windows screen.
u NOTE u
REFERENCE
Merge the AEC file if the AEC file has not been replaced.
Storage of the set conditions of exposure intervals in the AEC lookup table takes place
during AEC file exchange.
21.7.1 Replacing the AEC File
The AEC file needs to be replaced if one of the following conditions is applicable. (1) Select “All Programs” → “Accessories” → “Run...” from the Windows
Otherwise, go to Sect. 21.7.2 “Merging the AEC File”. Start menu.
(A) When the AWS V3.0 is to be installed in Europe: The “Run...” window appears.
Replace the file “for use in Japan” with the file “for use in Europe (NHS)”. (2) Input “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\AECLUTMerge.exe”, and
(B) When the version of the AWS is updated from V2.0 or older to the AWS click [OK].
V3.0 (any area). Clicking [OK], the “AECLUTMerge window” appears.
Outside Europe: Replace from the “old version for use in Japan” to the file “for <“Run...” window>
use in Japan”. #1
Europe: Replace the file “for use in Europe (NHS)” with file of the latest
version. [Input]
REFERENCES
- Type of the AEC file stored in the AWS when delivered.
Destination
Other than Europe Europe #2
Model [Click]
For use in Japan DRMS8404E.ai
AWS V3.0 For use in Japan * Needs to be replaced with the (3) Select a merge source file.
file “for use in Europe (NHS)”.
Select “\AEC\AecLut_Dosage.csv” in the machine-specific data CD-R supplied with
For use in Japan of the old For use in Japan of the old the machine.
version version
AWSV2.0 or older
* Needs to be replaced with the * Needs to be replaced with the
file for use in Japan. file for use in Europe (NHS).
- * The AEC table is modified in the AWS V3.0 to support biopsy exposure.
n Procedures
(1) Store the latest AEC file (AECLUT.csv) suitable for the destination in
the following folder of the AWS.
<Storage location>
C:/Program Files/FujiFilm/IIP/Param
(2) Restart the AWS.

IN-110
(4) Click [SELECT], and specify a merge destination file by an absolute (6) Click [YES].
path. REFERENCE
Specified file: "C/Program Files/FujiFilm/IIP/Param/AECLUT.csv"
Click [NO] to cancel the merge process. Clicking [NO], the window in procedure (4)
(4) #2 (4) #1 appears.
[Select] [Click]
<AECLUTMerge window>
(7) Check the merge process completion window.
u INSTRUCTION u
D:￥AEC￥AecLut_Dosage.csv
If the merge process ends in abnormality, take appropriate measures referring to
C:￥Program Files￥FujiFilm￥IIP￥Param￥AECLUT.csv the AWS Service Manual.
<When the merge process is normally completed>

(5) #2 (5) #1
[Select or input] [Click]
DRMS8405.ai
(5) Click [MERGE].

Clicking [MERGE], the merge process window appears, and the backup file is
created concurrently.
Backup file name: AECLUT+YYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv
u NOTE u
If an error occurs during the merge process, change the backup file name to
“AECLUT.csv”.
<When the merge process ends in abnormality>
<AECLUTMerge window>
D:￥AEC￥AecLut_Dosage.csv
C:￥Program Files￥FujiFilm￥IIP￥Param￥AECLUT.csv
[Click]
<Check window>
DRMS8407.ai
(8) Click [OK].

(9) Click [CLOSE].
DRMS8406.ai

IN-111
21.8 Backing Up the RU Data (1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
(1)-1 Press the AWS [Windows] key, and move from the AWS window to the
REFERENCE Windows screen.
Back up (save) the following data from the RU via the FTP server into an external Press
storage device (FD, USB or the like) or into the HD.
DRMS8136.ai
- CONFIGURATION:
(1)-2 Select “Run...” from the start menu.
Back up the configuration data from the RU into the FTP server.
(1)-3 Input or select [“C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\Tool\RuPcTool\RuPCTool.
- INDIVIDUAL DATA (RU -> HD): exe”], and click the [OK].
Back up the unique machine-specific data of the RU into the FTP server.
- MANAGEMENT INFORMATION (RU -> HD): Pull-down menu

Back up the unique management information (date and time when the last ...........
calibration takes place, or the like) of the RU into the FTP server. ...........
- ERROR LOG: ...........
Back up the latest error log into the FTP server. ...........
- TRACE LOG: ...........
Back up the latest trace log (design analysis information) into the FTP server. ...........
- ALL LOGS: Run... (1)-2 [Select]
Back up the latest all logs into the FTP server.
.... Run ?
CAUTION .... Type the name of a program, folder, document, or

The Compact Flash Card of the controller unit is accessed when the “INDIVIDUAL Open: "C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\Tool\RuPcTool\RuPCTool.exe" (1)-3_#1
DATA (RU -> HD)” is to be backed up. Therefore, never turn OFF the RU power [Input or
(1)-3_#2 [Click] OK Cancel Browse...
and the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard during the backup. If select]
turned OFF, the data on the Card gets damaged, and the RU cannot boot up as a
result. RU PC-Tool window
Configuration(C)
u NOTE u EACH RU SETTING

CONNECTION TEST
LIST OF EXIST NG RU
RU NAME
Prepare an external storage device (such as FD and USB) beforehand when the data RU IP ADDR
is to be backed up in a storage device except the HD.
BACKUP RESTORE
ALL RUs SETT NG
DRMS8341.EPS

IN-112
(2) Select the RU to be backed up from the RUs listed in the “LIST OF (3) Select the data to be backed up from the pull-down menu of “BACK
EXISTING RU”, and click [FTP]. UP”.
If the IP address the same as the selected RU appears, you can determine that the RU PC-TOOL window
FTP server normally works.
192 168 0 101 ru0 192.168.0.101 MARS V1.5-0201
192 168 0 101 ru0 192.168.0.101 MARS V1.5-0201 #1

FTP
[Select]
RU BACKUP
#2 EXECUTE
[Click]
“FTP”
BACKUP #1
[Click]
ll "SYSTEM/192.168.0.101/CONFIG"
History.cfg CONFIGURATION
hosts INDIVIDUAL DATA (RU->HD) #2
Irset.cfg MANAGEMENT INFORMATION (RU->HD) [Select]
Script is done. ERROR LOG Data
value = 0 = 0x0 TRACE LOGS
ALL LOGS
#3
#4 [Verify] DRMS8146 ai
[Click] The IP address the same as (4) Click [EXECUTE].

“OK” the selected RU appears. DRMS8145 ai
REFERENCE
When the “INDIVIDUAL DATA (RU -> HD)” is to be backed up, the dialogue for
selecting the drive does not appear, and storage into the HD takes place.
RU PC-TOOL window
192 168 0 101 ru0 192.168.0.101 MARS V1.5-0201
BACKUP [Click]
EXECUTE
“EXECUTE”
DRMS8147.ai

IN-113
(5) Specify the drive of the external storage device or a folder where the (6) Exit the RU PC-TOOL.
data is to be temporarily saved, and click [OK]. #2
The backup starts, and the dialogue appears upon completion. [Click]
Click [OK] according to the instruction on the screen. Clicking [OK], the RU PC- 192 168 0 101 ru0 192.168.0.101 MARS V1.5-0201
TOOL window appears.

REFERENCES
- When an external storage device is to be selected, connect the device to the
AWS.
- If the RU is not correctly connected with the network, the following error
message appears.
DRMS8150.ai
DRMS8149.ai
RU PC-TOOL
Selected Folder:
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\TEMP
Drive:
C:
OK #2
Directory: [Click]
C:\ “OK”
#1 Program Files
[Select] FujiFilm
FCR CANCEL
Backup location TEMP
#3
[Click]
“OK”
DRMS8148.ai

IN-114
22. Time Setting for the Mammographic (3) Click [Set Time] and enter the Set Time window.
System window
Stand
(2) Click [System] and enter the System main window.
Zigma Webserver (Main menu) window
[Click]
“System”
System window
[Click]
“Set Time”
Set Time window
DRMS8345.ai
DRMS8346.ai

IN-115
(4) Set the date and time.
#1
[Set] #2
Set Time window Day/Month/Year [Click]
“Set”
#3 #4
[Set] [Click]
Hour/Minute/Second “Set”
DRMS8347.ai

IN-116
23. FPD Calibration
Carry out following calibrations.
- Line defect detection

- FPD dot defect detection
- Updating the offset data
- Updating the shading data
- Exposure dot defect detection
- Updating the X-ray uniformity data
Refer to the following for details.

{Calibration (CA)}

IN-117
24. Checking the Exposure Recognition (3) Press the exposure button on the control pad and check that:
- A sound is heard from the mammographic stand, and you can know exposure
Function is in progress;
- The LED on the exposure button on the control pad changes from green to
yellow, and you can know exposure is in progress;
(1) Set the following exposure conditions on the AWS. - The radiation mark on the lower right of the AWS screen changes from green
- Exposure menu: RMI156 (any exposure menu will do) to yellow, and you can know exposure is in progress.
- AEC: Manual mode
- T/F: Mo/Mo
- Tube voltage: 28 kVp
- mAs: 40 mAs
(2) Check that “STANDBY” appears on the AWS screen.
#1
[Check]
Beep
Mammographic stand
[Verify]
“STANDBY” DRMS8379.ai
Control pad
#2
[Check]
LED (yellow)
AWS screen
#3
[Check]
Radiation mark (yellow)
DRMS8380.ai

IN-118
25. Checking the AEC (3) Compress the acrylic board by 100 N ± 10 N.
25.1 Confirmation of AEC Accuracy

(1) Mount the compression plate of 18x24 size (24x30 compression plate
for the FDR-1000DRLZ).
(2) Place the 40 mm acrylic board on the exposure stand. [Compress]
Place the acrylic board to protrude from the chest wall plane of the exposure stand. Acrylic board
A
[Place]
Acrylic board DRMS8382.ai
Exposure
stand
DETAIL A
Exposure
stand
Chest wall
plane Acrylic board
DRMS8381.ai

IN-119
(4) Fix the dosimeter. <When the dosimeter is to be fixed outside the compression plate>
u NOTES u A
- The dosimeter must be fixed so that it is located at the same position
throughout the procedures including “machine installation”, “preventive
maintenance”, “FPD replacement” and “single tank unit replacement”. [Fix]
- The dose measured in this procedure is used to check for a relative change. Dosimeter
Therefore, it is desirable to always use the same meter.
- Locate the dosimeter so that the measuring part of the dosimeter is within the
exposure area and part or the whole of the dosimeter is not within the AEC
sensor area.
<When the dosimeter is to be fixed inside the compression plate (plastic plate
B
part)>
[Fix] DETAIL A
Dosimeter (80)
Exposure center
Dosimeter
Exposure
stand
Acrylic board
(130)
DETAIL A Exposure center
100
Exposure Chest wall plane “AEC sensor area”
110 Do not allow the
stand
Compression plate dosimeter to locate
Acrylic board Dosimeter within this area.
DETAIL B
100
Dosimeter
Compression
Chest wall plane plate
110 “AEC sensor area” Acrylic board
Compression plate Do not allow the
dosimeter to locate Exposure stand
(plastic plate part) Unit: mm
within this area. Unit: mm DRMS8384.ai
DRMS8383.ai

IN-120
(5) Register the exposure menu on the AWS. l How to calculate the deviation (formula)
“RMI156” (any exposure menu will do) _
(1) Calculate the average value (X).
(6) Set the exposure conditions on the AWS. A total of individual measurement values (data) divided by a total quantity is
u NOTE u called average.
<Formula: A>
Be sure to set Auto Decomp to “OFF”. If exposure takes place with Auto Decomp
set to “ON”, the compression plate moves up after the exposure, and a shift of
_
X1+X2+    +X10
X=
the dosimeter might result. n
X1, X2,   , X10: Respective measurement values
- AEC: AUTO n: Quantity of measurements
- Dose Level: L-mode
(2) Evaluate the deviation of each measurement value.
- Auto Decomp: OFF
<Formula: B> _
(7) Make exposure. The average value X is subtracted from
_ the measurement value Xn. This Xn is
(8) Record the dosimeter value (measurement value). further divided by the average value X. The obtained by this division is referred
to as the deviation.
(9) Repeat the procedures (7) and (8) ten times, and calculate the average _
Xn-X
value from the measurement values (n=10). Deviation=
X
(3) Check that the deviation is in a range of ± 0.05.
Check that each deviation value is within ± 0.05. The deviation is within ± 0.05: GOOD
WARNING The deviation exceeds ± 0.05: NO GOOD
When the deviation exceeds ± 0.05, the AEC may possibly have failures.
Replace the FPD immediately.
(11) Remove the dosimeter and the acrylic board.

IN-121
l How to calculate the deviation (calculation example) 25.2 Confirmation of Dose per Exposure Mode
Shown below is an example of calculation when individual measurement values (n=10)
are 535.0, 531.1, 522.7, 519.3, 517.5, 517.5, 514.1, 522.7, 516.2 and 521.5 (unit: (1) Put on the 18x24 compression plate (24x30 for the FDR-1000DRLZ).
mR).
_ (2) Place the 40 mm acrylic board on the exposure stand.
(1) Calculate the average value (X). Place the acrylic board to protrude from the chest wall plane of the exposure stand.
<Formula: A>
_
X= 535.0+531.1+522.7+519.3+517.5+517.5+514.1+522.7+516.2+521.5 =521.8
10

A
[Place]
<Formula: B> Acrylic board
535.0-521.8 =-0.025
Deviation=
521.8
The following deviation values are obtained by similarly calculating the deviation
of each measurement value. Exposure
0.018, 0.0018, -0.0047, -0.0082, -0.0082, -0.015, 0.0018, -0.011, -0.0005 stand
(3) Check that the deviation is in a range of ± 0.05.
As all deviations are in a range of ± 0.05, the result is GOOD. DETAIL A
<List of measurement results (example)>
Exposure
Measurement Measurement Deviation Determination stand
count value (unit: mR)
n=1 535.0 0.025 OK
Chest wall
n=2 531.1 0.018 OK plane Acrylic board
n=3 522.7 0.0018 OK DRMS8381.ai
n=4 519.3 -0.0047 OK

n=5 517.5 -0.0082 OK
n=6 517.5 -0.0082 OK
n=7 514.1 -0.015 OK
n=8 522.7 0.0018 OK
n=9 516.2 -0.011 OK
n=10 521.5 -0.0005 OK
Average value (X) 521.8 - -

IN-122
(3) Compress the acrylic board by 100 N ± 10 N. (8) Change Dose Level to “H-mode” and make irradiation.
(9) Enter the inspection information window, and check that the mAs
value is within the following ragne.
{Operation Manual}
<H-mode>
AEC file For use in Japan For use in Europe
Model (NHS)
[Compress]
Acrylic board 18x24 55-85
45-80
24x30 45-80
(10) Change Dose Level to “W-mode” and make irradiation.

DRMS8382.ai
value is within the following range.
(4) Register the exposure menu on the AWS. {Operation Manual}
“RMI156” <W-mode>
(5) Set the exposure conditions on the AWS. AEC file For use in Japan For use in Europe
- AEC: AUTO Model (NHS)
- Dose Level: L-mode 18x24 60-100
- Auto Decomp: OFF 40-70
24x30 40-70
(6) Make exposure.
value is within the following range.
{Operation Manual}
<L-mode>
AEC file For use in Japan For use in Europe

Model (NHS)
18x24 45-75
60-100
24x30 60-100

IN-123
26. Checking the Variation in X-Ray (3) Compress the acrylic board by 100 N ± 10 N.
Output
(1) Mount the compression plate of 18x24 size (24x30 compression plate
for the FDR-1000DRLZ).
(2) Place the 40 mm acrylic board on the exposure stand.
Place the acrylic board to protrude from the chest wall plane of the exposure stand. [Compress]
Acrylic board
A
[Place]
Acrylic board
DRMS8382.ai
Exposure
stand
DETAIL A
Exposure
stand
Chest wall
plane Acrylic board
DRMS8381.ai

IN-124
(4) Fix the dosimeter. <When the dosimeter is to be fixed outside the compression plate>
u NOTES u A
- The dosimeter must be fixed so that it is located at the same position
throughout the procedures including “machine installation”, “preventive
maintenance” and “single tank unit replacement”. [Fix]
- The dose measured in this procedure is used to check for a relative change. Dosimeter
Therefore, it is desirable to always use the same meter.
- Locate the dosimeter so that the measuring part of the dosimeter is within the
exposure area and part or the whole of the dosimeter is not within the AEC
sensor area.
<When the dosimeter is to be fixed inside the compression plate (plastic plate
B
part)>
[Fix] DETAIL A
Dosimeter (80)
Exposure center
Dosimeter
Exposure
stand
Acrylic board
(130)
DETAIL A Exposure center
100
Exposure Chest wall plane “AEC sensor area”
110 Do not allow the
stand
Compression plate dosimeter to locate
Acrylic board Dosimeter within this area.
DETAIL B
100
Dosimeter
Compression
Chest wall plane plate
110 “AEC sensor area” Acrylic board
Compression plate Do not allow the
dosimeter to locate Exposure stand
(plastic plate part) Unit: mm
within this area. Unit: mm DRMS8384.ai
DRMS8383.ai

IN-125
(5) Register the exposure menu on the AWS. <Measurement result record (example)>
“RMI156” (any exposure menu will do)
Exposure count Target/Filter
(6) Set the exposure conditions on the AWS.
Mo/Mo W/Rh
u INSTRUCTION u
n=1
Be sure to set Auto Decomp to “OFF”. If exposure takes place with Auto Decomp
set to “ON”, the compression plate moves up after the exposure, and a shift of n=2
the dosimeter might result. n=3
- AEC: MANUAL n=4

- kV: 28 n=5
- mAs: 20
- Focus Spot: Large n=6
- Grid: IN n=7
- Auto Decomp: OFF
- Target Filter: Mo/Mo n=8
(7) Make exposure. n=9
(8) Record the dosimeter value (measurement value). n=10

Average value (X)
(9) Repeat the procedures (7) and (8) ten times, and calculate the average
value and standard deviation from the measurement values (n=10). Standard
deviation (s)
(10) Calculate the coefficient of variation (standard deviation divided by
the average value). Coefficient of
variation (CV)
Check that the coefficient of variation is 0.05 or less.
u INSTRUCTION u Unit: mR
If the coefficient of variation exceeds 0.05, carry out the generator adjustment. If
the coefficient of variation exceeds 0.05 after the generator adjustment, replace
the single tank unit.
(11) Change “Target Filter” of the exposure conditions to W/Rh, and take
the procedures (7) to (10).
(12) Remove the dosimeter and the acrylic board.

IN-126
l How to calculate the coefficient of variation (formula) l How to calculate the coefficient of variation (calculation example)
_
(1) Calculate the average value (X). Shown below is an example of calculation when individual measurement values (n=10)
are 535.0, 531.1, 522.7, 519.3, 517.5, 517.5, 514.1, 522.7, 516.2 and 521.5 (unit:
A total of individual measurement values (data) divided by a total quantity is mR).
called average. _
<Formula: A> (1) Calculate the average value (X).

<Formula: A>
_
X1+X2+    +X10
X=
n _
535.0+531.1+522.7+519.3+517.5+517.5+514.1+522.7+516.2+521.5 =521.8
X=
X1, X2,   , X10: Respective measurement values 10
n: Quantity of measurements (2) Calculate the sum of squares (S).
(2) Calculate the sum of squares (S). <Formula: B>
A root sum square of a difference between an individual measurement value and S=(535.0-521.8)2+(531.1-521.8)2+(522.7-521.8)2+(519.3-521.8)2
the average value is called sum of squares and expressed as S (upper case S). +(517.5-521.8)2+(517.5-521.8)2+(514.1-521.8)2+(522.7-521.8)2
<Formula: B> _ +(516.2-521.8)2+(521.5-521.8)2
_ _
S=(X1-X) +(X2-X)2+    +(X10-X)2
2 =396.3
(3) Calculate the variance (s2). (3) Calculate the variance (s2).
A value of the sum of squares S divided by (n-1) is called variance, and <Formula: C>
expressed as s2 (square of lower case s). S =44
<Formula: C> s2=
10-1
S
s2= (4) Calculate the standard deviation (s).
n-1
<Formula: D>
(4) Calculate the standard deviation (s). s= 44 =6.6
The root of the variance is called standard deviation and expressed as s (lower (5) Calculate the coefficient of variation (CV).
case s).
<Formula: E>
<Formula: D>
s= s2 6.6
CV= =0.013
521.8
(5) Calculate the coefficient of variation (CV). _
The standard deviation (s) divided by the average value (X) is called coefficient of
variation (CV). Coefficient of variation (CV) = 0.013 < 0.05
<Formula: E> The result of the example is GOOD.
S
CV= -
X
The value of the coefficient of variation (CV) is 0.05 or less: GOOD

The value of the coefficient of variation (CV) exceeds 0.05: NO GOOD

IN-127
27. Checking for Image Problems and (4) Check to make sure that the image appearing on the AWS monitor is
free from the following problems.
Checking the S Value REFERENCE
When PreView is used, also check the diagnostic image appearing on the
PreView.
27.1 Checking for Image Problems
- Specific irregularities (vertical streaks, horizontal streaks, unevenness, whitened
(1) Place a small object such as a pen on the exposure stand. or blackened margins)
REFERENCE - Uncorrected dot defect/line defect
- Black dot defect
The small object such as a pen is placed because an image with uniform density
cannot be distinguished if it appears due to an error. REFERENCE
The system is specified to display the warning and paint the dot defect in black
(2) Set the exposure conditions when a dot defect out of standard is found during the calibration. Therefore, it
- Exposure menu: Left breast CC is necessary to check if the image has a black-painted dot defect. The black-
- Exposure condition: Manual painted dot defect appears as shown below, and sometimes a vertical streak as
shown below appears.
- Voltage: 23 kV
- Target/Filter: Mo/Mo
- mAs value: 7.1 mAs
- With grid Black-painted dot defect
- Without compression plate
(3) Make exposure. Vertical streak
DRMS8328.ai
27.2 Checking the S Value

Check the S value by the following refer-to procedures.
{CA:2.7.1_Checking the S Value}
u INSTRUCTION u
Adjust the system sensitivity if the S value is abnormal.
{CA:2.7.2_Adjusting the System Sensitivity}

IN-128
28. Checking the Operation of the (1) Turn ON the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard.
Mammographic Stand (3) Press the system start button on the control pad.
28.1 Checking the Elevation of the Swivel Arm (5) Press the down button to lower the swivel arm to its lowermost
u NOTE u position.
Check that no abnormal noise sounds and that the swivel arm can smoothly move.
Do not move up/down the swivel arm continuously for more than 16 seconds. If the
swivel arm is elevated continuously for 16 seconds or longer, an error might occur, (6) Press the up button to lift the swivel arm to its uppermost position.
resulting in the suspension of the machine. In case the machine stops, restart it. Check that no abnormal noise sounds and that the swivel arm can smoothly move.
u NOTE u
Check the elevation of the swivel arm for each of six buttons individually.
- Swivel arm control panel (right/left)
- Compression unit control panel (right/left)
- Foot switch (right/left)
Elevation stand
Compression unit
control panel
Swivel arm
control panel Foot switch
Elevation button
DRMS8357.ai

IN-129
28.2 Checking the Rotation of the Swivel Arm (1) Keep pressing the left button from the 0° position of the swivel arm
and check that the arm automatically stops at the -90° position.
CAUTION Check that the angle indication on the display shows “-90°”.
(2) Keep pressing the left button from the -90° position of the swivel arm
Do not rotate the swivel arm continuously for more than 24 seconds. If the and check that the arm automatically stops at the -180° position.
swivel arm is rotated continuously for 24 seconds or longer, the motor driver
might get damaged. Check that the angle indication on the display shows “-180°”.
(3) Keep pressing the right button from the -180° position of the swivel
u NOTE u arm and check that the arm automatically stops at the 0° position.
Check that the angle indication on the display shows “0°”.
Check the rotation of the swivel arm for each of four buttons individually.
- Swivel arm control panel (right/left) REFERENCE
- Compression unit control panel (right/left) When the swivel arm is to be returned from the -180º (or 180º) position to the 0º
Elevation stand position, it does not stop at the -90º (or 90º) position.
Compression unit (4) Keep pressing the right button from the 0° position of the swivel arm
control panel and check that the arm automatically stops at the 90° position.
Swivel arm Check that the angle indication on the display shows “90°”.
control panel (5) Keep pressing the right button from the 90° position of the swivel arm
and check that the arm automatically stops at the 180° position.
(6) Keep pressing the left button from the 180° position of the swivel arm
and check that the arm automatically stops at the 0° position.
REFERENCE
When the swivel arm is to be returned from the -180º (or 180º) position to the 0º
position, it does not stop at the -90º (or 90º) position.
(7) Press the left button, and release the button while the swivel arm is
rotating.
Display Check that the swivel arm stops rotating immediately after you release the button.
(8) Press the right button, and release the button while the swivel arm is
rotating.
DRMS8358.ai Check that the swivel arm stops rotating immediately after you release the button.

IN-130
28.3 Checking the Emergency Stop Switches (1) Press the emergency stop switch while pressing the elevation switch
of the swivel arm.
u NOTE u Check that the swivel arm stops moving up/down.
The emergency stop switches are located on three positions, on the right- and left- (2) Press the emergency stop switch while pressing the rotation switch of
hand sides of the elevation stand and on the control pad. In checking the emergency the swivel arm.
stop switches, individually check the respective buttons.
Check that the swivel arm stops rotating.
Elevation stand
(3) Press the emergency stop switch while pressing the compression
plate elevation switch.
Emergency stop switch Check that the compression plate stops moving up/down.
(4) Check the following while pressing the emergency stop switch.
- The swivel arm cannot move up/down;
- The swivel arm cannot rotate;
- The compression plate cannot move up/down;
- You cannot make exposures;
Emergency stop switch - An error (emergency stop [00015]) is displayed on the AWS monitor.
(5) Release the emergency stop switch.
Control pad
DRMS8359.ai

IN-131
28.4 Checking the Compression Unit n Checking the Compression/Decompression Dials
 NOTE 
28.4.1 Operation and Operation Check of the Compression
Individually check the compression/decompression dials on the right and left.
Plate
 NOTES  (1) Turn the compression/decompression dial clockwise and check that
the compression plate moves in the compressing direction.
- Individually check the following operations of the compression plate.
Compression/decompression dials of the compression unit (right and left) Check that the compression plate continuously moves while the dial is turned.
Compression/decompression buttons of the foot switch (right and left) (2) Turn the compression/decompression dial counterclockwise and
Elevation stand check that the compression plate moves in the decompressing
direction.
Check that the compression plate continuously moves while the dial is turned.
Compression/decompression
dials of the compression unit (3) Turn the compression/decompression dial clockwise and release the
dial halfway.
Foot switch Check that the compression plate stops moving immediately after you release the
dial.
(4) Turn the compression/decompression dial counterclockwise and
release the dial halfway.
Check that the compression plate stops moving immediately after you release the
dial.
Display
Decompression Compression
button button
DRMS8360.ai
- Check to make sure that no abnormal noise occurs during the operation and that the
compression plate smoothly works.

IN-132
n Checking the Compression/Decompression Buttons of the Foot 28.4.2 Checking Decompression
Switch
n Checking the Decompression Button of the Control Pad
 NOTE 
(1) Mount the compression gauge on the exposure stand.
Individually check the right and left buttons.
(1) Press the compression button of the foot switch and check that the
compression plate moves in the compressing direction.
Check that the compression plate continuously moves while the button is pressed.
(2) Press the decompression button of the foot switch and check that the
compression plate moves in the decompressing direction.
[Mount]
Check that the compression plate continuously moves while the button is pressed. Compression
(3) Press the compression button of the foot switch and release the gauge
button halfway.
Check that the compression plate stops moving immediately after you release the
button. Exposure
stand
(4) Press the decompression button of the foot switch and release the
button halfway. DRMS8361.ai
Check that the compression plate stops moving immediately after you release the (2) Turn the compression/decompression dial clockwise to compress the
button. compression gauge with an arbitrary pressure.
Compression
plate
[Compress]
Compression
gauge
DRMS8362.ai

IN-133
(3) Press the decompression button of the control pad. n Checking the Emergency Decompression Button of the
Check that the compression is canceled. Compression Unit
(1) Move up/down the compression plate while pressing the emergency
Control pad decompression button of the compression unit.
#1 Check that the compression plate is unlocked and that the compression plate moves
[Press] up/down.
Decompression
button
#1
[Press]
Emergency
decompression
button
#2
[Check]
Compression
plate
#2
[Check]
DRMS8363.ai
Compression
(4) Dismount the compression gauge from the exposure stand. plate
DRMS8364ai

IN-134
28.4.3 Checking the Optimum Compression Pressure (3) Set Optimized Compression to [ON].
Function Compression parameters setting box window
(1) Open the patient information input window of the AWS.

{Operation Manual}
(2) Click [Compression parameters setting].
Patient information input window [ON]
“Optimized Compression” DRMS8366.ai
[Mount]
Compression
gauge
Exposure
stand
DRMS8361.ai
[Click]
“Compression
parameters setting”
DRMS8365.ai

IN-135
(5) Keep pressing the compression button of the foot switch until (6) Check that the compression pressure indication on the display
compression automatically stops. flashes.
Flashing display of the compression pressure indicates that the optimum
Foot switch compression pressure function normally works.
 NOTE 
#1 Keep the compression to check the automatic decompression in the following

procedures.
[Press]
Compression
button [Check]
<Display example> Compression
thickness indication
Display
#2
[Compress]
Compression gauge
DRMS8368.ai
DRMS8367.ai

IN-136
28.4.4 Checking the Automatic Decompression Function (5) Turn the compression/decompression dial clockwise to compress the
compression gauge with an arbitrary pressure.
(1) Register the exposure menu on the AWS.
“RMI156” (any exposure menu will do)
(2) Set the exposure conditions on the AWS.
 NOTE  Compression
The Auto Decomp is set to “ON” to effect the automatic decompression function. plate
- AEC: MANUAL
- kV: 28
[Compress]
- mAs: 2.0
Compression
- Auto Decomp: ON
gauge
(3) Press the exposure button of the control pad.
(4) Check that the compression is canceled (automatic decompression).
DRMS8362.ai
(6) Disable the automatic decompression function on the AWS.

- Auto Decomp: OFF
[Check] (7) Press the exposure button of the control pad.

Compression Check that the compression is kept.
plate
DRMS8369.ai

IN-137
28.4.5 Checking the Compression Thickness (5) Check the compression thickness indicated on the display.
(1) Turn the compression/decompression dial counterclockwise to  INSTRUCTION 

decompress. If the compression thickness indicated on the display is other than 40 mm, correct
the indication.
(2) Dismount the compression gauge from the exposure stand.
{MC:3.5.2_Correcting the Compression Thickness Indication}
(3) Mount the acrylic board of 40 mm on the exposure stand.
(4) Compress the acrylic board with approx. 100 N. [Check]
Compression thickness
0 40 100 Display
° mm N
[Compress]
Acrylic board DRMS8371.ai
DRMS8370.ai

IN-138
28.4.6 Checking the Compression Pressure Indication (5) Turn the compression/decompression dial clockwise and keep
Accuracy compressing until the indication on the gauge shows a value of 100 N
± 10 N (10.2 kgf ± 1 kgf).
(1) Dismount the acrylic board from the exposure stand.
(3) Turn the compression/decompression dial clockwise and keep
compressing until the indication on the gauge shows a value of 50 N ± Compression plate
10 N (5.1 kgf ± 1 kgf).
#1
[Compress]
Compression gauge
#2 [Check]
Compression plate Compression
pressure of
#1 100 N ± 10 N
[Compress] (10.2 kgf ± 1 kgf)
Compression gauge
DRMS8374.ai
#2 [Check] (6) Check the compression pressure indicated on the display.

Compression Check that the compression pressure indicated on the display is 100 N ± 20 N.
pressure of
[Check]
50 N ± 10 N
(Display example) Compression pressure
(5.1 kgf ± 1 kgf)
0 109 100
DRMS8372.ai
(4) Check the compression pressure indicated on the display. Display

Check that the compression pressure indicated on the display is 50 N ± 20 N. ° mm N
[Check]
0 112 50 Display
DRMS8375.ai
° mm N
DRMS8373.ai

IN-139
(7) Turn the compression/decompression dial clockwise and keep 28.4.7 Checking Continuity of the Compression
compressing until the indication on the gauge shows a value of 150 N
± 10 N (15.3 kgf ± 1 kgf). (1) Mount the compression gauge on the exposure stand.
(2) Set the maximum compression pressure to 200 N by means of the
compression parameters setting box of the AWS.
{Operation Manual}
Compression plate  NOTE 
Write down the original maximum compression pressure value before you change
#1
the setting.
[Compress]
Restore the compression pressure to the original pressure after checking the
Compression gauge
continuity.
#2 [Check]
Compression Compression parameters setting box window
pressure of
150 N ± 10 N
(15.3 kgf ± 1 kgf)
DRMS8376.ai
(8) Check the compression pressure indicated on the display. [Set]

Check that the compression pressure indicated on the display is 150 N ± 20 N. “Max Compression Force”: DRMS8378.ai
[Check] 200 N
(3) Compress the compression gauge with the maximum compression
pressure (200 N).
0 105 150 Display (4) Keep the compression gauge compressed for approx. 1 minute.
° mm N Check that the compression pressure value indicated on the display does not vary
and that the gauge is kept compressed.
(5) Cancel the compression.
DRMS8377.ai
(6) Restore the maximum compression pressure to the original value by
means of the compression parameters setting box of the AWS.
(9) Dismount the compression gauge from the exposure stand.
{Operation Manual}
The compression gauge may be kept mounted when the subsequent procedures are
to be taken.

IN-140
28.5 Checking the Collimator (8) Measure displacement between the exposure frame silk-printed on the
exposure stand and the light irradiation field.
Measure the displacement between the exposure frame on the opposite chest wall
28.5.1 Checking the Collimator Mounting Angle side and the light irradiation field.
u NOTE u u INSTRUCTION u
Be sure to keep the compression plate frame put on when checking and adjusting the If the displacement between the exposure frame and the light irradiation field
collimator mounting angle. exceeds 1 mm, reposition the collimator.
This is because the irradiation field size varies depending on the presence of the {MC:3.3.2_Adjusting the Collimator Mounting Angle}
compression plate frame. Remove the compression plate (plastic plate part) to
eliminate an adjustment error due to light refraction.
DETAIL A
(1) Put on the 18x24 compression plate (24x30 compression plate for the |a-b| should be ≤ 1 mm
Exposure frame
FDR-1000DRLZ).
a b
(2) Remove the compression plate (plastic plate part).
{MC:3.5.3_Compression Plate (Plastic Plate Part)}
(5) Press the system start button of the control pad.
(7) Light up the light irradiation field lamp.
A
Opposite chest
wall side
Light irradiation
field
Exposure stand
Exposure frame
DRMS8393.ai

IN-141
28.5.2 Checking the Collimator Lamp
(1) Remove the compression plate, and reinstall it.
Check that the collimator lamp lights up.
(2) Move up/down the compression plate.
Check that the collimator lamp lights up.
(3) Press the collimator lamp ON button of the control panel to light up
the collimator lamp.
28.5.3 Checking the Irradiation Field Size

(1) Install each compression plate and check the irradiation field size.
Check that the irradiation field size varies for each type of the compression plate.
{MD:1.4_X-Ray Irradiation Field Size}

IN-142
29. Clearing the Error Log (2) From Window’s Start menu, choose “Run...”, type in or select [“C:\
Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\Tool\RuPcTool\RuPCTool.exe”], and click
[OK].
29.1 Clearing the RU Error Log ...........
...........
(1) Press the AWS's [Windows] key to open the Start menu of Windows. ...........
...........
Press ...........
...........
DRMS8385.ai
Run... #1 [Click]
.... Run ?
.... Type the name of a program, folder, document, or

Open: "C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\Tool\RuPcTool\RuPCTool.exe" #2
[Type in
#3 [Click] OK Cancel Browse...
or select]
RU PC-TOOL window <Display example>

Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU
RU IP ADDR
BACKUP RESTORE
ALL RUs SETT NG
DRMS8386.EPS

IN-143
(3) Open the ERROR DB window, and check the error log. (4) Clear the error log.
RU PC-TOOL window <Display example> (5) Click on the upper right of the RU PC-TOOL screen to exit the RU
RU PC-TOOL Ver.*.*
Configuration(C) Operation(O)
PC-TOOL.
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST 4. #1
RU NAME ru0 LIST OF EXISTING RU ERROR-DB [Click]
RU NAME IP ADDRESS RU TYPE VER
window <Display example> 5. #1
RU IP ADDR 192 168 0 101 ru0 192.168.0.101 MARS #1 [Select/Click]
MUTL PING MON FTP DELETE [Click]
INSTALL VERSION UP EDIT HISTORY EDIT CONFIGURATION
EDIT CL NAME
BACKUP RESTORE
ERROR LOG
EXECUTE EXECUTE
I/O TRACE EXPERT ERROR DB
ALL RUs SETTING

UNINSTALL
#2 [Click]
#3
ERROR-DB [Scroll]
window <Display example>
DRMS8388.ai
#4
[Click]
DRMS8387.ai

IN-144
29.2 Clearing the Error Log of the (2) Click [Error Log] to open the Error log window.
Main menu window
Mammographic Stand
(1) Start up the Zigma Webserver, and open the main menu window.
Main menu window
[Click]
“Error Log”
Error log window
DRMS8389.ai
DRMS8390.ai

IN-145
(3) Click [Options] to open the Options window. (4) Clear the error log.
Error log window Opsions window
#1
[Scroll]
Scroll bar
[Click]
“Clear Log”
DRMS8392.ai
#2
[Click]
“Options”
Opsions window
DRMS8391.ai

IN-146
30. Protective Grounding Test (Outside
Japan)
Test the protective grounding as needed, in compliance with the local regulations.

IN-147
31. Measurement of Leakage Current
and Patient Leakage Current
(Outside Japan)
Measure the leakage current and the patient leakage current as needed, according to
the local regulations.

IN-148
32. Visual Inspection and Cleaning of
the Machine
CAUTION
If some failure is observed after the visual inspection (a crack is found on
the compression plate, for example), report to the customer and replace the
component.
n Visual Check of the Mammographic Stand Cover

(1) Visually check if the mammographic stand cover is damaged.
Wipe with a moistened cloth when the cover is dirty.
n Visual Check of the Face Guard

(1) Visually check if the face guard is damaged.
Wipe with a moistened cloth when the guard is dirty.
n Visual Check of the Compression Plate

(1) Visually check if the compression plate is damaged.
Clean the compression plate with a cloth moistened with water or a dry clean cloth
when the plate is dirty.
n Visual Check of the Exposure Stand

(1) Visually check if the exposure stand is damaged.
Wipe with a moistened cloth when the stand is dirty.
u INSTRUCTION u
Never use ethanol to wipe off the surface of the exposure stand (carbon cover).
n Visual Check of the Optional Items

(1) Visually check if the optional items are damaged.
Wipe with a moistened cloth when they are dirty.

IN-149
33. Measurement of Power Source
Impedance [Only Inside Japan]
Measurement of power source impedance immediately after completion of the
installation is to be carried out only in Japan.
{IN:Appendix 2._Measurement of Power Source Impedance [Only Inside
Japan]}
REFERENCE
The measurement of the power source impedance is to be carried out conforming to
the following standards.
- IEC60601-2-45 10.2.2
- JISZ4751-2-45 10.2.2

IN-150
34. Measurement of Installation (1) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard, and
connect the voltage probe of the voltage analyzer to the circuit breaker
Environment measurement terminal.
[For single-phase three-wire]
Measurement position:
34.1 Measurement of Installation Environment Between L1 and L2 circuit breaker terminals
(Temperature and Humidity) Circuit breaker
terminal (for L1)
A variation in the temperature and humidity of normal operating days is measured. ON
The measurement period is one week after installation.
Circuit breaker
{IN:Appendix 4._Measurement of Installation Environments (Temperature and Protective
OFF
terminal (for L2)
Humidity)}
ground terminal
34.2 Measurement of Installation Environment

(Power Supply Voltage) [Only Inside Japan]
The measurement of the installation environment (power supply voltage) is to be [For single-phase two-wire]
carried out only in Japan. Measurement position:
A variation in voltage of normal operating days is measured irrespective of presence Between L and N circuit breaker terminals
of a booster transformer. The measurement period is three days after installation.
REFERENCE
Make sure that the power supply voltage value while the machine is working is in a ON Circuit breaker
range of 195 to 228.8 V. terminal (for N)
Take the following actions when the measured power supply voltage value is less than Protective
OFF
Circuit breaker
195 V. ground terminal terminal (for L)
- Without the booster transformer: Install the booster transformer and again make
measurement.
- With the booster transformer: Again make measurement. If the value is less than
195 V, request the customer to improve the power supply equipment.
DRMS8340.ai
REFERENCE
Setting and measurement examples for reference:
{IN:Appendix 3._Installation Environment Measurement (Power Supply
Voltage) [Only Inside Japan]}

IN-151
(2) Turn ON the power supply analyzer (manufactured by HIOKI: model:
8808) and make the settings.
The settings are:
- Effective value: 100 msec
- Recording length: 50 DIV
- Lower limit: 50 V
- Magnification: x2
- Trigger: Continuous
- Pre-trigger: 10 DIV
- ch1 level: 195 V
- Slope: ↓
(3) Turn ON the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard and start
measurement.

Appx IN1-1
Appendix 1. Requirements Regarding
Locally Obtained Parts
For some parts, such as network cables, locally obtained parts may be used. In this
case, parts that meet the requirements set forth below should be obtained locally.
n Locally Obtained Parts and Their Requirements

l Network cable
- Grade: Category-5e shielded type (STP)
1000Base-T
- Cable length: Up to 20 m
- Connection: Straight
l Specifications of the USB interlock tap (only when the indicator lamp
is to be connected via the USB interlock tap)
- Rated capacity: 15 A125 V (1500 W)
- Plug: 3P
- Outlet: 3 P (one or more interlocking ports)
- Power cord: 2 m or longer
- USB cable: 2 m or longer
- USB current: Sensitive to current of 100 mA or less
l HUB (between mammographic stand and AWS)
Procure locally outside Japan.
As the HUB is supplied together with the AWS as its accessory inside Japan, local
procurement is not necessary.
- Manufacturer: Allied Telesis
- Type: CenterCom GS905L
019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual Appx IN1-1

Appx IN1-2
BLANK PAGE

Appx IN2-1
Appendix 2. Measurement of Power (2) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the controller unit and the system
OFF button of the control pad. Measure the power supply voltage
Source Impedance (maximum) without load by means of the tester.
Write down the measured value. It is used in calculating the power supply
[Only Inside Japan] impedance.
Measure the power supply impedance irrespective of presence of a booster Measurement position:
transformer. Between L1 and L2 circuit breaker terminals
REFERENCE
Circuit breaker
Tools to be used in measuring the power supply impedance include: terminal (for L1)
- Tester ON
- X-ray shield (lead apron with lead equivalent of 0.25 to 0.35 mm Pb, or 60 mm Circuit breaker
acrylic board) Protective ground OFF
terminal (for L2)

terminal
(1) Place the X-ray shield on the FPD exposure stand.
u INSTRUCTION u
The X-ray shield is used to protect the detector against irradiated X-rays during
exposure. If measurement of the power supply impedance is made without using [For single-phase two-wire]
the X-ray shield, the service life of the FPD might shorten or an after image might Measurement position:
appear in the image. Between L and N circuit breaker terminals
[Place] ON Circuit breaker

X-ray shield terminal (for N)
Protective ground OFF
Circuit breaker
Exposure
terminal terminal (for L)
stand
FPD
DRMS8335 ai
DRMS8336.ai

Appx IN2-2
(6) Select [Left breast CC] and [Right breast CC] in the AWS inspection (7) Click [Start inspection] in the inspection window.
window. Check that “STANDBY” appears.
Inspection window Set inspection item window
#2 [Verify] #1
#1 “STANDBY” [Click]
[Click] “Start inspection”
“Next” DRMS8338.ai
Set inspection item window (8) Set the parameters in the inspection window.
The settings are:
- AEC: MANUAL
- Target/Filter: W/Rh
- Tube voltage: 35 kV
- Tube current time product: 500 mAs
Set inspection item window
#2
[Click]
“Left breast CC”
“Right breast CC”
#1 [Set] #2 [Set] #3 [Set] #4 [Set]

“MANUAL” “W/Rh” “35” “500.0” DRMS8339.ai
DRMS8337.ai

Appx IN2-3
(9) Press the exposure button, and measure the power supply voltage (10) Calculate the power supply impedance and check that the resistance
(minimum) during the maximum exposure by means of the tester. value is within the specified range.
Write down the measured values. The smaller value of the two measured values is - Power supply impedance formula:
used in calculating the power supply impedance. (Power supply voltage value without load – Power supply voltage during maximum
u NOTES u exposure)/Maximum current value (28.5 A)
- Specified value: 0.25 Ω or less
- Make measurement of the power supply voltage during the exposure (while the
buzzer sounds).
- Make two exposures.

Between L1 and L2 circuit breaker terminals
Circuit breaker
terminal (for L1)
ON
Circuit breaker
terminal (for L2)

terminal
[For single-phase two-wire]

Between L and N circuit breaker terminals
ON Circuit breaker
terminal (for N)
Circuit breaker
terminal terminal (for L)
DRMS8335 ai

Appx IN2-4
BLANK PAGE

Appx IN3-1
Appendix 3. Installation Environment Appendix 3.2 Setting Up the Working
Measurement Environments
(Power Supply Voltage) Appendix 3.2.1 Installing the Waveform Viewer
[Only Inside Japan] Prepare the floppy disk of “Waveform viewer (Wv) for Memory hicoder and memory
hilogger” supplied with the memory hicoder. You can also download the program from
Described in this section is how to measure the power supply voltage in the installation the HIOKI Corporation home page.
room where the FDR MS-1000 is installed. The machine to be used is “8808 Hicoder Prepare a personal computer on which the program can run, and install the program
of HIOKI E.E. Corporation”. according to the following procedures.
Refer to the “Operation manual” accompanying the machine for a detailed method of (1) Turn ON the power of the computer, and boot up the Windows.
handling the Hicoder.
(2) Set the floppy disk of the memory hilogger waveform viewer (Wv) in
Appendix 3.1 Measurement Flow the FD drive.
(Not necessary if the program is downloaded into the personal computer)
The flow of measuring the power supply voltage is as follows:
(3) Select “Run” from the “START” menu.
Setting up the working environments
Install the “waveform viewer” into the note PC.

Preparation for measurement
Set the measurement conditions in the memory hicoder. (4) Input the source drive and the execution program name (A:\WV118J.
Measurement EXE).
(The drive A is selected in this documentation.)
Acquire the data from the memory hicoder to When the program is downloaded to the computer, specify SETUP.EXE in the
the PC. destination of storage. Upon input, click “OK”.
Transfer of the data to the PC
Determine whether the measurement data

conforms to the specifications.
Data analysis
Adjustment of power supply voltage,
reconstruction (5) The memory hilogger waveform viewer installer starts to run.
Data storage
If the power supply voltage and frequency do not

conform to the specifications.
End

Appx IN3-2
(6) Read the memory hilogger waveform viewer setup window, and select (8) The program file copying starts.
“Next”.
(9) The message window indicating completion appears.
Click “Complete”, and end the installation.
(7) Specify the drive and the folder of the installation destination.
The default setting is “C:\Program Files\HIOKI\Wv”. If the default is OK, select
“Next”.

Appx IN3-3
Appendix 3.3 Preparation for Measurement (1) Define the setting of each analog input terminal as follows before
setting the measurement conditions.
Appendix 3.3.1 Measurement Overview Analog input
Measurement power supply
terminal
Monitor the power supply voltage of the machine by the memory hi-recorder. Store
the power supply voltage waveform, power supply frequency, and abnormal power ch1 3-phase 200 V system/400 V system, U-V phase
supply voltage data out of allowance in an internal memory (PC card). Check “8 ch2 3-phase 200 V system/400 V system, V-W phase
Measurement Conditions for the Power Supply Voltage” and make measurement.
ch3 Single phase 100 V system/200 V system
Appendix 3.3.2 Measurement Period ch4 Single phase 100 V system/200 V system
In three days (normal operating days) after the installation of the machine.
(2) Press the [Set] button, move by the [Cursor] key, and set by the [Select]
Appendix 3.3.3 Setting the Measurement Conditions key.
Note that the settings differ depending on items to be measured.
Set the measurement conditions by the memory hi-recorder.
l Settings when confirming the power supply voltage waveform and power
n Setting the Date and Time supply frequency
Turn ON the power of the memory hi-recorder, according to the operation manual Press the [Set function] and [Set] buttons, to display the status (*/3).
accompanying the memory hi-recorder. Press the [System] button five times. Use the
Memory recorder function
[Cursor] key and [Select] key on the initialization (5/5) page for adjusting and setting
the time. Press the [Basic settings] and [Set] buttons to display the status (1/3).
Time axis range: 10 ms
n Setting the Measurement Conditions (data interval) (125 μsec)
Refer to the following photograph for the results to be measured in power supply Recording length: 400 DIV
voltage waveforms. (4.00 s)
Window split: Two windows
Automatic storage: Binary
File name [AUTO]
Skip OFF
Printer recording format: Waveform
Smooth print OFF
Instantaneous waveform record (memory record) OFF
Select “Numerical operation…”, and make the following settings.
Numerical operation ON
No. 1 frequency ALL (Select a connected
channel).
No.2 OFF
No.3 OFF
No.4 OFF
Operation executed
Print the operation results OFF
Store the operation results ON

Appx IN3-4
Press the [Set input channel] and [Set] buttons to display the status (2/3). l Setting when monitoring the power supply voltage
Channel (2/3) memory
No problem is found in the measurement results if a file is not created after
Color Range Magnification (/DIV) Position several days of measurement. (This is because the file is created if a change
Graph (Lower limit to upper limit) Filter setting range of the voltage is exceeded.)
CH1 ~ 50 V x1 (50 V) 50% Turn OFF the circuit breaker as a test before actual measurement, and check that
G1 (0 V-500 V) OFF the voltage is recorded as shown below.
CH2 50 V x1 (50 V) 50%
G2 (0 V-500 V) OFF
CH3 50 V x1 (20 V) 50%
G3 (0 V-200 V) OFF
CH4 50 V x1 (20 V) 50%
G4 (0 V-200 V) OFF
Press the [Set trigger] and [Set] buttons to display the status (3/3).
Trigger (3/3) Memory
Trigger Continuous Pull trigger 0%
Trigger source OR Manual trigger ON
CH1
RMS Level
CH2
RMS OFF
CH3
RMS OFF If numerous files are created in the card, the CH2 setting remains effective. Set
CH4 CH2 of the trigger (3/3) to “OFF”.
RMS OFF Press the [Set function] and [Set] buttons, to display the status (*/3).
Effective value recorder function
Press the [Basic settings] and [Set] buttons, to display the status (1/3).
Status (1/3)
Basic settings
Time axis range: 100 ms
(data interval) (1.25 msec)
Recording length: 20 DIV
(2.00 s)
Frequency: 50 Hz/60Hz (select depending on the local
power supply frequency)
Window split: One window
Automatic storage: Binary
File name [AUTO]
Skip OFF
Printer recording format: Waveform
Print OFF
Instantaneous waveform record OFF
(memory record)

Appx IN3-5
Press the [Set input channel] and [Set] buttons to display the status (2/3). Appendix 3.3.4 Storing the Measurement Data
Channel (2/3) memory Effective value
Analog n Initializing the PC Card
Color Range Magnification (/DIV) Position Store the measurement data in the PC card.
Graph (Lower limit to upper limit) Filter Insert the PC card with its operation confirmed into the PC card insert port of the
CH1 ~ 50 V x1 (50 V) 50% memory hicoder.
G1 (0 V-500 V) OFF
CH2 50 V x1 (50 V) 50%
l PC card with its operation confirmed
G2 (0 V-500 V) OFF
CH3 50 V x1 (20 V) 50% SRAM card Flash ATA card
G3 (0 V-200 V) OFF HIOKI I-O DATA
- 9596RAM card (1MB) - PCFCA-10MS - PCFCA-20MS
CH4 50 V x1 (20 V) 50% - 9597RAM card (4MB) - PCFCA-40MS - PCFCA-85MS
G4 (0 V-200 V) OFF HITACHI MAXELL - PCFCA-110MS
- ML-1M-TB4N MELCO
- ML-2M-TB4N - DPF-10J - DPF-20J
Press the [Set trigger] and [Set] buttons to display the status (3/3). - ML-4M-TB4N - DPF-40J - RCF-C
Trigger (3/3) Effective value I-O DATA HAGIWARA Sys-Com
- PCS-1M - HPC-FC12M
Trigger Continuous Pull trigger 5 DIV CANON
Trigger source OR Manual trigger OFF - CSCJ-020M-ATA
CH1 Lower limit Upper limit LOGITEC
- LPM series
RMS Out 187.5 V 227.5 V Scan Disk
- FLASH DISK
u NOTES u MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
- IC card 7.5 MB
- The above trigger settings are those set when the upper limit/lower limit is Panasonic
set with a rate of variation of ±10% for an average value of the power supply - BN-012AB
HITACHI MAXELL
voltage. - COMPACT IC DISK 8 MB
- If the power supply to be measured is not enough for 4 channels, set the MITSUBISHI PLASTICS
trigger setting to “OFF”. Otherwise, the trigger will always operate. Exercise - Flash Express COMPACT
care.
Press the [Card] button, select “initialization” by the [Select] key, and carry out
initialization by pressing the [Start] key twice.
(3) Store the setting conditions as needed.
Press the [System] key to display the setting condition window (4/5).
Store the set conditions according to the following procedures.
Set conditions
No.1 [TEST ] ← Input a desired file name (“TEST” in this example).
Store Read Delete ← Select “Store”.
No.2 [ ]
Store Read Delete

Appx IN3-6
Appendix 3.4 Measurement n Setting when Monitoring the Power Supply Voltage
Place the memory hicoder body at the measurement site, and start measurement (1) Press the [Display waveform] key.
according to the following procedures. ↓
Appendix 3.4.1 Measurement (2) Select the recorder function. (n Setting the Measurement Conditions).
Select the memory recorder function.
Connect the connection cords accompanying the memory hicoder to the respective
power lines. ↓
(3) Press the [Start] key. (The green lamp lights up).
n Settings when Confirming the Power Supply Voltage Waveform When pressing the [Start] key, “Wait for trigger” appears.
and Power Supply Frequency If the power supply voltage varies out of the settings (when the trigger setting
is met), abnormal waveforms are automatically stored. Monitor in this state for
(1) Press the [Display waveform] key twice to display the DMM window. three days.
↓ ↓
(2) Record effective values (RMS) of all of analog input terminal (ch1). u NOTE u
(Refer to “Appendix 3.6.3 Example of Reporting the Measurement Data”.)
If “Compression being displayed”, “During storage” and “Data being stored”
If the window for displaying the effective value is not set, select the [Channel repeatedly appear instead of “Wait for trigger”, again check the trigger setting.
select] key to set the effective value (RMS) display.
This phenomenon occurs if the trigger setting of a channel not in use is not “OFF”.
↓
(3) Press the [Display waveform] key again. (4) Press the [Stop] key after the measurement period is over.
↓ ↓
(4) Press the [Start] key. (The green lamp lights up). (5) Check to make sure that no abnormal waveform file is created in the
When pressing the [Start] key, “Wait for trigger” appears. Press the [Manual PC card.
trigger] key to acquire the data.
Select the [Channel select] key to display the operation results. As frequencies of
respective lines are displayed, record them. (Refer to “7.3 Example of Reporting
the Measurement Data”.)
↓
(5) Press the [Stop] key.
u NOTE u
If “Compression being displayed”, “During storage” and “Data being stored”
appear instead of “Wait for trigger”, check the trigger settings.
This phenomenon occurs if the trigger setting of a channel not in use is not “OFF”.

Appx IN3-7
Appendix 3.5 Transfer of the Data to the PC and Appendix 3.6 Data Analysis
Data Display
Appendix 3.6.1 Printing the Data
Read the data in the memory hicoder body into the PC according to the following
procedures. Print the graph according to the following procedures.
(1) Display the graph to be printed.
(1) Take out the PC card from the memory hicoder.
(2) Click “Display(V)” and “Hard copy(H)” on the main menu.
(2) Insert the PC card into the card slot of the PC.
(3) Start up the waveform viewer (Wv) which has been installed.
(4) Select [File(F)] and [Open(O…)]. Select the stored data [AUTOxxxx.
MEM, AUTOxxxx.RMS] from the PC card for display.
[AC waveform measurement results (AUTOxxxx.MEM)]
The data is stored in the clip board by this operation.

(3) Start up an application program such as Word, paste the data and
print.
(Refer to “Appendix 3.6.3 Example of Reporting the Measurement Data”.)
[Effective value waveform measurement results (when abnormality is observed)
(AUTOxxxx.RMS)] Appendix 3.6.2 Data Analysis
If abnormal data is stored from the measurement results, the results do not conform
to the specifications. Be sure to find the cause of the abnormal data before starting to
use the machine.
If the measurement results do not conform to the specifications, the power supply
construction need again start from the beginning.
Modify other machines to conform to the specifications, as the other machines might
affect.

Appx IN3-8
Appendix 3.6.3 Example of Reporting the Measurement Data
Result report of power supply voltage measurement (example)
Make a report of measured data containing the following items for a post concerned:
- Installation site Installation Model of installed
XXX hospital FDR MS-1000
site machine
- Model of installed machine
- Measurement period Measurement
06/10/2008 to 18/10/2008 Measuring device HIOKI EE 8808 Memory hicoder
- Measuring device period
- Measurement results (voltage, frequency and remarks)
- Power supply voltage data printed in Appendix 3.6.1. Measurement Measurement
Measurement power supply Frequency
voltage results
Refer to an example of the report below:
Three-phase 200 V (U-V) 203.0 V 60.15 Hz Good
Power supply Three-phase 200 V (V-W) 202.5 V 60.15 Hz Good

voltage Single phase 200 V 203.5 V 59.70 Hz Good
Instantaneous power failure was observed on the xxx power supply xxxV line on
Remarks
xx(day)/xx(month)/xxxx(year).
Power supply voltage waveform (Three-phase xxxV U-V phase)
Waveform when the power supply monitor is abnormal (example)
(Paste the abnormal power supply

waveform only when observed.)

Appx IN3-9
Appendix 3.7 Power Supply Voltage
Specifications
The measurement conditions for the power supply voltage of the FDR MS-1000 are
mentioned below.
Make measurements according to the measurement conditions.
Appendix 3.7.1 Power Supply Voltage Specifications for the

FDR MS-1000
- Measurement period: Until three days after the machine power is turned ON.
- Measuring device: HIOKI E.E. 8808 Memory hicoder
- Allowable measurement power supply value:
Three-phase 400 V system
(200V system): 400 V-5%/+10%
* Check with the U-V and V-W phases.
Single-phase 200 V: 200 V±10%
Single-phase 200 V: 200 V±10%
- Allowable power supply frequency: ±0.5 Hz or less
Distribution switchboard reference example (for three-phase 200 V system)

Appx IN3-10
BLANK PAGE

Appx IN4-1
Appendix 4. Measurement of Appendix 4.2 Setting Up the Working
Installation Environments Environments
(Temperature and Appendix 4.2.1 Name of Each Part of the Data Logger
Humidity) 7. Liquid crystal display
6. ALARM connector 8. Sensor
Described in this section is how to measure the temperature and humidity in the
installation room where the FDR MS-1000 is installed. The descriptions are intended
for the “Microtechno Data logger TH-101” as a machine to be used. Refer to the
operation manual accompanying the machine for detailed instructions of the machine.
Appendix 4.1 Measurement Flow

The flow of measuring the temperature and humidity is as follows: 1. POWER switch
5. COM connector
Setting Up the Working Environments
2. RECORD switch
Install the “Manager program” into the note PC. 3. INTERVAL switch
Preparing for the measurement 4. MODE switch
Set the measurement conditions in the data logger.

Measurement start
Measurement complete
Change the air-conditioner settings

Transferring the data to the PC
Acquire the data into the PC from the data logger.

Data analysis
Determine whether the measurement

data conforms to the specifications.
Data storage
If the temperature and humidity do not

conform to the specifications.
End

Appx IN4-2
Appendix 4.2.2 Installing the Manager Program (6) Read the TH-101 manager setup window, and select “Next”.
Prepare the floppy disk of the “Data logger TH-101 manager program” supplied with
the TH-101. The program can also be downloaded from the Microtechno home page.
Prepare a personal computer on which the program can run, and install the program
according to the following procedures:
(1) Turn ON the power of the computer, and boot up the Windows.
(2) Set the floppy disk of the TH-101 manager program in the FD drive. (Not
necessary if the program is downloaded in the personal computer)
(3) Select “Run” from the “START” menu.
(7) Specify the drive and the folder of the installation destination.
The default setting is “C:\Program Files\SIE\TH-101 manager”. If the default is
OK, select “Next”.
(4) Input the source drive and the execution program name (A:\SETUP.
EXE). (The drive A is selected in this documentation.) When the
program is downloaded to the computer, specify SETUP.EXE in the
destination of storage. Upon input, click “OK”.
(8) The program file copying starts.
(5) The TH-101 manager setup program starts to run.

Appx IN4-3
(9) The message window indicating completion appears.
Click “Complete”, and end the installation.

Appx IN4-4
Appendix 4.3 Preparing for Measurement Appendix 4.3.3 Setting the Measurement Conditions
Set the measurement conditions via communication with the data logger by means
Appendix 4.3.1 Measurement Conditions of the manager program installed in the personal computer. Take the following
procedures.
The measurement conditions for the temperature and humidity depend on the room to
be measured. n Starting Up the Manager Program
Refer to “Appendix 4.8 Measurement Conditions for Temperature and Humidity” for
details. (1) Turn ON the power of the computer, and check that the Windows
boots up.
Appendix 4.3.2 Recording Interval and Measurable Days (2) Select the “TH-101 manager” shortcut registered in the [Programs] in
The data logger can record 8,000 pieces of the temperature and humidity data. the [START] menu. The application program starts.
Standard combinations of the interval of recording time and the number of measurable
days are as follows.
Recording interval Recorded time/day

2 sec 4.4/0.18
5 sec 11.1/0.46
10 sec 22.2/0.92
15 sec 33.3/1.38
20 sec 44.4/1.85 (3) The application program starts, and the main menu window appears
30 sec 66.6/2.77 on the screen.
1 min 133.3/5.55
2 min 266.6/11.10
5 min 666.6/27.77
10 min 1333.3/55.54
15 min 2000.0/83.33
20 min 2666.6/111.11
30 min *4000.0/166.66
60 min *8000.0/333.33
* The number of recorded days depends on the service life of a battery, which is
approx. three months, although it is influenced by the state of the battery.
* The internal setting is kept if the battery is replaced within one minute.

Appx IN4-5
n Communication Setting n Date and Time Setting
Select [Communication] and [Communication port setting] in the main menu. Make reservation setting based on the personal computer time. Correctly set the
If the port is not available as another device occupies, terminate the application personal computer time. Then, follow the procedures below:
program. Solve the problem of the occupation, referring to the manual of the device (1) Connect the TH-101 data logger with the personal computer via an
or the like, and then retry setting. The conditions are to be set as follows (COM1 in
accompanying communication cable.
the following figure is an example.)
(2) Check that the power of the TH-101 data logger is ON.
(3) Start up the manager program.
(4) Select [Communication] and [Setting] in the main menu. The setting
window appears.
u NOTE u
If the data logger is measuring the temperature and humidity, the following
window appears. In this case, stop the measurement, read and store the data
into the personal computer as needed, and then retry.
(5) Select [Time]. If the same date and time as the personal computer
time is to be set, make a check on [Use PC time], and select [Set]
button.

Appx IN4-6
n Setting the Measurement Conditions (5) Upon completion of setting the respective items of “Measurement
conditions”, select the [Set] button. Click “Close” upon completion of
Check the measurement conditions in advance, referring to “Appendix 4.8
the setting.
Measurement Conditions for Temperature and Humidity”.
(1) Connect the TH-101 data logger with the personal computer via an
accompanying communication cable.
(2) Check that the power of the TH-101 data logger is ON.
(4) Select [Communication] and [Setting] in the main menu. The setting
window appears.
u NOTE u
If the data logger is measuring the temperature and humidity, the following
window appears. In this case, stop the measurement, read and store the data
into the personal computer as needed, and then retry.
Recording mode: Select overwrite (LOOP).

Overwrite (LOOP): When the memory is full, the data is
sequentially overwritten from the initial data.
Stop (END): The measurement ends when the memory is full.
Temperature unit: Select “Celsius”.
Recording interval: Set the recording interval suitable for the modality, referring
to “9. Temperature and Humidity Measurement Conditions”.
Machine-specific number: Normally “1”
(6) Click “Communication” and “Start measurement” in the main menu,

when the measurement is to be started soon. The measurement can
start if the “REC” mark appears on the data logger.
(7) When the measurement is to be started later, disconnect the
communication cable, and turn OFF the power of the machine.

Appx IN4-7
Appendix 4.4 Measurement Start Appendix 4.5 Measurement End
Install the data logger main body at the measurement site, and start the measurement.
Refer to “Appendix 4.8 Measurement Conditions for Temperature and Humidity” for Appendix 4.5.1 Terminating the Measurement on the Data
the installation site of the data logger.
Logger Main Body
Start measurement according to the procedures below.
Check the state of the air conditioner of the room (Is the air-conditioner working to Terminate the measurement according to the following procedures.
cool, heat or dehumidify? What’s the set temperature? And so on), and check in what (1) Press keeping the "RECORD switch" for 2 or more seconds.
environments the operation proceeds (the door has been left open for transfer, or the The measurement ends when “REC” disappears from the liquid crystal display.
like).
(1) Place the data logger main body at the position where the temperature (2) Set the "POWER switch" on the side of the data logger main body to
and humidity are to be measured. "OFF".
7. Liquid crystal display
(2) Set the "POWER switch" on the side of the data logger main body to 8. Sensor
"ON". 6. ALARM connector
7. Liquid crystal display

6. ALARM connector 8. Sensor
1. POWER switch
5. COM connector
1. POWER switch 2. RECORD switch
5. COM connector 3. INTERVAL switch
2. RECORD switch 4. MODE switch
3. INTERVAL switch
Request of battery replacement
4. MODE switch
In communication Farhrenheit
Press keeping the RECORD switch for 2 or more seconds. The measurement
starts when “REC” appears on the liquid crystal display. Celcius
Request of battery replacement Humidity
In communication Farhrenheit
Celcius Interval time unit

Alarm In recording Recording status
Humidity
Interval time unit

Alarm In recording Recording status

Appx IN4-8
Appendix 4.5.2 Terminating the Measurement from the Appendix 4.6 Transferring Data to the Personal
Personal Computer
Computer
(1) Connect the data logger main body with the personal computer via the Read the data from the data logger main body to the personal computer according to
dedicated cable. the following procedures.
(2) Start up the manager program. (1) Connect the data logger main body with the personal computer via the
(3) Click “Communication” and “Stop measurement” on the main menu. dedicated cable.
Click “Yes” when the following window appears. (2) If the main body power is "OFF", set the POWER switch on the side of
the main body to "ON".
(4) Click [Communication] and [Read] on the main menu. The following
table appears.
Make a check in the check box, and select [Read]. The selected record data is
read.
(4) Click “OK” when the following window appears.
u NOTE u
The following window appears while the data logger is measuring the temperature
and humidity. Terminate the measurement, referring to “1.5.2 Terminating the
Measurement from the Personal Computer”.

Appx IN4-9
(5) Click “Return” upon completion of the read. The table is closed. Appendix 4.7 Data Analysis
The data which is read in the above procedures is displayed in a graph.
Appendix 4.7.1 Charting the Data
n Charting
The data read into the personal computer is charted to evaluate the installation
environments. Make a graph with unified scales of the vertical and transverse axes
as follows, in charting the data.
Graph scale
X axis: 1 day
Y axis: Temperature with the lower limit of 17°C and upper limit of 27°C
Humidity with the lower limit of 0% and upper limit of 100%
Refer to “8.1.3 How to Change the Graph Scale” for setting the scales. The data
(6) Select “File” and “Save as” in the main menu. Name the file as which is measured in the same temperature unit (Celsius) and the same recording
desired, and store the data. interval can be combined into a graph.
n Displaying the Graph

(1) Click “File”, “Open” and “Graph” on the main menu.
(2) The dialog box of “Specifying the file to be displayed in a graph”

appears.
Select the file name and click “Open”. The graph appears.

Appx IN4-10
n How to Change the Graph Scale n Displaying the Group File
(1) While the graph is displayed, click “Graph” and “Scale” on the main Up to four data files measured in the same temperature unit and with the same
recording interval can be combined and displayed in a graph. Display the graph
menu.
according to the following procedures.
(1) Click “File” and “Create” in the main menu.
(2) When the setting window shown below appears, make a check in “1
day” for the X axis and “Manual” for the Y axis. Click “Details”.
(2) The “Create a new group file” window appears.

Select the right button to display the group in the “Specifying the group file”
window. Specify the file name.
(3) When the detail setting window for the Y axis appears, set the upper
and lower limits of the humidity as follows, and click “OK”. The graph
appears with the changed scales.
(3) Upon completion of the specification, select [OK]. The specified data
files are displayed in one graph.

Appx IN4-11
n Printing the Graph Appendix 4.7.2 Data Analysis
Print the graph according to the following procedures. When printing the graph, Check if the measurement results conform to the installation environmental
combine the data by the procedures in “n Displaying the Group File” and print the specification for each machine, based on the graph obtained from the measurement
graph in the unit of a day. results. When the results are within the specification values and there is no room for
improvement, continue the measurement.
(1) Display the graph to be printed. When changing the operation conditions of the air-conditioner is assumed to lead to
(2) Click “File” and “Print” on the main menu. more comfortable environments although the results conform to the specifications,
change the operation conditions of the air-conditioner for measurement.
If the results do not conform to the specifications, the operation conditions of the air-
conditioner need be changed. Attempt to get improvement by switching over the
operation of the air-conditioner or changing the set temperature. Change various
settings, make measurement and again analyze the data. Obtain the optimum
operation conditions of the air-conditioner by repeating the above procedures. When
the environments cannot be improved only by the operation conditions of the air-
conditioner, consult the air-conditioner expert and take appropriate measures.
Appendix 4.7.3 Example of Reporting the Measurement Data

Make a report of measured data containing the following items for a post concerned:
(3) Remove the check of “Print the detail information”, and click “Printer - Installation site
setting”. - Model of installed machine
- Measurement period
- Measurement room (operation room, machine room or examination room)
- General weather and work description for each measurement date
- Temperature and humidity graph for every measurement date (in a unit of day)
printed in “Appendix 4.7.1 Charting the Data”.
Refer to an example of the report on the following page:
(4) Click the size of “A4” and the printing direction of “Horizontal”, and
click “OK”.
(5) Click “OK”.

Appx IN4-12
Result report of temperature and humidity measurement Appendix 4.8 Measurement Conditions for
(example) Temperature and Humidity
Installation Model of installed Described below are the measurement conditions for temperature and humidity for the
XXX hospital FDR MS-1000
site machine FDR MS-1000. Make measurements according to the measurement conditions.
Measurement Measurement
period
06/10/2008 to 18/10/2008
room
Examination room Appendix 4.8.1 Measurement Conditions for the FDR MS-1000
Measurement - Measurement period:
Work description Remarks Weather In a week (normal operating days) after the installation of the machine.
date
- Measurement site:
06/10 (Mon) Transfer The door is kept open. Cloudy
Machine room
07/10 (Tue) Installation of the machine Air-conditioned at 24°C Sunny The machine room wall at 1 m above the floor near the cabinet.
08/10 (Wed) Assembly Without the door open Sunny The site should be free from direct contact with the wind from the air-conditioner.
The data logger for remote maintenance after the machine is put into practice should
Air-conditioner changed
09/10 (Thu) Assembly
to 23°C
Sunny be installed at the same position.
10/10 (Fri) Wiring Sunny Examination room

Temporarily install the machine near the FPD of the swivel arm where adjustment or
11/10 (Sat) Wiring Sunny the like is not interfered with, until the clinical practice starts.
12/10 (Sun) Holiday No work Cloudy Install at the site free from direct contact with the wind from the air-conditioner.
Install on the side face of the monitor support after the clinical practice starts.
13/10 (Mon) Install at the site free from direct contact with the wind from the air-conditioner.
14/10 (Tue) XX
XXX XXX
15/10 (Wed)
Side of the monitor support
16/10 (Thu)
17/10 (Fri) Clinical practice starts. Normal clinical practice Sunny
18/10 (Sat)
Near the FPD installation position
XXX XXX XXX
- Recording interval:
(1) 30 seconds since the installation starts until the clinical practice starts.
Be sure to read the data into the personal computer and analyze data once
a day, and change the operation conditions of the air-conditioner as the need
arises.
(2) 2 minutes for a week after the clinical practice starts.
As the memory is full of data in 11 days, read the data into the personal
computer a week later.
* Each daily graph is attached to the above.

Appx IN5-1
Appendix 5. Unloading (1) Unload the crates accommodating units of the machine from the
platform of the truck.
Appendix 5.1 Unloading and Preparation for [Unload]

Transfer Crate
CAUTIONS
- When unloading the machine, two or more persons should always cooperate
to do so.
- Wear safety shoes for operation.
- Before unloading the machine, secure a proper machine transfer route.
- The mass of the mammographic stand is approx. 320 kg. When the crate
packing the mammographic stand is to be unloaded from the platform of the
truck, confirm the gravity center for balance.
Mammographic stand
Gravity center marker

DRMS8093 ai
(Operation desk and (Mammographic stand) (FPD, controller unit,

equipment rack) accessories) DRMS8001.ai

Appx IN5-2
Appendix 5.1.1 Unpacking the Mammographic Stand (3) Remove the plastic cover and check that the machine is not damaged.
(1) Move the crate in which the mammographic stand is packed to a place u INSTRUCTIONS u
where it can be disassembled. - Fully leave the machine with the plastic cover put on in the room. If the cover is
put off immediately after the machine is transferred into the room, the machine
(2) Disassemble the crate.
might get condensation.
#2
- Do not put off the protective sheet of the collimator to prevent entry of dust and
[Remove]
dirt.
Crate (right- and left-hand side faces,
Do not put off the protective
upper face and rear)
sheet from the collimator.
DRMS8011.ai
#1
[Within Japan] [Outside Japan]
[Remove]
Crate (front) DRMS8002.ai
#1 #1
[Remove] [Remove]
Pedestal Pedestal cover
cover #2
[Remove] #2
Plastic cover [Remove]
Protective
cover
#3
[Remove]
Plastic cover
DRMS8012.ai

Appx IN5-3
(4) Remove the packing material, the air cap and the protective sheet. (6) Remove the PP band brackets and the transit clamp from the pedestal
of the mammographic stand.
Do not remove the protective Do not remove the protective
sheet and the packing material sheet of the collimator until Transit clamp Bracket
of the grid until instructed. instructed.
#3
[Remove] #4
Air cap [Remove] #1
#2 Protective sheet [Remove]
[Remove]
BQ8x70
Packing #1
material [Cut]
PP band x2
#2
Do not remove this
[Remove]
packing material
BQ10x40
until instructed.
Pedestal
DRMS8096 ai
(5) Remove the bracket retaining the upper surface of the mammographic
stand.
Mammographic stand DRMS8004.ai
(7) Remove the bracket retaining the pedestal of the mammographic

#1 stand.
[Remove]
BQ16x30 (x2) DETAIL A
#2 [Remove]
Na10 (x2)
#2
[Remove] A
BQ10x40 (x2)
#1 [Remove] Pedestal
Upper surface bracket BQ10x40 (x2) Pedestal retaining bracket
DRMS8005 ai
DRMS8003.ai

Appx IN5-4
Appendix 5.1.2 Unpacking the FPD, the Controller Unit and (2) Unload the packing boxes from the pallet and mount them on a carrier
Accessories or the like.
CAUTION u INSTRUCTION u
Carry the handles on the packing box when lifting the box packing the FPD.
The FPD need be unpacked under such temperature and humidity conditions
that the FPD performance can be kept. Therefore, do not unpack the FPD until
Dot not unpack the FPD box
instructed in the manual.
until instructed in the manual.
{IN:17.1_Unpacking the FPD}
(1) Remove the stretch film packing the packing box.

Packing box
[Mount]
FPD packing box
[Remove]
Stretch film [Mount]
Accessory packing box
(under cover, cables)
Handles
[Mount]
Controller unit
packing box
DRMS8097 ai
[Mount]
Accessory packing box
(Temperature adjustment unit,
coolant bottle, pads, cover,
manual, etc.) DRMS8098.ai

Appx IN5-5
Appendix 5.1.3 Unpacking the Operation Desk and the (3) Unload the operation desk and the equipment rack from the pallet and
Equipment Rack mount them on a carrier or the like.
(1) Move the crate packing the operation desk and the equipment rack to
a place where it can be disassembled. [Mount]
Operation desk and
(2) Disassemble the crate. equipment rack
[Remove]
Crate
DRMS8100.ai
DRMS8099 ai

Appx IN5-6
Appendix 5.1.4 Unpacking the Elevation Stand Cover
(1) Move the crate packing the elevation stand cover to a place where it
can be disassembled.
(2) Disassemble the crate.

Appx IN5-7
Appendix 5.2 Transferring the Mammographic Appendix 5.2.1 Using the Dedicated Carrier
Stand REFERENCES
- When the dedicated carrier is to be used for transfer, prepare an eye bolt.
CAUTIONS
- The mass of the mammographic stand is approx. 320 kg. When transferring
the mammographic stand, two or more persons should always cooperate to
do so. Eye bolt
- If the machine is to be transferred over differing floor levels, slowly move the
machine not to shock it. Note that the carrier can come over a differing level
DRMS8101.ai
- The dedicated carrier is designed for exclusive use of the mammographic stand. It
up to approx. 10 mm. can carry the machine, as well as fix the machine to the carrier and is equipped with
adjustable feet capable of temporary installation of the machine while it is on the
u NOTE u carrier.
If the bump is 10 mm or higher, a slope should be provided.
When the mammographic stand is to be transferred to its installation position, it is

desirable to prepare a dedicated carrier and use it. If, however, the carry-in route is Dedicated
narrow, the dedicated carrier cannot be used. In this case, refer to the procedures for carrier
transferring the stand without use of the dedicated carrier for transfer.
Adjustable foot (x4)

DRMS8102.ai

Appx IN5-8
(1) Attach the eye bolts to the upper surface of the mammographic stand. (3) Lower the mammographic stand onto the dedicated carrier.
[Attach]
Eye bolt x2
[Lower]
Mammographic stand
Mammographic stand DRMS8103.ai Dedicated carrier DRMS8105.ai
(4) Fix the mammographic stand lowered onto the dedicated carrier.
(2) Route the rope through the eye bolt and crane up the mammographic Mammographic stand
stand.
#2
Mammographic stand
[Crane]
Mammographic stand
#1 [Tighten]
[Route] Hex head bolt x4
Rope
Eye bolt
DRMS8104.ai
Dedicated carrier
DRMS8109.ai

Appx IN5-9
(5) Remove the wooden bars from the rear of the mammographic stand. (6) Remove the rope from the mammographic stand and transfer the
mammographic stand to its installation position.
Wooden bar x2 [Remove]
Rope
[Remove]
M8x120 (x6)
Mammographic stand DRMS8108.ai
Mammographic stand
DRMS8110 ai

Appx IN5-10
Appendix 5.2.2 When not Using the Dedicated Carrier (3) Unload the mammographic stand from the carrier, and stand it upright.
(1) Load the mammographic stand on the carrier while moving it on the CAUTION
pallet.
#1 The mass of the mammographic stand is approx. 320 kg. When unloading the
[Move] mammographic stand from the carrier and standing it up, four or more persons
Mammographic stand should always cooperate to do so.
Pallet
#2 [Stand up]
Carrier [Load] DRMS8006 ai Mammographic stand
(2) Transfer the mammographic stand on the carrier to the installation
position.
DRMS8106 ai
#1
[Transfer]
Mammographic stand
DRMS8007 ai

Appx IN5-11
(4) Remove the wooden bars from the rear of the mammographic stand. Appendix 5.3 Transferring Other Packed Items
Wooden bar
(1) Transfer the other packed items to their installation positions.
Mammographic - FPD
[Remove]
stand - Controller unit
M8x120 (x6)
- Accessories (under cover, cables)
- Accessories (temperature adjustment unit, coolant bottle, pads, cover etc.)
- Operation desk and equipment rack
- Elevation stand cover
DRMS8008 ai

Appx IN5-12
BLANK PAGE

Appx IN6-1
Appendix 6. Installing the Optional (3) Install the shaft of the monitor arm.
Monitor Arm
(1) Open the right-hand side cover. Shaft
assembly
Operation desk
[Open]
Right-hand side cover [Tighten]
Nut
Spacer
Operation desk
DRMS8165 ai
(4) Install the monitor arm.

DRMS8163.ai
(2) Draw out the shelves.

Operation desk
[Install]
[Draw out] Monitor arm
Shelf
DRMS8164.ai
DRMS8166.ai

Appx IN6-2
BLANK PAGE

Appx IN7-1
Appendix 7. Installing the Optional (2) Take out the X-ray protective board from the packing material.
Protective board
X-Ray Protective Board
CAUTION
The mass of the X-ray protective board is approx. 16 kg. When attaching/
detaching the X-ray protective board, two or more persons should cooperate to
do so.
Anchor the operation desk before putting the X-ray protective board on the
operation desk. Otherwise, the gravity center of the operation desk moves
backward, and the desk might topple down.
(1) Remove the hex head bolts (x6), open the lid of the crate, and take out
the X-ray protective board together with the packing material from the
transporting box. DRMS8409.ai
Bracket
Screw
Protective board
(packing material)
Rear cover
Hex head bolts (x6)

DRMS8408.ai

Appx IN7-2
(3) Remove the upper tray from the operation desk. (4) Temporarily fix the bracket to the rear of the operation desk.
#3 [Remove] Bracket Spacer x2
Upper tray W6 (x2)
SW6 (x2)
A
#1
B [Temporarily fix]
Q6x30 (x2)
DETAIL A
DETAIL A DETAIL B
#2
[Temporarily fix]
TP3x6 (x5)
DRMS8411.ai
#1 [Raise] #2 [Lower]
Stopper Stopper
DRMS8412 ai

Appx IN7-3
(5) Install the X-ray protective board on the operation desk. (6) Reinstall the upper tray.
REFERENCE
Install the X-ray protective board so that “FUJIFILM” logo mark is visible from the [Reinstall]
patient. The logos look as mirror copies from the operator. Upper tray
#1
[Check]
Logo mark
”MLIFIJUF“
DETAIL A #2
[Insert]
X-ray
protective
board
A
DRMS8414.ai
#3 (7) Put on the rear cover.

[Tighten]
Q6x30 (x2) u NOTE u
The rear cover is not put on when the equipment rack is assembled with the rear
of the operation desk.
[Tighten]
#4 BQ6x12 (x4)
[Tighten]
TP3x6 (x5)
DRMS8169.ai
DRMS8413.ai

Appx IN7-4
BLANK PAGE

Appx IN8-1
Appendix 8. Installing the 1.8-Fold l 24x30
#1 [Tighten] 319N101839
Magnification Exposure #2 [Put] Retainer cover (left: 350N101858, right: 350N101859)
#3 [Tighten] 319N101840
Stand Kit S
Appendix 8.1 Putting the Positioner Retainer

(1) Remove the armrest covers (right and left).
#1 [Remove] Screw (Q4x12), Washer (W4)
DRMS8417 ai
(2) Put on the positioner retainers (right and left).

l 18x24
#1 [Put] Retainer cover (left: 350Y101584, right: 350Y101585)
#2 [Tighten] 319N101605
DRMS8419 ai
DRMS8418.ai

Appx IN8-2
Appendix 8.2 Adjustment of the Position of (2) Loosen the screws of the aluminum shaft locks (right and left).
#1 [Loosen] Screws (M6x15)
the Positioner #2 [Loosen] Screws (M4x8)
#3 Loosen the special screws with a thin-blade screwdriver.
(1) Remover the covers (right and left) of the aluminum shaft locks.
#1 [Remove] Screws (B3x8) #2
#1
#3
A DRMS8421 ai
(3) Put the positioner on the exposure table, and adjust its position so
that the retainer of the armrest is on a flat area of the aluminum shaft
DETAIL A DETAIL B lock.
#1
Cover
Flat area
Retainer
DRMS8420 ai
DRMS8422 ai

Appx IN8-3
(4) Fix the vertical direction of the positioner. (6) Fix the lateral direction of the positioner.
#1 Raise the lock, and while slightly pressing the flat area of the lock against the #1 While slightly pressing the brass block against the retainer, tighten the screw
retainer, tighten the screws (M6x15). (M4x8).
#1
#1
Retainer
Brass block
Flat area
(5) Fix the back-and-forth direction of the positioner.

#1 Adjust the position so that the lock pin is located toward the opposite chest
wall side from the retainer.
#2 While pushing the positioner toward the opposite chest wall side, move the
lock pin toward the chest wall side, and slightly press against the retainer.
#3 [Tighten] Tighten the special screws under the conditions mentioned in #2.
#3
#2
#1
Lock pin
Retainer
DRMS8424 ai
Chest wall side

Appx IN8-4
BLANK PAGE

Appx IN9-1
Appendix 9. Installing the Front Cover n Operation Flow for Installation
Kit START
Appendix 9.1 Checking the Items Supplied

Mount the front cover kit when the biopsy positioner kit or the stereo exposure kit is to
be installed. Appendix 9.2 Removing the Covers
n Product Abbreviations Appendix 9.3 Replacing the Bracket under the Swivel Arm
Name of product Abbreviation Appendix 9.4 Internal Wiring and Putting on the Stereo
Front cover kit (18x24) FRONT COVER KIT BIOPSY 18X24 #(E) Cover
Front cover kit (24x30) FRONT COVER KIT BIOPSY 24X30 #(E) Appendix 9.5 Putting on the Swivel Arm Lower Connector
Cover
Appendix 9.6 Putting on the Covers
END

Appx IN9-2
Appendix 9.1 Checking the Items Supplied No. Item Appearance Qty. Remarks
Check the components against the packing list supplied.
10 Cable 1 136Y102395*
DRMS8437.ai
No. Item Appearance Qty. Remarks

11 Cable DRMS8438.ai
1 136Y102826*
Stereo swivel arm; 18x24: 350Y101608*

1 1 12 Cable tie 10 316S1082*
left front cover 24x30: 350Y101609* DRMS8439.ai
DRMS8428.ai
13 Screw (BR6x12) 1
DRMS8440.ai
2 Bracket 1
DRMS8429.ai 14 Screw (S3x10 (SUS)) DRMS8441.ai 8 Only for 18x24
3 Bracket 1 356N104378*
DRMS8430.ai
350Y101550*
15 Armrest 1
Only for 24x30
4 Cable 1 136Y102382*
DRMS8442 ai
DRMS8431.ai
5 Bracket 1 356N104569*
350Y101551*
DRMS8432.ai
16 Armrest 1
Only for 24x30
6 Screw (TP3x6) 7
DRMS8433.ai
DRMS8443.ai
7 Clamp 2 316S0256*
DRMS8434.ai
17 Label 1 405N102277*
DRMS8444 ai
8 Cover 1 350Y101589* 18 Operation manual 1 897N101756*
DRMS8435 ai
9 Bracket 1 356N104614*
DRMS8436.ai

Appx IN9-3
Appendix 9.2 Removing the Covers Appendix 9.3 Replacing the Bracket under the
Swivel Arm
WARNINGS
(1) Remove the brackets under the swivel arm.
- Be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard to #1 Remove: M5x10 (x2)
avoid electrical shock hazards. #2 Remove: Screwed brackets (right and left)
- Electrical charge (residual charge) accumulated by a capacitor might remain
OFF. Be sure to proceed with operations after you are sure that the charge #1
DETAIL A
has been completely discharged, due to fears of electric shock hazards.
(1) Remove the following covers.

{MC:2._Covers}
#1 Swivel arm top cover
#2 Swivel arm lower cover
#3 Swivel arm left-hand side cover
#4 Swivel arm right-hand side cover #2 A
#5 Left-hand armrest
#6 Right-hand armrest
#7 FPD bottom filter cover DRMS8445.ai
#8 Carbon cover (2) Place the stereo bracket.

#9 Compression unit left-hand side cover #1 Put the screwed brackets (right and left) on the stereo bracket.
#10 Compression unit right-hand side cover #2 Tighten: M5x10 (x2)
#11 Swivel arm left-hand front cover
#12 Swivel arm right-hand front cover
#13 Inner cover (CBA board)
#2
#1 #1
Stereo bracket
DRMS8446 ai

Appx IN9-4
Appendix 9.4 Internal Wiring and Putting on the (2) Mount the bracket under the internal cable.
#1 Put: Clamps x2
Stereo Cover #1
(1) Mount the bracket on the positioner connection connector.
#1 Tighten: Screw supplied with the cable
#2 Retain: TP3x6 ground wire
Ground wire Align
#1
DRMS8448.ai
#2 Loosen the hexagon nuts (for both two round connectors).

#3 Put the connector into the hole of the bracket. Align the D-cut portions of the
connector and the bracket.
#2 #3
DRMS8449 ai
#2 u INSTRUCTION u
The connector has two D-cut portions. Make alignment so that the protrusions in
the connector are directed as shown below.
DRMS8446.ai
DRMS8450 ai

Appx IN9-5
#4 Retain: Hold the bracket in the hexagon nuts you loosen in the procedure #6 Retain: TP3x6 (x4) Three ground wires (yellow/green) and one ground
#2 and the ring. wire (black)
u INSTRUCTION u
The locations and the orientation of the ground wires are as shown below. Retain
in the order of #1 to #4. Intersect the #1 and #2 ground wires.
#4
#1
DRMS8451.ai #4 #2 #3
#5 Clamp: 2-positions
DRMS8453 ai
Ground wire used in #3 (yellow/green) Ground wire used in #4 (black)
#5
DRMS8454.ai
DRMS8452.ai

Appx IN9-6
(3) Fix the bracket of the connector cable. #4 Position the connector bracket with the screw hole aligned.
#1 Put the cable insert side of the connector cable through from the bracket
mounting position.
#1
#4
DRMS8455 ai
#2 Feed the cable downward.

#3 Draw the cable insert side toward you.
#3
DRMS8457 ai
#2
DRMS8456.ai

Appx IN9-7
#5 Temporarily tighten: BR6x12 (4) Connect the internal cable with the CBA board connector.
#6 Insert the notch of the bracket. #1 Connect: X7
#7 Tighten: BR6x12 #2 Connect: CN203
#2
DETAIL A #1
DRMS8459.ai
#6 (5) Gather the cables connected with X5, X14 and X15 at the center.
#5 #7
DRMS8458.ai
DRMS8460.ai

Appx IN9-8
(6) Replace the inner cover (CBA board) with the stereo inner cover u NOTE u
(featuring the notch at the center of the lower end).
Do not intersect the right and left cables extending from the CBA board to the
compression unit in connecting them. Put on the inner cover (CBA board) while
identifying the right and left cables. Wrong connection might result in damage of
the tube during stereo motion.
Notch DRMS8461.ai
(7) Temporarily put the stereo inner cover (CBA board).

#1 Pass the X5, X14 and X15 cables through the notch on the inner cover.
#2 Pass the flat cable under the notch.
DRMS8463.ai
#1
#2 DRMS8462 ai

Appx IN9-9
(8) Put on the binding sheet metal of the inner cover. (11) Raise the flat cable and fix it to the binding sheet metal.
#1 Slightly pull out forward the inner cover. #1 Fix
#2 Put the latches of the binding sheet metal into the right and left holes of the
notch of the inner cover (two locations).
#3 Raise the binding sheet metal and hook the latches (four locations).
#1
#1
DRMS8466.ai
#2
#3 (12) Fix the flat cable to the location as indicated in the figure below.
#1 Bind
DRMS8464 ai
(9) Retain the stereo inner cover (CBA board) on the swivel arm.
(10) Retain the cables extending from X5, X14 and X15 to the binding sheet
metal.
#1 Bind
#1
#1
DRMS8467.ai
DRMS8465.ai

Appx IN9-10
(13) Temporarily bind the internal cable and the ground wires (long yellow/ u INSTRUCTION u
green wire with a connector).
Temporarily bind the four cables from the connector of the internal cable (two
#1 Route white wires, gray and black wires) and the ground wires (yellow/green) at the
#2 Temporarily bind: PLT-2S position as indicated in the figure. Make wiring not to allow the cables to overlap.
#1 Temporarily bind: PLT-2S
#1
A DETAIL A
Wiring diagram
#2
#2
#1
DRMS8469.ai
#2
DRMS8468.ai

Appx IN9-11
u NOTE u (14) Make stereo exposures of the tube before putting the cover by means
of the stereo exposure plug, and check that the cables do not interfere
If the internal cable is erroneously wired, the tube might get damaged during
stereo motion. with one another.
Check that an adequate distance is assured between the cable and the bracket #1 Put the left-hand side cover of the compression unit.
on the side of the CBA board. Connect the cable from the CBA board to the connector inside the cover.
#2 Turn ON the power of the mammographic stand.

#3 Insert the stereo exposure plug into the connector.
DRMS8472.ai

Appx IN9-12
#4 Press the center of the button of the compression unit to make stereo (18) Put on the left-side front cover of the stereo swivel arm.
motion. #1 Tighten: Q5x8
Check that the cables are not forcibly pulled or interfere with one another. #2 Tighten: Together with the Q5x8 bracket.
(15) Retain the internal cable. Use the binder for temporarily retaining in
the procedure (13).
#1 Bind: PLT-2S
#1
#1
Stereo cover
#1
DETAIL A
#1
DRMS8473.ai
(16) Remove the left-hand side cover of the compression unit.

(17) Replace the rail on the rear of the left-hand front cover of the swivel
arm with the left-hand front cover of the stereo swivel arm. (For the
18x24 size, use retaining screws [S3x10 (x8)) supplied in the cover #2
kit.]
DRMS8475.ai
Rail
DRMS8474.ai

Appx IN9-13
(19) Put the right-hand front cover of the swivel arm. (22) Mount the bracket on the left-hand side of the carbon cover.
(20) Draw a lower part of the internal cable out of the left-hand front cover #1 Tighten: TP3x6
of the stereo swivel arm. #2 Tighten: TP3x6 ground wire (short yellow/green wire with a connector)
Bracket
#1
DRMS8476 ai
(21) Put on the right and left compression unit side covers.
Connect the cable from the CBA board to the connector inside the cover.
Connect the ground wire (green) inside the cover to the compression unit frame.
u NOTE u
Do not intersect the right and left cables extending from the CBA board to the
compression unit in connecting them. Put on the inner cover (CBA board) while
identifying the right and left cables. Wrong connection might result in damage of
the tube during stereo motion.
#2
Ground wire
DRMS8477.ai

Appx IN9-14
(23) Put on the carbon cover over the exposure stand. Appendix 9.5 Putting on the Swivel Arm Lower
(24) Connect the ground wire (short yellow/green) attached to the carbon
cover to the connector of the ground wire (long yellow/green) inside
Connector Cover
the swivel arm. (1) Mount the internal cable bracket on the connector cover.
(25) Mount the right and left armrests. #1 Insert the bracket into the cover from the connector side (downward in the
figure below).
u INSTRUCTION u #2 When the round connector comes in the round hold of the cover, insert the
Put on the armrest retaining screw as indicated below. upper part of the bracket into the cover.
#2 #1
DRMS8478.ai
(26) Put on the FPD bottom filter cover.

DRMS8479.ai
#3 Tighten: TP3x6 (together with the connector cover)
#1
DRMS8479 ai

Appx IN9-15
(2) Fit the connector cover of the internal cable. Appendix 9.6 Putting on the Covers
#1 Fit the latch under the connector cover into an opening under the swivel arm
front cover. Put on the right- and left-hand side covers of the swivel arm, and the upper and lower
#2 Fit the latch on the connector cover. covers of the swivel arm.
#2
#1
DRMS8481.ai
(3) Retain the ground wire on the FPD bracket.

#1 Tighten: TP3x6 together with the ground wire (black).
#1
Ground
wire
DRMS8482 ai

Appx IN9-16
BLANK PAGE

Appx IN10-1
Appendix 10. Installing the Stereo Appendix 10.1 Checking the Items Supplied
Exposure Kit Check the components against the packing list supplied.
No. Item Appearance Qty. Remarks

n Product Abbreviations
Name of product Abbreviation
Stereo exposure kit STEREO EXPOSURE KIT #
1-1 Stereo exposure plug 1 358Y100111*
n Operation Flow for Installation

START DRMS8483.ai
1-2 Operation manual - 1

Appendix 10.1 Checking the Items Supplied
Appendix 10.2 Installing the Front Cover Kit 1-3 Optional CD 1
Appendix 10.3 Adjusting the Irradiation Field DRMS8484 ai
Appendix 10.3.1 Adjusting the X-Ray Irradiation Field
Appendix 10.3.2 Adjusting the Light Irradiation Field
Appendix 10.4 Updating the RU Software Versions
Appendix 10.5 Setting the AWS
Appendix 10.6 Installing the Stereo Digital Mammography Key

Software
Appendix 10.7 Checking the Operation
Appendix 10.7.1 Checking the Stereo Motion of the Swivel

Arm
Appendix 10.8 Creating the Correction Data
Appendix 10.8.1 Filter Structure (Stereo)
Appendix 10.8.2 Checking for Image Problems (Stereo)
END

Appx IN10-2
Appendix 10.2 Installing the Front Cover Kit Appendix 10.3 Adjusting the Irradiation Field
{IN:Appendix 9._Installing the Front Cover Kit}
Appendix 10.3.1 Adjusting the X-Ray Irradiation Field
Adjustment of the irradiation fields of the Mo large focus and W large focus supporting
the stereo exposures need to be done in the AMULET having the stereo exposure
function installed.
The target values of adjusting the X-ray irradiation field for stereo exposure are listed
in the table below (the underscored values refer to the changes).
Mo large focus W large focus

a' 5 5
b' 8 8
c' 4 4
d' 8 8
Open the analysis Excel file supporting the stereo exposure, which corresponds to the
target value, and make adjustment of the X-ray irradiation field.
Refer to the MC manual for the adjustment procedures.
{MC:11.1_Adjusting the X-Ray Irradiation Field}
REFERENCE
The analysis Excel file supporting the stereo exposure is separately delivered.
Appendix 10.3.2 Adjusting the Light Irradiation Field

{MC:11.2_Adjusting the Light Irradiation Field}

Appx IN10-3
Appendix 10.4 Updating the RU Software Appendix 10.7 Checking the Operation
Versions
Appendix 10.7.1 Checking the Stereo Motion of the Swivel
{MC:7.1_Updating the RU Software Versions}
Arm
u NOTE u
(1) Connect the stereo exposure plug.
Check to make sure that the AMULET controller unit software is of the version
corresponding to the stereo exposure kit (V3.0 or higher). (2) Set the swivel arm angle to 0º, press the single touch button, and
make sure that the tube makes the stereo motion.
(3) While the swivel arm is tilted to each of angles of -90º, -45º, +45º, and
Appendix 10.5 Setting the AWS +90º similarly, press the single touch button, and make sure that the
Refer to the FDR-1000AWS service manual for detailed procedures. tube makes the stereo motion.
u NOTE u REFERENCE
Check to make sure that the AWS is of the version corresponding to the stereo The direction of the stereo motion depends on the angle of the swivel arm.
exposure kit (V3.1 or higher). - From 0º to 90º: Stereo motion in the + direction.
- From -2º to -90º: Stereo motion in the - direction.
- -1º: Stereo motion in either + or - direction.
Appendix 10.6 Installing the Stereo Digital (This is because the threshold value is -1.5º.)
Mammography Key Software

(1) Insert the supplied optional CD into the drive of the AWS PC.
(2) Install the option key.
(3) Install the application key.
(4) Start up the AWS.

Appx IN10-4
Appendix 10.8 Creating the Correction Data
u INSTRUCTIONS u
- Carry out necessary calibration data items according to the installation of optional items, referring to the table below. Carry out the items sequentially from the top of the table.
- Be sure to complete the calibration items of the AMULET body before calibrating the biopsy optional items and the SDM optional items. Refer to the following for calibrating the
AMULET.
{Calibration (CA)}
At installation of optional items Periodic maintenance,

At new installation of the AMULET
into the existing machine replacement and check
Correction data item AMULET
AMULET AMULET Biopsy Periodic When the FPD/
AMULET +Biopsy Biopsy SDM
+Biopsy +SDM SDM maintenance tube is replaced
+SDM
Filter structure data
- - O O - O O O -
[Set Stereo (X-ray uniformity)]
Check for image problems - - O O - O O O O

Appx IN10-5
Appendix 10.8.1 Filter Structure (Stereo) Appendix 10.8.2 Checking for Image Problems (Stereo)
REFERENCE (1) Connect the stereo exposure plug.
Take the procedures while the stereo exposure plug is connected. (2) Put a small item such as a pen on the exposure table.
(3) Set the exposure conditions, and make exposure.
(1) Enter the [Calibration (Stereo/Biopsy)] window of the MUTL.
(2) Click [Set Stereo (X-ray uniformity)].
STEREO- STEREO+
Inspection menu STEREO +/-, R MAMMOGRAPHY, CC
AEC Manual
kV 23 kV
T/F Mo/Mo
mAs 14 mAs
Grid In
REFERENCES
- In the “-0” menu, exposure is made with the tube set to 0° (same as normal
exposure).
In the “+4” menu, exposure is made with the tube tilted by 4° in the right.
- While the stereo exposure plug is connected, Auto Decompression is OFF
although Auto Decompression ON is set on the AWS. Compression needs to
be canceled manually after the exposure.
DRMS8485 ai
(3) Click [Calib] on the inspection window of the AWS, and click “Field
Calibration”.
(4) When the message appears on the AWS, click [OK].
(5) Make exposure when “Perform exposure for calibration” appears.

Appx IN10-6
(4) Check to make sure that the image appearing on the AWS monitor is
free from the following problems.
- Specific irregularities (vertical streaks, horizontal streaks, unevenness,
whitened or blackened margins)
- Uncorrected dot defect/line defect
- Black dot defect
REFERENCES
- The system is specified to display the warning and paint the dot defect in black
when a dot defect out of standard is found during the calibration. Therefore, it
is necessary to check if the image has a black-painted dot defect. The black-
painted dot defect appears as shown below, and sometimes a vertical streak
as shown below appears.
DRMS8487 ai
- If exposures of are made 0° and 4° are made under the same exposure
conditions, the image quality at 4° might be worse than that at 0°. This is
because the X-rays are incident slantly to the grid and the dose arriving at the
device decreases.
(5) Disconnect the stereo exposure plug.

u NOTE u
Check for image problems, and if a white defect is present, carry out exposure dot
defect.
{IN:Appendix 10.9_Exposure Dot Defect Calibration}

Appx IN10-7
Appendix 10.9 Exposure Dot Defect Calibration Appendix 10.9.1 Erasure of Permanent Dot Defect
When an uncorrected white defect is found in checking for image problems, carry out (1) Select the [Correct (Defect)] tab of the MUTL.
exposure dot defect calibration.
(2) Click [Clear Permanent Dot Defect].
u NOTES u
- Carry out necessary calibration data items sequentially from the top of the table,
depending on the installation states of optional items.
- Again check for image problems after the exposure dot defect calibration.
AMULET
AMULET AMULET
Correction data item AMULET +Biopsy
+Biopsy +SDM
+SDM
Erasure of permanent dot defect
O O O O
{IN:Appendix 10.9.1_Erasure of
Permanent Dot Defect}
Exposure dot defect
[Set Maintenance (Defect-Solid)]
For AMULET O O O O
{Calibration (CA)}
Exposure dot defect
[Set Biopsy (Defect-Solid)]
For biopsy
- O - O
optional item
{FDR-1000BPY Service
Manual}
Exposure dot defect DRMS8489.ai
[Set Stereo (Defect-Solid)]

(3) Check to make sure that the window is active, and exit from the MUTL.
For SDM
- - O O
optional item {IN:Appendix 10.9.2_
Exposure Dot Defect
(Stereo)}

Appx IN10-8
Appendix 10.9.2 Exposure Dot Defect (Stereo)
(1) Connect the stereo exposure plug.
(2) Start up the MUTL.
(3) Enter the [Calibration (Stereo/Biopsy)] window.
(4) Click [Set Stereo (Defect-Solid)].
DRMS8488.ai
(5) Click [Calib] on the inspection window of the AWS, and click “Field
Calibration”.
(6) When the message appears on the AWS, click [OK].
(7) Make exposure when “Perform exposure for calibration” appears.

Appx IN10-9
BLANK PAGE

Appx IN10-10
BLANK PAGE

Control Sheet
FDR MS-1000
Service Manual
Performance Check (PC)

PC-1
Performance Checklist of FDR MS-1000 3. Installing the AWS
{AWS Service Manual}
The purpose of this checklist is to document the steps performed and record the - Checking on the AWS performance checklist  OK  NG
measurement values and set values based on the descriptions in the Service Manual
when the FDR MS-1000 is to be installed. Therefore, this document is not intended to 4. Installing the Controller Unit
replace the installation checklist located in the FDR MS-1000 Service Manual but to {IN:8._Installing the Controller Unit}
be followed concurrently.
- Checking clamping of the anchor bolts  OK  NG
Make system connection and image outputs not only at the time of installation but
also after the servicing, so as to deliver a machine proved to work normally to the 5. Connecting the Power Supply Cable of the Controller Unit
customer.
{IN:9._Connecting the Power Supply Cable}
Installation Information - Connecting the power supply cable of the controller unit  OK  NG
Single-phase two-wire  Single-phase three-wire 
Machine serial number: _____________ Software Ver.: ___________________ - Connecting the power supply cable of the mammographic stand  OK  NG
- Power supply voltage: V (specified value: 208/230/240±10% (single-phase,
Site name: ___________________ Installed by: ___________________ AC))
Site number: ___________________ Signature: ___________________ 6. Installing the Mammographic Stand
Room number: ___________________ Date completed: ___________________ {IN:11._Installing the Mammographic Stand}
- Checking position for clamping  OK  NG
- Check the tilt  OK  NG
Checklist - Checking clamping of the anchor bolts  OK  NG
1. Checking the Items Supplied  OK  NG 7. Connecting the Cables to the Mammographic Stand
{IN:5._Checking the Items Supplied} {IN:13._Connecting the Cables to the Mammographic Stand}
Machine main body  Accessories  - Connect the network cable  OK  NG
- Connect the foot switch cables  OK  NG
2. Installing the Operation Desk - Connect the door switch cable  NA  OK  NG
{IN:6._Installing the Operation Desk}
- Checking clamping of the anchor bolts  OK  NG
- Installing the optional X-ray protective board  Yes  No
- Installing the optional monitor arm  Yes  No
- Installing the equipment rack (separately available accessory)  Yes  No
- Installing the anchor plate (separately available accessory)  Yes  No
019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual PC-1

PC-2
8. Changing the Swivel Arm Height (Uppermost Position) 12. Installing the RU Software
{IN:14._Changing the Swivel Arm Height (Uppermost Position)} {IN:21._Installing the RU Software}
- Changing the swivel arm height  Yes  No - Installing the RU software
Uppermost position: mm (value after adjustment) - Installing the machine-specific data
- AEC file exchange
9. Changing the DIP Switch Setting on the CBA (D905) Board - RU IP address:
{IN:18.7_Changing the DIP Switch Setting on the CBA (D905) Board} - FTP server IP address:
- Changing the DIP Switch Setting (all OFF)  OK  NG - RU identification code (FPD serial No.):
- The serial No. of the single tank unit:
10. Installing the Temperature Adjustment Unit - Software version:
{IN:19._Installing the Temperature Adjustment Unit} - Backup of set file (machine-specific data)  OK  NG
- Liquid level (coolant)  OK  NG
13. Checking the Operation of the Mammographic Stand
GOOD NO GOOD {IN:28._Checking the Operation of the Mammographic Stand}
- Checking the elevation of the swivel arm  OK  NG
Joint of the reserve tank - Checking the rotation of the swivel arm  OK  NG
- Checking the stereo motion of the swivel arm (only when the stereo exposure kit is
installed)
{IN:Appendix 10.7.1_Checking the Stereo Motion of the Swivel Arm}
 OK  NG
- Checking the emergency stop switches  OK  NG
- Checking the compression unit  OK  NG
- Checking the collimator  OK  NG
14. FPD Calibration
than the joint of the reserve tank. than the joint of the reserve tank. {Calibration (CA)}
DRMS7001.ai
- Line defect detection  OK  NG
- FPD dot defect detection  OK  NG
11. Installing the Front Cover Kit (only when the Stereo Exposure Kit Is - Updating the offset data  OK  NG
Installed) - Updating the shading data  OK  NG
{IN:Appendix 9._Installing the Front Cover Kit} - Exposure dot defect detection  OK  NG
- Internal wiring  OK  NG - Updating the X-ray uniformity data  OK  NG

PC-3
15. Checking the Exposure Recognition Function 18. Checking the Variation in X-ray Output
{IN:24._Checking the Exposure Recognition Function} {IN:26._Checking the Variation in X-ray Output}
- Checking the exposure recognition function  OK  NG - Check the coefficient of variation
(Specified value: Coefficient of variation (CV) should be within 0.05.)
16. Adjusting the Irradiation Field (only when the Stereo Exposure Kit Is  OK  NG
Installed)
Target/Filter
{IN:Appendix 9._Installing the Front Cover Kit} Exposure count
- Adjusting the X-ray irradiation field  OK  NG Mo/Mo W/Rh
- Adjusting the light irradiation field  OK  NG n=1 mR mR
17. Checking the AEC n=2 mR mR
{IN:25.1_Confirmation of AEC Accuracy} n=3 mR mR
- Check the AEC accuracy
n=4 mR mR
(Specified value: Deviations for all measurements (n=10) should be within ± 0.05.)
 OK  NG n=5 mR mR
Measurement Measurement n=6 mR mR
Deviation Determination
count value
n=7 mR mR
n=1 mR
n=8 mR mR
n=2 mR
n=9 mR mR
n=3 mR
n=10 mR mR
n=4 mR
Average value (X) mR mR
n=5 mR
Standard
n=6 mR deviation (s)
n=7 mR Coefficient of
variation (CV)
n=8 mR
n=9 mR
n=10 mR
Average value (X) mR - -
- Confirmation of dose per exposure mode
Dose Level “L-mode” (specified value: 45 to 75 mAs)  OK  NG
Dose Level “H-mode” (specified value: 55 to 85 mAs)  OK  NG
Dose Level “W-mode” (specified value: 60 to 100 mAs)  OK  NG

PC-4
19. Checking for Image Problems and Checking the S Value
- X-ray exposure information
X-ray dose: mR S value: Voltage: kV
Tube current: mA Time: msec Distance: mm
- Irregularities (specified value: no irregularities)  OK  NG
- Vertical streaks/horizontal streaks (specified value: no streaks)  OK  NG
- White/black blank at edges of image (specified value: no blank)  OK  NG
(specified value: no defect)  OK  NG
20. Checking for Image Problems (Stereo Exposure Kit)
{IN:Appendix 10.8.2_Checking for Image Problems (Stereo)}
- Irregularities (specified value: no irregularities)  OK  NG
- Vertical streaks/horizontal streaks (specified value: no streaks)  OK  NG
- White/black blank at edges of image (specified value: no blank)  OK  NG
(specified value: no defect)  OK  NG
21. Protective Grounding Test  OK  NG
22. Measurement of Leakage Current and Patient Leakage Current

 OK  NG
23. Summary test  OK  NG
24. Keep output films as the record of performance check  OK  NG
25. Test equipment used for the check

Test equipment: Model: S/N:
26. Measurement of Installation Environment
{IN:34._Measurement of Installation Environment}
- Temperature and humidity  OK  NG

PC-5
BLANK PAGE

Service Manual FDR MS-1000 Main

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual FDR MS-1000 Main

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FUJIFILM Digital Mammography System

The relationship between mR (milliroentgen), which

FDR is a trademark or a registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation.

<No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted.>

Copyright © 2008-2011 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval

2-26-30 Nishiazabu, Minato-ku, Tokyo

About this Manual  Notation of Cautions, Warnings, etc.

FDR MS-1000 Service Manual Calibration (CA)

1. FUJIFILM Corporation reserves all rights related to this manual. REFERENCE

019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual 0.1

019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual 0.2

n Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/Calibration

∗: A block gauge for use in inspection requires calibration.

019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual 0.3

Flexible screwdriver kit  -

Emergency stop short-

019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual 0.4

019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual 0.5

019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual 0.6

4. Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves................................... 22

019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual 0.7

1. Specifications of the Machine................................................. 1

019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual 0.8

Machine Description (MD)

2. Mechanism and Operation of the Mammographic

3. Software Operation Overview........................................ MD-24

019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual 0.9

Checks, Replacement and Adjustment

019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual 0.10

4. Elevation Stand Unit..................................................... MC-106 5.7 Compact Flash Card.............................................................MC-141

019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual 0.11

9. Generator Adjustment.................................................. MC-174 14. Tools............................................................................... MC-237

11. Adjusting the Irradiation Field..................................... MC-192

12. Checking for Image Problems..................................... MC-218

019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual 0.12

Service Parts List (SP)

019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual 0.13

Preventive Maintenance (PM)

1. Preventive Maintenance Program................................... PM-1 8. Checking the Coolant..................................................... PM-19

019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual 0.14

23. AEC Sensitivity Error Detection.................................... PM-35

24. Checking the Variation in X-Ray Output....................... PM-36

25. Checking for Image Problems....................................... PM-37

26. SDM Calibration.............................................................. PM-38

27. Checking the AWS.......................................................... PM-39

28. Clearing the Error Log.................................................... PM-40

29. Visual Inspection and Cleaning of the Machine........... PM-41

30. Protective Grounding Test............................................. PM-42

31. Measurement of Leakage Current and Patient

019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual 0.15

4. Transfer................................................................................ IN-8 14. Changing the Swivel Arm Height

019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual 0.16

019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual 0.17

019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual 0.18

019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual 0.19

Appendix 9.5 Putting on the Swivel Arm Lower Connector

Appendix 10. Installing the Stereo Exposure Kit....... Appx IN10-1

019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual 0.20

Performance Check (PC)

Performance Checklist of FDR MS-1000.................................PC-1

019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual 0.21

019-201-03E FDR MS-1000 Service Manual 0.22